Peel District School Board 2017 June 21... · Peel District School Board . Owner . Design and Construction section within the Planning and Accommodation Support Services Department,

Peel District School Board Design Guidelines Manual for Elementary Schools Architectural

Version 2.5 Issued: June 21, 2017 Section: Table of Contents Page 1 of 6

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARCHITECTURAL PART A INSTRUCTIONS TO CONSULTANTS

A.i INDEX

A.ii INTRODUCTION Version 1.5

A.1 FORMAT OF THE GUIDELINES

A.2 DEFINITIONS

A.3 OTHER DOCUMENTS

A.4 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS:

A.5 GENERAL DESIGN STANDARDS

A.6 CHECKLIST OF PROJECT START-UP DOCUMENTATION

A.7 CHECKLIST OF ITEMS TYPICALLY NOT IN CONTRACT

A. 8 HEALTH & SAFETY

A.9 DESIGN FOR LOCKDOWN PROCEDURES

A.10 STANDARD PEEL DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD DOCUMENTS

PART B GUIDELINES TO MAJOR SCHOOL SPACES

B.i INDEX Version 2.2

B.ii this section intentionally not used

B.iii GENERAL NOTES

B.1. ROOM DESCRIPTIONS (text section & corresponding drawing section if applicable)

B.1.1 this section intentionally not used

B.1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE AREAS Version 1.5

B.1.3 COMMON AREAS Version 1.5

B.1.4 CARETAKING AREAS

B.1.5 ACADEMIC AREAS Version 1.5

B.1.6 ACADEMIC STORAGE AREAS



B.1.7 SPECIAL NEEDS AREAS Version 2.3

B.1.8 GENERAL PURPOSE AREA (GYM) Version 1.5

B.1.9 GYM STAGE

B.1.10 RESOURCES CENTRE (LIBRARY) Version 1.5

B.1.11 MECHANICAL ROOMS Version 1.5

B.1.12 ELECTRICAL ROOMS Version 1.5

B.1.13 ELEVATOR AND ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOMS

B.1.14 SERVICE AREAS Version 1.5

B.1.15 MISCELLANEOUS & BUILT IN FURNITURE & FITMENTS Version 1.5

B.2 SITE WORK SAMPLE DRAWINGS Version 1.5

B.3 this section intentionally not used



B.6 CARPENTRY & MILLWORK SAMPLE DRAWINGS Version 1.5

B.7 ROOFING AND CLADDING SAMPLE DRAWINGS

B.8 WINDOWS, GLAZING, DOORS AND HARDWARE SAMPLE DRAWINGS Version 1.5

B.9 FINISHES SAMPLE DRAWINGS

B.10 EQUIPMENT & MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES SAMPLE DRAWINGS Version 1.5

B.11 BARRIER FREE DESIGN SAMPLE DRAWINGS Version 1.5

B.12 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS SAMPLE DRAWINGS

PART C GUIDELINES FOR SPECIFICATIONS C.i INDEX

C.ii INTRODUCTION Version 1.5

C.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Version 1.5

C.1.1 SITE SAFETY PROTOCOL

C.2 SITE WORK



C.3 this section intentionally not used

C.4 MASONRY

C.5 this section intentionally not used

C.6 CARPENTRY & MILLWORK

C.7 ROOFING AND CLADDING

C.8 WINDOWS, GLAZING, DOORS & HARDWARE Version 2.2

C.9 FINISHES

C.10 EQUIPMENT & MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

C.11 EQUIPMENT Version 1.5

C.11 this section intentionally not used Version 1.5

C.12 FURNISHINGS Version 1.5

C.12 this section intentionally not used Version 1.5

C.13 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS Version 1.5

C.14 BARRIER FREE DESIGN Version 1.5

C.15 ELECTRICAL GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS Version 1.5

MECHANICAL PART A INSTRUCTIONS TO DESIGNERS

A.i INDEX

A.ii INTRODUCTION

A.1 FORMAT OF THE GUIDELINES

A.2 DEFINITIONS

A.3 OTHER DOCUMENTS

A.4 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS

A.5 GENERAL DESIGN STANDARDS

A.6 DIGITAL AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A.7 HEALTH & SAFETY/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS



A.8 MECHANICAL DESIGN PROCEDURES

PART B TYPICAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ROOMS B.i reserved for future use

B.ii reserved for future use

PART C GUIDELINES FOR SPECIFICATIONS

C.i INDEX

C.ii INTRODUCTION

C.1 MECHANICAL TECHNICAL DESIGN PROCEDURES

C.2 INSULATION

C.3 SITE SERVICES

C.4 PLUMBING & DRAINAGE

C.5 SPRINKLERS/ FIRE PROTECTION

C.6 HEAT GENERATION

C.7 HEATING, PIPING, FITTINGS

C.8 AIR DISTRIBUTION

C.17 ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM Version 2.1

C.20 FIELD IRRIGATION Version 2.5

ELECTRICAL PART A INSTRUCTIONS TO DESIGNERS A.i INDEX

A.ii PREAMBLE

A.1 CASH ALLOWANCE

A.2 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS

A.3 CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS



A.4 ELECTRICAL ROOM

A.5 PROVISION FOR FUTURE ADDITIONS

A.6 FUTURE ADDITIONAL COOLING AND SERVICES

A.7 AVAILABILITY OF ELECTRICAL SERVICES

A.8 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A.9 PERMITS, FEES AND LICENSES

A.10 DRAWINGS, RECORDS AND MANUALS

A.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A.12 INSTRUCTIONS TO MAINTENANCE AND OPERATORS

A.13 MINIMUM CONSULTATIVE SERVICES

A.14 RESPONSIBILITY OF ENGINEER

A.15 DETAILED PROCEDURES TO BE FOLLOWED BY DESIGNERS

A.16 CODES AND STANDARDS

A.17 APPROVAL OF ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A.18 SUB TRADE BIDS AND INFORMATION REQUIRED IN TENDER

A.19 BONDING REQUIREMENTS

PART B TYPICAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ROOMS B.i reserved for future use

B.ii reserved for future use

B.1 TYPICAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ROOMS Version 1.5

PART C GUIDELINES FOR SPECIFICATIONS C.i INDEX

C.ii INTRODUCTION

C.1 ELECTRICAL SERVICE PROVISION

C.2 PREFERRED BUILDING DISTRIBUTION VOLTAGE

C.3 ESSENTIAL SERVICE (STANDBY PROVISION)



C.4 SERVICE ENTRANCE BOARD

C.5 SHORT CIRCUIT & OVERLOAD PROTECTION CO-ORDINATION

C.6 GROUNDING

C.7 PANELBOARDS

C.8 SPECIAL PANELBOARD FEATURES

C.9 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

C.10 FUSES

C.11 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

C.12 MOTOR FEEDERS & CONTROLS

C.13 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM

C.14 LAWN IRRIGATION SYSTEM

C.15 TELEPHONE SYSTEM

C.16 CABLE T.V.

C.17 COMPUTER SYSTEM

C.18 INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEM

C.19 CLOCK AND PROGRAM BELL SYSTEM

C.20 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

C.21 ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM

C.22 SOUNDS SYSTEMS

C.23 SPECIALTY ALARM SYSTEMS Version 2.5

C.24 LIGHTING

C.25 EXIT LIGHTING AND EMERGENCY LIGHTS Version 2.5

C.26 STAGE LIGHTING & DIMMING SYSTEM

C.27 TYPICAL FIXTURE LIST Version 2.5

C.28 TYPICAL MODULAR CONTROL PANEL (MCP) Version 1.5

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 Section: A.i – INDEX TO PART A Page 1 of 1

INDEX TO PART A - INSTRUCTIONS TO CONSULTANTS A.i INDEX A.ii INTRODUCTION A.1 FORMAT OF THE GUIDELINES A.2 DEFINITIONS A.3 OTHER DOCUMENTS A.4 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS: A.5 GENERAL DESIGN STANDARDS

Best Practice Approach to Design Requirements for a Design Brief Approach to “Design Standards and Design Guidelines” Energy Conservation New Technologies Quality Control: Inspection and Testing

A.6 CHECKLIST OF PROJECT START-UP DOCUMENTATION A.7 CHECKLIST OF ITEMS TYPICALLY NOT IN CONTRACT A.8 HEALTH & SAFETY A.9 DESIGN FOR LOCKDOWN PROCEDURES A.10 STANDARD PEEL DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD DOCUMENTS

Peel District School Board Design Guidelines for Elementary Schools Architectural

Version 1.5 Issued: Feb 28, 2013 Section: A.ii to A.10- INSTRUCTIONS TO CONSULTANTSPage 1of 7

PART A - INSTRUCTIONS TO CONSULTANTS A.ii INTRODUCTION These Design Guidelines are issued by the Peel District School Board (PDSB) and are intended for use exclusively by Board-designated Consultants for the purpose of assisting in new school construction and renovation projects. These Guidelines are issued for new Junior and Middle Schools and are relate to Renovations and Additions and consist of 3 main categories: • Architectural, • Mechanical and • Electrical. All sections are to be read in conjunction with one another. These Guidelines will be revised and updated by the Board, as required. Feed-back and suggestions for revisions are encouraged and are to be directed to the Owner. For the purposes of these Guidelines, the “Planning and Accommodations Support Services, Design & Construction” are defined as the “Owner”. Ref. A.2 Definitions A.1 FORMAT OF THE GUIDELINES • The Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical sections of these Design

Guidelines are each further separated into in 3 main “PARTS”.

PART A - INSTRUCTION TO CONSULTANTS PART B - GUIDELINES TO MAJOR SCHOOL SPACES PART C - GUIDELINES FOR SPECIFICATIONS

• “PARTS” are arranged into “Sections”: e.g. Section “B.9 – Finishes” • Sections contain subsections: e.g. “B.9 – Finishes - Gypsum Board” • Hierarchical indexes are provided:

• A main Table of Contents provides a list of each PART and Sections. • An Index is provided at the beginning of each PART which lists both the

Sections and subsections for that PART. • These 3 Parts are also cross-referenced in the right hand margin. • It is the intent of this structure to provide a ready-reference to the design team

in a way that supports the design process and the assembly of Contract Documents.



Part A - Instructions to Consultants: • provides a general background to “across the board” design issues or

standards. Part B - Guidelines to Major School Spaces: • provides a “room by room” guide to spaces within Junior and Middle schools.

Each main area is described by a text section and, where applicable, this is followed by sample diagram(s) for that area.

• Components referred to in Part B will be named, where applicable, by model or manufacturers, in Part C.

Part C - Guidelines for Specifications: • the order of most, but not all, sections follows the chronology of typical

specifications using the CSC/CSI 1995 Masterformat. This is for basic organizational purposes only. Ref. C.ii-Format of Specifications

• Where applicable or required, the text of each subheading in Part C is arranged to address:

• General issues • Design issues • Specification issues • Construction issues • Renovations and Additions

It is important to recognize that the Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical sections are to be read as a complete set of guidelines. A.2 – DEFINITIONS (for the purpose of using these Guidelines definitions will

be in regular italics) PDSB Peel District School Board Owner Design and Construction section within the Planning and

Accommodation Support Services Department, Peel District School Board

Board Standard: Any statement or standard which is the policy of the PDSB

should not be deviated from without consultation and approval by the Owner.

Guide Specification: Specification information provided to consultant. It is not

to be implied that this is a strict standard. In many cases guide specifications are suggestions of what has been acceptable and successful in previous projects.



Consultant The Consultant is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is an Architect or Engineer or entity licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender. The term Consultant means the Consultant or the Consultant's authorized representative. If the Consultant is not identified as a separate entity in the Agreement, then the term Consultant means the Board's authorized agent or representative as designated to the Contractor in writing.

Junior School: Typically a Kindergarten to Grade 5 accommodation (K-5).

Sometimes K-8 accommodations which will possibly involve some of the same design criteria for Middle Schools.

Middle Schools: Also known as Senior Elementary schools; consisting of

grades 6, 7, 8. Senior Schools: see ‘Middle Schools’. A.3 - OTHER DOCUMENTS These guidelines must be read in conjunction with the following standard Peel District School Board Documents. • Form of Agreement with the Peel District School Board and Architect

The minimum services for all of the Architect’s Consultants are identified in the Board/Architect Agreement. Refer to the latest Board/Architect Agreement.

• Stipulated Price Contract, Peel District School Board, latest edition – this is the agreement between the Board and the Contractor.

• Any other project related tender instructions, reference materials, specifications or project documents issued by the Owner.

• These Guidelines do not reference in any detail, if at all, Building Codes, Fire Codes, Municipal Bylaws or any other legal Statues or Regulations, as they are understood to be within the standard sets of governances pertaining to any construction project.

• It is not the intention of these Guidelines or the above reference ‘Other Documents’ to be in conflict with other codes, regulations, bylaws, statues, etc. Should the Consultant note any inconsistencies or conflicts between documents, these should be brought to the Board’s attention immediately.



A.4 - RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS: It is anticipated that these Guidelines will be used extensively by Architects and Engineers preparing documents for renovations and additions to schools. These guidelines attempt to provide assistance in the case of renovations and additions by listing information for renovations and additions as a subsection within each individual section of Part B. In addition, Section C.12 is devoted to capturing general issues related to Renovations and Additions. Ref. Section C.12-Renovations & Additions A.5 - GENERAL DESIGN STANDARDS Best Practice • The PDSB expects that each of its consultants respect “best practice”

standards for project design, documentation and administration, as may be maintained by the governing Professional Association for the consultant.

• The PDSB insists that its Consultants recognize and respect space and cost-conscience design.

Approach to Design • Consultants should be familiar with the Ministry of Education and Training

current funding model as may be discussed with the Design Department. • Consultants must be aware of the affect of design decisions on operation and

maintenance. • Consultants are encouraged to provide feed-back to the Design Department if

first costs, operation and maintenance costs (life cycle) costs are seen to provide information such that existing design standards or guidelines may be reviewed or challenged.

Requirements for a Design Brief • Consultants shall in conjunction with the owner establish the project scope,

objectives and time frame at the very out set of the project. • At the end of the Schematic or Concept Design phase the design team shall

prepare for the Owner a “Design Brief” which shall address the following items, as applicable to each project:

• Project Schedule • Project Estimated Tender Price, with separately identified Contingency

and Cash Allowances • Basic site analysis including all zoning and site design criteria listed in

these guidelines Ref. Arch. C.2 Site Work • Basic concept layout of building (or addition or interior renovation) • Statement of proposed structural systems • Statement of proposed mechanical systems • Statement of proposed electrical systems



• Any restrictive conditions, Conservation areas, Heritage areas, Easements, Municipal Services (septic systems), Irregular existing conditions such as height restrictions, encroachments, zoning, etc.

• Any proposed deviations from these Guidelines • Any proposed enhancement for energy conservation within the terms

reference in these guidelines Ref. Arch. A.5 –Energy Conservation • For Renovations or Additions, the Design brief shall also address:

• a summary analysis of existing building code compliances, • a summary of existing structural systems, mechanical systems and

electrical systems • deviation from these guidelines

Approach to “Design Standards and Design Guidelines” • Refer also to definitions Ref. Arch. A.2 –Definitions • Alternate systems, approaches or deviations from design standards are to be

reviewed with the owner; it is recognized that from time to time design standards may be improved or revised.

Energy Conservation • The Board is interested in affordable, and practical energy conservation

measures for its buildings • Consultants are encourage to investigate and discuss with the owner any

energy conservation measures or programs or incentive programs which have a clearly definable cost savings or pay back period within a short to midterm time frame and within a time horizon where the cost of energy can be reasonable estimated. Where possible, new buildings, renovations, and additions shall be designed to exceed the “National Energy Code of Canada for Buildings 2011 or latest.

website reference: http:/oee.nrcan.gc.ca www.nationalcodes.ca/mnecb/index_e.shtml

New Technologies • When proposing new energy efficient building components or systems,

consultants are to propose these materials to the owner with sufficient knowledge as to cost, availability, durability, etc.



Quality Control: Inspection and Testing • Inspection and testing of building products and systems is typically paid

for from cash allowances, refer to the check list of typical allowances Refer Arch. C.1 General Requirements-Allowances • Inspection firms used during the Contract Administration Phase and paid

for by cash allowance are to be solicited by request for quotations. A minimum of three quotations to be received.

• Inspection and testing by such firms does not preclude the consultant’s requirements for field review.

A.6 - CHECKLIST OF PROJECT START-UP DOCUMENTATION: A minimum list of typical recommended project start-up documents follows. This list is includes but is not limited to: For all New Buildings and Additions: • Topographical Site Survey • Phase I Environmental Assessment • Geotechnical Report • Local Zoning By-Laws and Regulations • Phase II Environmental Assessment • Final Submission Checklist Add for Renovations and Additions: • Existing building (as-built) drawings • Private on-site locates for buried services • Hazardous Materials (or Asbestos) Report A.7 - CHECKLIST OF ITEMS TYPICALLY NOT IN CONTRACT As a guide only, the following list itemises aspects which may not be in the General Contract. This scope should be verified with the Owner at the start of each project: • Asbestos Abatement • loose furniture and chairs • Library ‘Circulation’ Desk –if applicable- • Office furniture • Office reception counter (not including renovations) • Appliances • Equipment (computers, projectors, classroom projection screens *projection

screen mounts are in contract)



• Caretaker equipment/ supplies • Window coverings and shades • Loose area rugs/ carpets • Any other items labelled NIC A.8 - HEALTH & SAFETY • In preparation of designs and contract documents, consultants are to bear in

mind that the Board places the health and safety of its staff, students and workers on projects as its highest priority.

• Consult with the owner early in the design to review if any health and safety issues may have a bearing on the individual project.

• In addition, review the health and safety issues as they relate directly to contract documents in Part C.1. ref. Part C.1-General Requirements-Health & Safety Issues

A.9 – DESIGN FOR LOCKDOWN PROCEDURES Refer to the PDSB Standard Specification “Provision And Installation of Integrated Telephone / P.A. Systems” (not enclosed): • A lockdown is defined by the police as the restriction of movement during the

time of a potentially serious violent incident that would endanger the lives of students and staff.

• The Board’s Lockdown procedures have the following design implications: • One room in the General Administration Office suite shall have within it a

telephone capable of calling out of the school, a PA handset connected to a line seizure device, and pushbutton used to initiate lockdown procedures.

• This room shall be capable of being locked from the interior, have no window and no lites or transoms in doors. A typical room that may suit these requirements could be the workroom. Ref. Arch. B.1.2.1a, B.1.2.2a

• Ensure to minimize dead zones for the School PA system and bell. A.10 – STANDARD PEEL DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD DOCUMENTS Refer to the following PDSB Standard Documents enclosed: • Certificate of Payment - exclude taxes to prepare for HST

CERTIFICATE OF PAYMENT #

Architect: Date:Project Name:Contractor:

This is to certify that in accordance with the contract with Peel District School Board dated

The CONTRACTOR, 0has completed work and delivered products to the place of work and is hereby entitled to payment of

Total amount - w ritten

$0.00 which includes $0.00

to as noted below.

Signature of Architect ____________________________________________________ Date __________________

Signature of Project Manager ______________________________________________ Date __________________

a) Net Contract Amount per Tender (excluding allowances) 0.00b) Contingency allowance 0.00c) Cash allowance 0.00d) Board approved contract price change 0.00e) Total contract amount 0.00

f) Gross Value of Work to Date (excluding allowances) 0.00% 0.00g) Contingency allowance expended 0.00% 0.00h) Cash allowance expended 0.00% 0.00i) Total amount certified 0.00% 0.00

j) Deduct 10% Holdback on i) 0.00k) Less Holdback Released 0.00l) Net Holdback 0.00m) Deduct Completion Security Account on [ i) minus j) ] of 0.000% 0.00n) Total Deduction [ l plus m) ] 0.00

o) TOTAL CERTIFIED TO DATE [ i) minus n) ] 0.00p) Less Previously Certified 0.00q) THIS CERTIFICATE [ o) minus p) ] 0.00r) H.S.T. 0.00s) TOTAL PAID PER THIS CERTIFICATE 0.00

The Contractor, having examined this Statement of Account, finds it correct and acknowledges receipt of the account above certified.

Contractor: _____________________________ Title: ____________________________ Date: _______________

taxes, and is for work performed from

By law, the amount certified is subject to reduction by the amount of any lien of which this contractor has received written notice. This Certificate is not negotiable and is payable to the Contractor named herein. Issuance, payment and acceptance are without prejudice to any right of the Board or Contractor under contract. The issue of this Certificate of Payment shall not be taken as a representation that the Architect or the Board has made any examination to ascertain how and for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract price or that the Contractor has discharged the obligations imposed on him by law under the Workers' Compensation Act, other applicable statues, non-compliance with which may render the Board personally liable for the Contractor's default.

Peel District School Board Design Guidelines Manual for Elementary Schools

Version 2.3 Issued: March 3, 2017 Section: B.i-Index to Part B Page 1 of 5

INDEX TO PART B GUIDELINES TO MAJOR SCHOOL SPACES

B.i INDEX

B.ii this section intentionally not used

B.iii GENERAL NOTES Version 2.0

B.1. ROOM DESCRIPTIONS

(TEXT SECTION & CORRESPONDING DRAWING SECTION if applicable)

B.1.1 this section intentionally not used

Reference No.

B.1.2 Administrative Areas

B.1.2.1 Junior School General Office

B.1.2.1.a Junior School Office Spatial Relationships Sample Drawing

B.1.2.1.b General Office NIC Furniture Layout Sample Drawing

B.1.2.2 Middle School General Office

B.1.2.2.a Middle School Office Spatial Relationships Sample Drawing

B.1.2.3 Principal’s Office

B.1.2.4 Vice Principal’s Office Version 1.5

B.1.2.5 Staff Lounge Version 1.5

B.1.2.5.a Staff Lounge Sample Drawing

B.1.2.6 Staff Work Room/OSR Storage Version 1.5

B.1.2.7 Health Room Version 1.5

B.1.2.8 Health Room Washroom Version 1.5

B.1.2.9 Guidance Area and Office

B.1.3 Common Areas

B.1.3.1 Student Washroom Version 1.5

B.1.3.1.a Student Washroom Sample Drawing

B.1.3.2 Staff Washroom Version 1.5

B.1.3.2.a Staff Washroom Sample Drawing

B.1.3.3 Barrier Free Washroom Version 2.0

B.1.3.3.a Barrier Free Washroom Sample Drawing

B.1.3.4 Junior School Corridors Version 1.5

B.1.3.5 Middle School Corridors

B.1.3.6 Stairwells Version 1.5

B.1.4 Caretaking Areas

B.1.4.1 Custodial Office Version 1.5

B.1.4.2 Custodial Storage Version 1.5



B.1.5 Academic Areas

B.1.5.a Fitment and Fixture Mounting Heights Sample Drawing Version 1.5

B.1.5.1 Special Education Classroom

B.1.5.1.a Special Education Classroom Sample Drawing

B.1.5.2 Science, Mathematics & Technology Classroom Version 1.5

B.1.5.2.a Science, Mathematics & Technology Classroom and Prep Room Sample Drawing

B.1.5.3 Science, Mathematics & Technology Prep Room Version 1.5

B.1.5.4 Art Classroom Version 1.5

B.1.5.4.a Art Classroom with Prep Room Sample Drawing Version 1.5

B.1.5.5 Art Prep Room Version 1.5

B.1.5.6 Vocal Music Classroom

B.1.5.6.a Music Classrooms:

Vocal & Instrumental with Practice Rooms Sample Drawing

B.1.5.7 Instrumental Music Classroom

B.1.5.8 Music Practice Rooms

B.1.5.9 Single Classroom Version 2.0

B.1.5.9.a Single Classroom Sample Drawing Version 2.0

B.1.5.10 Double Classroom Version 2.0

B.1.5.10.a Double Classroom Sample Drawing Version 2.0

B.1.5.11 Kindergarten Classroom Version 2.0

B.1.5.11.a Kindergarten Classroom Sample Drawing Version 2.0

B.1.5.12 Kindergarten Washroom Version 2.0

B.1.5.13 Kindergarten Barrier Free Washroom Version 2.0

B.1.5.14 Kindergarten Storage Room Version 2.0

B.1.5.15 Kindergarten Vestibule Version 2.0

B.1.5.16 Resource Room

B.1.5.17 Seminar Room

B.1.5.18 Teacher’s Work Room

B.1.5.19 Science and Technology Application Centre (S.T.A.C.) Version 1.5

B.1.5.20 Hybrid Prep. Room

B.1.6 Academic Storage Areas

B1.6.1 Academic Storage Room

B.1.7 Special Needs Areas

B.1.7.1 Alternative Learning Environment (A.L.E.) Version 2.3

B.1.7.1.a Alternative Learning Environment (A.L.E.) Sample Drawing

B.1.7.2 Orthopedic Washroom Version 1.5

B.1.7.2.a Orthopedic Washroom Sample Drawing

B.1.8 General Purpose Area (Gym)

B.1.8.1 General Purpose Room (Junior and Middle Schools) Version 2.0

B.1.8.1.a General Purpose Room Spatial Relationships Sample Drawing

B.1.8.1.b Line Layout Sample Drawing (Junior and Middle Schools)

B.1.8.2 Boys & Girls Change Rooms



B.1.8.2.a Boys & Girls Change Rooms Sample Drawing

B.1.8.3 Gym Instructor’s Room (Junior and Middle Schools)

B.1.8.3.a Gym Instructor’s Room (Junior and Middle Schools)

B.1.8.4 Gym Storage Room

B.1.9 Gym Stage

B.1.9.1 Gym Stage (Junior and Middle Schools)

B.1.9.1.a Gym Stage Layout (Junior and Middle Schools) Sample Drawing

B.1.9.1.b Stage Pipe Grid

B.1.9.1.c Stage Pipe Grid & Curtain Valence Layout

B.1.9.2 Under Stage Chair Storage

B.1.9.2.a Under Stage Chair Storage Sample Drawing Version 2.0

B.1.9.2.b Chair Dolly Sample Drawing Version 2.0

B.1.9.3 Stage Storage Room

B.1.10 Resources Centre (Library)

B.1.10.1 Library (Junior and Middle Schools) Version 1.5

B.1.10.1.a Library & Computer Lab Sample Drawing

B.1.10.2 Computer Lab (Junior and Middle Schools)

B.1.10.3 Library Work Room (Junior and Middle Schools)

B.1.11 Mechanical Rooms

B.1.11.1 Mechanical Room Version 1.5

B.1.11.2 Sprinkler Room

B.1.12 Electrical Rooms

B.1.12.1 Electrical Room Version 1.5

B.1.13 Elevator and Elevator Machine Rooms

B.1.13.1 Elevator Machine Room

B.1.14 Service Areas

B.1.14.1 I.T.S./Hub Room

B.1.14.2 Exterior Storage Room Version 1.5

B.1.14.3 Garbage Storage Room Version 1.5

B.1.14.4 Exterior Garbage Enclosure Version 1.5

B.1.14.4.a Exterior Garbage Enclosure Sample Drawing Version 1.5

B.1.14.4.b Exterior Garbage Enclosure Details Sample Drawing

B.1.15 Miscellaneous & Built in Furniture & Fitments

B.1.15.1 Drinking Fountains Version 2.0

B.1.15.1.a Drinking Fountains Mounting Heights Version 2.0

B.1.15.2 Vending Machine Areas Version 2.0

B.1.15.3. Braille Interior Signage

B.1.15.3.a Braille Interior Signage Sample Drawing Version 1.5



B.1.15.3.b Braille Interior Signage Sample Drawing

B.1.15.3.c Interior Signage Sample Drawings Version 1.5

B.1.15.3.d Interior Signage Sample Drawings

B.1.15.3.e Occupancy Load Signage Version 2.0

B.1.15.4.a Gypsum Board Wall Base Detail

B.1.15.5.a Base Detail at Bullnosed Block Corner

B.1.15.6.a Exterior School Sign

B.2. SITE WORK SAMPLE DRAWINGS

B.2.1.a Soccer Field

B.2.2.a Concrete Curb at Finished Grade

B.2.3.a Concrete Curb at Concrete Sidewalk

B.2.4.a Pavement Marking Lines

B.2.5.a Pavement Marking Messages

B.2.5.b Pavement Marking Messages

B.2.5.c Pavement Marking Messages

B.2.6.a Directional Arrow Types

B.2.7.a Site Plan Detail – 3 Lanes at Front of School

B.2.8.a Job Site Sign Version 2.0

B.2.8.b Job Site Sign

B.2.8.c Job Site Sign

B.2.9.a Fire Route Gate

B.2.9.b Fire Route Gate Details

B.2.10.a Asphalt Details

B.2.11.a Site Signage

B.2.12.a Site Plan – Line Markings and Parking Layout

B.3. this section intentionally not used



B.6. CARPENTRY & MILLWORK SAMPLE DRAWINGS

B1 Lower Cabinet (double doors with adjustable shelving)

B2 Lower Cabinet (double doors and fixed panel with sink)

B3 Lower Cabinet (single door with adjustable shelving)

B4 Lower Cabinet (art cabinet with adjustable shelving)

B5.1 Lower Cabinet (Science Teachers’ desk)

B5.2 Lower Cabinet (Science Teachers’ desk cont.)

B6 H/C Cabinet (counter top with fixed panel)

B7 H/C Cabinet (counter top with fixed panel and sink guard)

B8 Lower Cabinet (double doors with adjustable shelving and drawer)

B9 Lower Cabinet (open shelving)

B10 Lower Cabinet (counter top and gables only)

B11 Lower Cabinet (open shelving) Version 2.0

C1 Cabinet (teacher’s closet) Version 1.5



C2 Cabinet (open shelving)

C3 Cabinet (double doors with adjustable shelving)

C4 Cabinet (mail boxes and lower double doors)

K1 Kindergarten Closet & Drawers

K2 Kindergarten Storage Unit (single door with tackboard)

K3 Kindergarten Coat Area Cubicles Version 2.0

K4 Kindergarten Toy Cart Storage

K5 Kindergarten Toy Cart

K6 Kindergarten Moveable Bench

K7 Kindergarten Upper Cabinet (double doors w/adjustable shelving)

K8 Kindergarten Lower Cabinet (double doors w/adjustable shelf)

K9 Kindergarten Lower Cabinet (double doors and fixed panel with sink)

K10 Kindergarten Cabinet (open shelving)

M1 Radiator Cover

M2 Modular Control Panel Version 2.2

M3 Gypsum Board Bulkhead Detail

M4 Gym Storage Room Shelving

M5 Gym Change Room Bench

M6 Electrical Panel Chase Version 1.5

U1 Upper Cabinet (double doors with adjustable shelving)

U2 Upper Cabinet (double doors with adjustable shelf)

U3 Upper Cabinet (single door with adjustable shelving)

U4 Upper Cabinet (double doors with microwave shelf) Version 1.5

U5A Upper Cabinet (double doors with adjustable shelving & valance)

U5B Upper Cabinet (double doors with glass, adjustable shelving & valance)

U6 Upper Cabinet (double doors with exhaust hood provision)

B.7. ROOFING AND CLADDING SAMPLE DRAWINGS

B.8. WINDOWS, GLAZING, DOORS AND HARDWARE SAMPLE DRAWINGS

B.8.1.a Door Elevations Version 1.5

B.9. FINISHES SAMPLE DRAWINGS

B.10. EQUIPMENT & MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES SAMPLE DRAWINGS

B.11 BARRIER FREE DESIGN SAMPLE DRAWINGS

B.12 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS SAMPLE DRAWINGS


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 Section: B.iii Page 1 of 6

General Notes Abbreviation Legend ACAD. Academic AFF Above Finished Floor A.L.E. Alternative Learning Environment ARCH. Architectural B+S Bench and Shelf BF Barrier Free CB Chalk Board CCTV Closed Circuit Television CH Coat Hooks CR Coat Rack CR+S Coat Rack and Shelf CS Convenience Shelf CM Convex Ceiling Mirror C/W Complete With D Dryer DBL Double ELECT. Electrical ELEV. Elevator EMS Energy Management System FB Fire Blanket FD Floor Drain FE Fire Extinguisher FEC Fire Extinguisher Cabinet FM Frequency Modulation FS Floor Socket FSS Folding Shower Seat GB Grab Bar GBF Folding Grab Bar GBL Grab Bar “L” Shape GBS Shower Grab Bar GFI Ground Fault Interrupter GL Glazing HD Hand Dryer J.S. Junior School KC Kindergarten Cubbie LAP Lay-in Acoustic Panel M Mirror

MCP Modular Control Panel MC Medicine Cabinet MCP Modular Control Panel MECH. Mechanical Min. Minimum M.S. Middle School N/A Not Applicable NIC Not in Contract NTS Not to Scale PA Public Address System PCT Privacy Curtain Track & Curtain PREF Preferred PTD Paper Towel Dispenser SCB Sliding Chalkboard SD Soap Dispenser SMT Science, Math & Technology SND Sanitary Napkin & Tampon Disposal SNDisp Sanitary Napkin & Tampon

Dispenser SR+C Shower Rod and Curtain SS Service Sink SSD Shower Soap Dish SWB Sliding Whiteboard STOR. Storage TB Tackboard TD Toilet Tissue Dispenser TDD Paper Towel Dispenser & Disposal TLB Towel Bar TM Tilted Mirror TV Television TYP Typical V Vanity VCT Vinyl Composite Tile W Washer WB Whiteboard WM Wiremold WSHRM Washroom

Typical abbreviations are referred to in the text as follows: • [TB] One (1) – Tackboard 1200 x 1200 • [FD] Floor drain



Drawing Legend

Drawing General Notes • All documentation, drawings and specifications prepared by the PDSB are

instruments of service and as such are the Board’s property. • Drawings are not to be scaled. • Review millwork drawings in conjunction with Arch. C.6 • Not all furniture, equipment, appliances & mechanical/electrical devices are

shown on sample drawings. • Sample drawings to be read in conjunction with Part B text section. • Refer to drawing B.1.5.a for typical mounting heights.



Junior and Middle School Recommended Room Area & Loading Note: Total school size should not to exceed 87-92 Sq. Ft. / Pupil.

Room Name Recommended Area (sq.m)

Recommended Area (sq.ft)

Occupant Load

(Staff)

Occupant Load

(Student)

Adm

inis

trativ

e Ar

eas

General Office Varies Varies 2/3 0 Principal's Office 17 183 1 0 Vice Principal's Office 11 120 1 0 Staff Lounge 70 753 0 0 Staff Work Room 15 161 0 0 Health Room 12 130 0 0 Health Room Washroom 2 (5 if BF) 22 (54 if BF) 0 0 Guidance Area & Office (MS only) Varies Varies 0 0

Com

mon

Are

as Student Washroom Varies Varies 0 0

Staff Washroom 8 86 0 0 Barrier Free Washroom 5 54 0 0 Corridors Varies Varies 0 0 Stairwells Varies Varies 0 0

Car

etak

ing

Area

s Custodial Office 25 270 1 0

Custodial Storage 5 54 0 0

Acad

emic

Are

as

Single Classroom 70 753 1 31 Double Classroom 140 1510 2 62 Special Education Classroom 70 753 1 16 S.M.T. Classroom (MS only) 93 1000 1 31 S.M.T. Prep Room (MS only) 18 190 0 0 Art Classroom (MS only) 93 1000 1 31 Art Prep Room (MS only) 18 190 0 0 Vocal Music Classroom (MS only) 93 1000 1 31 Instrumental Music Room (MS only) 93 1000 0 0 Music Practice Room (MS only) 5.5 59 0 0 Kindergarten Classroom (JS only) 93 1000 1 26 Kindergarten Washroom (JS only) 3.5 38 0 0 Kindergarten BF Washroom (JS only) 5 54 0 0 Kindergarten Ext. Storage (JS only) Varies Varies 0 0 Kindergarten Vestibule (JS only) 8 86 0 0



Ac

adem

ic

Area

s Resource Room 38-60 410-646 1 16

Seminar Room (four per school) 12-37 130-398 0 0 Teacher's Work Room 20 215 0 0

Acad

. St

or.

Area

s

Academic Storage Room 25 270 0 0

Spec

ial

Nee

ds

Area

s Alternative Learning Environment 8 80 0 0

Orthopedic Washroom 14 150 0 0

Gen

eral

Pur

pose

Ar

eas

Junior School General Purpose Room 372 4000 0 31 Middle School General Purpose Room 585 6350 0 31 Change Room 32 345 0 0 Instructor's Room 7.5 80 0 0 Gym Storage Room 30 323 0 0

Gym

Sta

ge

Area

s

Stage Storage Room Varies Varies 0 0 Junior School Gym Stage 70 753 0 0 Middle School Gym Stage 93 1000 0 0 Under Stage Chair Storage Varies Varies 0 0

Res

ourc

e C

entre

Ar

eas School Library 150 1615 0 0

School Computer Lab 70 753 0 0 Library Work Room 15 162 1 0

Mec

h.

Area

s Mechanical Room Varies Varies 0 0 Sprinkler Room Varies Varies 0 0

Elec

t. Ar

eas

Electrical Room Varies Varies 0 0

Elev

. Ar

eas

Elevator Machine Room Varies Varies 0 0

Serv

ice

Area

s Main I.T.S. / Hub Room 4.6 50 0 0 Secondary I.T.S. / Hub Room 2.4 25 0 0 Exterior Storage Room Varies Varies 0 0 Garbage Storage Room Varies Varies 0 0 Exterior Garbage Enclosure Varies Varies 0 0

Room Name Recommended Area (sq.m)

Recommended Area (sq.ft)

Occupant Load

(Staff)

Occupant Load

(Student)



Notes: Post room loading signs within Library, General Purpose Room.

The OBC calculation for Occupant Load results in a substantially larger population than the school will contain. The table above stipulates an "Occupant Load" which the Board uses to calculate the estimated population of the school (the Total PDSB Occupant Load). Confirm by letter with the appropriate municipality that the previous suggestions are acceptable.

* Determination of overall washroom count, exiting requirements and air supply to be based on the Total PDSB Occupant Load, plus allow washrooms for future 12 portables.

General Notes: Apply to All Areas Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 • Refer to Guidelines Specifications for Millwork Construction • Consultants to coordinate any NIC furniture with Owner during design phase Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • Refer to Guidelines Specifications for required Fitments & Equipment • Where possible, all teaching spaces to have windows to exterior • Robe hooks are NOT permitted in any washrooms Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Refer to Guidelines Specifications for Finishes Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • Rooms to be fitted with plumbing as outlined in Mechanical Guidelines. • All plumbing lines and services to be concealed unless otherwise noted. • Only students sinks to have tempered water unless otherwise noted. • Architect to coordinate plumbing fixture locations with Mechanical Engineer. HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.6, C.7, C.8 • Rooms to be fitted with HVAC as outlined in Mechanical Guidelines. • All HVAC ductwork and services to be concealed unless otherwise noted. • Architect to coordinate HVAC equipment with Mechanical Engineer.



Electrical Power & Devices: Ref. Elect. C.5 – C.24 • Rooms to be fitted with power as outlined in Electrical Guidelines. • All Electrical conduit and wiring to be concealed unless otherwise noted. • Provide 2x50mm (2x2”) minimum conduit sleeve for cabling in ceiling space

from rooms to Corridor. • Provision for motion detector for all spaces with exterior windows • Architect to coordinate Electrical fixtures and devices with Electrical

Engineer. Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.25, C.26, C.27 • Rooms to be fitted with lighting as outlined in Electrical Guidelines. • All Electrical conduit and wiring to be concealed unless otherwise noted. • Architect to coordinate Electrical fixtures and devices with Electrical

Engineer. Approved Manufacturers or Suppliers: Ref. Arch. C.1 • Refer to Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Guidelines Specifications

for approved manufacturer and suppliers Design Issues: • Wall construction to be masonry complete with bullnose blocks on all

exposed corners and edges. • If drywall cannot be avoided in wall conditions, use of the "Typical Drywall

Base Detail" is required to avoid moisture absorption. Ref. Arch. B.1.15.4.a • All doors accessing barrier free washrooms shall be minimum 900mm. • Provide a Fire Safety Plan Box inside the main vestibule for all new schools.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: B.1.2.1 Page 1 of 2

Junior School General Office Area Range: Varies Desired average 50-68 square meters (550-730 square feet) Associated Rooms: Forms part of the following suite of rooms: • General Office • Principal’s Office • Vice Principal’s Office • Second Vice Principal’s Office (if applicable) • Staff Work Room • Health Room • Health Room Washroom Preferred location is in proximity of the following areas: • Staff Room To be located adjacent to main entrance Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 • Provide reception counter millwork for Office Renovation Projects Fitments: N/A Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 • Room to be air conditioned • Ductwork insulated to minimize noise and eliminate condensation



Electrical Power & Devices: • Coordinate electrical power and data drops with Owner to ensure adequate

location for NIC furniture. • Min. two (2) single pole 3-way light switches (as required) Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) 4-plex receptacle per workstation Ref. Elect. C.11 • Provide empty conduit and rough-in to Electrical Room for future CCTV Ref. Elect. C.16 • One (1) data outlet per workstation Ref. Elect. C.17 • One (1) telephone jack per workstation Ref. Elect. C.15 • One (1) TV outlet complete with adjacent duplex receptacle Ref. Elect. C.11, C.15 • Min. two (2) ceiling mounted PA speakers Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. five (5) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • 4 x 4 junction box for Administrative Console Unit Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) clock hanger receptacle complete with clock Ref. Elect. C.19 • Call for Assistance System connected to emergency call switch in Barrier Free

Washrooms. Ref. Elect. C.20 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures type 'V' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Min. one (1) fixture un-switched on night light circuit Ref. Elect. C.25 Design Issues: • One (1) secretary space to be provided for every three hundred (300) students

or part there of. • Unobstructed view of the Main entrance as well as the Vestibule. • Include air conditioning of Administration area in renovation projects in

conjunction with the air conditioning for the Library/Computer Lab (if they are in close proximity).

Direct access from Foyer to Office1

General Office requires view into Foyer,Vestibule & Main Entrance (Exterior)2

Locate Reception Desk within General Office3

Provide Vistor Seating within General Office4

Provide corridor and office suite access toTeacher Mail Boxes in Workroom

5

6

Provide General Coat Storage nearGeneral Office

7

Receptionist to have a clear view intoHealth Room (be respectful of privacyfrom General Office visitors)

8

CO

RRID

OR

OU

TSID

E

FOYER

GENERALOFFICE

VICEPRINCIPAL

HEALTHROOM

STAFFWORKROOM

STAFFLOUNGE

VESTIBULE

B1.2.5.a

1

23

4

7

8

5

B1.2.1.b

Staff Lounge and Staff washrooms to beadjacent or in vicinity to Administration Area

6

WSHRM

PRINCIPAL

SECONDVICE

PRINCIPAL

2

Location of the Principal's and VicePrincipal's offices can be reversed

9

9

9

Optional

DWG. NO.

ISSUE/REV. eelDistrictSchool Board

SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:JUNIOR SCHOOL OFFICESPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.2.1.a

1.4

GENERAL OFFICE

VESTIBULE

Front Counter

StudentDesk

Visitor Seating

Reception Desk 1 Reception Desk 2

NOTE:ALL FURNITURE SHOWN IS NOT INCONTRACT. OFFICE FURNITURE TOBE CO-ORDINATED WITH PDSB.

NIC ITEMS FOR REFERENCE ONLY,THEY ARE NOT TO BE SHOWN ONWORKING DRAWINGS.

Coordinate duplex receptaclesand data connections with Ownerto suit NIC furniture layout

1

1

1

1

1

H

A

Call for Assistance Systeminterconnected with AssistancePull Cord Station in BarrierFree Washroom (asappropriate)

2

2

tv

FOYER

Reception Desk 31

Location to be convenient forstaff and students3

3

3

Barrier-Free

One portion NIC counter4

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:GENERAL OFFICE NIC FURNITURE LAYOUT

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.2.1.b

1.4



Middle School General Office Area Range: Varies Desired average 100 square meters (1070 square feet) Associated Rooms: Forms part of the following suite of rooms: • General Office • Principal’s Office • Vice Principal’s Office • Second Vice Principal’s Office (if applicable) • Staff Work Room • Health Room • Health Room Washroom • Guidance Open Area including an office Preferred location is in proximity of the following areas: • Staff Room To be located adjacent to main entrance Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 • N/A Fitments: N/A Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A



HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 • Room to be air conditioned • Ductwork insulated to minimize noise and eliminate condensation Electrical Power & Devices: • Coordinate electrical power and data drops with Owner to ensure adequate

location for NIC furniture. • Min. two (2) single pole 3-way light switches (as required) Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) 4-plex receptacle per workstation Ref. Elect. C.11 • Provide empty conduit and rough-in to Electrical Room for future Ref. Elect. C.11, C.16, C.17 • One (1) data outlet per workstation Ref. Elect. C.17 • One (1) telephone jack per workstation Ref. Elect. C.15 • One (1) TV outlet complete with adjacent duplex receptacle Ref. Elect. C.11, C.15 • Min. two (2) ceiling mounted PA speakers Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. five (5) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • 4 x 4 junction box for Administrative Console Unit Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) clock hanger receptacle complete with clock Ref. Elect. C.19 • Call for Assistance System connected to emergency call switch in Barrier Free

Washroom. Ref. Elect. C.20 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures type 'O' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Min. one (1) fixture un-switched on night light circuit Ref. Elect. C.25 Design Issues: • One (1) secretary space to be provided for every three hundred (300) students

or part there of. • Unobstructed view of the Main entrance as well as the Vestibule. • Include air conditioning of Administration area in renovation projects in

conjunction with the air conditioning for the Library/Computer Lab (if they are in close proximity)

• Refer to HVAC section for coordination • Coordinate with Project Manager for location and layout of future reception

counter. Count with NIC furniture.

GENERALOFFICE

GUIDANCEOFFICE

PRINCIPAL

VICEPRINCIPAL

HEALTHROOM

WSHRM

STAFFLOUNGE

B1.2.5.a

6

VESTIBULE

CO

RRID

OR

OU

TSID

E

STAFFWORKROOM

1

2

FOYER

34

7

8

5

Direct access from Foyer to Office1

General Office requires view into Foyer,Vestibule & Main Entrance (Exterior)2

Locate Reception Desk within General Office3

Provide Vistor Seating within General Office4

Provide corridor and office suite access toTeacher Mail Boxes in Workroom5

6

Provide General Coat Storage nearGeneral Office

7

Receptionist to have a clear view intoHealth Room (be respectful of privacyfrom General Office visitors)

8

Staff Lounge and Staff washrooms to beadjacent or in vicinity to Administration Area

B1.2.1.b

SECONDVICE

PRINCIPAL

Direct access if possible

GUIDANCEOPEN AREA

10

Provide a table and seating in GuidanceOpen Area for 5-6 students

9

10 Location of the Principal's and VicePrincipal's offices can be reversed

10

10

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:MIDDLE SCHOOL OFFICESPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.2.2.a

1.4



Principal’s Office Area Range: 17 square meters (183 square feet) Associated Rooms: Forms part of the following suite of rooms: • General Office • Principal’s Office • Vice Principal’s Office • Second Vice Principal’s Office (if applicable) • Staff Work Room • Health Room • Health Room Washroom • Guidance Open Area including an office (Middle School only) Preferred location is in proximity of the following areas: • Staff Room Millwork: N/A Fitments: N/A Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 • Room to be air conditioned, as part of the administration suite (if applicable)




location for NIC furniture. • Min. one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle on each wall Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) clock hanger receptacle complete with clock Ref. Elect. C.19 Workstation (typically two locations with one being active):

• Min. one (1) 4-plex receptacle Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) telephone outlet Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. one (1) data outlet Ref. Elect. C.17

Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'O' Design Issues: • Associated closely with all the office administration areas. • Exterior window must be provided.


Version 1.5 Issued: February 28, 2013 Section: B.1.2.4 Page 1 of 2

Vice Principal’s Office Area Range: 14 square meters (150 square feet) Associated Rooms: Forms part of the following suite of rooms: • General Office • Principal’s Office • Vice Principal’s Office • Second Vice Principal’s Office (if applicable) • Staff Work Room • Health Room • Health Room Washroom • Guidance Open Area including an office (Middle School only) Preferred location is in proximity of the following areas: • Staff Room Millwork: N/A Fitments: N/A Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 • Room to be air conditioned, as part of the administration suite (if applicable)






Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'O' Design Issues: • Associated closely with all the office and administration areas. • Exterior window must be provided.



Staff Lounge Area Range: 74 square meters (800 square feet) Associated Rooms: Preferred location is in proximity to Administrative area and Staff Washrooms Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for staff use: • One (1) – M2 – MCP Island (if space permits):

• Six (6) – B1 – Lower Cabinet (Review both space and program requirement needs with PDSB during design brief)

Kitchenette:

• One (1) – B2 – Lower Cabinet • Three (3) – B8 – Lower Cabinet • One (1) – B10 – Lower Cabinet Coordinate shop drawings with • Opening for Range owner to ensure adequate sizes • Two (2) – U1 – Upper Cabinet for NIC equipment and appliances • One (1) – U2 – Upper Cabinet • Two (2) – U4 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – U6 – Upper Cabinet

Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TB] One (1) – Tackboard – 1200 x 2400 • [WB] One (1) – Whiteboard – 1200 x 2400 • [CR+S] Coat rack and shelf • Provision for lay-in specialty tile for a ceiling mounted projector Ref. Elect. C.11 Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system



Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-12] One (1) – Sink and faucet – hot and cold water on sink • Provision for dishwasher (NIC) and hot and cold water • Cold water line to refrigerator for ice maker HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 • Room to be air conditioned, as part of the administration suite (if applicable) • Range hood above range. Exhaust vented directly to exterior • Review requirements for range hood venting with Municipality. If residential

venting cannot be negotiated, range and hood is to be deleted and provide oven only.

Electrical Power & Devices: • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 • Min. five (5) duplex receptacles (min. 1 per wall) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) stove receptacle (see HVAC notes above) Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) duplex receptacle for dishwasher Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) duplex receptacle for refrigerator Ref. Elect. C.11 • Two (2) duplex receptacles for microwaves (coordinate within U4 millwork) Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) connection and circuit for stove hood Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) split duplex receptacles at counter Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle mounted on specialty tile within ceiling Ref. Elect. C.11 • All above counter receptacles to be GFI. • Provide one (1) projector ceiling plate to be mounted in ceiling grid, supply

and installed by electrical sub-contractor. Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacles mounted on specialty tile within ceiling Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' Design Issues: • Associated closely with all the office and administration areas. • Lightweight Suspended Ceiling Plates for Projector mounts complete with all

mounting equipment. • Contractor to verify with Board if any specialty or equipment will be

provided. Data: • Min. of two (2) data locations excluding one located on MCP • One (1) typical audio/video and computer assembly location to be determined

by Peel District School Board.

WB

CR

& S

MCP

TB

CO

RRID

OR

OU

TSID

E

MALE STAFFWASHROOM

FEMALE STAFFWASHROOM

B1.3.2.a

Reference

B1.3.2.a

Reference

STAFFLOUNGE

Staff washrooms to be in vicinity ofStaff Lounge1

Staff Kitchen requires 2 microwaveson separate circuits

2

1

2

3

Staff Lounge and Staff washrooms tobe adjacent or in vicinity toAdministration Area

3

4

Provide cold water supply tofridge for ice maker.4

B8 B2B8 B8U4 U2U6U1 U1 U4

RANGE(NIC) D/W

(NIC)

FRIDGE(NIC)B10

5

Consultant to reviewrequirements for range hoodventing with municipality. Ifpossible provide range andrange hood.

5

* * *

S-12

M2

ISLAND

Island (if applicable). Review bothspace and program requirement needswith PDSB during design brief.

6

6

765 915

Coordinate with PDSB prior to shopdrawing approval. Applies for allappliance.

7

7 72

c

7

Distance to be coordinated withPDSB (base on projector).8

8

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:STAFF LOUNGE

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.2.5.a

1.4



Staff Work Room/OSR Storage Area Range: 20 square meters (215 square feet) Associated Rooms: Forms part of the following suite of rooms: • General Office • Principal’s Office • Vice Principal’s Office • Second Vice Principal’s Office (if applicable) • Staff Work Room • Health Room • Health Room Washroom • Guidance Open Area including an office (Middle School only) Preferred location is in proximity of the following areas: • Staff Room Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for teacher use: • 680mm AFF Three (3) – C4 – Mail slots. Minimum 60 mail slots. • 900nn AFF Three (3) – B1 – Lower Cabinet • Three (3) – U1 – Upper Cabinet Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • Fire extinguisher Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A

Coordinate countertop height and finishing of lateral gable if units are placed adjacent



HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 • Room to be air conditioned as part of administration suite (if applicable) Electrical Power & Devices: • Min. one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) data outlets (photocopiers) Ref. Elect. C.17 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle on dedicated circuit (laminator) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) duplex receptacles (photocopiers, dedicated circuits) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) emergency telephone outlet complete with line seizure relay for

lockdown procedure Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. one (1) telephone outlet (fax) Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. two (2) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • Pushbutton for School closedown procedure interconnected to PA system Ref. Elect. C.15 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures type 'V' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Lighting to be 3 way switch if room has two (2) entrances Ref. Elect. C.11 Design Issues: • Associated closely with all the office and administration areas • If design permits, provide access from General Office and Corridor • Locate integrated PA/telephone lockdown control in this room in

conformance with requirements of PDSB lockdown procedures. • Refer to the PDSB Standard Specification “Provision And Installation of

Integrated Telephone / P.A. Systems” (not enclosed): • Coordinate number of lateral files required for OSR Storage with Project

Manager. Minimum 6 cabinets (3 back to back creating an island is prefer) (if space permits, additional OSR storage is recommended)



Health Room Area Range: 12 square meters (130 square feet) Associated Rooms: Forms part of the following suite of rooms: • General Office • Principal’s Office • Vice Principal’s Office • Second Vice Principal’s Office (if applicable) • Staff Work Room • Health Room • Health Room Washroom • Guidance Open Area including an office (Middle School only) Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for teacher use: • One (1) – B1 – Lower Cabinet • One (1) – B2 – Lower Cabinet • One (1) – U1 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – U2 – Upper Cabinet Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [PTD] – Paper Towel Dispenser Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Porcelain tile flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-10] One (1) sink and faucet - hot and cold water • Cold water line to fridge for ice maker HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 • Room to be air conditioned, as part of the administration suite (if applicable)



Electrical Power & Devices: • Min. one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) duplex receptacle for refrigerator Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) duplex GFI receptacles at sink/counter Ref. Elect. C.11

Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixture - type 'A' Design Issues: • Associated closely with all the office and administration areas.



Health Room Washroom Area Range: 2 square meters (22 square feet) • If washroom is required to be Barrier Free: 5 square meters (54 square feet) Associated Rooms: Preferred Location is adjacent to the Health Room Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TM] Tilted mirror • [HD] Hand dryer • [TD] Toilet tissue holder • [SNDisp] Sanitary napkin & tampon dispenser • [SND] Sanitary napkin & tampon disposal • [CS] Convenience Shelf Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Gloss alkyd paint • Water resistant gypsum board ceiling Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-4] Barrier free sink and faucet – hot and cold water • [FD] Floor drain • [WC-1] Water closet • Floor slab to slope to floor drain HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 • Room to be air conditioned (as part of General Office only)



Electrical Power & Devices: Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) single pole light switch • Min. one (1) duplex GFI receptacle at sink/counter • PA speaker on ceiling Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixture - type 'B' Design Issues: • In renovation projects this room may be designed as a Barrier Free Washroom

if no other Barrier Free Washroom exists within the School, refer to section B.1.3.3. Ref. Arch. B.1.3.3

• Design to accommodate ease of access to the Corridor.



Guidance Area and Office Area Range: • Guidance Office: 11 square meters (120 square feet) • Guidance Open Area: Varies Associated Rooms: Forms part of the following suite of rooms: • General Office • Principal’s Office • Vice Principal’s Office • Second Vice Principal’s Office (if applicable) • Staff Work Room • Health Room • Health Room Washroom • Guidance Open Area including an office (Middle School only) Preferred location is in proximity of the following areas: • Staff Room Millwork: N/A Fitments: N/A Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 • Office and Open Area to be air conditioned (if within General Office)



Electrical Power & Devices: Office: • Coordinate electrical power and data drops with Owner to ensure adequate



Open Area: • Min. one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) clock hanger outlet complete with clock Ref. Elect. C.19 • Min. two (2) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. three (3) data outlets (each to be adjacent a receptacle) Ref. Elect. C.17 • Min. one (1) red t-slot service receptacle on dedicated circuit, labelled

“Custodial” Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) ceiling mounted PA speaker Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. one (1) telephone outlet Ref. Elect. C.15 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'O' Ref. Elect. C.27 • One (1) fixture un-switched on night light circuit Ref. Elect. C.25 Design Issues: • Associated closely with all the office and administration areas. • Door to this room to include glazing



Student Washrooms Area Range: Varies Associated Rooms: N/A Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TM] Tilted Mirror (one (1) for every four (4) stalls) • [HD] Hand dryer (one (1) for every four (4) stalls) • [TD] Toilet tissue holder (one (1) per stall) • [SNDisp] Sanitary napkin & tampon dispenser (Girl’s Washroom) • [SND] Sanitary napkin & tampon disposal (MS – one (1) per stall, JS –

one (1) for every four (4) stalls and within barrier free stall) • Toilet partitions Barrier Free Stall: • [GB] Grab bars • [GBL] Grab bar “L” shape • [CS] Convenience shelf Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Porcelain tile flooring complete with base • Ceramic wall tile 1200mm above finished floor throughout entire washroom • Gloss alkyd paint • Water resistant gypsum board ceiling Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [WF-1/2] Barrier free multi-head wash fountain – tempered water only (fixture type dependant on number of water closets) • [WC-1] Water closets (as required) • [WC-2] One (1) – Barrier free water closet per washroom • [U-1] Urinals (male only, as required) • [FD] Floor drains • Floor slab to slope to floor drain • Provide sufficient barrier free wash fountains to allow for one (1) hand-wash

station per water closet.



HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Switching control by Corridor key switch Ref. Elect. C.7 • One (1) GFI receptacle at entrance Ref. Elect. C.11 • Connections for hand dryers (one (1) for every four stalls) Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) PA speaker in ceiling Ref. Elect. C.15 • One (1) receptacle within ceiling for urinal solenoid valve (male only) Ref. Elect. C.11 • PA box and speaker, ceiling mounted Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'G1' Design Issues: • May be divided into separate suites within floor plan or one (1) large

washroom for each sex on each floor. • Barrier free compliant, consultant to reference latest edition of Ontario

Building Code and Disabilities Act. • Consultant to reference latest edition of Ontario Building Code and to

complete washroom count to ensure that adequate washrooms are provided on each floor.

• If design permits, rooms to share a common water wall • If multiple washrooms occupy the floor, these are to be located in opposite

corners to facilitate use by students. • Location in school should facilitate supervision. • Avoid washroom locations directly adjacent to entry/exits • Provide washroom fixtures as per OBC requirements, plus allow for 12 future

portables.

FD FD

FDFD

TM

TM TM

GBL

GB

GBL

GB

HD

TM

TD

HD

GIRLSWASHROOM

BOYSWASHROOM

SND

SND

SNDTD

TD

TD

TD

TD

TD

TD

SND

SND

SND

SND

TD

TD

SD (NIC)

SND

TD

SND

isp.

CORRIDOR

For Junior Schools;One urinal to be mounted at560mm AFF. Other urinals tobe mounted at 400mm AFF.For Middle Schools;One urinal to be mounted at400mm AFF. Other urinals tobe mounted at 560mm AFF.

1

150PREF.

900

MINIMUM CLEAROPENING

150PREF.

900

MINIMUM CLEAROPENING

1

WC-2

WC-1TYP.WC-1 TYP.

U-1TYP.

WF-1WF-2

Type ofwashfountaindependenton numberof waterclosets

OR

Type of washfountain dependent on

number of water closets

OR

HD

HD

SD (NIC)

WF-1WF-2

TD

Discourage design utilizinga second set of doors.

2

2

CS CS

2

SD (NIC)SD (NIC)

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:STUDENT WASHROOM

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.3.1.a

1.4



Staff Washroom Area Range: 8 square meters (86 square feet) Associated Rooms: To be located in proximity to Staff Lounge (ground level) Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 • Plam counter tops for installation of sinks and vanities • B7 – Always barrier free counter Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TM] Tilted mirror • [HD] Hand dryer (provide one (1) for every four stalls) • [TD] Toilet tissue holder (one (1) per stall) • [SNDisp] Sanitary napkin & tampon dispenser (female only, one (1) per

stall) • [SND] Sanitary napkin & tampon disposal (female only, one (1) per stall) • Toilet partitions (if applicable) Barrier Free Stall: • [GB] Grab bars • [GBL] Grab bar “L” shape • [CS] Convenience shelf Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Porcelain tile flooring complete with base • Ceramic wall tile 1200mm above finished floor throughout entire washroom • Gloss alkyd paint • Water resistant gypsum board ceiling Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-4] Barrier free sink and faucet –tempered water • [WC-1] Water closets (as required) • [WC-2] One (1) – Barrier free water closet per washroom • [U-1] Urinals (male only, as required) • [S-9] Barrier free sink and faucet • [FD] Floor drains • Floor slab to slope to floor drain



HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • No light switching, control from circuit breaker in corridor lighting panel Ref. Elect. C.7 • Min. one (1) GFI receptacle at entrance Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) GFI receptacle above vanity top Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) PA speaker Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. one (1) connection for hand dryer Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) receptacle within ceiling for urinal solenoid valve (male only) Ref. Elect. C.11 • PA box and speaker, ceiling mounted Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'B' Design Issues: • May be divided into separate suites within floor plan or one (1) large

washroom for each sex on each floor. Minimum one (1) per floor • Barrier free compliant, consultant to reference latest edition of Ontario

Building Code and Disabilities Act. • Consultant to reference latest edition of Ontario Building Code and to

complete washroom count to ensure that adequate washrooms are provided on each floor.

• One (1) Staff Washroom required per sex per floor, two (2) stalls per washroom.

FEMALESTAFF

WASHROOM

MALESTAFF

WASHROOM

1 In lieu of vanity, usemillwork type B7

FDFD

GBLTD

GBL

GBGB

HD

CS

TM

SD (NIC)

TM

SD (NIC)

1

1

SND

isp.

CORRIDOR

150PREFERRED

900MINIMUM CLEAR

OPENING

150PREFERRED

HD

CS

900MINIMUM CLEAR

OPENING

SND TD

TD

WC-2 WC-2

U-1

WC-1

S-9S-9

SND

GFIGFI

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:STAFF WASHROOM

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.3.2.a

1.4


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 Section: B.1.3.3 Page 1 of 2

Barrier Free Washroom Area Range: 5 square meters (54 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Elevator / Barrier Free lift • Barrier free entrance • Barrier-free parking space and related curb cuts to access B/F entrance Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TM] Tilted mirror • [HD] Hand dryer • [TD] Toilet tissue holder • [GB] Grab bars • [GBL] Grab bar “L” shape • [SNDisp] Sanitary napkin & tampon dispenser • [SND] Sanitary napkin & tampon disposal • [CS] Convenience Shelf Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Porcelain tile flooring completed with rubber base • Gloss alkyd paint • Water resistant gypsum board ceiling Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-4] One (1) - Barrier free sink and faucet - tempered water • [WC-2] One (1) - Barrier free water closet • [FD] Floor drain • Floor slab to slope to floor drain HVAC: no special requirements



Electrical Power & Devices: • Min. one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) GFI duplex receptacle (tamper proof) Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. one (1) connection for hand dryer Ref. Elect. C.15 • Call for Assistance System connected to emergency call switch in Administration Area. Ref. Elect. C.20 • Wire pull cord alarm to Corridor light where it is not possible to wire to

Administration Area. • PA box and speaker, ceiling mounted • PA handset in washroom. Refer to Drawings item 3 Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixture - type 'B' (of D if recess not possible) • Corridor dome light fixture – type ‘C1’ (if required) Design Issues: • One (1) barrier free washroom on each floor • Close proximity to elevator / barrier free lift and barrier free entrance • Barrier free, consultant to reference latest edition of Ontario Building Code

and Disabilities Act. • Locate handset clear or access ways • Refer to Door Elevations for door size Ref. B.8.1.a

GB

GBL

TM

HD

SND

TD

SD

CS

1 For Kindergarten Barrier-FreeWashrooms:Provide Sink type S-14.Do not provide Sanitary Napkindispensers.Do not provide Sanitary Napkindisposals.

1

CORRIDOR/KINDERGARTEN

CLASSROOM

150PREFERRED900

MINIMUM CLEAR OPENING

SNDisp.

WC-2

S-2

FD

Emergency pull cord alarmdevice, associated assistancealarm to sound in GeneralOffice when pull cord is used.Wire pull cord alarm toCorridor light where it is notpossible or practical to wire toAdministration Area.

2

2

Handheld phone if possiblelocated close by toilet.Communication with office andpossibly to dial 911.

3

32

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:BARRIER-FREE WASHROOM

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.3.3.a

1.4



Junior School Corridors Area Range: Varies Associated Rooms: N/A Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 • Trophy / Display Cases (if applicable, confirm quantity and location with

Owner) Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [CR] Coat Rack • [TB] Tackboards • Barrier free push buttons at Main Vestibule, and any other entrance vestibule

as required by the Ontario Building Code • [FE] Fire extinguishers Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Porcelain tile flooring with rubber base • Gloss alkyd paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • Consultants to coordinate floor cleanout locations with Mechanical Engineer • [DF-1] & [DF-2] Drinking fountains HVAC: no special requirements R Electrical Power & Devices: • T-slot service receptacles on dedicated circuits within Corridor for cleaning

equipment on 15m centres Ref. Elect. C.11 • Wiring to be prepared for barrier free push buttons and operators Ref. Elect. C.11 • Control lighting fixtures from Corridor panel Ref. Elect. C.7 • PA speakers on approximately 10m centers Ref. Elect. C.15 • Pull station and cover Ref. Elect. C.11 • Exit signs as required • Security device as required by PDSB



Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'B' Ref. Elect. C.27 • 10% of fixtures to be un-switched on night light circuit Ref. Elect. C.25 Design Issues: • Designed such that no rooms, doors, millwork or any other protrusion

interferes with the required Corridor width. • Must meet all Ontario Building Code requirements. • Relationship with all public entrances and stair wells. Corridor to allow for

easy accessibility to barrier free elevator and washrooms. • Barrier free, consultant to reference latest edition of Ontario Building Code

and Disabilities Act. • Coordinate location of Vending machine alcove • Recommended wall to wall Corridor Width shall be:

• 2700mm (incl. coat rack one side of Corridor) • 3000mm (incl. coat rack track on both sides of Corridor) • 2400mm (with no coat racks)

• Provide contrasting colour strip or pattern to guide visual impaired • Provide contrasting colour base boards and every time the corridor change

direction to guide visual impaired • Provide recessed sprinkler heads to prevent vandalism. • Coat Racks in ground floor corridors • Mixture of coat racks and lockers on second floor corridors



Middle School Corridors Area Range: Varies. Associated Rooms: N/A Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 • Trophy / Display Cases (if applicable, confirm quantity and location with

Owner) Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TB] Tackboards • Barrier free push buttons at Main Vestibules, and any other entrance vestibule

as required by the Ontario Building Code • [FE] Fire extinguishers in cabinets • [CR] Coat Racks Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Porcelain tile flooring with rubber base • Gloss alkyd paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • Consultants to coordinate floor cleanout locations with Mechanical Engineer • [DF-1] & [DF-2] Drinking fountains HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • T-slot service receptacles on dedicated circuits within Corridor for cleaning

equipment on 15m centres Ref. Elect. C.11 • Wiring to be prepared for barrier free push buttons and operators. Ref. Elect. C.11 • Control light fixtures from Corridor panel Ref. Elect. C.7 • PA speakers on approximately 10m centers Ref. Elect. C.15 • Pull station and cover Ref. Elect. C.11



Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'B' Ref. Elect. C.27 • 10% of fixtures to be un-switched on night light circuit Ref. Elect. C.25 Design Issues: • Designed such that no rooms, doors, lockers, millwork or any other protrusion

interferes with the required Corridor width. • Must meet all Ontario Building Code requirements. • Relationship with all public entrances and stair wells. Corridor to allow for

easy accessibility to barrier free elevator and washrooms. • Lockers shall be raised from Corridor finished level by 100mm on concrete

base. • Barrier free, consultant to reference latest edition of Ontario Building Code

and Disabilities Act. • Coordinate Vending machine alcove • Recommended wall to wall Corridor Width shall be:

• Middle School: 2400mm - no lockers 3000mm - lockers on one (1) side (incl. depth of lockers)

3600mm – lockers on both sides (incl. depth of lockers) • Where lockers are provided, provide masonry nib walls at each end



Stairwells Area Range: Varies Associated Rooms: N/A Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • Barrier free push buttons (if applicable) • Fire extinguishers • Aluminum windows complete with fixed glazing Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Porcelain tile flooring complete with base at landings • One (1) piece stair tread/riser. Resilient rubber on stairs complete with non-

slip nosing colour contrast on stair nosing for visual impaired • Gloss alkyd paint • Epoxy paint (stair railings & stringers only) • LAP ceiling and grid system • Gypsum board bulkheads (as required) Plumbing: N/A HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.7 • Force flow heaters Electrical Power & Devices: • Wiring to be prepared for barrier free push buttons and operators (where

applicable) Ref. Elect. C.11 • T-slot service receptacle on dedicated circuits within Stairwells for cleaning

equipment, top & bottom landing only. Ref. Elect. C.11 • Fluorescent wall brackets to be used on landings at 2.5 m mounting height Ref. Elect. C.27 • No switching control, control fixtures from un-switched circuits (panelboard) Ref. Elect. C.25 • Pull station and cover Ref. Elect. C.11



Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - types 'A', 'B' and 'S' Design Issues: • Easily accessible from corridor and have safe and easy access to outdoor areas

for egress if necessary. • Conform to latest edition of Ontario Building Code. • Designed such that no obstruction or protrusions interfere with means of

egress. • Designed at opposite ends of the school to facilitate easy means of egress • Designed and finished to minimize maintenance • Occupant load of school to be reviewed to determine required quantity,

location and sizes of exit widths and stairs. • Designers to review with Owner, requirements to use stair and stair landing as

place of refuge • Designed to prevent collection of garbage in between railings • Both round and flat plate style handrails are acceptable (stainless steel is not

permitted). • Refer to Door Elevations for door size Ref. Arch. B.8.1.a



Custodial Office Area Range: 25 square meters (270 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Custodial Storage Room Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 • One (1) – M2 – MCP Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TB] One (1) - Tackboard 1200 x 1200 • Four (4) - Full size lockers Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint PDSB Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [JS-1] Mop sink complete with hot and cold water, floor mount • [FD] Floor drain • [EW-2] Hand held eye wash station • Floor slab to slope to floor drain • Provision for washer and dryer (NIC) complete with hot and cold water HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 • Provision for washer and dryer Electrical Power & Devices: • Coordinate location of any electrical panels and electrical equipment • Three-way switching (as required) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. three (3) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) receptacle for dryer Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) clock hanger outlet complete with clock Ref. Elect. C19 • One (1) PA speaker Ref. Elect. C.15



• One (1) duplex receptacle for washer Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) data outlet at location of custodial desk Ref. Elect. C.17 • Min. one (1) receptacle for auto scrubber battery charger Ref. Elect. C.11 • Connection for hot water tank Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) EMS panel connection and telephone outlet Ref. Elect. C.11, C.15 • One (1) emergency battery pack unit complete with two heads Ref. Elect. C.25 • Standard MCP devices (provision for call switch) Ref. Elect. C.28 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'B' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Provide one (1) fixture un-switched on night light circuit Ref. Elect. C.25 Design Issues: • Designed to have two areas with access between them. One (1) area for the

office and one (1) area for any required mechanical and electrical equipment • Consultants to review the requirement for rating around this room due to

storage materials contained within it. • Access directly through corridor. • Allow space for washer and dryer c/w rough-ins. • One (1) mop sink per floor only – if designed here to not supply extra mop

sink in custodian storage. Preferable in custodian storage if space is available. • Attempt to have outside access • Refer to Door Elevations for door size Ref. Arch. B.8.1.a



Custodial Storage Area Range: 5 square meters (54 square feet) Associated Rooms: N/A Millwork: N/A Fitments: • Metal shelves bolted to wall. NIC Finishes: • Sealed concrete flooring Ref. Arch. C.9 • Latex paint PDSB Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [JS-1] Mop sink complete with hot and cold water floor mount • [FD] Floor drain. • [EW-2] Hand held eye wash station • Floor slab to slope to floor drain HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Min. one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) red t-slot service receptacle on dedicated circuits, labelled “Custodial” Ref. Elect. C.11 Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'B'



Design Issues: • If multiple Custodial Rooms are required, rooms to be separated to facilitate

cleaning. • If multiple Custodial Rooms are required, minimum one (1) room per floor in

multi-storey designs. Also fit one room per floor with mop wink c/w eye wash station and signage.

• Consultants to review the requirement for rating around this room due to storage materials contained within it.

• Access directly through corridor. Where possible, access to Mechanical, Electrical, ITS-Hub and Sprinkler room.

• Allow free wall space to place and blot a minimum of 3 units of metal high shelves NIC.

• Refer to Door Elevations for door size Ref. Arch. B.8.1.a



Special Education Classroom Area Range: 70 square meters (753 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Alternative Learning Environment • Orthopedic Washroom • Elevator Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork: • Two (2) - B1 - Lower Cabinet • One (1) – B7 - Lower Cabinet • Two (2) - U1 - Upper Cabinet • One (1) - U2 - Upper Cabinet • One (1) - C1 – Teacher’s Cabinet • One (1) – M2 - MCP • One (1) - C2 - Cabinet Optional Millwork (for Life Skills): • Two (2) - B1 - Lower Cabinet • One (1) – B10 – Lower Cabinet • One (1) – U1 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) - U2 - Upper Cabinet • One (1) – U4 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – U6 - Upper Cabinet • Opening for range Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [CB/TB] One (1) – Chalkboard with Tackboard above 1200 x 3600 • [TB] Two (2) - Tackboards 1200 x 3600 • Provision for a lay-in specialty tile for a ceiling mounted projector Ref. Elect. C.11 If Life Skills millwork is not a project requirement, provide the following in lieu of millwork shown on drawing B.1.5.1.a: • [TB] One (1) - Tackboard 1200 x 4200



Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 Standard Classroom Plumbing: • [S-12] One (1) - Sink and faucet – tempered water • Rough-in for washer/dryer, dishwasher and hot and cold water Optional Classroom Plumbing (for Life Skills): • Cold water line to fridge for ice maker HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 Optional Classroom HVAC (for Life Skills): • Range hood above range. Exhaust vented directly to exterior • Review requirements for range hood venting with Municipality. If residential

venting cannot be negotiated, range and hood is to be deleted and provide oven only.

• Provision for washer and dryer Electrical Power & Devices: Standard Electrical Power & Devices: • Within ceiling grid system electrical conduits and receptacles to be roughed in

for allocation of ceiling mounted projector. This item to be coordinated with electrical consultants. Ref. Elect. C.11

• GFI breakers for all devices Ref. Elect. C.7 • Audio jack to speaker jack within Alternative Learning Environment Ref. Elect. C.22 • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 • Min. two (2) data outlets Ref. Elect. C.17 • Min. two (2) duplex receptacles per wall Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) split duplex receptacle (above sink counter, where applicable) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle mounted on specialty tile within ceiling Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) duplex receptacle for microwave (coordinate within U4 millwork) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) GFI receptacle at counter/sink Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) duplex receptacle for refrigerator Ref. Elect. C.11 • Provide wiremold complete with four (4) duplex receptacles and four (4) data

outlets Ref. Elect. C.11



Optional Classroom Electrical Power & Devices (for Life Skills): • One (1) stove hood connection and circuit Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) duplex receptacle for dishwasher Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) stove receptacle Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) receptacle for dryer Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) duplex receptacle for washer Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) receptacle within microwave millwork Ref. Elect. C.11 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Lighting to be switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elect. C.11 Design Issues: • Access and visual relationship to Alternative Learning Environment • If design permits, to be located on ground floor as close as possible to the fire

route for emergency paramedic access. • Ask PDSB if the Life Skills millwork should be included in this project, if

not; provide appropriate rough-ins for future implementation. • Lightweight Suspended Ceiling Plates for Projector mounts complete with all

mounting equipment.

CB W/TB ABOVE

MCP

6 C

OM

PU

TER

WO

RK

STA

TIO

NS

(NIC

)

ALTERNATIVELEARNING

ENVIRONMENT

SPECIALEDUCATIONCLASSROOM

CORRIDOR

OUTSIDE

C1

U2

U1

U1

B7

B1

B1

WM

Alternative LearningEnvironment Room to beaccessible from SpecialEducation Classroom

1B1.7.1.a

1

c

Optional millwork &appliances. Review requirmentswith PDSB.

2

TEACHINGWALL

C2

Cold water supply to fridge forice maker.4

Range hood above range.Consultant to review ventingrequirements with municipality

5

3

S-12

M2

U6

U1

B1

U2

B10

4

5RANGE

(NIC)

D/W(NIC)

FRIDGE(NIC)

**

** DRYER

(NIC)

* WASHER(NIC)

TBTB

Review with PDSB if theLife Skills millwork shouldbe included in this project,if not; provide appropriaterough-ins for futureimplementation.

3

3

3

If Life Skills millwork is includedin project, provide the following:

U4

B1

2

1800

MIN

.

B9 for Junior Schools,C2 for Middle Schools6

B9 6

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:SPECIAL EDUCATION CLASSROOM

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.5.1.a

1.4



Science, Mathematics and Technology Classrooms (S.M.T.) Area Range: 93 square meters (1000 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • S.M.T. Prep-Room • S.T.A.C. • Hybrid Prep Room Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for student and teacher use: • Seven (7) – B1 – Lower Cabinet • Three (3) – B2 – Lower Cabinet • One (1) - B5.1 - Lower Cabinet • One (1) – B5.2 – Lower Cabinet • One (1) – B6 – B/F Cabinet • One (1) – B7 – B/F Cabinet • Four (4) – U5A – Upper Cabinet • Four (4) – U5B – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – C1 – Teacher’s Closet • One (1) – M2 – MCP Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [SCB] One (1) –Sliding Chalkboard 1200 x 3600 • [TB] One (1) – Tackboard 1200 x 6000 • [FB] Fire Blanket • [FE] Fire Extinguisher • Provision for lay-in specialty tile for a ceiling mounted projector Ref. Elect. C.11 Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system



Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-13] One (1) - sink and faucet with hot and cold water to teacher’s

demo desk • [S-13] Four (4) - sinks and faucets (incl. one within BF millwork) –

tempered water • [EW-4] Hand held eye wash (mounted to teacher’s demo desk) • Water shut-off valve HVAC: • Teacher’s demo desk to be equipped with extraction ventilation. Electrical Power & Devices: • GFI receptacle for all devices Ref. Elect. C.11 • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 • Minimum five receptacles, wall mounted (two above counter are required) on

separate circuit other than from Shop Panel • PA Speaker • Fire Alarm Strobe/Horn • Fire Alarm interconnection to dust collector spark detection system in dust

collector control panel • Minimum one ceiling mounted duplex receptacle Ref. Elec. C.11 • One On/Off Keyswitch/Pilot Light and red dome light (Type 'C') Ref. Elec. C.11

interconnected to illuminate when dust collector is running. Keyswitch is to control contactor

• Minimum three emergency stop pushbutton stations interconnected to Ref. Elec. C.11.6 • Shop Panel and contactors to shut off all Shop Equipment • Combination Exit/Emergency Light located at door immediately leading to

Corridor Ref. Elec. C.11.6 • Minimum twelve duplex Receptacles (10 mounted above counter and two in

compartment wiremold) for Shop Equipment Ref. Elec. C.11.6 • Minimum eight ceiling receptacles for cord reels Ref. Elec. C.11.6 • Two 3-pole light switches Ref. Elec. C.11.6 • One panelboard contactor/emergency pushbutton to controls hop equipment

circuits through keyswitch in S.M.T. Ref. Elec. C.11.6 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures – types 'M & M1' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Dome Light (Type 'C') Ref. Elec C.27 • Fluorescent under-counter fixtures, as required Ref. Elec C.27 • Lighting switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elec C.11



Design Issues: • Visual connection between S.M.T. Prep Room and S.M.T. Classroom. • Consultant to review fire rating. • Fire blanket to be located near entrance • Sinks and eye wash station on teacher’s demo desk must always be on the side

of exit door. The demo desk can be mirrored if required. • Light weight suspended ceiling plate for projector mount competed with all

mounting equipment.

SCB

MCP

6 C

OM

PU

TER

WO

RK

STA

TIO

NS

(N.I.

C.)

S.M.T.CLASSROOM

BARRIER-FREE

STATION

PRIMARYTEACHING WALL

SECONDARYTEACHING

WALL

B5.1B5.2

S.M.T. PREP ROOM

CO

RRID

OR

OU

TSID

E

B7 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2

C1

B1

B1

B1

B1

B1.5.4.a

POSSIBLE ARTROOM/PREP ROOM

LOCATION

c

3

Create plumbing chase wall betweenS.M.T. Classrooms if applicable3

No plumbing on this wall (if possible)Minimize electrical2

Non load bearing wall (if possible) toallow for future expansion of room1

21

4

Dedicated Exhaust at Instructor's Desk4

U5AU5BB6

U5B U5A U5B U5A U5B U5A

FB

TB

MIN. 1500

5

Eye Wash5

M2

S-15

EW-4

S-13

S-13TYP.

WBTB

POSSIBLE S.M.T.CLASSROOM

HD

FE

6

Power and Data to be located onTeacher's Demonstration Desk, facingteaching wall

6

SD(NIC)

7

Location to be coordinated with PDSB(based on projector and teaching wall)

7

PTD

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:SCIENCE, MATHEMATICSAND TECHNOLOGY CLASSROOMWITH PREP ROOM NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.5.2.a

1.4


Version 1.4 Issued: Febraruy 28, 2013 Section: B.1.5.3 Page 1 of 2

Science, Mathematics and Technology Prep. Room (S.M.T.) Area Range: 18 square meters (190 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • S.M.T. Classroom • S.T.A.C. • Hybrid Prep Room Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TB] One (1) - Tackboard 1200 x 1200 • [WB] One (1) – Whiteboard 1200 x 1200 • [HD] Hand dryer • [PTD] Paper towel Dispenser Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-15] One (1) - sink and faucet with hot and cold water • [EW-2] Hand held eye wash HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • One (1) ceiling mounted PA speaker Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. three (3) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) data outlets Ref. Elect. C.17 • One (1) – panel board complete with contactor to control burner circuits

through keyswitch in S.M.T. Classroom MCP Ref. Elect. C.8


Version 1.4 Issued: Febraruy 28, 2013 Section: B.1.5.3 Page 2 of 2

Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' Design Issues: • Visual connection between S.M.T. Prep Room and S.M.T. Classroom • Access from adjacent S.M.T. Classroom • If design permits, shall be designed with non-load bearing intermediate walls

with minimal mechanical / electrical devices to allow for future removal



Art Classroom Area Range: 93 square meters (1000 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Art Prep Room Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for student and teacher use: • Two (2) – B1 – Lower Cabinet • One (1) – B2 – Lower Cabinet • One (1) – B4 – Lower Cabinet • One (1) - B9 - Lower Cabinet Open Shelving • Two (2) – U1 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – U2 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – C1 – Teacher’s Cabinet • One (1) – C2 - Cabinet Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [CB/TB] Two (2) – Chalk boards with Tackboards above 1200 x 3600 • [TB] Two (2) – Tackboards 3600 x full wall height • [FB] Fire blanket • [FE] Fire extinguisher • Provision for lay-in specialty tile for a ceiling mounted projector Ref. Elect. C.11 Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-10] One (1) - sink and faucet • [S-16] One (1) - sink and faucet with hot and cold water and mud trap HVAC: N/A



Electrical Power & Devices: • GFI breakers for all devices Ref. Elect. C.7 • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 • Min. two (2) split receptacles at counter/sink Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. three (3) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) data outlets Ref. Elect. C.17 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle mounted on specialty tile within cieling Ref. Elect. C.11 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Lighting to be switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elect. C.11 Design Issues: • Visual connection between Art Prep Room and Art Room. • Fire blanket to be mounted near entrance • Lightweight Suspended Ceiling Plates for Projector mounts complete with all

mounting equipment.

PRIMARYTEACHING

WALL

SECONDARYTEACHING WALL

TB

ART ROOM

TBTB

PREP ROOM

CO

RRID

OR

OU

TSID

E

C1B4



1 2

FB

B2

U2

B1

U1

C2

B1.5.2.a

POSSIBLE S.M.T.ROOM/PREP ROOM

LOCATION

TBB9

MCP

CB

W/T

B A

BO

VE

CB

W/T

B A

BO

VE

c

M2

S-10

S-15

HD

B1

U1

SS

S-16

(NIC)SD

Min. dimension to meet OBC

FE

PTD

PTD

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:ART CLASSROOMWITH PREP ROOM

NTS FEB 2013 B.1.5.4.a

1.5



Art Prep Room Area Range: 18 square meters (190 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Art Classroom Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TB] Two (2) - Tackboards 1200 x 1200 • [HD] Hand dryer • [PTD] Paper Towel Dispenser Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-16] One (1) - sink and faucet with hot and cold water and mud trap HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • One (1) ceiling mounted PA speaker Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. three (3) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) data outlets Ref. Elect. C.17 Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A'



0Design Issues: • Visual connection between Art Prep Room and Art Room • If design permits, shall be designed with non-load bearing intermediate walls




Vocal Music Classroom Area Range: 93 square meters (1000 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Music Practice Room • Instrumental Music Room Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for student and teacher use: • Two (2) – B1 – Lower Cabinet • One (1) – B2 – Lower Cabinet • Two (2) – U1 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – U2 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – C1 – Teacher’s Closet • One (1) – M2 – MCP • One (1) – C2 – Tall Open Shelving Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [CB/TB] Two (2) – Chalk boards with Tackboards above 1200 x 2000 • [CB/TB] One (1) – Chalk boards with Tackboards above 1200 x 2400 (pre-

painted music lines) • [TB] One (1) – Tackboard 1200 x full wall length of secondary teaching

wall (min. 7600) • Acoustic wall treatment • Provision for lay-in specialty tile for a ceiling mounted projector Ref. Elect. C.11 Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-10] One (1) - sink and faucet



HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 • Min. four (4) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) data outlets Ref. Elect. C.17 • Min. one (1) duplex GFI receptacle (above counter at sink) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacles mounted on specialty tile within ceiling Ref. Elect. C.11 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Lighting to be switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elect. C.11 Design Issues: • Wall surface treatment for proper sound attenuation • Visual connection with Music Practice Room • If design permits, group room with Instrumental Music Room to facilitate

sharing of Music Practise Room.

VOCAL MUSICROOM

PRIMARYTEACHING

WALL

SECONDARYTEACHING

WALL

MCP

SS

INSTRUMENTALMUSIC ROOM

PRIMARYTEACHING

WALL

PRACTICEROOM

CO

RRID

OR

OU

TSID

E

U1 U1B1 B1B2

U2

U1 U1B1 B1B2

U2

Provide acousticalwall panels.

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

PRACTICEROOM

C1

C1

1

1

TM

TM

TB

TB

c

c

CB W/TBABOVE

CB W/TBABOVE

CB W/TBABOVE

CB W/TBABOVE

CB W/TBABOVE

CB W/TBABOVE

SECONDARYTEACHING

WALL

M2

MCPM2

S-10

S-15

C2

C3

C2

Fill in space between millwork andblock wall with millwork as applicable

Min. dimension to meet OBC

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:MUSIC CLASSROOMS:VOCAL & INSTRUMENTALWITH PRACTICE ROOMS NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.5.6.a

1.4



Instrumental Music Classroom Area Range: 93 square meters (1000 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Music Practice Room (one (1) Practice Room per Music Classroom) • Vocal Music Classroom Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for student and teacher use: • Two (2) – B1 – Lower Cabinet • One (1) – B2 – Lower Cabinet • Two (2) – U1 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – U2 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – C1 – Teacher’s Closet • One (1) – M2 – MCP • One (1) – C2 – Tall Open Shelving • One (1) – C3 – Storage Cabinet Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [CB/TB] Two (2) – Chalk boards with Tackboards above 1200 x 2000 • [CB/TB] One (1) – Chalk boards with Tackboards above 1200 x 2400 (pre-

painted music lines) • [TB] One (1) – Tackboard 1200 x full wall length of secondary teaching

wall (min. 7600) • Acoustic wall treatment • Provision for lay-in specialty tile for a ceiling mounted projector Ref. Elect. C.11 Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-10] One (1) - sink and faucet – tempered water • [S-15] One (1) - sink and faucet – tempered water



HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 • Min. four (4) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) data outlets Ref. Elect. C.17 • Min. one (1) duplex GFI receptacle (above counter at sink) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle mounted on specialty tile within ceiling Ref. Elect. C.11 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Lighting to be switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elect. C.11 Design Issues: • Wall surface treatment for proper sound attenuation • Visual connection with Music Practice Room • If design permits, locate Instrumental Music Room adjacent to Vocal Music

Room to facilitate sharing of Music Practice Rooms.



Music Practice Room Area Range: 5.5 square meters (59 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Instrumental Music Classroom • Vocal Music Classroom Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TM] Tilted mirror • Acoustic wall treatment Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Min. one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) PA speaker Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. two (2) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixture - type 'A' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Lighting to be switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elect. C.11



Design Issues: • Wall surface treatment for proper sound attenuation • Visual connection with Instrumental and Vocal Music Classrooms. • One (1) Practice Room per Music Classroom • If design permits, locate Instrumental Music Room adjacent to Vocal Music

Room to facilitate sharing of Music Practice Rooms.



Classroom Area Range: 70 square meters (753 square feet) Associated Rooms: N/A Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for student and teacher use: • Two (2) – B1 – Lower Cabinet • One (1) – B2 – Lower Cabinet • Two (2) – U1 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – U2 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – C1 – Teacher’s Closet • One (1) – M2 – MCP Additional Millwork: • One (1) - B9 - Lower Open Shelving – Elementary Schools only • One (1) – C2 – Tall Open Shelving – Middle Schools only Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [WB/TB] Two (2) – White boards with Tackboards above 1200 x 3600 • [TB] One (1) - Tackboard 1200 x 4800 • [TB] One (1) – Tackboard 1200 x 4200 • Provision for lay-in specialty tile for a ceiling mounted projector Ref. Elect. C.11 Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-10] One (1) - sink and faucet – tempered water HVAC: no special requirements



Electrical Power & Devices: • Within ceiling grid system electrical conduits and receptacles to be roughed in


• Min. two (2) duplex receptacles per wall (tamper resistant) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) data outlets Ref. Elect. C.17 • Min. one (1) split duplex receptacle (above sink counter) (tamper resistant,

GFCI) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle mounted on specialty tile within ceiling Ref. Elect. C.11 • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Lighting to be switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elect. C.11 Design Issues: • All classrooms to have access to corridor. • Preferred that two (2) windows be provided opposite the teaching wall with

operable ‘awning style’ window. Two operable panels per classroom. • Lightweight Suspended Ceiling Plate for Projector mounts complete with all

mounting equipment.

6 C

OM

PU

TER

WO

RK

STA

TIO

NS

(NIC

)

TB

TB

MCP

TEACHINGWALL

SINGLECLASSROOM

C1

U2

U1

U1

B2

B1

B1

C2

CORRIDOR

OUTSIDE

c

B9

WB

W/ T

B A

BO

VE

WB

W/ T

BA

BO

VE

M2

S-101/

3 W

ALL

LEN

GTH


11Distance to be coordinated withPDSB (based on projector)

2

2

2

AV OutletData Outlet

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:SINGLE CLASSROOM

NTS JAN. 2014 B.1.5.9.a

2.0



Double Classroom Area Range: 140 square meters (1510 square feet) Associated Rooms: N/A Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for student and teacher use: • Four (4) – B1 – Lower Cabinet • Two (2) – B2 – Lower Cabinet • Four (4) – U1 – Upper Cabinet • Two (2) – U2 – Upper Cabinet • Two (2) – C1 – Teacher’s Closet • Two (2) – M2 – MCP

Additional Millwork: • Two (2) – B9 – Lower Open Shelving – Elementary Schools only • Two (2) – C2 – Tall Open Shelving – Middle Schools only • Millwork to be divided equally amongst the two (2) halves of the classrooms

so that if it is subdivided, it accommodates an adequate classroom layout. Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [WB/TB] Four (4) – White boards with Tackboards above 1200 x 3600 • [TB] Two (2) - Tackboards 1200 x 1200 • Provision for two (2) lay-in specialty tiles for ceiling mounted projectors Ref. Elect. C.11 • Designed to accommodate future subdivision of classroom. Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-10] Two (2) sinks and faucets. One (1) in each half of the classroom –

tempered water



HVAC: • Designed to be controlled as two (2) separate classrooms Electrical Power & Devices: • Designed to be controlled as two (2) separate classrooms • Within ceiling grid system electrical conduits and receptacles to be roughed in

for allocation of ceiling mounted projectors. This item to be coordinated with electrical consultants. Ref. Elect. C.11

• Two (2) Standard MCP devices (one (1) per classroom) Ref. Elect. C.28 • Two (2) duplex receptacles per wall (min. four (4) duplex receptacles for rear

Classroom wall) (tamper resistant) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. four (4) data outlets (two (2) per classroom) Ref. Elect. C.17 • Min. two (2) duplex receptacles (above each sink counter) (one (1) per

classroom) (tamper resistant, GFCI) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) duplex receptacles mounted on specialty tile within ceilings

(separate circuit) (one (1) per classroom) Ref. Elect. C.11 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Designed to be controlled as two separate classrooms. Ref. Elect. C.11 • Lighting to be switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elect. C.11 Design Issues: • All classrooms to have access to corridor. • Preferred that four (4) windows be provided opposite the teaching wall with

operable ‘awning’ windows. Two operable panels per classroom. • Allow for future block wall (coordinate structural and mechanical for wall

radiator) No folding partition. • Lightweight Suspended Ceiling Plates for Projector mounts complete with all

mounting equipment. • Two double classroom per school. One on first and one on second floor.

PRIMARYTEACHING

WALL

MCP

FUTU

RE

PAR

TITI

ON

(N.I.

C.)

6 COMPUTER WORKSTATIONS (N.I.C.)6 COMPUTER WORKSTATIONS (N.I.C.)

CLASSROOM CLASSROOM

WB

W/T

B A

BO

VE

C2

C1U2U1U1B2B1

M2

C1U2 U1 U1B2 B1 B1

CORRIDOR

OUTSIDE

PRIMARYTEACHING

WALL

TB

cc

WB

W/T

B A

BO

VE

WB

W/T

BA

BO

VE

WB

W/T

BA

BO

VE

B9

MCPM2

B1

S-10 S-10


1

1 1 C2TB

1

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:DOUBLE CLASSROOM

NTS JAN. 2014 B.1.5.10.a

2.0



Kindergarten Classroom Area Range: 93 square meters (1000 square feet) - Teaching Area 23 square meters (25 squared feet) – Ancillary Space Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Kindergarten Washroom • Kindergarten Exterior Storage • Kindergarten Vestibule Note: Kindergarten suites are typically designed as: two (2) Kindergarten Classrooms, one (1) Vestibule, one (1) Kindergarten Barrier Free Washroom and one (1) standard Kindergarten Washroom. This suite of rooms is not to exceed 232 square meters (2500 square feet) Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for student use: • Two (2) - K1 - Kindergarten Closet & Drawers • One (1) - K2 - Kindergarten Storage Unit • Thirty (30) – Kindergarten Cubbies • Three (3) – K4 - Kindergarten Storage Unit for Toy Carts • Three (3) – K5 - Kindergarten Toy Cart • One (1) – K9 - Kindergarten Cabinet • Nine (9) – K10 – Kindergarten Cabinet • Two (2) – B11 – Lower Cabinet

Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for each classroom: • One (1) – B2 – Lower Cabinet • Eight (8) – U1 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – C1 – Teacher’s Closet • One (1) – M2 – MCP Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [CM] One (1) – Convex Ceiling Mirror for Cloakroom • [WB] Three (3) – Whiteboard 1220 x 2440 • [TB] Three (3) - Tackboard 1220 x 1220 • [KC] Kindergarten Cubbies Ref. Arch.B6 Diagram K3



Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-10] One (1) - sink and faucet • [S-11] One (1) - sinks and faucets • [DF-1] One (1) - Drinking fountain • [DF-2] One (1) - Drinking fountain HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 • Provide buzzer override on MCP Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) three-way switch (both entrances) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) duplex receptacles per wall (Tamper Proof) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) data outlets Ref. Elect. C.17 • Pull station covers Ref. Elect. C.11 • Provide local isolated audible alarm system, complete with one horn in each

room, low voltage transformer, door contacts, and local illuminated toggle disconnect. (buzzer system) – contacts on all doors to exterior vestibule and all doors to corridor. Ref. Elect. C.11

• Power for hand dryer • Add emergency light for 3rd party programs Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Lighting to be switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elect. C.11



Design Issues: • If design permits, group kindergarten rooms to facilitate sharing of washroom,

exterior storage and vestibule spaces. • Drinking fountains to be shared between two (2) rooms if design permits. • Provide minimum two (2) double coat hook located within millwork K3 -

Kindergarten Coat Area Cubicle • Provide access to exterior asphalt play area. This area to be enclosed by black

vinyl covered chain link fence • Storage bunker to be accessible from outdoor kindergarten play area. One (1)

bunker per four (4) kindergarten rooms when interconnected. • Provide double gate for exterior play area if design permits for snow removal.

Sized to be confirmed with Project Manager

KIN

DER

GA

RTE

NC

LASS

RO

OM

1K

IND

ERG

AR

TEN

CLA

SSR

OO

M 2

DF-2

DF-1

VES

TIB

ULE

C1 K1

K9

K10

U1

U1

TYP.

U1

U1

K1K2 K10 K10

B11

B11

B2

CR

CR

CR

SD

TD

SD

TD

MC

PM2

CR

CR

MC

PM2

CLO

AK

RO

OM

B/F

W/R

W/R

CO

RRID

OR

Cla

ssro

om Z

one

- 94

squa

re m

eter

s (10

00 sq

uare

feet

)A

ncill

ary

Spac

es -

46 sq

aure

met

ers

(500

squa

re fe

et)

S-11

S-11

WC-1

WC-1

TO O

UTD

OO

R PL

AYG

ROU

ND

GB

K10

K5 K5 K5C

R

C1 K1

K9

K10

U1

U1

TYP.

U1

U1

K1K2 K10 K10

B11

B11

B2

K10

MTM

WB

TBWB

WB

CLO

AK

RO

OM

S-10

S-10

K4 K4 K4

K5 K5 K5

K4 K4 K4

CLAS

Cla

ssro

om Z

one

- 94

squa

re m

eter

s (10

00 sq

uare

feet

)

Anc

illar

y Sp

aces

LOW

WA

LLLO

W W

ALL

CM

CM

TBWB

TB

TB TB

TB

WB

WB

HD

HD

PTD

PTD

Low

Wal

l (16

00m

m m

ax.)

DWG. NO.


SCALE: NTS DATE: DEC. 2013

Sample Diagram:

B.1.5.11.a

2.0KINDERGARTEN CLASSROOM(Sample shows grouped configuration)



Kindergarten Washroom Area Range: 3.5 square meters (38 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Kindergarten Classroom Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [M] Mirror • [TD] Toilet tissue holder (one (1) per stall) • [HD] Hand Dryer • [SD] Soap Dispenser Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Half wall ceramic and gloss alkyd paint • Porcelain tile flooring complete with rubber base • Water resistant gypsum board ceiling Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-4] One (1) - sink and faucet • [WC-1] One (1) - water closet • [FD] Floor drain • Floor slab to slope to floor drain HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) single pole light switch to control light fixture and exhaust • Min. one (1) GFI duplex receptacle, tamper proof • Power for hand dryer



Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixture - one (1) type 'B' (or D if recess not possible) Design Issues: • If design permits, share kindergarten washrooms with other kindergarten

classrooms. • If one (1) Kindergarten Washroom is provided, it is to be barrier free. If two

(2) Kindergarten Washrooms are paired together, provide one (1) barrier free and one (1) standard Kindergarten Washroom.



Kindergarten Barrier Free Washroom Area Range: 5 square meters (54 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Kindergarten Classroom Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TM] Tilted mirror • [SD] Soap dispenser • [TD] Toilet tissue holder • [GB] Grab bars • [GBL] Grab bar “L” shape • [HD] Hand dryer Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Porcelain tile flooring completed with rubber base • Half wall ceramic and gloss alkyd paint • Water resistant gypsum board ceiling Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-4] One (1) - barrier free sink and faucet • [WC-2] One (1) – barrier free water closet • [FD] Floor drain • Floor slab to slope to floor drain HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) single pole switch to control light fixture and exhaust • Min. one (1) GFI duplex receptacle, tamper proof



Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixture - type 'B' (or D if recess not possible) Design Issues: • Barrier free, consultant to reference latest edition of Ontario Building Code

and Disabilities Act. • Located within Kindergarten Classroom • If design permits, share kindergarten washrooms with other kindergarten

classrooms. • If one (1) Kindergarten Washroom is provided, it is to be barrier free. If two

(2) Kindergarten Washrooms are paired together, provide one (1) barrier free and one (1) standard Kindergarten Washroom.



Kindergarten Exterior Bunker Area Range: minimum 10 square meters (110 square feet) Associated Areas: Associated with the following areas: • Kindergarten play area Millwork: N/A Fitments: N/A Finishes: N/A Plumbing: N/A HVAC: N/A Electrical Power & Devices: N/A Electrical Lighting: N/A Design Issues: • Accessible from within the Kindergarten Play Area. • Precast concrete structure on concrete slab. • If design permits, share one bunker per four Kindergarten Classrooms.



Kindergarten Vestibule Area Range: 8 square meters (86 square feet) Note: Refer to ‘Kindergarten Classroom’ for overall Kindergarten suite size Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Kindergarten Cloakroom Millwork: N/A Fitments: N/A Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Gloss alkyd paint • Porcelain tile flooring with rubber base • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A HVAC: Dedicated heat source Electrical Power & Devices: Ref. Elect. C.11 • Pull station covers required in this room • No light switch - connect fixture to Kindergarten Classroom • Provide bell to exterior Vestibule door complete with one (1) chime in each

room within suite Ref. Elect. C.19 • Provide door contact connecting to buzzer in Kindergarten Classroom Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'B'



Design Issues: • If design permits, group two (2) or more Kindergarten Classrooms to facilitate

sharing of Kindergarten and access to exterior play area.



Resource Room Area Range: 38-60 square meters (410-646 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Classrooms (if applicable) Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for student and teacher use: • One (1) – B9 – Lower Cabinet (if design permits) – Junior Schools only • One (1) – C1 – Teacher’s Cabinet • One (1) – C2 – Open Shelving (if design permits) – Middle Schools only • One (1) – M2 – MCP Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TB] One (1) - Tackboard 1200 x 2400 • [WB/TB] One (1) – Whiteboard with Tackboard above 1200 x 4800 Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 • Min. three (3) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) data outlet Ref. Elect. C.17



Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'V' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Lighting to be switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elect. C.11 Design Issues: • Access from Corridor. • Visual relationship must be maintained from resource room to the Corridor. • One (1) Resource Room required for school.



Seminar Room Area Range: 12-37 square meters (130-398 square feet) Associated Rooms: N/A Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for student and teacher use: • One (1) – B9 – Lower Cabinet (if design permits) – Junior Schools only • One (1) – C1 – Teacher’s Cabinet • One (1) – C2 – Open Shelving (if design permits) – Middle Schools only • One (1) – M2 – MCP Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [WB] One (1) - Whiteboard 1200 x 2400 • [TB] One (1) - Tackboard 1200 x 2400 Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 • Min. two (2) data outlets Ref. Elect. C.17 • Min. four (4) duplex receptacle, one (1) on each wall Ref. Elect. C.11 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures type 'A' Ref. Elect. C.27



Design Issues: • Access to Corridor • Up to Two (2) Seminar Rooms required on each floor of school. (If design

allows)



Teacher’s Workroom Area Range: 20 square meters (215 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Administration Work Room Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for teacher use: • Four (4) - B1 Lower Cabinet • Four (4) - U1 Upper Cabinet • One (1) – M2 – MCP Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [WB] One (1) - Whiteboard 1200 x 2400 • [TB] One (1) –Tackboard 1200 x 2400 Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 • Min. four (4) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) data outlet (photocopier) Ref. Elect. C.17 • One (1) data outlet (computer) Ref. Elect. C.17 • One (1) receptacle on a dedicated circuit for laminator



Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Lighting to be switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elect. C.11 Design Issues: • Access to Corridor • One (1) room on second floor. The first floor work room is included in the

general office area.



Science and Technology Application Centre (S.T.A.C.) Area Range: 130 square meters (1400 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • S.M.T. Prep Room Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for student and teacher use: • Four (4) – B1 – Lower Cabinet • Two (2) – B2 – Lower Cabinet • Four (4) – U1 – Upper Cabinet • Two (2) – U2 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – B7 Barrier-Free Sink and Cabinet • One (1) – C1 – Teacher’s Closet • Four (4) – C2 – Tall Open Shelving • One (1) – C3 – Storage Cabinet • One (1) – M2 – MCP Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [SCB] One (1) –Sliding Chalkboard 1200 x 3600 • [HD] Hand Dryer • [FB] Fire Blanket • [FE] Fire Extinguisher Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-5] One (1) – Barrier Free Washroom • [S-15] One (1) - floor mounted sink and wall mounted faucet with hot

and cold water • [S-10] One (1) - sink and faucet • [S-16] One (1) – Barrier Free Counter mount sink and faucet



• [EW-2] Hand held eye wash fountain (wall mounted) • Sawdust Collector Exhaust System water spray fire suppression • Water shut-off valve HVAC: • Sawdust collector exhaust system Ref. Mech. C.8 Electrical Power & Devices: • GFI Receptacle for all devices Ref. Elec. C.11 • Standard MCP Panel Ref. Elec C.28 • Minimum five receptacles, wall mounted (two above counter are required)

on separate circuit other than from Shop Panel • PA Speaker • Fire Alarm Strobe/Horn • Fire Alarm interconnection to dust collector spark detection system in dust

collector control panel • Minimum one ceiling mounted duplex receptacle for projector plate • One On/Off Keyswitch/Pilot Light and red dome light (Type 'C') Ref. Elec. C.11

interconnected to illuminate when dust collector is running. Keyswitch is to control contactor

• Minimum three emergency stop pushbutton stations interconnected to Ref. Elec. C.11.6 Shop Panel and contactors to shut off all Shop Equipment

• Combination Exit/Emergency Light located at door immediately leading to Corridor Ref. Elec. C.11.6

• Two 3-pole light switches • Minimum twelve duplex receptacles (10 mounted above counter and two

in compartment wiremold) Ref. Elec. C.11.6 • Minimum three ceiling receptacles for cord reels Ref. Elec. C.11.6 • Min. ten (10) data outlets mounted above counter and two in compartment

wiremold Ref. Elect. C.17 • One panelboard contactor/emergency pushbutton to control shop

equipment circuits through keyswitch in S.M.T. and S.T.A.C. Classrooms Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent Fixtures Types 'M' & 'M1' Ref. Elec. C.27 • Dome Light (Type 'C') Ref. Elec C.27 • Lighting switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elec C.11



Design Issues: • Visual connection between S.M.T. Prep Room and S.T.A.C. • Consultant to review fire rating. • Fire blanket and fire extinguisher to be located near entrance • Coordinate ducting for extraction system with windows and equipment. • Lightweight suspended ceiling plate for projector mount complete with all

mounting equipment.

SCB

C1U2U1U1B2B1B1

PTD

S-10

U2 U1 U1B7 B1 B1

PTD

S-16

MC

PM2

S-15

HD

SHO

P EQ

UIP

MEN

T A

REA

WIT

H S

AW

DU

ST E

XTR

AC

TIO

N T

O E

LEC

TRIC

FO

R M

AC

HIN

ES

S.T.

A.C

RO

OM

DU

STC

OLL

ECTO

RO

UTS

IDE

Wor

k C

ount

er w

ith W

irem

old

Abo

ve3

Eye

Was

h4

Met

al A

cous

tical

Wal

l Pan

els A

roun

dR

oom

Per

imet

er F

or S

ound

Bar

rier

2

1

1

1

Loca

tion

to b

e co

ordi

nate

d w

ith P

DSB

(bas

ed o

n pr

ojec

tor &

prim

ary

teac

hing

wal

l)

1

S.M

.T.

CLA

SSR

OO

MB

1.5.2.a

CO

RRID

OR

4

EW-2

PRIM

AR

YTE

AC

HIN

G W

ALL

3

FB

c2

1

S.M

.T. P

REP

RO

OM

S-5W

BTB

HD

SD

SD (NIC

)FE

C2

1

3000

- m

in 6

00 k

nee

spac

e pe

r stu

dent C3

C2

C2C2

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY APPLICATIONCENTRE with S.M.T. PREP ROOM

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.5.19.a

1.4



Hybrid Prep. Room Area Range: 28 square meters (300 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • S.M.T. Classroom Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for teacher use: • Four (4) – B1 – Lower Cabinet • Four (4) – U1 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – M2 – MCP • Work Counter. Length to be determined by room configuration Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [HD] Hand Dryer • [SD] Soap dispenser Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [EW-2] Hand held eye wash • [S-15] One (1) - floor mounted sink and wall mounted faucet with hot

and cold water • Water shut-off valve HVAC: • N/A



Electrical Power & Devices: • Fire Alarm Strobe/Horn • Ceiling Mounted PA Speaker • Standard MCP Panel Ref. Elec C.28 • Two 3-pole light switches • Minimum twelve duplex receptacles (10 mounted above counter and two

in compartment wiremold) Ref. Elec. C.11.6 • Ten data outlets mounted above counter and two in compartment

wiremold • One panelboard contactor/emergency pushbutton to control shop

equipment circuits through keyswitch in S.M.T. and S.T.A.C. Classrooms Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent Fixtures Type 'A' Ref. Elec. C.27 Design Issues: • Visual connection between S.M.T. Prep Room and S.M.T. Classroom • Access from adjacent S.M.T. Classroom • If design permits, shall be designed with non-load bearing intermediate walls


S-15

HDSD (NIC)

U1B1

HYBRIDPREP

ROOM

OUTSIDE

S.M.T.CLASSROOM

B1.5.2.a

U1B1

U1B1

U1B1

CORRIDOR

33

MCPM2

S.M.T. PREPROOM S-15

HD

SDTB

WB



21

Work Counter with Wiremold Above3

4

EW-2

Eye Wash4

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:S.M.T. PREP ROOMWITH HYBRID PREP ROOM

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.5.20.a

1.4

WM

Tack

boar

d,C

halk

boar

d an

d/or

Whi

tebo

ard

300

1220 930

900

200

MIN

.MC

P

2200

M2

B8.1.a

Ref

er to

dw

g. M

2

MIN

.

840

1000

1000

SND

TDD

TMM

Hai

r Dry

er

Han

d D

ryer

1200

1700

Fini

shed

Flo

or

1200

NO

TE:

Whe

re a

pplic

able

, the

dim

ensi

on is

to th

e O

pera

tor.

If d

imen

sion

s con

flict

with

Bar

rier-

Free

requ

irem

ents

and/

or th

e O

ntar

io B

uild

ing

Cod

e, re

view

with

PD

SB.

Loca

te S

oap

Dis

pens

er a

t rig

ht si

deat

a h

eigh

t to

clea

r top

of l

avat

ory.

MiddleSchool

Tack

boar

d,C

halk

boar

d an

d/or

Whi

tebo

ard

1220 800

JuniorSchool

WM

770

SD (NIC

)SD (N

IC)

Han

d D

ryer

s to

be m

ount

ed a

s per

man

ufac

. rec

omm

enda

tions

.

483

700

Hai

r Dry

erD

rinki

ng F

ount

ains

600 inKindergarten

B/F

152

KD

152

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:FITMENT AND FIXTUREMOUNTING HEIGHTS

NTS FEB 2013 B.1.5.a

1.6



Academic Storage Room Area Range: 25 square meters (270 square feet) Associated Rooms: N/A Millwork: N/A Fitments: N/A Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • Exposed structure ceiling Plumbing: N/A HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) single pole light switch • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle (adjacent to door) Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'L' Design Issues: • If design permits, should accommodate three walls of shelving units (NIC),

one side to accommodate 305mm shelf depth, other side to accommodate 610mm shelf depth

• Maximum wall space desired • No ceiling to be provided in this room • Consultants to review the requirements for fire rating due to storage materials

contained within room


Version 2.3 Issued: March 03, 2017 Section: B.1.7.1 Page 1 of 2

Alternative Learning Environment (A.L.E.)

Area Range: 8 square meters (80 square feet)

Associated Rooms:

Accessible from only Special Education Classroom

Millwork: N/A

Fitments: N/A

Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9

Latex paint

VCT flooring

Rubber base is NOT to be installed – No base board at all

Gypsum board ceiling

Plumbing: N/A

HVAC:

Heat can only to be provided from ceiling. No radiators are permitted

Ductwork is NOT to be shared with Classroom and is sound insulated

Thermostat to be located outside A.L.E. Room (sensor located inside room)

above 2135mm or in return duct

Radiant panels within ceiling to be provided and not wall fin

Electrical Power & Devices:

Provide only one (1) duplex receptacle mounted at 2135mm AFF Ref. Elect. C.11

Audio jack from Special Education Room to speaker jack within room

mounted at 2200mm AFF Ref. Elect. C.22

One (1) single pole dimmer switch (located outside room) on classroom side Ref. Elect. C.11

One (1) PA speaker ceiling mounted Ref. Elect. C.15

One (1) Strobe/horn fire alarm mounted at 2200mm AFF C/W wireguard

Sprinkler head to be recessed


Version 2.3 Issued: March 03, 2017 Section: B.1.7.1 Page 2 of 2

Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27

Dimmable Incandescent recessed pot lights - type 'T' complete with shatter

proof lenses

Design Issues:

Walls to extend to underside of structure to assist with sound attenuation

Accessible from Special Education Room.

No window in room

Visual relationship to adjacent Special Education Room via door glazing only

complete with tempered glass upper/lower lites (Georgian wire not to be

used). Door to open out into the Special Education Room.

Walls to be designed to be free of any surface irregularities, exposed

Mechanical / Electrical devices and fasteners for the safety of the occupant.

Not accessible through Corridor

Door to swing into Special Education Room

Door latchset/ lockset for this room is to be ONLY: Corbin Russwin CL3390-

626 (NOT lockable)

Light switch located outside of room

Provide solid core metal door complete with mortar filled head and jamb,

weather stripping and four (4) heavy duty hinges

All materials and methods of construction to be vandal proof

Weather strip around door to contain sound

ALTERNATIVELEARNING

ENVIRONMENT

SPECIALEDUCATIONCLASSROOM

B1.5.1.a

1

No window1

Access to A.L.E. fromadjacent classroom (Nodirect access to Corridor)

2

CORRIDOR

OUTSIDE

2

Classroom Side

Min

. 600

Door to open out into theSpecial Ed Room3

3

S

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:ALTERNATIVE LEARNING ENVIRONMENT

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.7.1.a

1.4



Orthopedic Washroom Area Range: 14-18 square meters (150-200max square feet) Associated Rooms: Preferred location is in proximity of the following areas: • General Office • Special Education Classroom • Elevator Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 Orthopedic Washroom Fitments:

• [TM] Tilted mirror • [HD] Hand dryer • [TD] Toilet tissue holder • [GBF] Folding grab bars • [GB] Grab bars • [CS] Convenience shelf • [MC] Medicine cabinet • [SNDisp] Sanitary napkin & tampon dispenser • [SND] Sanitary napkin & tampon disposal • [PCT] Privacy curtain track & curtain • [PTD] Paper Towel Dispenser • Toilet partition (if applicable) • Electrical adjustable change table (NIC)

Shower Fitments: • [GBS] Shower grab bars • [SR+C] Shower rod & curtain • [FSS] Folding shower seat • [SSD] Shower soap dish

Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Porcelain tile flooring complete with base • Ceramic wall tile 1200mm above finished floor throughout entire washroom,

full height wall tile within shower • Gloss alkyd paint • Water resistant gypsum board ceiling in shower only • LAP ceiling in the washroom to allow for future transfer track



Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-1] One (1) - sink and faucet • [S-4] One (1) - barrier free sink and faucet • [WC-2] One (1) – barrier free water closet • [SHWR-1]One (1) - Barrier free shower • [FD] Floor and shower drains • Floor slab to slope to floor drain • Provision for washer and dryer (NIC) and hot and cold water HVAC: • Provisions for washer and dryer • Dedicated heating at shower drying area Electrical Power & Devices: • Min. one (1) single pole light switch (as required) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Electric manual starter complete with pilot light for exhaust fan Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) connection for hand-dryer Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) receptacle for dryer Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) duplex receptacle for washer Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) t-slot service receptacle on a dedicated circuit Ref. Elect. C.11 • Provide cord with notification to the office Ref. Elect. C.15 • Waterproof Shower light • PA handset Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • Fluorescent shower fixture - type 'R'

Design Issues: • Barrier free shower, consultant to reference latest edition of Ontario Building

Code and Disabilities Act. • Provisions for washer and dryer • Ceiling layout shall be designed to accommodate provision for future ceiling

mounted mobility track to carry user from the water closet to powered change table and shower. Consultant to coordinate ceiling design with Structural, Mechanical and Electrical consultants. (Items to consider: curtain tracks, lights, diffusers, etc.)

• Provide privacy to toilet and change table. (Curtains on ceiling tracks are an acceptable method.)

• Refer to Door Elevations for door size Ref. Arch. B.8.1.a

FD

SR+C

FSSFD

GBFGB

TM

GBF750

MIN

.

USE

AB

LEA

TTEN

DA

NT

SPA

CE

750

MIN

.

USE

AB

LEA

TTEN

DA

NT

SPA

CE

CORRIDOR

3

Provide privacy curtain

3

3

SSD

GBS

TD

PTD

SND

SND

isp.

1

S-4

WC-2

SHWR-1 Adjustable changetable (NIC)

S-1

Provide ceiling trackto swing open

2

2

2

2185 MIN. CLEARANCE

Provide cord withnotification to the office1

DRYER(NIC)

WASHER(NIC)

SD(NIC)

CS

4Provide for futureceiling tacking transfercoordinate interferencewith structure and LAPceiling. Bord to reviewlcoation of ceiling track.

MC4

5 Provide PA handsetdirect to office

5

HD

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:ORTHOPEDIC WASHROOM

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.7.2.a

1.4



General Purpose Room (Junior Schools) Area Range: 585 square meters (6350 square feet) not including stage Associated Rooms: Associated with the following suite of rooms: • Stage • Change Rooms • Gym Storage • Instructor’s Room • Under Stage Storage Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [CB] Two (2) – White boards 1200 x 1200, recessed • [FS] Sixteen (16) - Floor sockets • Four (4) - Adjustable basketball backstops (installed on side walls, Junior

Schools) • Four (4) – Adjustable height basketball backstops (installed on side walls,

Middle Schools) • Two (2) - Swing up basketball back stops – electrically operated • Gymnasium Divider Curtain – electrically operated • Acoustical wall panels Ref. Arch. C.9 Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring • Games lines (inlaid) • Latex paint Plumbing: N/A HVAC: • HVAC ductwork and services can be exposed. • Ceiling fans including protection cage. (Provide speed control at gym level)



Electrical Power & Devices: • Stage sound system control panel at back wall of Gymnasium. • Provision for one (1) separate sound system control panel (portable) to be

located on side wall of gymnasium Ref. Elect. C.22 • Coordinate electrical power requirements to barrier free lift. Ref. Elect. C.11 • Three-way switches to control lighting (quantity as required) at each entrance

to gymnasuim Ref. Elect. C.11 • Remote dimming control Console on proscenium wall of gym Ref. Elect. C.26 • PA jack selector switch for portable PA system on proscenium wall of gym Ref. Elect. C.22 • Speaker jacks – min. two (2) located at Stage, min. two (2) located at rear wall Ref. Elect. C.22 • Min. twelve (12) duplex receptacles located on all four walls of gymnasium Ref. Elect. C.11 • Two (2) clock hanger receptacles complete with clocks and wireguards in

gymnasium Ref. Elect. C.19 • Min. one (1) projector jack at rear room mounted at 900mm AFF with duplex

and data receptacle adjacent Ref. Elect. C.2,C17 • Duplex receptacles ceiling mounted for destratification fans (quantity as

required) c/w speed control switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Destratification fans speed control switch (one (1) per bay) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Hearing Assistive listening system (FM systems only. No floor loops

permitted) • Motorized projector screen controls located on proscenium side wall Ref. Elect. C.21 • Motorized folding curtain motor and controls Ref. Elect. C.11 • Motorized basketball backstop motor and controls Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) PA units complete with call switch on side wall in gymnasium. Ref. Elect. C.15 • PA speakers complete with wireguards (surface mounted as required) Ref. Elect. C.15 • Gymnasium lights on motion detectors • Provide rough in for outside signed/score board Electrical Lighting: • Min. four (4) lights per gymnasium wired to night light circuit Ref. Elect. C.25 • Fluorescent fixtures - types 'G' & 'G1' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Provide approximately 15% of total number of fixtures in gymnasium on

night light circuit and switch from Custodian's Office Ref. Elect. C.25 • Min. two (2) front-of-house spot lights complete with lighting channels

located in gymnasium ceiling Ref. Elect. C.26



Design Issues: • Design assumes a double gymnasium. • All wall mounted Mechanical / Electrical fitments to be recessed. • Designed to have acoustical sound retention system • Ensure no sharp corners or protrusions within masonry

• No exposed conduits, pipes, RWL etc, on wall • If design permits, group storage areas • Two (2) points of operation and recessed crank for manual operation for

Gymnasium Divider Curtain • Provide light guards for Gym Stage lighting Ref. Arch. C.10 • Line layouts to be modified to suit gymnasium, refer to drawing B.1.8.1.b for

inlaid line layout and areas to be modified to suit gymnasium layout. Ref. Arch. B.1.8.1.b • Must provide occupancy signs for gym and library as per code. • Provide occupancy signage Ref. Arch. B.1.15.3.e • Refer to Door Elevations for door size Ref. Arch. B.8.1.a

INSTRUCTOR'SROOM

GYMSTORAGE

GYM

STAGE/ LUNCH

BOY'SCHANGE

ROOM

GIRL'SCHANGE

ROOM

CORRIDOR

CO

RRID

OR

CO

RRID

OR

CORRIDOR

B1.9.1.a

B1.8.1.b

GameLines

B1.8.2.a

B1.8.2.a

B1.8.3.a

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:JUNIOR AND MIDDLE SCHOOLS GENERAL PURPOSE AREA (GYM)SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.8.1.a

1.4

GA

MES

LIN

ES L

EGEN

DB

aske

tbal

l cou

rtR

ed 2

00m

m w

line

s

Red

50m

m w

line

s

Vol

leyb

all c

ourt

Gre

en 5

0mm

w li

nes

Bad

min

ton

cour

tB

lack

25m

m li

nes

4850

4850

450

F.S.

800550

2500 2565

F.S.

260

260 4502565 2500 550

4850

4850

68002400

F.S.

6325

200m

m L

INE

4800

F.S.

1300 4025

9150

12900

3550

2300

1000

1000

F.S.

F.S.

F.S.

F.S.

F.S.

Floo

r soc

ket t

yp.

R177550

Cei

ling

hung

swin

g up

bask

etba

ll ba

ckst

op12204555

R177

550

R600

50400

300

1002150

300900

50900

50

900

50260

50

1800

50R

1775

1450

300

900 50

90050

90050

425

1800

50

Min

.M

in.

SEE

NO

TE 1

SEE NOTE 1

760

3920

4050

Dim

ensi

on to

be

mod

ified

to su

it Ju

nior

Scho

ol a

rea

and

layo

ut.

1

This

layo

ut is

onl

y ha

lf of

the

gym

floo

r.M

irror

all

lines

alo

ng c

ente

r lin

e fo

r ful

lin

laid

line

s lay

out.

.

2

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:LINE LAYOUT

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.8.1.b

1.4



Gym Change Rooms Area Range: 32 square meters (345 square feet) per change room Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • General Purpose Room • Instructor’s Room Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork: • M5 Bench and shelf (minimum 15m linear length) Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TM] Two (2) per change room – Tilted mirror • [CH] Thirty min. (30) per change room – Coat hook Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • Gypsum board ceiling Plumbing: N/A HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Light control is from key switches in Corridor Ref. Elect. C.7 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle near entrance to Gym Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) PA Speakers complete with wire guards Ref. Elect. C.15 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'G1' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Provide min. two (2) fixtures un-switched on night light circuit Ref. Elect. C.25



Design Issues: • Accessible from both General Purpose Room and Corridor – Lockable doors • Visual barrier must be maintained from door ways into change rooms. • If design permits, group Change rooms.

B+S

B+S

B+S

TM

CHANGE ROOM

GENERALPURPOSE

AREA

CO

RRID

OR

CH TYP.

Minimum 15m linear length of bench1

1

Provide Classroom function lockset - lockable from Corridorside, Ref. Arch C.8

2

2

2

Coat hooks - 30 minimum per Change Room3

3

TM

M5

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:BOYS & GIRLS CHANGE ROOMSJUNIOR AND MIDDLE SCHOOLS

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.8.2.a

1.4



Gym Instructor’s Room (Junior and Middle Schools) Area Range: 7.5 square meters (80 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • General Purpose Room • Change rooms Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork: • One (1) – C1 – Teacher’s Cabinet • One (1) – M2 – MCP Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TB] One (1) - Tackboard 1200 x 1200 • [M] Mirror • [HD] Hand dryer • Three (3) per room – Double tier lockers (Middle Schools only) Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-8] One (1) - sink and faucet with hot and cold water HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Min. one (1) single pole light switch (as required) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 • Min. two (2) duplex outlets Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) data outlet Ref. Elect. C.17



Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixture - type 'A' Design Issues: • Visual connection with Gymnasium through small screen complete with

shatter proof glazing (temperate or GWG) • Allow a space for 5ft desk • If Instructors room on outside wall then provide operable window opening to

exterior

HDM

MCPM2

TB

C1S-8

Base underlockers (typ.)

INSTRUCTOR'SROOM

GENERAL PURPOSEROOM

3 D

oubl

e Lo

cker

s(M

.S. o

nly)

SD(NIC)

EXTERIOR

1

If room is on outside wall then provideoperable window opening to exterior1

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:GYM INSTRUCTOR'S ROOMJUNIOR AND MIDDLE SCHOOLS

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.8.3.a

1.4



Gym Storage Room Area Range: 30 square meters (323 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • General Purpose Room Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork: • M4 Storage Rack (minimum 13,000 mm linear length) Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • Twenty four (24) - Steel “J” hooks, 320 x 305 x 38 mm • Twenty four (24) - Steel “J” hooks, 150 x 150 x 28 mm • Provide storage area for games poles Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Sealed concrete flooring • Latex paint • Exposed structure ceiling Plumbing: N/A

HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) single pole light switch • Min. four (4) duplex receptacles Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'G1'



Design Issues: • Accessible from General Purpose Room. • If design permits, accessible from Corridor • May be grouped with Stage Storage • Floor sockets for vertical storage of volleyball poles • Double doors to Gymnasiums



Gym Stage (Junior and Middle Schools) Area Range: 70 square meters (753 square feet): Junior School 93 square meters (1000 square feet): Middle School Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • General Purpose Room • Stage Storage • Drapes storage • Under Stage Chair Storage Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for teacher use: • Two (2) – B1 - Lower Cabinet • One (1) - B2 - Lower Cabinet • Two (2) – U1 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – U2 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – C1 – Teacher’s Cabinet • One (1) – M2 – MCP Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TB] One (1) - Tackboard 1200 x 3600 • Folding Partition at stage proscenium including blackboard to inside panels • Stage rigging, including lighting pipe grid • Projection screen – Electronically Operated • Barrier free lift (must be located adjacent to stage for barrier free access) Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • Exposed structure Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-10] One (1) - sink and faucet • Plumbing services can be exposed – painted out black at ceiling.



HVAC: • HVAC ductwork and services can be exposed – painted out black at ceiling. Electrical Power & Devices: • All Electrical conduit and wiring to be concealed except at ceiling. All conduit

to be painted out black at ceiling. • Sound system control panel at Stage Storage and at back wall of Gymnasium. Ref. Elect. C.22 • Coordinate electrical power requirements to barrier free lift. • Min. one (1) three-way light switch (as required) located at stage entrances Ref. Elect. C.11 • Standard MCP devices located on stage Ref. Elect. C.28 • Min. one (1) PA speaker located on stage Ref. Elect. C.15 • Data, Power VGA and mic to be located 150mm from opening • Min. one (1) data jack located on low proscenium wall Ref. Elect. C.17 • Min. one (1) projector jack on low proscenium wall- General Purpose side Ref. Elect. C.22 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacles on low proscenium wall - General Purpose side Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) projector jack on low proscenium wall Ref. Elect. C.22 • Min. two (2) duplex receptacles on low proscenium wall Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) stage lighting channels complete with wire and stage fixtures

located above stage Ref. Elect. C.26 • Key switch for Stage Curtain Control located on stage side wall Ref. Elect. C.11 • Motorized projector screen located above stage complete with key switch

controls located on side proscenium wall Ref. Elect. C.11 • House Lights - dimming control panel located on stage Ref. Elect. C.26 Electrical Lighting: • Stage dimming panels to accommodate up to twenty four (24) stage light

fixtures (Middle Schools) and twelve (12) stage light fixtures (Junior Schools). Ref. Elect. C.26

• Fluorescent fixtures - types 'K' and 'K1' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Three (3) fixtures on night light circuits switched from Custodian's Office Ref. Elect. C.25 Design Issues: • Elevated to 900mm above finished floor • Drape storage on stage • If design permits, group with Stage Storage • Coordinate structural system for gym stage • Proscenium must face General Purpose Room • Provide barrier free accessibility • Provide power to NIC fridge, close to millwork or inside storage. • Provide visual contrasting strip at edge of the stage for visual impaired • Provide structural engineer inspection review of the hanging detail of the

projection screen

TB

MCP

CORRIDOR

GENERAL PURPOSE ROOM

UP

DRAPESSTORAGE

LIFT

CO

RR

IDO

R

UP

STAGESTORAGE

STAGE

Foldingpartition

Curtain and drapes above

Outline of chairstorage below

B1.9.2.a

B2

B1

B1

C1

U2

U1

U1

Projection screen above,Ref. Arch. C.10

NOTE:REFER TO DWG. B.1.9.1.b FOR

SAMPLE STAGE PIPE GRIDREFER TO DWG. B.1.9.1.c FOR

SAMPLE STAGE PIPE GRID & CURTAIN VALENCE LAYOUT

M

M2

S-10

Located 150mm from opening1

1

HD

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:GYM STAGE LAYOUTJUNIOR AND MIDDLE SCHOOLS

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.9.1.a

1.4

GYM

CO

RRID

OR

CENTERSTAGE

Line of top and bottomcross-bracing on OWSJ as required

Electric pipe grid

C.L. of Gym

Ensure no interference betweenfront of hose stage pipe grid andbasketball backstop

1st L

eg

2nd Leg

3rd Leg

1800 MIN.

1800 MIN.

1800

MIN

.

NOTE:Modify Guide Specification to suit stage dimensions.Refer to Arch. C10

1st L

eg

2nd L

eg

3rd L

eg

1800

MIN

.

1800

MIN

.

1800

MIN

.

CurtainValance

Projection screen aboveRef. Arch. C.10

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:STAGE PIPE GRIDPLAN VIEW

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.9.1.b

1.4

Ope

rabl

epa

rtitio

n

Stag

e flo

or

Gym

floo

r

Ligh

ting

pipe

as

requ

ired

Ligh

ting

pipe

as re

quire

dB

ulkh

ead

Und

ersi

de o

f roo

fst

ruct

ure

Des

ign

rem

ovab

lepr

otec

tion

as re

quire

d

Mod

ify to

suit

stag

e di

men

sion

s

Cur

tain

Val

ance

Proj

ectio

n sc

reen

abo

veRe

f. Ar

ch. C

.10

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:STAGE PIPE GRID AND CURTAIN VALENCE LAYOUT

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.9.1.c

1.4



Under Stage Chair Storage Area Range: Varies Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Stage • General Purpose Room • Gym Storage Room Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 • Stage apron / access panels Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • Fourteen (14) - Steel rolling carts (if applicable) Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Latex paint Plumbing: N/A HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Smoke detector Electrical Lighting: N/A Design Issues: • If design permits, include rolling chair dolly carts storage beneath Stage. Ref. Arch. B. 1.9.2.a

VA

RIE

S

DOLLY UNIT FOR EACHBAY (TYPICAL)

CHAIR DOLLY(TYPICAL)

B1.9.2.b

QU

AN

TITY

OF

CA

RTS

TO

SUIT

E ST

AG

ED

IMEN

SIO

N

SPA

CIN

G T

OA

CC

OM

OD

ATE

CA

RT

SIZE

90x90x6mm

DOLLY STOPANCHORED IN POSITIONAT BACK OF DOLLY TOALIGN DOORS ATFRONT OF DOLLYCOMPARTMENT

CONTINOUS ANGLE GUIDES.FLAIR GUIDES AT FRONT TOALLOW EASY ENTRY OF T's

75x75x6mm L-FRAMEw/ PAINT FINISH

90x90x6mm CONTINOUS ANGLE GUIDES. SECURED TO SLAB

CONTINOUS 6X125mmSTEEL 'T' BOLTED TO

u/s OF PLYWOOD FLOOR

RETARDANTPLYWOOD-FIRE19mm FIR

TREATED

PROVIDE FILLER PLATE AS REQUIRED

FRONT DETAILDOLLY & CENTRE GUIDE

125mm dia.CASTERS

PLAN VIEWUNDER STAGE CHAIR STORAGE

150x150x6mmSTEEL PLATE (6x)

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:UNDER STAGE CHAIR STORAGE

NTS JAN. 2014 B.1.9.2.a

2.0

75x75x6mm L-FRAME

CONTINOUS 6x125mm STEEL 'T' BOLTED

75x75x6mm L-FRAME

RETARDANT

CONTINOUS 6X125mm

L 140x75 DOLLY STOP 300mmLONG - ANCHOR IN POSITIONAT BACK OF DOLLY TO ALIGNDOORS AT FRONT OF DOLLYCOMPARTMENT

ELEVATIONDOLLY UNITTYPICAL FOR

EACH BAY

985

3000

TO S

UIT

STA

GE

CO

NST

RC

UTI

ON

TO S

UIT

STA

GE

CO

NST

RC

UTI

ON

PLAN

PLYWOOD-FIRE19mm FIR

TREATED

STEEL 'T' BOLTED TOu/s OF PLYWOOD FLOOR

150x150x6mmSTEEL PLATE(x6)

45°

90x90x6mm CONTINOUS ANGLE GUIDES. SECURED TO SLAB

TO u/s OF PLYWOOD FLOOR

w/ PAINT FINISH

125mm dia.CASTERS

2150 850

STEEL FACE FRAME &BRACES AS REQUIRED

DOLLY STOP WELDED TO u/s OF L-FRAME

75x75x6mm 300mm LONG

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:CHAIR DOLLY

NTS JAN. 2014 B.1.9.2.b

2.0



Stage Storage Area Range: Varies Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Stage Millwork: N/A Fitments: N/A Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • Exposed structure (optional) Plumbing: N/A HVAC: • HVAC ductwork and services can be exposed. Electrical Power & Devices: • Stage sound system control panel and at back wall of Gymnasium. Ref. Elect. C.22 • Min. one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle Ref. Elect. C.11 Electrical Lighting: • Stage dimming panels (located within Stage Storage room) to accommodate

up to twenty four (24) stage light fixtures. Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixture - type 'B' Ref. Elect. C.27 Design Issues: • Located adjacent Stage and at same floor level



Library (Junior and Middle Schools) Area Range: 150 square meters (1615 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Library Workroom • Computer Lab Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for teacher use: • One (1) – M2 – MCP Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • Fire extinguisher • Provision for lay-in specialty tile for a ceiling mounted projector Ref. Elect. C.11 Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Carpet complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A HVAC: • Provide air conditioning (only if interconnected with Computer Lab) Electrical Power & Devices: • Within ceiling grid system electrical conduits and receptacles to be roughed in


• Standard MCP device Ref. Elect. C.28 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle mounted on specialty tile within ceiling Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) duplex receptacles located at circulation desk Ref. Elect. C.11



• Min. two (2) data outlets located at circulation desk Ref. Elect. C.17 • Surface mounted wiremold complete with min. eight (8) duplex receptacles

and min. six (6) data outlets Ref. Elect. C.11, C.17 • Min. one (1) TV outlet complete with adjacent duplex receptacle and data

outlet* Ref. Elect. C.11, C.16, C.17 • Min. one (1) ceiling mounted PA speakers Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. two (2) 25 mm conduits in ceiling space, one (1) to lighting panel and

one (1) to Computer Hub for future use. Ref. Elect. C.11 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures type 'V' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Lighting to be switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elect. C.11 Design Issues: • If design permits, located on main floor level near main entrance. • If design permits, group Library, Library Workroom and Computer Lab as

one suite accessible from Corridor. • No door from the computer lab to corridor or library area. • Library shelving to be mounted to perimeter walls and as free standing units

within space. • Provision for book drop from Corridor to Library • Windows to exterior. • Visual connections between Library, Library Workroom and Computer Lab. • *If TV outlet adjacent wiremold, provision for extra data outlet not required. • Lightweight Suspended Ceiling Plates for Projector mounts complete with all

mounting equipment. • If design permits locate library entrance door as close as possible to the

computer lab entrance. • Maximize wall space to allow for wall mounted shelving (NIC) • Occupancy sign as per building code. • Refer to Door Elevations for door size Ref. Arch. B.8.1.a

COMPUTERLAB

LIBRARY

WORKROOM

COMPUTER STATIONS (NIC)

CO

RRID

OR

OU

TSID

E

BOOKCOLLECTION

AREA

WM

WM

Library shelving mounted to perimeterwalls and as free standing units withinspace

1

1

c

MCP

Room Separation to be half wall onlywith glazing above

2

2

SWB

TB TB

TB

TB

Provide for dedicated year roundair-conditioning system to serveComputer Lab

33

tv

WM

S-10

M2

U1U1U1B1B1B1

M2

C1

1830

MIN

.18

30 M

IN.4

Design for 32 stations to accommodate30 computers and 2 printers. TypicalPDSB size of table, 72"x30" or optional36"x30"

4

1800 MIN.

MCPM2

U2B2

CIRCULATIONDESK (NIC)

Book drop-off5

5

c

MCP

AV OutletData Outlet

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:LIBRARY AND COMPUTER LAB LAYOUT

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.10.1.a

1.4



Computer Lab (Junior and Middle Schools) Area Range: 70 square meters (753 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Computer Lab • Library Workroom Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for teacher use: • One (1) – C1 – Teacher’s Closet • One (1) – M2 - MCP Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TB] Two (2) - Tackboards 1200 x 2400 • [WB] One (1) – Whiteboard 1200 x 2400 • Fire extinguisher • Provision for lay-in specialty tile for a ceiling mounted projector Ref. Elect. C.11 Finishes: • VCT flooring complete with base Ref. Arch. C.9 • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A

HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 • Provide dedicated year round air conditioning. Electrical Power & Devices: • No floor monuments to be used • Within ceiling grid system electrical conduits and receptacles to be roughed in




• One (1) duplex receptacle mounted on specialty tile within ceiling Ref. Elect. C.11 • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 • Surface wiremold and provision for centre island (free standing tables) for

min. thirty (30) duplex receptacles and min. thirty (30) data outlets Ref. Elect. C.11, C.17 • Min. two (2) quad receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle and data outlet Ref. Elect. C.11, C.17 • Min. two (2) empty 53 mm conduit sleeve in ceiling space from Computer

Room to Library/Reference Room and one (1) to Corridor Ref. Elect. C.11 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'V' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Lighting to be switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elect. C.11 Design Issues: • Directly accessed from Library, no access from Corridor. Maintain visual

control between Computer Lab and Library • No full height wall between Computer Lab and Library • No door from computer lab to library • Lightweight Suspended Ceiling Plates for Projector mounts complete with all

mounting equipment.



Library Workroom (Junior and Middle Schools) Area Range: 15 square meters (162 square feet) Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Library • Computer Labs Millwork: Ref. Arch. C.6 Shall be fitted with the following minimum millwork for teacher use: • Three (3) - B1 - Lower Cabinet • One (1) – B2 - Lower Cabinet • Three (3) - U1 - Upper Cabinet • One (1) – U2 – Upper Cabinet • One (1) – M2 – MCP Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • [TB] Two (2) - Tackboards 1200 x 2400 • Fire extinguisher Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [S-10] One (1) - sink and faucet HVAC: • Provide air conditioning (only if Library is air conditioned)



Electrical Power & Devices: • Standard MCP devices Ref. Elect. C.28 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle and data outlet Ref. Elect. C.11, C.17 • Min. one (1) GFI receptacle at counter sink Ref. Elect. C.11 Electrical Lighting: • Wired separately from Library Ref. Elect. C.11 • Fluorescent fixtures type 'V' Ref. Elect. C.27 • Lighting to be switched to allow for alternate rows to be controlled separately Ref. Elect. C.11 Design Issues: • Library Workroom to be directly accessed from Library. • Visual control of the adjacent Library and entrance.



Mechanical Room • Area Range: Varies Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Electrical room • Exterior roof (if applicable) • Sprinkler room Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • Fire extinguisher Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Sealed concrete flooring • Unpainted concrete block • Exposed structure ceiling Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [FD] Floor drain(s) (Quantity of floor drains to be determined by

consultants, dependent on the size of the rooms) • [EW-1] Eye wash station (in Boiler Room adjacent chemical pot feeder) • Floor slab to slope to floor drain HVAC: • HVAC equipment to be coordinated by a consultant and a Mechanical

Engineer within the room or subgroups or rooms. • Coordinate louver installation through wall flashing detail with Mechanical

sub-trade



Electrical Power & Devices: • Consultant to coordinate electrical and mechanical requirements within

Mechanical Room for specified equipment • Min. one (1) single pole light switch or 3 way light switch (as required) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. three (3) duplex receptacles mounted at 1200mm AFF Ref. Elect. C.11 • Connections for mechanical equipment (as required) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) motor control centre(s) (as required) Ref. Elect. C.11 • One (1) EMS panel connection and telephone outlet Ref. Elect. C.11, C.15 • Min. one (1) PA speaker (provision for call switch) Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. one (1) telephone outlet Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. one (1) data outlet Ref. Elect. C.17 Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'L' Design Issues: • Access from Corridor. If suited with Electrical room, ensure proper fire

separation is maintained between the rooms. • Access to rooftop (if applicable) • Flood dam required at entrance door from Corridor • All equipment elevated on a concrete pad. • Adequate floor drains. Size and quantities of floor drains determined during

design • If design permits, group with other Mechanical and Electrical Rooms • Fire extinguisher mounted adjacent to door • All roof hatches to be safe distance away from perimeter of roof (if

applicable) • If designed adjacent classrooms, acoustically treated for sound attenuation • Consultants to review the requirements for fire rating due to storage materials

contained within • Refer to Door Elevations for door size Ref. Arch. B.8.1.a



Sprinkler Room Area Range: Varies Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Mechanical room • Electrical room Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • Fire extinguisher Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Sealed concrete flooring • Unpainted concrete block • Exposed structure ceiling Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [FD] Floor drain • Floor slab to slope to floor drain HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Min. one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) PA speaker Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle Ref. Elect. C.11 • Connection to all mechanical pumps. equipment, supervised valves, pressure

switches, flow switches (as required) Ref. Elect. C.11



Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixture - type 'L' Design Issues: • Access from corridor. If suited with Mechanical room ensure proper fire

separation is maintained between the rooms. • All equipment elevated on a concrete pad. • Fire extinguisher mounted adjacent to door • Consultants to review the requirements for fire rating due to storage materials

contained within



Electrical Room Area Range: Varies Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Mechanical room • Sprinkler room Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • Fire extinguisher Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Sealed concrete flooring • Unpainted concrete block • Exposed structure ceiling Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [FD] Floor drain • Floor slab to slope to floor drain HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Min. one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Main switchboard and distribution panels (as required) Ref. Elect. C.4 • Transformers (as required) Ref. Elect. C.4 • Hydro metering cabinet to suit local electrical utility Ref. Elect. C.4 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle located adjacent metering cabinet Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) telephone outlet (for remote monitoring of meter) Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle on distribution panel wall Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) 2.4 m x 2.4 m x 19 mm thick plywood backboard for incoming

telephone and Cable TV Ref. Elect. C.15, C.16



• Min. two (2) duplex receptacles mounted on telephone backboard Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) telephone outlet mounted on backboard Ref. Elect. C.15 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'L' Ref. Elect. C.27 • One (1) fixture un-switched on night light circuit Ref. Elect. C.25 Design Issues: • Access from Corridor. If suited with Mechanical room, ensure proper fire

separation is maintained between the rooms. • All equipment elevated on a concrete pad. • Fire extinguisher mounted adjacent to door • Consultants to review the requirements for fire rating due to storage materials

contained within • No electrical equipment to be installed on any wall shared with an occupied

space • Refer to Door Elevations for door size Ref. Arch. B.8.1.a



Elevator Machine Room Area Range: Varies Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Elevator • Mechanical room Millwork: N/A Fitments: N/A Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Sealed concrete flooring • Unpainted concrete block • Exposed structure ceiling Plumbing: • Consultant to coordinate mechanical requirements within Elevator Machine

Room for specified equipment as per elevator manufacture’s installation guidelines

HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 • Ventilation equipment to be coordinated by a consultant and a mechanical

engineer within the elevator room or subgroups of rooms, per elevator manufacture’s installation guidelines

Electrical Power & Devices: • Elevator to be fitted with power as required by elevator manufacturer.

Consultant to coordinate with Electrical Engineer. • Consultant to coordinate electrical requirements within Elevator Machine

Room for specified equipment as per elevator manufacture’s installation guidelines

• Consultant to coordinate mechanical requirements within Elevator Machine Room for specified equipment as per elevator manufacture’s installation guidelines



• Min. one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) emergency telephone outlet complete with line seizure relay Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. two (2) 50 mm conduits run between elevator controller in Machine

Room and Elevator (run in ceiling space) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) 3-pole fused disconnect switch (sized to suit) complete with

auxiliary contacts and feeder connected to elevator controller Ref. Elect. C.9 • Min. one (1) fused disconnect switch, wire and circuit for Elevator cab lights Ref. Elect. C.9 Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixture - type 'L' Design Issues: • Access from Corridor • Consultants to review the requirements for fire rating due to storage materials

contained within • Consultants to ensure proper fire separation is maintained. • Coordinate Electrical and Mechanical locations and prepare room with

conduit between Elevator Machine Room and elevator. • Elevator Machine Room located adjacent to elevator to facilitate hydraulic

and electrical lines



I.T.S./ Hub Room Area Range: 50 square meters (538 square feet): Main Room 25 square meters (270 square feet): Secondary Room Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Second floor Hub Room (if applicable) Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • Provision for floor mounted server workstation Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • VCT flooring complete with base • Latex paint PDSB Plumbing: • No plumbing to be exposed within room. If plumbing chasses are required

they shall be chased within the concrete block chase wall HVAC: Ref. Mech. C.8 • Adequately ventilated due to heat produced by the equipment within the room Electrical Power & Devices: • Dedicated circuits to panel for computer room Ref. Elect. C.7 • Min one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) quad receptacles, isolated ground Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. two (2) duplex receptacles Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) 2.4 m x 2.4 m x 19 mm thick plywood backboard • Min. six (6) 50 mm conduit sleeves from First Floor Hub Room to Second

Floor Hub Room (if required) Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. six (6) 50 mm conduit sleeves from Hub Room to First Floor Corridor Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) telephone outlet Ref. Elect. C.16



• Min. one (1) manual electric starter complete with pilot light and inline-line

voltage thermostat for exhaust fan control Ref. Elect. C.11 • PA system wiring junction box Ref. Elect. C.15 Electrical Lighting: • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'L' Ref. Elect. C.27 • No electrical panels Design Issues: • Ground floor and Second floor I.T.S. Hub rooms to be stacked for ease of

wire management between ground and second floor • If design permits, group with Electrical Room • Mechanical and Electrical chasses must be enclosed within a concrete block

chase wall • Area of room will vary depending on classrooms, number of computers and

number of hub rooms placed on floor. • Consultants to review the requirements for fire rating due to storage materials

contained within • To be designed according to current TIA-EIA 568-A-5 Standards



Exterior Storage Room Area Range: Varies Associated Rooms: N/A Millwork: N/A Fitments: N/A Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Sealed concrete flooring • Unpainted concrete block • Exposed structure ceiling Plumbing: N/A HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: • Min one (1) single pole light switch Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) PA speaker Ref. Elect. C.15 • Min. one (1) security door contact at outside door Ref. Elect. C.18 • Min. two (2) manual electric starts complete with pilot lights for exhaust fans Ref. Elect. C.11 Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'D' Design Issues: • Design to accommodate shelving units. • Maximum wall space desired. • If design permits, layout should accommodate three walls of shelving units.

Shelving (NIC) • Exterior Storage Rooms applies only to all school designs.



• If design permits, access from both Corridor and Exterior area of the school • Double doors required • Consultants to review the requirements for fire rating due to storage materials

contained within • Refer to Door Elevations for door size Ref. Arch. B.8.1.a



Garbage Storage Room Area Range: Varies Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Exterior area (if applicable) • Custodial Room Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • Separate garbage and recycling bins (NIC) Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Sealed concrete flooring • Unpainted concrete block • Exposed structure ceiling Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • [FD] Floor drain • Floor slab to slope to floor drain HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: Ref. Elect. C.11 • Min. one (1) single pole light switch • Min. one (1) duplex receptacle • Min. one (1) manual electric starter for exhaust fan Electrical Lighting: Ref. Elect. C.27 • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'L'



Design Issues: • Consultants to review the requirement for rating around this room due to

storage materials contained within it. • Min. one (1) garbage room located on ground floor with access to exterior for

garbage removal • Refer to Door Elevations for door size Ref. Arch. B.8.1.a



Exterior Garbage Enclosure Area Range: • Area: 18 square meters (195 square feet) • Garbage enclosure to fit two (2) 6yd bins Associated Rooms: Associated with the following areas: • Custodial Room • Garbage room Millwork: N/A Fitments: Ref. Arch. C.10 • Enclosure gates complete with screening material • Minimum four (4) steel bollards Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Concrete slab on grade • Unpainted block Plumbing: N/A HVAC: N/A Electrical Power & Devices: N/A Electrical Lighting: N/A Design Issues: • Located along laneways such that there is adequate space for garbage trucks to

safely maneuver around it. • Gates shall be 2000 mm wide and fitted with wheels at bottom



• Enclosure wall height to fully obscure visibility of the garbage bins from the

main thoroughfare. • Wall construction to be masonry block complete with face brick or

architectural block to match school • Minimum four (4) pipe bollards concrete filled, two (2) to be located within

the enclosure and two (2) outside the gates. • Gates must swing out in all instances.

Extent of concrete pad

6000

3500

250

3025

PLAN

Slop

e 35

mm

Pipe bollard (typ.)

2B.1.14.4.bConcrete slab on grade

300

Refuse Bin(NIC)

Pipe bollard

Refuse Bin(NIC)

ELEVATION

1810

150

150Ø pipe bollardconcrete filled paintedproj. 900 above grade1200 below grade (typ.)

Coordinatefoundation withStructural Engineer

Gate Construction:-wood siding-frame bracing reinf. HSS tubes (welded)

Hardware:1- heavy duty padlock hasp4- per gate-extra heavy duty hinges (weld)1- gate roller per (see detail)

3B.1.14.4.b

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:EXTERIOR GARBAGE BIN ENCLOSURE

NTS FEB 2013 B.1.14.4.a

1.5

7525

25

Precast stone capsecurely anchored to wall

SECTION 1

305

150x150 HSS completewith strap anchors. Carrydown & anchor to footing.

DETAIL 2

Double ballbearing swivelwheel

Pressuretreated woodsiding on steelframe

75mm Movement

angle support, top &bottom plate angle

weld to angleMin. 19 dia. stainless

steel rod with stainlesssteel coil spring

DETAIL 3

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:EXTERIOR GARBAGE BIN ENCLOSURE DETAILS

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.14.4.b

1.4


Version 2.0 Issued: Januar 1, 2014 Section: B.1.15.1 Page 1 of 1

Drinking Fountains Area Range: Varies Associated Rooms: N/A Millwork: N/A Fitments: N/A Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Porcelain tile flooring complete with rubber base • Gloss alkyd paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: Ref. Mech. C.4 • Dual drinking fountain stations complete with two (2) mounting heights for

barrier free and regular use. Ref. Arch. 1.15.1.a • Cold water plumbing and drain to drinking fountains HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: N/A Electrical Lighting: N/A Design Issues: • Located within designated rooms and the general circulation space. Refer to

specific room descriptions for rooms which this applies. • Minimum of two (2) locations within each floor plan. • If design permits, close proximity of washroom suites. • Area designed such that it does not protrude into the general circulation space

FRONT ELEVATION

381Backplate

229

483

381

305

(min)

152

700

B/F

KD

SECTION

Upper drinking fountain height set forBarrier Free

Lower drinking fountain is for use by smallchildren

337

635

700

(typ.

)

Req

uire

d fo

r B

arrie

r Fre

e

152

483

852

483

(typ.

)

Kin

derg

arte

n on

ly KD

B/F

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:DRINKING FOUNTAINSMOUNTING HEIGHTS

NTS Jan 2014 B.1.15.1.a

2.0



Vending Machine Areas Area Range: varies Associated Rooms: N/A Millwork: N/A Fitments: N/A Finishes: Ref. Arch. C.9 • Porcelain tile flooring complete with rubber base • Gloss alkyd paint • LAP ceiling and grid system Plumbing: N/A HVAC: no special requirements Electrical Power & Devices: Ref. Elect. C.11 • Dedicated circuits to location of Vending Machine Areas. Not to be mixed

with other circuits. • Min. one (1) circuit per vending machine – confirm quantity with PDSB Electrical Lighting: N/A Design Issues: • Minimum of one (1) location for each floor • Consultant to confirm quantity and sizes of equipment which would be used

by the specific school and accommodate this information in design and layout • Area designed such that it does not protrude into the general circulation space



Braille Interior Signage Ref. Arch B.1.15.3a-b Design Issues: • Interior signs to meet the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act

Accessibility Guideline (ADAAG), the Ontario Building Code and Ontarios with Disabilities Ac (ODA). Interior signs shall meet National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 225) Class A, Level 1 for flame spread and smoke density.

• Sign construction is based on “encapsulated poly-carbonate” system of accessible signage.

• “Uncontracted” Grade 1 Braille translation to be provided by sign manufacturer.

• Applied letters or braille beads, engraved, sandblasted or etched backgrounds are not acceptable.

• Signs shall be of dark contrasting background with white lettering and pictograms. Characters and background must have a non-glare finish and be of uniform design and sign shape.

• Signs are to be both tactile and Uncontracted Braille

Mounting • Signs are to be placed on the latch side of the door, 60 to 75mm from the door

jamb and at 1500mm from finished floor to center line of sign. • All interior signs are to be fastened horizontally with double faced tape or

construction adhesive. • On doors opening into the corridor the sign must allow a person to approach

the sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within a door swing. Refer to CAN/CSA-B651-95 Barrier Free Design Standard Installation Requirements for Tactile Signage.

Acceptable Manufacturers and Models • The General Requirements above are based on Interior Grade “Brailliant

Touch” encapsulated non-glare membrane applied to 1/8” Black acrylic. White raised text, number and graphics, Uncontracted Braille (embossed Braille dots). Encapsulating top later is to be designed to resist vandalism.

• Acceptable Manufacturers: Eye Catch Signs International 2482 Maynard Street, Halifax, NS B3K 3V4 Global Precision Signage Incorporated 9 Silverwood Terrace, Halifax, NS B3M 2Y9



• Products by other manufacturers may also be accepted provided that the

individual products, sizes, appearance, surface finish, surface texture, performance, etc. are acceptably similar to the above mentioned products as approved by the Board.

ROOM #ROOM NAME

Uncontracted Braille

175

9515

1647

3047

250

Type 1

ROOM #ROOMNAME


175

6910

1647

3047

250

Type 2

1615


DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:BRAILLE INTERIOR SIGNAGE

NTS FEB 2013 B.1.15.3.a

1.5

175

100

25

250

Type 3

1 Line ExampleUncontracted Braille

6915

1625

80

2 LineExample


175

25

250

Type 4


130

100

4315

1610

1625

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:BRAILLE INTERIOR SIGNAGE

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.15.3.b

1.4

Edge of sign plate to be smooth finish.

SINGLE LINE SIGN - VARIABLE LENGTH UP TO 300mmSTYLE: INT.#1

CLASSROOM

Rear of sign plate painted - Architect tospecify colour

6mm clear acrylic sign plate with 22mm white vinylletters mounted on rear face.

Length varies - Maximum 300mm

2525

50

10

25Min.

10

25Min.


DOUBLE LINE SIGN - VARIABLE LENGTH UP TO 300mmSTYLE: INT.#2

LANGUAGEROOM

Rear of sign plate painted - Architect to specify colour



12

80

10

12

10

Name length varies


SINGLE LINE SIGN - NAME WITH PLATE SLOTSTYLE: INT.#3

CLASSROOM




35

50

10

Slot at rear of sign plate for slide-inname plate (by others) - Teacher's name

7520

5

10

Name length varies

(Note: Use this style on special requests or to match existing interior signage only. Review with PDSB.)

25Min.

25Min.

25Min.

25Min.

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:INTERIOR SIGNAGE

NTS FEB 2013 B.1.15.3.c

1.5

BARRIER FREE LOGO

BARRIER FREE/ MALE LOGO BARRIER FREE/ FEMALE LOGO

MALE LOGO FEMALE LOGO

Size: 150x6x150

6mm Clear acrylicsmooth finish on

edge.


edge.


edge.

White vinyl logo

White vinyl logo

White vinyl logo

Rear of sign paintedArchitect to select colour



Size: 150x6x150

Size: 150x6x150Note: All mounting to bewith four (4) countersinkscrews (typ.)

1010 1010

1010 1010

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:INTERIOR SIGNAGE

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.15.3.d

1.4



6mm clear acrylic sign plate with 22mm white vinyl letters mounted onrear face.


12

215

12

12

12

Text length varies12Min.

12Min.

Note: To be posted in a conspicuous locationTemplet available by request from the PDSB

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:OCCUPANCY LOAD SIGNAGE

NTS JAN. 2014 B.1.15.3.e

2.0

75

FLOOR SLAB

CONT. BITUMENOUSICESHIELD TRIMMEDTO TOP OF BASE.

RUBBER BASE(ENSURE ADHESIONTO ICESHIELD)

SEALANT, BOTHSIDES (TYP.)

ABUSE-RESISTANTGYPSUM BOARD

BATT-INSULATION(NOISE SEPARATION)

CONTINUOUSFIBERGLASS-FACED

DENS GOLD

FLOOR FINISH

STEEL STUD (TYP.)

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:

GYPSUM BOARD WALL BASE DETAILNTS JUNE 2012 B.1.15.4.a

1.4

Bullnose concrete block.Typical above first course.

Square corner piece porcelain tile.Refer to room finish schedule.

Standard square corner concreteblock, first course only.Grind portion above base tomatch bullnosed concrete block.

DETAIL AT PORCELAIN TILE BASE

Bullnose concrete block.Typical above first course.

Wrap resilient base aroundbullnosed corner.

Extend bullnosedconcrete block to floor

DETAIL AT RESILIENT RUBBER BASE

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:BASE DETAIL AT BULLNOSED BLOCKCORNER

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.15.5.a

1.4

eelDistrictSchool Board

SAMPLE TWO-STOREY SCHOOL ELEVATION


SCHOOL NAME HEREPUBLIC SCHOOLSchool address here

SCHOOL NAME LINE 1SCHOOL NAME LINE 2SCHOOL ADDRESS

300

200

200

150

100

950


3002438

950

TYPICAL LETTERINGTYPEFACE: GOTHAM BOLD

SCHOOL NAME LINE 1SCHOOL NAME LINE 2SCHOOL ADDRESS

6mm SATIN ALUMINUM COMPLETE WITHBLACK VINYL OR SILK SCREENED GRAPHICS

EFGH14

300

200

200

150

100

950

1215 pt811 pt602 pt

NOTES:1. LOGO PANEL TO STAY CONSISTENT ON ALL SCHOOLS2. LOGO PANEL TO BE MOUNTED USING WELDED BOSES AND STAINLESS STEEL STUDS AND SPACED A MINIMUM OF 6mm FROM EXTERIOR WALL MATERIAL3. COLOUR FOR LETTERING OF SCHOOL NAME AND ADRESS AS PER ARCHITECT'S SPECIFICATION

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:EXTERIOR SCHOOL SIGN

NTS JUNE 2012 B.1.15.6.a

1.4

70000

1100

00

Movable goal posts

Painted lines (NIC)

1640

0

40200

18300

5400

R9150

R9150

NOTE:FOR MIDDLE SCHOOLS ONLY; WHERE A FULL SIZE SOCCER FIELD CANNOT BEACCOMMODATED, PROVIDE TWO (2) SMALLER ONES. SCALE FIELD PROPORTIONALLY

EQ.

EQ.

Moveable goal posts

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:SOCCER FIELD

NTS JUNE 2012 B.2.1.a

1.4

FRONT POST - MINI GROUND SUPPORT - MINI

TYPICAL PIPEBACK SUPPORT

1600

mm

(5ft

3in)

3658mm (12ft)

PERSPECTIVE

FRONT POST PIPE BACK SUPORT

GROUND SUPPORT

3658mm (12ft)

1524

mm

(5ft)

FRONT POST - MINOR GROUND SUPPORT - MINOR

1905

mm

(6ft

3in)

5486mm (18ft)

1828

GROUND SUPPORT - MAJOR

2515

mm

(8ft

3in)

7315mm (24ft)

7315mm (24ft)

2133

mm

(7ft)

FRONT POST - MAJOR

5486mm (18ft)

2"x2" TUBE 1/8" WALL OVERALL LENGTH 22FT 6IN1"x3" TUBE 1/8" WALL OVERALL LENGTH 22FT2 1/4" PIPE 1/4" WALL OVERALL LENGTH 14FT



HOLD DOWNRODS

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:MOVABLE SOCCER GOAL POSTSMINI, MINOR & MAJOR

1:50 JUNE 2012 B.2.1.b

1.4

150

Reinforced concrete curb completewith rounded tooled nosing.

Fin. grade, sod or asphalt

6mm SLOPE MIN.

10mm radius

150Asphalt

Compacted granular fill

Compacted granular fillUndisturbed soil

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:CONCRETE CURB AT FINISHED GRADE


1.4

150

6mm SLOPE MIN.10mm radius

200

150Asphalt

25

Poured in place concrete curb

Undisturbed soil

150

100

MIN

.

15mm control jointsawcut and caulk

Concrete slab reinforced completewith rounded tooled nosing


Undisturbed soil


DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:CONCRETE CURB AT CONCRETE SIDEWALK


1.4

SOLID CENTER LINELINE TYPE 1

VARIES

STOP BARLINE TYPE 2

3600 (OR SMALLER)

100

305

BROKEN CENTER LINELINE TYPE 3

1220

100

915 1220

WALKWAY DESIGNATIONLINE TYPE 4

VARIES

100

100

1500

100

300

45°

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:PAVEMENT MARKING LINES


1.4

(3")(29 1/2")(18")

750

750

600

2100

3750TYP.450 100

TYP.

HANDICAPPARKING

MESSAGE:HANDICAP PARKING

750FIRE ROUTE

TYP. TYP.

750

750

1500

375EQ. EQ.

750 450

100 450

2700

2700

254

MESSAGE:FIRE ROUTE

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:PAVEMENT MARKING MESSAGES

NTS JUNE 2012 B.2.5.c

1.4

750

750

EQ.

EQ. EQ

. EQ

.

EQ.EQ.

EQ.EQ.

750

750

750

1500

ARROW TYPE: A1

750375

R750

UP or DOWNLEFT or RIGHT

ARROW TYPE: A2UP or DOWN

LEFT or RIGHT

Arrow Colour: Yellow

Arrow Colour: Yellow

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:DIRECTIONAL ARROW TYPES


1.4

SCH

OO

L

CO

NC

RET

E SI

DEW

ALK

CU

RB

CU

RB

SOD

3000 4000 1500 3500

3500

(IDEAL)

THRU

AR

RO

W T

YPE

A1

AR

RO

W T

YPE

A1

AR

RO

WTY

PE A

2C

OM

BIN

ATI

ON

AR

RO

WTY

PES

A1

& A

2

ENTR

AN

CE

ON

LY

Line

type

4

Flus

h br

oom

fini

shco

ncre

te st

rip o

r tw

oso

lid y

ello

w li

nes

Line

type

2

Line

type

3

EXIT

ON

LY

NO

TE:

REF

ER T

O D

WG

. B.2

.4.a

FO

R M

AR

KIN

G L

INES

REF

ER T

O D

WG

. B.2

.5.a

, b &

c F

OR

MA

RK

ING

MES

SAG

ESR

EFER

TO

DW

G. B

.2.6

.a F

OR

DIR

ECTI

ON

AL

AR

RO

WS

300

900

300

NO

TE:

ALL

LA

NE

WID

THS

MU

ST C

OM

PLY

TO

TH

EM

INIM

UM

MU

NIC

IPA

LITY

BY

-LA

WS

ENSU

RE

BU

S LA

NE

DES

IGN

ATI

ON

DO

ES N

OT

INTE

RFE

RE

WIT

H F

IRE

RO

UTE

AC

CES

S TO

SCH

OO

LRe

fer t

o Ar

ch. C

.2 -

Fire

Rou

tes

LANE

DO NOT

STOP

CAR

DROP

OFF

ZONE

NO

PARKING

BUSES

ONLY

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:SITE PLAN DETAIL - 3 LANES IN FRONT OFSCHOOL (Alternate Layout Due to MunicipalityRequirements or Site Constraints) NTS JUNE 2012 B.2.7.a

1.4

2400

New home of

Alloa Public SchoolFor more information, call

(905) 890-1010 ext. 2212Visit www.peelschools.org

We're getting ready to inspire...

100

1200

2200 100

Arial 55 mm high

Century schoolbook 90 mm high

Arial 120 mm high

Arial 90 mm high

1200

600

3000


Pantone Process Blue C Background

Installation location to beconfirmed with Consultant

Pantone Process Blue C Background


Peel board visual identity

Colour to be Pantone SystemBackground Process Blue CText & Boarder WhiteMax. No. Of colours = 2

DistrictSchool Board

1100

100

1100

5050

Finished grade

2400

600

1500

2400

Coordinate foundation withStructural Engineer

Pressure treated spruce horiz. andvertical frame members

Diagonal supports behind bolted tovertical at pier

Fir overlay plywd-good one-side

Finished grade

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:JOB SITE SIGN

NTS Jan. 2014 B.2.8.a

2.0

Construction EntranceDO NOT ENTER WITHOUTFLAG PERSON ESCORT

Contact: (Contractor)Site Supervisor:Telephone:

1000

Arial 45 mm high

Arial 45 mm high (black)

Arial 40 mm high

15mm black band

25

750

25

25

950

25

800

(CONTRACTOR LOGO)

Construction SiteHours of Operation:X:XX A.M. - X:XX A.M.

X:XX P.M. - X:XX P.M.

In Case of EmergencyPlease ContactSite Supervisor:Telephone:

950

Arial 40 mmhigh (black)

Arial 50 mm high

Arial 40 mm high

(CONTRACTOR LOGO) 210

10

100

10

220

10

290


850

10mm black band

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:JOB SITE SIGNAGE

NTS JUNE 2012 B.2.8.b

1.4

AuthorizedConstruction

EntryONLY

610

610

Arial 70mm high


10 10 570 10 10

ConstructionTrafficONLY

610

610

Arial 70mm high


10 10 570 10 10

10mm blackband

NOConstruction

TrafficBeyond this

Point

61061

0Arial 70 mmhigh


10 10 570 10 10

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:JOB SITE SIGNAGE

NTS JUNE 2012 B.2.8.c

1.4

4 - 13mm dia. bolts

100x100x6 HSS post

200x200x13mmthick steel plate

PLAN AT POST

6400

Main post Lock post

Lock & hold open post

20°

PLAN VIEW

Main post

75x75x3 HSS

6400

225

1500

1050

900

ELEVATION

EQ. EQ. EQ.

2B.2.9.b

1B.2.9.b

3B.2.9.b

Reflectorsboth sides

900min.

Adjacent fenceor bollard mustbe flanged typ.both side of gate

900min.

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:FIRE ROUTE GATE


1.4

100x100x6 HSS post

1

225

100 138 75

100

1381

13

90 135

19 dia grade 8 bolt

75x75x3 HSS (typ)

100x175x13mm thick steelplate welded to HSS post

100x100x13mm thicksteel plate with 13mmgussets (2) and hole toaccept 19 dia. bolt weldedto HSS post

DETAIL

Finish grade

100 138 75

75x75 HSS (typ)

7510

013 dia. grade 8 boltwelded to plate

Trim bolt flushWith top of nut

200x200x13mm thicksteel plates

100x100x13mm thicksteel plate with 13mmgussets (2) and hole toaccept 19 dia. boltwelded To HSS post

100x100x13mm thicksteel plate welded toHSS post

19 dia. grade 8 bolt

300 dia. pouredconc. footing

2 DETAIL

400 long steel chainwelded to pin and plate

100x100x13mm steel plate with 2 gussetscut @ 45 angle welded to 100 HSS post

10mm dia. to allowfor pad lock

100x200x13mmplate welded to100 HSS post

Note: All steel tobe galvanized

194x119x19mm dia.locking pin

1001002017

519

100 19

81

3 DETAIL

100x100x6HSS post

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:FIRE ROUTE GATE DETAILS

NTS JUNE 2012 B.2.9.b

1.4

TYPICAL INSTALLATION

HEAVY DUTY ASPHALT

MEDIUM DUTY ASPHALT

HL3 asphalt surface course


Subgrade

Subgrade



300

150

6540

200

150

5040

50mm crushed limestone sub-base course

19mm crushed limestone base course

19mm crushed limestone base course

50mm crushed limestone sub-base course

NOTE:DESIGNER TO REFER TO SOILS REPORT TO CONFIRM THATADDITIONAL DEPTH IS NOT REQUIRED AND THATDEPTHS/MATERIALS OF ASPHALT AND SUBGRADECOMPONENTS MATCH THESE MINIMUM STANDARDS.

TYPICAL INSTALLATION

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:ASPHALT DETAILS


1.4

DO NOT ENTER

STOP600

600

600 (700)

600

(700

)

White background Red background

WHITE LINE

Red background

White letters

White border

460

300

White reflectiveBackground

Blackletters

VISITORPARKING

ONLY

460

300

Black letter 'P', legend & border

15mm red reflectiveinterdictory stroke

BY PERMITONLY

35

3010 30

25

125

20

155

30

20mm red reflective annular band

Blue reflectivebackground & outline

White reflective symbol& background

White reflective background

Black arrow

KEEPRIGHT

20mm greenreflective annularband

Black letters

White reflectivebackground

300

350350

ONE WAY

White background Blue background

1 2

3 4 5

6 7

9

460

300

Black letter 'P', legend& border

15mm red reflectiveinterdictory stroke

20mm redreflectiveannular band

White reflectivesymbol & border

White reflectivebackground8

VEHICLES WILL BE TOWED

ON DRIVEWAY

FIRE ROUTE

300

Note: All signs to be full size and format as per municipal standards. Posts required for all signsAll signs to be .080 gauge or greater.

Black arrow

20mm redreflective

annular band

460

200

600

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:SITE SIGNAGE


1.4

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

X

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

X

XX

X X X

XX

X

X X X X

SCH

OO

L

Asp

halt

Play

Are

a

Sodd

ed P

lay

Are

a

Gar

bage

Encl

osur

e

Kin

derg

arte

nPl

ay A

rea

(JS

only

)

Vis

itor P

arki

ng

NO

PAR

KIN

G B

USE

S O

NLY

THR

U L

ANE

THRU LANE

THRU LANE

CAR DROP OFF ZONE

Parking

Parking

Parking

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:SITE PLAN - LINE MARKINGS AND PARKINGLAYOUT (Preferred Layout, note only two (2) lanes at front of School) NTS JUNE 2012 B.2.12.a

1.4

900

635

100

800

100

Continuous post formedcounter top and backsplash

SECTION

ELEVATION

Door pull

Flush mounted pilaster strips

NOTE:All tackboards should be mounted 50mmabove backspalsh

Lock (typ.) alike to all cabinetry within the sameclassroom to be supplied and installed undermillwork section. Three (3) sets of keys for allcabinets to be supplied

Continuous hardwood kick block. It must coverthe entire length of several units of cabinets

All tackboards should be mounted 50mmabove backspalsh

Two (2) AdjustableShelves (typ.)

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:CABINET TYPE B1

NTS JUNE 2012 B1

1.4

SECTION

ELEVATION

800

900

100

635

Sink

Door pull

Continuous post formedcounter top & backsplash

200

600

100

Sink

Fixed panel. Where a row ofmillwork does not include drawersin base units; the fixed panel isnot required. Cabinet doors to goto underside of counter top

Fixed panel

Lock (typ.) alike to all cabinetrywithin the same classroom to besupplied and installed undermillwork section. Three (3) setsof keys for all cabinets to besupplied


DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS JUNE 2012 B2

1.4

400

900

635

100

100


SECTION

Door pull


ELEVATION

Lock (typ.) alike to all cabinetry within the sameclassroom to be supplied and installed undermillwork section. Three (3) sets of keys for allcabinets to be supplied



DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS JUNE 2012 B3

1.4

1300

SECTION

900

100

900

ELEVATION


5 Adjustable shelves (typ.)Minimum 25mm thickness


Continuous hardwood kickblock. It must cover theentire length of several unitsof cabinets

NOTE:For Middle School Art Room Only

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS JUNE 2012 B4

1.4

900

ELEVATION

SECTION

PLAN

450

3600

Eye wash

Pipe space

90040

0 M

IN.

Pipe space

900450 450

Vinyl base

Sink

Exhaust port withcover to suit duct

Post formed acid resistant plasticlaminate finish to all exposed faces

Removablepanels (typ.)

Fixedpanel

Eye wash station to always face exit door

Fixed panelA

B5.2

BB5.2

1 - 20ampElec. Rec.

1 - 15ampElec. Rec.

2 key switches complete with pilotlights for tempereed & cold water valves

Exhaustfan starter

V SKV V V SKV V

Number of water shut-off valves determinedby number of perimeter sinks required

Review with PDSB option to reverse drawers and knee space toprovide a lower height work surface at end of demo. desk

NOTE: For Middle Schools Only

750

Cabinet can be mirrored based on classroom exit door

Lock (typ.) alike toall cabinetry withinthe same classroom

Power and data typical for teacher's computer

Kneespace

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:CABINET TYPE B5.1

NTS JUNE 2012 B5.1

1.4

900

100

900

750

Cut to clear sink

Removable panel

Fixed panel

Fixed panel

Removable panel

750400350

SECTION A

615

MIN

.

SECTION B



DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:CABINET TYPE B5.2

NTS JUNE 2012 B5.2

1.4

900

900

635

100


ELEVATION

SECTION

Fixed panel

Outline of cabinet beyond

Hei

ght t

o su

it ba

rrie

r-fr

ee re

quire

men

ts

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS JUNE 2012 B6

1.4

900

635

840

Fixed panel

Continuous post formedcounter top and backsplash(Coordinate backsplash.Height to be continuous)

SECTION

Outline of cabinet beyond

ELEVATION

Hei

ght t

o su

it ba

rrie

r-fr

ee re

quire

men

ts

Hei

ght t

o cl

ear s

ink

Width to suit barrier-free

requirements

Hei

ght t

o su

it

barr

ier-

free

re

quire

men

ts

160

Fixed panel

Fixed panel

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS JUNE 2012 B7

1.4

900

580

100

One (1) Adjustable shelf (typ.)

190

800

DRAWER

100


Door pull

ELEVATION

SECTION

Lockable Drawer all keyed alike (typ.)

Hardboard DividerDoor pull

Continuous post formedcounter top and backsplash.

635

Locks all keyed alike (typical note)


DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS JUNE 2012 B8

1.4

2400

EQ. EQ. EQ.

ELEVATION

900


Continuous post formedcounter top

SECTION


350

Note:Provide Cabinet TypeB9 where shown forJunior Schools only.


DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:CABINET TYPE B9(LOWER CABINET)

NTS JUNE 2012 B9

1.4

900

635

100

820

100


SECTION

ELEVATION

Dishwasher (NIC)

Note:Coordinate electrical andplumbing requirements

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS JUNE 2012 B10

1.4

900

635

100

800

100


SECTION

ELEVATION


NOTE:All tackboards should be mounted 50mmabove backspalsh


All tackboards should be mounted 50mmabove backspalsh


DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS Jan. 2014 B11

2.0

ELEVATION

1050

75017

30

2200

900

100

SECTION

280

190

Rod

300

35mm solid core wood door

Four (4) Adjustable shelves (typ.)

Coat rod complete with rod flanges

One (1) Fixed shelf (typ.)

Continuous gypsum board bulkhead,front and both sides to adjacent units

100

Solid hardwood gable ends

760

35


Lock set by Hardware Section Arch.C.8Best core to be supplied and installed byhardware section on this cabinetry only

PLAN VIEW

Thumb turn on inside

350

FixedFixed

Lever SetTwo (2) Best Core Locks

795

Continuous hardwood kick block.It must cover the entire length ofseveral units of cabinets

40

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:CABINET TYPE C1(TEACHER'S CLOSET)

NTS FEB 2013 C1

1.5

EQ.

2200

2200

ELEVATION

100

SECTION

650

1300

Five (5) adjustable shelves (typ.)

EQ.

EQ.

EQ.

EQ.

EQ.

400

650

100

Note:Provide Cabinet Type C2where shown for MiddleSchools only.


350



DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:CABINET TYPE C2(TALL OPEN SHELVING)

NTS JUNE 2012 C2

1.4

100

5 adjustable shelves (typ.)

900

2200

795

2200

SECTIONELEVATION

Flush mountedpilaster strips

Door pull

35mm solid core wood door

Continuous gypsumboard bulkhead,front and both sidesto adjacent units

350

Continuous hardwood kickblock. It must cover theentire length of severalunits of cabinets

Lock (typ.) alike toall cabinets withinthe same classroom

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:STORAGE CABINET

NTS JUNE 2012 C3

1.4

970

1800

100

680

150635

310 90

400

EQ.

Intermediategable

Plastic edges

Adjustable shelf

(typ.

)

SECTION


Door pull


ELEVATION

EQ. EQ.

900

EQ.

Lock (typ.) alike samekey as all cabinetry inthe General Office area

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:CABINET TYPE C4(MAIL SLOTS)

NTS JUNE 2012 C4

1.4

Four

(4) A

djus

tabl

esh

elve

s (ty

p.)

Flus

h m

ount

edpi

last

er st

rips

1050

2200

1001600 500

795

EQ.EQ.EQ.EQ.

Dra

wer

(typ

.)

ELEV

ATI

ON

SEC

TIO

N

1100

Doo

r pul

l

35m

m so

lid c

ore

woo

d do

or

Solid

har

dwoo

d ed

ge,

both

side

s (ty

p.)

760

Con

tinuo

us g

ypsu

m b

oard

bul

khea

d,fr

ont a

nd b

oth

side

s to

adja

cent

uni

ts

350

Lock

(typ

.) al

ike

toal

l cab

inet

s with

inth

e sa

me

clas

sroo

m

Con

tinuo

us h

ardw

ood

kick

blo

ck.

It m

ust c

over

the

entir

e le

ngth

of

seve

ral u

nits

of c

abin

ets

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:KINDERGARTEN CLOSET AND DRAWERSTYPE K1

NTS JUNE 2012 K1

1.4

900

2200

600

x 19

00ta

ckbo

ard

Doo

r pul

l

2200

4 ad

just

able

shel

ves

35m

m so

lid c

ore

woo

d do

or

Tack

boar

d

1100

Stor

age

spac

e fo

rro

ll-aw

ay to

ys

ELEV

ATI

ON

SEC

TIO

N

795

EQ.

EQ.

EQ.

EQ.

Doo

r pul

l

Con

tinuo

us g

ypsu

m b

oard

bul

khea

d,fr

ont a

nd b

oth

side

s to

adja

cent

uni

ts

350

600minimum free space

Lock

(typ

.) al

ike

to a

llca

bine

ts w

ithin

the

sam

e cl

assr

oom

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:KINDERGARTEN STORAGE UNITTYPE K2

NTS JUNE 2012 K2

1.4

ELEVATION SECTION

-Provide minimum 30 cubbies per kindergarten classroom

250

300

724

3819

300

(min

.)

440

25019300 300

Bullnose solid Birch wood edge

Plastic double coat hook

L Angle blocking

60 mm Metal tube legs(Hafele or equivalent)

-Protect exposed edges

1350

(Max

imum

)

Hard Rock MapleMelamine Particle Board with pvs edges

Hard Rock MapleMelamine Particle Board with pvs edges

CORNER DETAIL

Solid hardwoodedging withbullnose corners

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:KINDERGARTEN COAT AREA CUBICLESTYPE K3

NTS JAN. 2014 K3

2.0

100

600

600

635

100


ELEVATION

SECTION

Secure gable to floor

Toy cartK5

800

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:KINDERGARTEN TOY CART STORAGETYPE K4

NTS JUNE 2012 K4

1.4

100

630

560

Cut outs for hand pull,typ. on all sides

Heavy duty lock castors

EQ. 100 EQ.

455

65

520

630

50

EQ. EQ.

EQ.

100

EQ. PLAN

ELEVATION

Solid rubber bumper,typ. all sides at topand bottom

Solid hardwood

CORNER DETAIL

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:KINDERGARTEN TOY CARTTYPE K5

NTS JUNE 2012 K5

1.4

2000

EQ. EQ. EQ.

Fixed gables

Bullnose edge (typ.)

Solid wood edgingSolid wood edging ongables and bottom typ.

400

PLAN

ELEVATION

400

600

SECTION A

Plastic Laminate

600

Adjustableglides required

Guides beyond


Protect edges

100

CORNER DETAIL

Solid hardwoodedging withbullnose corners

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:KINDERGARTEN MOVEABLE BENCHTYPE K6

NTS JUNE 2012 K6

1.4

Door pull

2200

800

T/O

FIN

ISH

ED F

LOO

R

800

350

SECTION

ELEVATION


Lock (typ.)


Adjustable Shelves

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:KINDERGARTEN CABINETTYPE K7 - EQUIVALENT TO U1

NTS JUNE 2012 K7

1.4

600

635

100

800

Lock (typ.) alike to all cabinets within same classroom

100



SECTION

ELEVATION

Door pull



DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:KINDERGARTEN CABINETTYPE K8

NTS JUNE 2012 K8

1.4

600

635

100

800


100


SECTION

ELEVATION

Sink

Sink

Door pull


Water proof seal around sink cut out to avoidbubbling of the Plam due to water penetration

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS JUNE 2012 K9

1.4

800

600

635



100

SECTION

ELEVATION



DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS JUNE 2012 K10

1.4

Var

ies

Plastic laminate topCoordinate mechanical ventcut-out with mechanical.Water proof/seal cut-out

Insulation

SECTION

Mechanical duct/chase,coordinate with Mechanical

Varies

Mechanical vent at toe kick.Coordiante with Mechanical

Millwork backing finish tosuit base unit construction

Mechanical vent at toe kick.Coordiante with Mechanical

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:RADIATOR COVER

NTS JUNE 2012 M1

1.4

1100

900

150

400

200

PLAN VIEW

ELEVATION

400

400

Plastic laminate panel to

Finished Floor

(number as required by div. 16)Light switches - door side

(Vocational room) (where required by div. 16)

Cut-out for speaker and grille

Finished ceiling

Clock w/ recessed clock outletElectrically operated 300 dia.

Solid hardwood gables

Solid hardwood gables (typ.)

P.A. telephone handset Confirm size and location

Removable plastic laminatefaced plywood panelto match counter

NOTES:1. MODULAR CONTROL PANEL TO BE LOCATED AT ENTRANCE OF ROOM2. REFER TO MILLWORK SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATES3. IN RENOVATIONS THE CEILING HEIGHT MAY PERMIT THE CLOCK TO BE SHOWN ABOVE THE FIRE ALARM SIGNAL DEVICE4. IF THE FIRE ALARM SIGNAL DEVICE IS A HORN/STROBE COMBINATION IT MUST BE MOUNTED AT THE HEIGHT SPECIFIED IN THE ULC INSTALLATION STANDARD OR THE INSTALLATION WILL NOT PASS VERIFICATION5. IN RENOVATIONS THE CLOCK, FIRE ALARM SIGNAL DEVICE, AND/OR THE PA SPEAKER MAY BE DELETED FROM THE MCP AND MOUNTED IN EXISTING BOXES.

1800

Top of back box

to u

/s o

f cei

ling

2000

To centre of clock

Open top allowed.50mm x 200mm cut out if top is provided

Red t-slot service receptacle ondedicated circuit for Custodial use

match counter

Thermal sensor - centered on panel

RAD-1 Audible Alarm (Science room) (where required)

Horn/Strobe

or programmable clock (if provided in school)

Push Button

Fire Alarm Signal Device (Install in accordance with CAN/ULC-S524-06)

2300

150

150mm from door opening

Rough-in for future data

DWG. NO.

ISSUE/REV.

eel

DistrictSchool Board

SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:MODULAR CONTROL PANEL

NTS March 2016 M2

2.2

SECTION DETAIL 4

PLAN DETAIL

SECTION DETAIL

Ceiling

J-mold trim (typ.)

Steel stud framing

Steel stud framing

3

5

J-mold trim (typ.)

Gypsum board

Gypsum board

SECTION 1

SECTION 2

3

Millwork Seal and tape

4Millwork

350

350

Note: provide when millwork isinstalled in space greater than 1 storey

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:GYPSUM BOARD BULKHEAD DETAIL

NTS JUNE 2012 M3

1.4

Angle bracket

Wood shelf

Nosing

End plate

Secure frame to wall

Gusset welded to angle and back plate

Steel back plate

Slope 5°

400

720

400

600

450

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:GYM STORAGE ROOM SHELVING

NTS JUNE 2012 M4

1.4

300

45°90°

45°

Steel angle

SECTION PLAN

Solid hardwood slats (rounded edges) fastened fromunderside to metal bracket. Typ. both shelves

Solid hardwood edging,rounded edge

Bar 10 x 45 x 230mm long builtinto wall with two 10mm Ø boltswelded to each plate at eachbracket @ bench and shelf (typ.)Use lag bolts and anchor shield atexisting walls.

1000

400

450

At returns provide 2 brackets plus additionalangle under the mitered corner. (typ.)

Hooks weldedto channel

Shelf support

90

150

150

At exiting walls add:HSS 38 x 38 x 25 post every other bracket.Provide steel clip angle cut to fit inside tubular leg.Bolt to floor, drill and tap for set screw.

M51

block wall

grout

steel anchorassembly for shelfand bench brackets

DETAIL 1

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:GYM CHANGE ROOM BENCH

NTS JUNE 2012 M5

1.4

1830

T/O

PA

NEL

2850

ELEVATION

100

661

1067

1022

Underside of ceiling

Electrical Panel.See Div. 16

Plastic laminatefinish

Plastic laminatefinish

SECTION

508100 100708

Electrical PanelSee Div. 16

Plastic laminate finish

PLAN VIEW Note:Provide electrical panel chase whererecessed panels cannot be provided.

Coordinate all dimensions withOBC and ADOA requirements.

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:ELECTRICAL PANEL CHASE

NTS FEB 2013 M6

1.5

2200

800

T/O

FIN

ISH

ED F

LOO

R

Two (2) Adjustable Shelves (typ.)


800

350

SECTION

ELEVATION


Door pull


400

50

Adjust space to scale

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:CABINET TYPE U1

NTS JUNE 2012 U1

1.4

800


2200

500

T/O

FIN

ISH

ED F

LOO

R


SECTION

ELEVATION

Door pull


350Continuous gypsum board bulkhead,front and both sides to adjacent units

400

50


DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS JUNE 2012 U2

1.4

800

T/O

FIN

ISH

ED F

LOO

R

Two (2) Adjustable shelves (typ.)

400

2200


SECTION

ELEVATION

Door pull



400


DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS JUNE 2012 U3

1.4

525 *

VARIES TO SUIT MICROWAVE

T/O

FIN

ISH

ED F

LOO

R22

00

340

460

*

800

SECTION

ELEVATION

Shelf to be samedimensions as microwavewith rounded corners

Microwave (NIC)

Electrical receptacle for microwave (typ.)Refer /coordinate with electrical section

Door pull


400

Adjust distance to scale

Lock (typ.) alike to all cabinetswithin same classroom

* coordinate dimensions with owner

Varies to Suit Microwave52

5*

Microwave (NIC)

PLAN

R100

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS FEB 2013 U4

1.5

800

800

400

Two (2) Adjustable shelves (typ.)

T/O

FIN

ISH

ED F

LOO

R22

00

Door pull

SECTION

ELEVATION


Valance to match cabinet construction

Light by Div. 16

100

100

350 Continuous gypsum board bulkhead,front and both sides to adjacent units


DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:CABINET TYPE U5A

NTS JUNE 2012 U5A

1.4

400

T/O

FIN

ISH

ED F

LOO

R

800

800

Two (2) Adjustable Shelves (typ.)

Solid hardwood rabetted door stilesand rails complete with stops

Clear tempered glass

2200

Door pull

SECTION

ELEVATION


GL. GL.

Valance to match cabinet construction

Light by Div. 16

100

100



DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:CABINET TYPE U5B WITH GLASS

NTS JUNE 2012 U5B

1.4

Exhaust hood (where applicable)

800

T/O

FIN

ISH

ED F

LOO

R50

0

500

2200

NOTE:CUT OUT WATERPROOF/SEAL CABINETFOR EXHAUST DUCT FROM HOOD WHEREAPPLICABLE. BOX DUCT WITH MATERIALTO MATCH CABINET.

Door pull

SECTION

ELEVATION

Duct & chase (if applicable)

350


400



DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:


NTS JUNE 2012 U6

1.4

NOTE:Refer to hollow metal, glazing and hardware specifications for door construction materials.Front Entrance doors to be aluminum. Refer to specifications

VARIES

2150

VARIES

2150

TYPE BTYPE A

TYPE C

VARIES

2150

Door grille if required

TYPE A950mm door width Use at washrooms and change rooms.1000mm door width Use at Outside Storage1100mm door width Use at Electrical Rooms, Custodial Office and Doors with Automatic Hardware1200mm door width Use at 'Corridor to Custodian Storage', 'Custodial Storage to Exterior Storage' and Ortho Washroom

TYPE B950mm door width Use at General Office1000mm door width Use at Corridors, Stairwells and Library1100mm door width Use at all Doors with Automatic Hardware inclduing Front Entrance

TYPE C950mm door width Use at Teacher and Staff Workrooms, Classrooms and Administrative Areas1000mm door width Use at Gymnasium1100mm door width Use at all Doors with Automatic Hardware

DWG. NO.


SCALE: DATE:

Sample Diagram:DOOR ELEVATIONS

NTS FEB. 2013 B.8.1.a

1.5


Version 2.0 Issued: January 01, 2014 Section: C.i – Index to Part C Page 1 of 3

INDEX TO PART C GUIDELINES FOR SPECIFICATIONS C.i INDEX C.ii INTRODUCTION

Guide or Standard Specifications: Format of Specifications

C.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Tender Documents Board Standard Tender Documents

Bid Procedures Version 2.0 Bonds Subcontractor Qualifications Warranties Allowances Scope of Inspection and Testing Acceptable Manufacturers/Suppliers and Alternates Quantities of Replacement Materials Health and Safety Issues Guide Specification: Hazardous Materials Documents Required: Start, During & Close Out Other General Requirements

Site Items Renovations and Additions

Guide Specification: Form of Tender Version 2.0 Guide Specification: Instructions to Bidders Version 2.0

C.1.1 SITE SAFETY PROTOCOL

Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings”

C.2. SITE WORK

Site Design and Site Components Parking Asphalt, Curbing and Sidewalks Traffic Safety and Control Fire Route Fire Gate Site Signage Garbage Enclosure Chain Link Fencing Bicycle Racks Flag Pole Planters and Landscape Features



Play Areas and Sports Fields Portable Classrooms Guide Specification: Painted Pavement Markings Guide Specifications: Traffic Safety and Control

C.3 this section intentionally not used C.4 MASONRY C.5 this section intentionally not used C.6 CARPENTRY & MILLWORK

Guide Specification: Architectural Woodwork – Melamine Faced System Guide Specification: Architectural Woodwork – Hardwood Veneer System

C.7 ROOFING AND CLADDING Prefinished Metal Flashing and Trim Built-Up Bituminous Roofing Guide Specification: 4 Ply Bituminous Built-Up Roofing

C.8 WINDOWS, GLAZING, DOORS & HARDWARE

Aluminum Windows & Skylights Glazing Steel Hollow Metal Doors, Frames & Screens Aluminum Doors Finish Hardware Standard Specification: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Standard Specification: Aluminum Doors Standard Specification: Finish Hardware

C.9 FINISHES

General Notes Colour Schedule Gypsum Wall Board Acoustical Ceiling Tile Acoustical Wall Treatment Painting Porcelain Tile VCT Flooring/Rubber Base Rubber Combination One Piece Stair Tread Riser Carpet or Broadloom Resilient Sheet Flooring



C.10 EQUIPMENT & MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Fire Safety Plan Box Washroom Accessories Toilet Partitions Gym Equipment Stage Rigging & Drapery Student Coat Racks & Shelf Lockers Window Blinds Chalkboards, Whiteboards, Tackboards Gym Stage Projection Screen Stage Folding Partition Guide Specification: Stage Rigging

C.11 EQUIPMENT Version 1.5 C.11 this section intentionally not used C.12 FURNISHINGS Version 1.5 C.12 this section intentionally not used

C.13 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS Version 1.5 C.14 BARRIER FREE DESIGN Version 1.5

Hydraulic Passenger Elevator Version 1.5 Personal Access Lift Version 1.5 Guide Specification: Hydraulic Passenger Elevator Version 1.5

C.15 ELECTRICAL GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS Version 1.5

Computer Systems Version 1.5 Emergency Generator Version 1.5 Transfer Switch Version 1.5


Version 1.5 Issued: Feb. 28, 2013 Section: C.ii - INTRODUCTION Page 1 of 2

C.ii INTRODUCTION This Part of the Guidelines groups issues into Sections similar to the organization of a standard. Extensive use is made of point form format and lists. Typically, issues are grouped in the following categories: • General Issues • Design Issues • Specification Issues • Construction Issues • Renovations and Additions Note: Use with Part B: Part C does not specifically identify all components or features of components related to each specification. Consultants are to recognise that they are to cross reference with Part B for the typically more detailed design features for each area and lists of individual required components or fitments. Note: “General Requirements”: “Section 1-General Requirements” lists topics typically addressed in Division One of the Specifications. Guide or Standard Specifications: • In addition, some Sections of this Part C are supplemented and identified as

either Guide Specifications or Standard Specifications and are written in italics.

• Consultants are to ensure the technical reference standards used in these samples are checked and updated for latest editions.

• Formatting of these sections, if used, may be modified to suit the consultants own specification template.

• Use of these Guide Specifications or Standard Specifications does not relieve the consultant of their responsibility. To ensure that all sections are reviewed and any discrepancies, errors and/or proposed deviations are reported to the Owner.


Version 1.5 Issued: Feb. 28, 2013 Section: C.ii - INTRODUCTION Page 2 of 2

Format of Specifications: • In conjunction with the PDSB, consultants may opt for a number of other

specifications formats • The Board currently does not prescribe nor require a particular specifications

format. • The order of most, sections follows the chronology of typical specifications

Divisions using the CSC/CSI 1995 Masterformat. Ref. Arch. A.1-Format of the Guidelines


Version 2.0 Issued: January 01, 2014 Section: C.1 - General Requirements Page 1 of 9

C.1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS TENDER DOCUMENTS Board’s Tender Documents The PDSB provides templates of documents for use, by Consultants in producing the Front End documentation for tendering new schools, renovations, and additions. All templates are to be reviewed with the owner prior to use on a project. Board Standard Form of Tender • Refer to the Board Standard Specification following this section.

Ref.Arch.C.1 – Std. Spec. Form of Tender Board Standard Supplementary Information Form • Reserved for future development • Board Standard Requirements Are to be included in the Instructions to

Bidders Ref.Arch.C.1 – Std. Spec. Instructions to Bidders

BID PROCEDURES • Refer to Architectural Part C, Section C.1 General Requirements – Guide

Specification: Instructions to Bidders Ref.Arch.C.1 – Std. Spec. Instructions to Bidders BONDS • As specified in the stipulated Price Contract. • Consultants should review with the Board and specify all Bonds required. SUBCONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS • In General Requirements or in various Specifications Sections, ensure

subcontractors’ qualifications are stipulated (typically 5 year minimum experience) to ensure quality standards are met for work of that trade.



WARRANTIES • Following is the list of ‘minimum’ required warranties for products or trade

work in the specifications sections. This is not a comprehensive list of all possible extended warranties and the design must ascertain if a product or trade not listed here may be required to provide an extended warranty should it represent good value to the Board.

• These extended warranties may also be modified to exceed the typical length of warranty dependent on approved variations to the products or systems specified.

• The warranty shall be issued to the Peel District School Board within two (2) working days following the date of substantial completion (as indicated in writing by the Board Designee).

Specification Section or Subtrade Warranty (years) Entire Building, General Contract 1Ref. Std. PDSB Stipulated Price Contract- latest edition Paving 2 Trees and Shrubs 2 Ref. Arch. C.2 – Site Work Finish Carpentry 2 Ref. Arch. C.6 - Millwork Preformed Metal Roofing or Siding 5 Concrete Slabs on Grade 3 Precast Structural Concrete 5 Roofing and Sheet Metal 5 Built-Up Roofing (Manufacturer’s warranty) 10 Ref. Arch. C.7-Roofing Caulking, Sealants 2 Cavity Wall Insulation 2 Steel Hollow Metal Doors & Frames 3 Ref. Arch.C.8 - Hollow Metal Work Panic Devices/ Door Closers 5 Ref. Arch.C.8 - Hollow Metal Work Finish Hardware, installation and products 3 Ref. Arch. C.8 – Finish Hardware Aluminum Windows & Window Walls 5 Ref. Arch. C.8 - Windows and Glazing Glazed Sealed Units 10 Ref. Arch. C.8 - Windows and Glazing Acoustic Ceilings 2 Ref. Arch. C.9 - Finishes Ceramic and Porcelain Tile 3 Ref. Arch. C.9 - Finishes Painting 2 Ref. Arch. C.9 - Finishes Gym Divider Curtain 5 Ref. Arch. C.10 - Equipment



ALLOWANCES Ref. PDSB Stipulated Price Contract- latest edition Cash Allowances – Lump Sum • The total of Cash Allowances should not exceed 4% on new construction • The total of Cash Allowances should not exceed 6% on Renovations • Confirm in specifications if any additional Cash Allowances have been carried

separately in Mechanical or Electrical specifications. Following is a checklist of some of the possible and typical Cash Allowance items. Other requirements of each project may be added following a review with the owner: • Soils Inspections and Foundation Compaction Testing • Topsoil Chemical Analysis and Nutrient Analysis • Paving Inspection and Testing • Concrete Inspection • Firestopping Inspection • Steel Inspection • Steel/Concrete Deck Inspection • Windows Testing • Roof Inspection • Spray Insulation/Vapour Barrier Inspection • Masonry and Mortar Inspection • Mechanical Services Connection Fees • Hydro Connection Fees • Air and Water Balancing/Testing • Storm Water Quality Contribution • Storm and Sanitary Sewer Video Inspection • Curb Cut and Sidewalk Upgrading (if performed by Municipality) • Street Pole Lamp or Electrical Pole Relocation (if any and if performed by Utility or

Municipality) • Permit fees if any Lot Grading Certificate (not deposits) • Erosion and Sediment Control Permit Fees (not deposit) • Hollow Metal Door, Frames & Screens Inspection • Finish Hardware Inspection • Painting Inspection (OPCA) – Consult with owner • Millwork Inspection (AWMAC) – Consult with owner • Interior signage (supply and install) • Elevator and Personal Access Lift Licensing Inspection fees (TSSA) • Permanent Cores for Finish Hardware locksets • Record Drawings • Building Envelope Inspection/ Testing • Mineral Fibre Fireproofing Inspection • Stage Drape Allowance – Consult with owner • Others – Consult with owner



Contingency Allowances – Lump Sum • The total of Contingency Allowances should not exceed 5% on new construction • The total of Contingency Allowances should not exceed 10% on Renovations ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS AND ALTERNATES • The Guidelines may list Board’s acceptable manufacturers and suppliers. The

listed names are to be specified unless specified otherwise by the Board. • The Board does not unnecessarily wish to restrict acceptable manufacturers

and suppliers. Where ‘acceptable alternative” may not be listed in these Guidelines, review with the Owner if acceptable alternatives may be listed in contract documents.

• The suggested text is to include for alternates is “…or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these specifications”. Avoid the term “equal to” or “equivalent” within specifications.

QUANTITIES OF REPLACEMENT MATERIALS • The following items are to be listed in Specifications:

• Quantities of replacement materials • Tools specific to the operation or maintenance of any equipment . • Keys and locks for components other than finish hardware and

millwork hardware. This would include items such as soap dispenser or paper towel dispenser access key

• Additional quantities of materials are to be used for maintenance and they are to be stored in a single location within the building at the end of project completion.

• For most applicable Finishes products, additional quantities have been listed in Part C of the Guidelines. In addition, these have been generally listed following:

• VCT; quantities of tile in original cartons equal to 5% of the quantity used for the project for each colour but not to exceed one complete carton of each colour

• Sheet Goods: quantities of tile in original cartons equal to 5% of the quantity used for the project for each colour

• Floor Porcelain Tile: 5% additional tiles of each type and colour of the tile required for the project in original packaging as applicable.

• Wall ceramic tile: 5% additional tile of each colour and type used for the project but not less than 12 tiles of each colour



HEALTH AND SAFETY ISSUES Design Issues • Health & Safety of students staff and all personnel involved in the

construction project is of paramount importance to the Board and must be regarded as the highest priority at all times by the design team. Ref. Arch. A.8-Health and Safety

• Under Provincial Health and Safety legislation, the Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act (OH&S Act), the Board actively maintains a Health & Safety Policy and has a Health and Safety officer.

• In conjunction with the Owner’s representative, designers must avoid contravening Board H&S even though they feel they may be in compliance with all other applicable Codes. Receive guidance from the PDSB Project Manager.

• At the outset of a project the design team must assess review the Hazardous Materials report that may be present in the existing building.

• It is a requirement to review the survey to confirm that its scope properly represents investigation into all the areas affected by the work and to coordinate remediation.

Specification Issues • Specify that workers on projects are to be trained in Best Practices as outlined

in the Occupational Health and Safety, Construction Regulations. Hazardous Materials Clause • The Design Department has issued a guide Hazardous Materials Clause to be

included in specifications for Renovation and Addition projects. • The Hazardous Materials Clause appears on the Hazardous Materials Report

(when included). The clause, on its own, should only be included in the Consultant’s documents if the report isn’t ready in time.

• This clause is subject to review and applicability for each project with the Design Dept. This clause should be reviewed and worded appropriate to each individual project. As such, this statement—written below—is issued as a Guideline:

Guide Specification-Hazardous Materials Clause

“HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: .1 The Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act requires the Board to provide a

list of Designated Substances to all prospective contractors and they in turn must supply the list to their sub-trades who are likely to handle or disturb the material. [The Peel District School Board has arranged for the removal of readily identifiable hazardous materials that would impact on Construction, in particular, Asbestos-containing building materials (designated substance) and PCB-containing electrical equipment (non-designated substance) prior to the work of this project.]



.2 Other materials that may be present in the area of construction may include any or all of the following and would be expected in normal construction: .1 Lead found in paint films, in solder or pipe for drinking water, in solder for

other pipe or electrical components; .2 Mercury found in elemental form in an ampoule in thermostats or in

electrical soft switches, as a gas in fluorescent light tubes or in paint films and caulk; and

.3 Silica, primarily as Quartz, bound in building materials including but not limited to concrete, brick and block.

.4 In accordance with the Ontario Health and Safety Act and regulations enacted under the Act the Contractor and sub-trades shall take appropriate precautions for the building and their work force. Such precautions may include for the substances listed following:

.3 Lead: .1 Any operation involving lead-based paints may potentially produce

significant exposures to lead if adequate controls are not provided. Exposure varies with the type of operation being employed.

.2 The presence of lead in building finishes left intact or found peeling in a few locations produces little exposure for workers to lead through contact, inhalation or ingestion.

.3 Operations involving the hand sanding and scraping of lead based paints can elevate exposure through inhalation. The use of a negative pressure respirator equipped with high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters is recommended to reduce exposure.

.4 Operations involving the machine sanding or abrasive cutting of paint and other surface coatings containing lead can elevate levels of much finer dust. The spray application of a lead bearing paint or coating produces a respirable fume. These operations increase the likelihood of exposure by inhalation. A negative pressure air-purifying respirator equipped with HEPA filters is recommended for these operations.

.5 Operations involving oxyacetylene torches or other heating operations produces the most significant exposure to lead in particular through inhalation and by contact of lead fumes solidifying on skin. A powered air-purifying respirator equipped with HEPA filters and full body covering is recommended for these operations.

.6 Lead found in solder of other pipe systems and electronic components poses no threat to the work force by inhalation, ingestion or by contact with the exception of maintenance or renovation activities. The maintenance of the pipe or electrical component may produce some exposure to lead fume during the sweating on of lead solders but for a short duration of time. Inhalation is the source of entry and exposure is not very significant.

.7 All items identified in this section may be disposed of as regular non-hazardous waste unless concentrated. Metallic lead may be reclaimed through scrap metal dealers



.4 Mercury .1 Fluorescent light tubes contain small quantities of mercury gas. These sealed

units do not pose any harm in the workplace except in the case of breakage. There are no liquid or residue present after breakage and spill cleaning is not a concern. A recommended practice is to evacuate the work area when breakage occurs. The gas will diffuse in about five to ten minutes and cleanup of the tubes can be performed. Mercury can be taken into the body by inhalation only from this source.

.2 The same precautions as those indicated for lead-based paints would apply to mercury in paints.

.3 Elemental mercury found in ampoules in electrical equipment may be disposed of as regular waste and should be turned over to the Board for disposal through commercial recyclers. The other forms (light tubes and painted surfaces that have not been concentrated) can be disposed of as regular waste.

.5 Silica .1 Silica is presumed to be present in cement, cement blocks, bricks and mortar

of the building. Unless the silica in these materials is reduced to respirable size (5 um or less) and the airborne concentration exceeds the time weighted average exposure of 0.2 milligrams per cubic metre in air, no adverse health effects are expected to occur. Building construction, renovation or demolition do not normally raise excessive exposure to silica with the exception of jack hammering, dry saw cutting or sand blasting. There is little likelihood for the work force to be exposed to excessive levels of respirable silica dust if the material is suppressed with water spray or flow. Respiratory protection is dependent on the type and airborne concentration of respirable silica present in the particular work environment.

.2 Prior to the disposal of building materials a leachate toxicity test in compliance with Waster Management Regulation (Revised Regulation of Ontario 1990 / Regulation 347) may be required by the local waste receiving site or the Ontario Ministry of Environment and Energy. Prior to disposal these authorities should be consulted with and tests performed where required.

.3 Where a friable building material enclosed in a wall, floor or ceiling such as fireproofing, insulation on pipe or ducts etc. (that is not fibrous glass) or an acoustical textured material (stucco) or a non-friable material such as cement board or cement pipe. The Contractor shall refer to the consultant who shall contact the Peel District School Board Design Department for further direction.

Renovations and Additions: Ref. Arch. C.12-Renovations & Additions • An updated Hazardous Materials report may be prepared in advance of a new

addition or renovation project. This assessment report is provided by the PDSB.

• In conjunction with other Documents Required at Start-Up [of Construction], ensure that the appropriate asbestos or hazardous materials surveys have been done. Ref. Arch.C.1-General Requirements



DOCUMENTS AND PROCEDURES REQUIRED: START, DURING & CLOSE OUT • The following is a suggested guide list of documents to be obtained from the

Contractor at key points in the project:

At Commencement of Contract • Supply all Performance Bond and Labour and Material Bonds, • Supply Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance Certificates, also

Builder’s Risk and Boiler Insurance • Supply WSIB Certificates incl. all Subcontractors. • Supply Contract Sum Breakdown. Include Mechanical and Electrical

Breakdowns for review. • Supply Construction Schedule that has been reviewed and approved by major

subtrades. • Supply Schedule of Shop Drawing Submissions. • Apply for, post and supply a copy of Notice of Project. • Supply a copy of Health & Safety policy; post at the job site.

During Construction • Maintain as-built record drawings. • Organize regular Trade Coordination meetings. • Organise separate, Owner/Consultant Job meetings • Maintain a record copy on site including, Permit Sets, Contract Documents, all

Changes and Supplementary Instructions. Monthly, with Each Progress Payment Application • Progress Reports and Construction Schedule • Adjust Allowances. • Current WSIB Form • Submission of Statutory Declarations - both Statutory Declarations Form CCDC-

9A for the General Contractor and CCDC-9B from subcontractors.

Prior to Substantial Completion • Room by room deficiency list. • Preliminary submissions of all Mechanical and Electrical Operations and

Maintenance Manuals have been reviewed by Consultants. • Preliminary submissions of all Warranty and Shop Drawing Records have been

reviewed by Consultants. • Final clean-up to has been executed. • Preliminary Balancing Reports. Upon Completion • Finishing Hardware, Inspection and Verification. • Final Inspection tour with the Owner's authorized representative; the

Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Consultants • A complete release of all liens arising out of this Contract, other General

Contractor’s. If a subcontractor or supplier refuses to furnish a release of such a lien, furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify him against any claim under such a lien.



• Certificates of good standing from the WSIB, for the General Contractor and all Subcontractors.

• All reference records, as specified. • Certificate of Inspection from Mechanical and Electrical Engineers. • Copies of all Lists of Deficiencies with each Deficiency verified when complete

by only this project's job Superintendent. The Final List of Deficiencies to be signed, completed by all concerned, if accepted.

• Statement of Completion from General Contractor. • Final adjustment of all Allowances. • Certificates required by Provincial, Municipal and other authorities having

jurisdiction, including signed Building Permit. • Final Balancing Reports showing completed adjustments • Digital copy of Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings and 2 sets As-

Built Drawings. • As-Built Survey by O.L.S. (2 copies and diskette) • Final copies of all Maintenance manuals.

OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • In addition to the consultants’ own standard General Requirements

specification section, the following topics should be addressed: Site items • Provision of temporary power–especially on ‘greenfields’ sites which

sometimes have no locally available power at the outset of construction. • Requirement for Temporary Construction Fencing and/or Hoarding • Locations of Contractor Parking • Provision of Material Safety Data Sheets • Portables, if known Renovations and Additions • Provisions required when building an Addition to an Existing Occupied

Building • Construction Sequencing • Portables • Approach to Selection of Systems and Components • Hazardous Materials


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.1.1 – Site Safety Protocol Page 1 of 5

C.1.1- SITE SAFETY PROTOCOL SITE SAFETY PROTOCOL FOR OCCUPIED BUILDINGS Preamble Health and Safety matters are paramount to the Board at all of its construction sites. In keeping with this, the health and safety of the staff, students and all other users and occupants of schools undergoing construction activity is the highest priority for the Board. As such, The Board has developed a specialised, standard specification “Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings”. It is mandatory that this is to be applied to all construction sites where any portion of the site remains occupied during the construction phase or a portion of the construction phase. This Protocol is issued to Architects as part of the Design Guidelines and consists of the following Design Guideline Inserts.

(i) Instructions to Architects: ref. Part C: 1.1 • Design Issues • Specification Issues • Board Standard Signage

(ii) Standard Specification- “Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings” ref. Part C: 1.1

(iii) Standard Site Safety Signage Details ref. Part B: 2.8 (b & c)

Notes for Preparation of Contract Documents: • Section C.1.1 includes a Standard Specification that shall be included in all

Contract Documents. • Section B.2.8 includes a Standard Site Safety Signage Details that shall be

included in all Contract Documents. • Instructions to Architects must be read in conjunction with the Standard

Specification to ensure continuity of intent and execution from Design through Contract Documents.



Instructions to Architects—Site Safety Protocol Design Issues: Construction Fencing and Hoarding: • Construction hoarding requirements shall be a site-based decision, to be

determined by the Architect and the Board Project Manager and reviewed with the Principal during the Design Phase.

• The preferred standard for surrounding construction work areas is 1800 mm (6’) high continuous chain link fence for visibility.

• Determine, in conjunction with the Board Project Manager, any areas which may require 1800 mm (6’) high plywood hoarding—typically where additional security from student access is deemed required. Those areas which require specific protection from internal construction activities will alternately use continuous 1800 mm (6’) high plywood hoarding. The extent of these areas is to be shown clearly on Contract Drawings.

Construction Site Access/Egress • Architect to review site conditions and wherever possible, ensure on Contract

Documents that the design of contractor accesses avoids routes through parking areas used by visitors or staff. Where this is not possible, obtain approval from the Board Project Architect and Principal at the Design Phase.

• Review of construction access should take place during Design Phase by Consultant and Board.

• Minimum 1800 mm (6’) high Chain-Link Fencing may be used to delineate access routes to wood hoarded areas.

• All access gates, including man-gates are to be lockable. The Contractor is to maintain responsibility for a key and the Board does not have or require a key.

Safety Signage • Consultants to issue Standard Site Safety Signage Drawings with Contract

Documents. • Provide this signage, as a minimum, at all construction entrances. • Indicate size and colours of signs and specific locations on site plans. Avoid

signage details that include logos, etc., which require Shop Drawing approval. • Total surface area of Site Safety signage is to avoid exceeding municipal

standards that would require a separate signage permit. • Signage details shall state restrictions on hours of entry and egress to meet the

particular requirements of the site and individual project. Generally, there shall be absolutely no traffic 30 minutes prior to school start, during recess, lunch break, and minutes after dismissal periods.



Design for School Pedestrian Occupants • Pedestrian access from portables to the school is to be designed to avoid

crossing construction access routes. Where this is not possible, pedestrian areas to be separated from construction areas by fences and closed gates to standards stated herein and full time Flagman to be posted.

• All pedestrian pathways from portables or around the hoarded/fenced work areas, must be paved for the complete distance from portables to the school entrance.

• ‘Covered Way’ protection is designed and provided when accesses or pathways are in proximity to overhead construction, per Ministry of Labour Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects.

• Portables design/layout to be included in review with Board Project Manager and Principal at the Design Stage.

• Layout of portables shall be considered carefully to minimise pedestrian traffic in conflict with Construction accesses or routes to gates.

Parking for School Staff and Visitors • As mentioned in “Construction Site Access/Egress” the design of Contractor

accesses avoids routes through parking areas used by visitors or staff. Where this is not possible, obtain approval from the Board Project Architect and Principal at the Design Phase.

• In the event Contractor access or egress routes must travel through staff/visitor parking areas, temporary parking should be developed, if possible, and pathways to the school entrances treated as those for portables.

• Provide temporary lighting of temporary parking areas. • Provide light duty paving for temporary staff/visitor parking (refer to

Guidelines for specification standard).



Specification Issues—Site Safety Protocol: Use of Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings” • Note that the attached Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for

Occupied Buildings” (Section 01 35 23 or Section 1710, depending on specification format) is to be included in the Contract Documents. ref. Part C: 1.1

• Note that Standard Site Safety Signage drawings are to be issued with the Contract Documents. ref. Part B: 2.8 (b & c)

• This standard specification must be included in Division One specifications. • Specifiers are to note that the provisions of this Section shall override all other

general conditions and specific specification sections, as the Health and Safety protocols shall not be compromised.

• Specifiers are to avoid this Section having conflict with other specification sections or drawings.

• Cross reference with Design Issues and ensure drawings are not in conflict with the intent of specifications.

Peel District School Board Health, Wellness & Safety Department Representative • Refer to Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings”. • Specify that Contract Documents to ensure full access at all times for the

Board’s Health, Wellness & Safety Department Representative. Requirements of Pre-Construction and Site Meetings • Ensure that specifications recognise the following requirements as outlined in

Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings”:

Pre-Construction meeting • Refer to Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for Occupied

Buildings”.

Initial Site Meeting: • Refer to Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for Occupied

Buildings”. • Architect and Board Project Manager shall ensure that the Board

Project Manager, School Principal and a representative of the Board’s Health, Wellness & Safety Department and the School Principal attend the initial site meeting.

• In the event that the Health, Wellness & Safety Department or the School Principal cannot attend the Board Project Manager shall ensure that they are informed of the meeting discussion and outcome.



Contractor’s Health and Safety Committee Meetings • Refer to Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for Occupied

Buildings”. Site Supervisor (Superintendent) • Refer to Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings”. Ontario Occupational Health & Safety Act Compliance • Refer to Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings”. On-Site Communications • Refer to Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings”. Full-Time On-Site Flagmen • Refer to Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings”. Access/Egress Controls • Refer to Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings”. • Cross reference with Design Issues and ensure drawings are not in conflict with

the intent of specifications. Contractor Parking • Refer to Standard Specification-“Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings”. • Cross reference with Design Issues and ensure drawings are not in conflict with

the intent of specifications.


Version 2.0 Issued: February 15, 2013 Section: C.1 – Guide Spec. Form of Tender Page 1 of 6

Form of Tender Peel District School Board School:_________________ Project:________________ Project No. _________ Tender No. _________

2013

2/15/2013



Part 1 1. FORM OF TENDER

1.1

ARCHITECT:________________________________________________________________

1.2 TENDER INFORMATION:

NAME OF BIDDER: _______________________________________________________

TENDER CLOSE:

____________________________________________________________________

NAME OF PROJECT:

________________________________________________________

PROJECT NUMBER:

_____________________

TO:

Peel District School Board 5650 Hurontario Street Mississauga, Ontario

L5R 1C6

1.3 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT RE EXAMINATION OF TENDER DOCUMENTS

.1 Having carefully examined all of the drawings (architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, site servicing and landscape) and having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the requirements of the Stipulated Price Contract, Standard Document PDSB, 2011 as attached, and all of the attached Specifications; (architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, site servicing and landscape) including Addenda numbered as follows:_________________________________________________________________

.2 and, having visited the sites, investigated and examined all conditions affecting the Work, including soil reports and surveys, and other reports as included in the tender documents, the undersigned Bidder makes the offers set out below.

1.4 TENDER AMOUNT

.1 The undersigned Bidder hereby offers to furnish all materials, labour, plant and equipment and to perform all duties and services called for by the ENTIRE WORK INCLUDING ALL TRADES for the Project named above for the stipulated sum of:

(_$________________________________________)

.2 in lawful money of Canada, excluding H.S.T. but including all other applicable Excise Taxes, Custom Duties, Insurance’s, Freight, Exchange and all other charges.

.3 Not included in the above sum is applicable H.S.T.



1.5 CONTINGENCY AND CASH ALLOWANCES

.1 All allowances specified under Section 01020 only amended as provided hereunder.

.2 The Tender Amount includes the total Contingency Allowance of:

$______________________________________________________

not including H.S.T. (H.S.T. on Contingency Allowance is not to be included in the Tender Amount).

The Tender Amount includes the total Cash Allowance of:

$_________________________________________________________ not including H.S.T. (H.S.T. on Cash Allowance is not to be included in the Tender Amount)

1.6 TENDER VALIDITY

.1 The undersigned Bidder is hereby submitting a valid Tender and will enter into the Stipulated Price Contract, Standard Document PDSB-2011 as attached, if we are notified in writing of our Tender acceptance by THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES within ninety (90) calendar days from the closing of the Tender.

1.7 BID BOND / AGREEMENT TO BOND / LETTER OF CREDIT

.1 The undersigned Bidder encloses a Bid Bond in the amount of :____________________

made out in the name of PEEL DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD, as well as an Agreement to Bond from an approved Bonding Company for a 50% Performance Bond and a 50% Labour and Material Payment Bond,

.2 The undersigned Bidder acknowledges and agrees to comply with the special provisions specified with respect to the wording and/or conditions under which the Performance Bond may be invoked and remain in force as a Maintenance Bond. These special conditions are specified in the enclosed Instructions to Bidders and documented in the enclosed Conditions.

.3 The undersigned Bidder acknowledges and agrees to comply with the terms and conditions of the Project Occupancy Requirements as outlined in the Board’s Stipulated Price Contract Document PDSB-2011 as attached, and as listed in the enclosed Supplementary Conditions.

1.8 UNDERTAKING

.1 The undersigned Bidder solemnly undertakes, as an integral part of our proposal and tender to:

.2 (a) Have the buildings “Fit for Occupancy” by:

.3 (b) Have all buildings and site work completed by:

and

.4 (c) Have the Contract completed in its entirety by:

.5 The undersigned Bidder confirms that all appropriate costs, such as winter heat, inclement weather protection and all overtime costs for all trades to meet the aforementioned schedule etc., have been included in our tender price to achieve this date.



1.9 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS

The undersigned Builder proposes to use Subcontractors and/or suppliers to perform work of this Contract, The Builder confirms that such Subcontractors have been investigated by the Builder to confirm their reliability and competence to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; The Builder further agrees that no changes from may be made without the express written approval of the Board.

Extra costs to the Contract will not be considered for the Subcontractor/supplier substitution, regardless of the reason, except where substitution is requested by the Board.

The Builder further agrees that a List of Subcontractors will be submitted to the Consultant within 48 hours of the close of Tenders as per section 1.13 thereof.

Failure to do so may result in disqualification.

1.10 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

.1 If notified of the acceptance of this Tender via a Letter of Intent issued by the Board, the undersigned Bidder agrees to proceed with construction of the Work within ten (10) days of receiving instructions to commence work and will complete all work ready for full legal occupancy and Substantial Performance described in the Tender Documents, no later than

.2 The Bidder acknowledges and agrees that so long as a building permit is obtained and the Bidder is directed to commence Work within the (____) calendar days following the Closing Date, even if such direction does not occur until the eighty-ninth (89th) day following the Closing Date, the Bidder shall not be entitled to a delay claim.

1.11 FEES FOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

.1 The undersigned Bidder acknowledges and agrees that the fees referred to in The Requirements of the Stipulated Price Contract, Standard Document PDSB-2011, as attached, will apply to changes in the Contract not covered by Unit Prices.

1.12 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY

.1 The undersigned Bidder covenants and agrees to comply with all applicable statutory obligations, including without limitation, the obligations imposed by the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario) and all Regulations thereto, and all amending and successor legislation, including without limitation, Bill 208 (the “Act”), in connection with all Work performed by either the Contractor, Sub-Contractors, or any other contractor on, or in connection with the Project.

.2 The undersigned Bidder further covenants and agrees that if awarded the Contract, the undersigned shall abide by all of the items identified under Construction Safety in the General Instructions of the Contract Documents and, for the purposes of the Project, the undersigned specifically agrees to be the “constructor” of the Project within the meaning of the Act, and as such, shall assume all the obligations and responsibilities, and observe all construction safety requirements and procedures and duties of inspection imposed by the Act on the “constructor”, as defined in the General Instructions of the Contract Documents, for all work and services performed by the undersigned, the Sub-contractors or other contractors on or in connection with the Project.



1.13 SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION FORM

• The undersigned Bidder agrees to submit the SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION FORM, as attached, within twenty-four (24) hours of Tender close, which shall including the following:

• COST BREAKDOWN: (SITE WORK, RENOVATION COST, ADDITION COST)

• LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS / SUPPLIERS / INSTALLERS

• UNIT PRICES

• ITEMIZED PRICES - REQUESTED BY CONSULTANTS

• IN LIEU OF PRICES - REQUESTED BY CONSULTANTS

• ALTERNATE PRICES TO BASE BID

• LIST OF ALTERNATIVE BIDS SUBMITTED FOR CONSIDERATION.

1.14 DECLARATION OF NO CONFLICT

.1 The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that this Tender submission is made in good faith and without any connection, knowledge, comparison of figures, or arrangements with any other company, firm, or person making a Tender for the same work and is, in all respects, fair and without collusion with any other bidder for this Contract, and without fraud. The undersigned also represents and warrants that, to the best of the undersigned’s knowledge and belief, no actual or potential conflict of interest exists with respect to the submission of the Tender or performance of the Contract other than those disclosed hereunder. The undersigned confirms that, where the Board discovers that the undersigned has failed to disclose all actual or potential conflicts of interest, the Board may disqualify the undersigned or terminate any Contract awarded to the undersigned pursuant to this Tender process. The undersigned understands that, for the purposes hereof, “conflict of interest” also includes:

(a) in relation to the Tender process, the undersigned has an unfair advantage or engages in conduct, directly or indirectly, that may give the undersigned an unfair advantage, including:

(i) having or having access to information in the preparation of the undersigned’s

proposal that is confidential to the Board and not available to other bidders; (ii) communicating with any person with a view to influencing preferred treatment in

the Tender process; or, (iii) engaging in conduct that compromises or could be seen to compromise the

integrity of the open and competitive process and render that process non-competitive and unfair; or,

(b) in relation to the performance of its contractual obligations in a Board contract, the

undersigned’s other commitments, relationships or financial interests:

(i) could or could be perceived to exercise an improper influence over the objective, unbiased and impartial exercise of the Board’s independent judgment; or,

(ii) could or could be perceived to compromise, impair or be incompatible with the

effective performance of the undersigned’s contractual obligations.



1.15 MUNICIPAL FREEDOM OF INFORMATION AND PROTECTION OF PRIVACY ACT

.1 This Tender and supporting documentation shall become the property of the Board. Information in a Tender is subject to potential disclosure to third parties after the award, in accordance with the provisions of the Municipal Freedom of Information and Protection of Privacy Act, R.S.O. 1990 (“MFOIPOP”), including any of the amendments to the Act to date. The Bidder acknowledges that any personal or confidential information which Bidders provide is being collected and will be used exclusively for the purposes of analyzing, evaluating and assessing Tenders submitted. Any information a Bidder wishes to identify as proprietary and have maintained as confidential, excluding unit pricing information as well as the total dollar value of the Tender, must be clearly identified as such, and any proposed restrictions on disclosure specified. For the purposes of a report to the Trustees of the Board, pricing information as well as the total dollar value of the Tender may be reported in a public report and will not be considered confidential. In addition, the Board may be ordered by the Information & Privacy Commissioner under the provisions of MFOIPOP to disclose additional information identified by a Bidder as proprietary and confidential.

1.16 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

.1 BY SUBMITTING A TENDER, THE UNDERSIGNED BIDDER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT THE BOARD WILL HAVE NO LIABILITY OR OBLIGATION TO ANY TENDER EXCEPT ONLY THAT OF THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER, IF ANY, AWARDED THE CONTRACT BY THE BOARD, IN ITS SOLE DISCRETION. THE BIDDER ALSO AGREES THAT IF THE UNDERSIGNED IS NOT AWARDED THE CONTRACT, THE BOARD SHALL BE FULLY AND FOREVER RELEASED AND DISCHARGED OF ALL LIABILITY AND OBLIGATIONS RELATING TO THIS REQUEST FOR TENDER AND ALL ITS SUBMISSION PROCEDURES. ALL BIDDERS RESPONDING TO THIS REQUEST FOR TENDER SHALL ACCEPT THE DECISION OF THE BOARD AS FINAL AND BINDING.

1.17 SIGNING OF TENDER

.1 The undersigned Bidder is hereby submitting this Stipulated Sum Tender under a Corporate Seal as a Limited Company or witnessed as an Individual, or Partnership.

PRINT COMPANY NAME ________________________________________________ PRINT NAME OF CONTACT

PERSON REGARDING THIS TENDER:

________________________________________________

SIGNATURE OF SIGNING OFFICER:

________________________________________________

PRINT TITLE OF SIGNING OFFICER:

________________________________________________

SIGNATURE OF WITNESS:

________________________________________________

PRINT NAME OF WITNESS:

________________________________________________

AFFIX CORPORATE SEAL:

END OF SECTION


Version 2.0 Issued: June 3, 2013 Section: C.1 – Guide Spec. Instructions to Bidders Page 1 of 12

Instructions to Bidders Peel District School Board

2013

6/3/2013



Part 1 General

1.1 INVITATION

.1 Bid Call

.1 Consultants are to review and incorporate in their Instructions to Bidders, and the Supplementary General Conditions the following Board requirements.

.2 Work not included in this Contract comprises of the following:

.3 Sealed stipulated sum tenders, submitted on the tender forms supplied, including all

Addenda issued prior to the closing of Tenders must be signed under seal, executed, and dated and received in the Purchasing Department, 1st Level, H.J.A. Brown Education Centre, Peel District School Board, 5650 Hurontario Street, Mississauga, Ontario L5R 1C6.

On or Before local time on:

.4 Tender shall be submitted for project on forms provided by the Consultant and shall be

marked on the outside of a 9” x 12” envelope with the contractors name, address and phone number in the upper corner and the following: Project Name:

Project Address:

Tender Number:

.5 ALL BLANKS IN THE TENDER FORM SHALL BE FULLY COMPLETED OR THE TENDER MAY BE INVALIDATED. TENDERS NOT COMPLETED IN FULL, MAY, AT THE DISCRETION OF THE BOARD BE REJECTED.

.6 The Tender Form shall be signed by the appropriate officers of the Contractor’s firm. Incorporated companies shall affix their corporate seal under the hands of their authorized officers. Drawings and specifications shall be returned to the Consultant within 10 days of the closing of Tenders. A second copy of the Tender Form shall be retained by the Bidder.

.7 Tenders shall be valid for ( ) Calendar Days from the date of closing above.

.8 The Tender Breakdown, when listed on form of Tender, must be submitted at time of Tender.

.9 The List of Subcontractors/Suppliers/Installers, not listed on Form of Tender, must be submitted by the three lowest Bidders and/or as requested by the Consultants, no later than twenty-four (24) hours after close of Tender.

.10 When listed on the Tender Form to provide, on a separate form, any “in Lieu of Prices” requested by the Consultant; any “Alternate Prices to the Base Bid” proposed by Bidder; any “Supplementary Alternate Prices” proposed by the Bidder; as well as all Unit Prices.

60-90 sixty-ninety

To be provided by the Board

DAY MONTH YEAR



002200 .11 Submit Section - Supplementary Information Form with all information fully completed within twenty-four (24) hours after Tender closing time by fax or by hand to the office of the Architect.

.12 Submit Section –Mechanical Supplementary Information Form, and Section - Electrical Supplementary Information Form, with all information fully completed

within twenty-four (24) hours after Tender closing time by fax to BOTH the office of the Architect AND the office of the Mechanical and Electrical Engineers. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Specification Divisions for Mechanical and Electrical Supplementary Information Form.

.13 Offers submitted after the time stipulated shall be returned to Bidder unopened.

.14 Offers will not be opened publicly.

.15 Amendments to submitted offer will be permitted if received in writing prior to bid closing and if endorsed by same party or parties who signed and sealed offer.

1.2 INTENT

.1 Intent of this Bid call is to obtain an offer to perform work to complete the construction of:

Name of School:

located at Address of School:

1.3 CONTRACT/BID DOCUMENTS

.1 Agreement Form.

.2 Definitions

.1 Contract Documents: Defined in the Board’s Stipulated Price Contract, Standard Document PDSB-2011, and Definitions.

.2 Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Instructions to Bidders, Form of Tender, and Bid Supplementary Forms identified herein.

.3 Bid, Offer, or Bidding: Act of submitting an offer under seal.

.4 Bid Price: Monetary sum identified in Bid Form as an offer to perform work.

.3 Availability

.1 Bid Documents may be obtained at office of Consultant located at:

.2 One set of Bid Documents can be obtained by bidders upon receipt of a refundable deposit by certified cheque in amount of $ 200.00 per set.

.3 Bidders may request two (2) sets only. Additional sets may be purchased at a cost of $ 200.00 per set. (The additional sets are purchased and the Board requests their return, but no cost will be returned on the purchased sets).

.4 Deposit will be refunded in the amount of $200.00 or $400.00 to all unsuccessful bidders if Bid Documents are returned complete, undamaged, unmarked and reusable to the Consultant within 10 days of notice of award or rejection of all bids. Failure to comply will result in forfeiture of deposit.

.5 Bid Documents are made available only for purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their use does not confer license or grant for other purposes.

.6 A copy of soils investigation report is found in Bid Documents.

.4 Examination

.1 Bid Tender Documents are on display only at Hamilton, Mississauga, Toronto, Barrie, Grand Valley and Durham Construction Association plan room facilities.

.2 Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify that documents are complete.

.3 Immediately notify Consultant upon finding discrepancies or omissions in Bid Documents.

EST MST



.5 Queries/Addenda

.1 Direct questions to office of the Consultant BY FAX or E-Mail ONLY, to the attention of:

FAX: E-Mail: .2 Addenda may be issued during bidding period or post-closing, if circumstances warrant

post-closing addenda, in the sole discretion of the Board. All addenda become part of Contract Documents. Include costs in Bid Price.

.3 All potential bidders to meet at the front entrance of the school and await direction from the Board representative(s). Failure of the potential bidder to be present and signed in from the time the meeting is called to order until the meeting is adjourned will result in disqualification from bidding. In addition to signing in, the potential bidders will be required to sign out at the adjournment of the meeting [as called by the Board representative(s).

.4 Verbal answers are only binding when confirmed by written addenda.

.5 Clarification to bidders questions, if any are warranted, will be in form of an addendum, a copy of which will be forwarded to known bidders no later than ( ) hours before receipt of Bids.

.6 Product/System Options: suggested wording when required

.1 There are two opportunities for a Bidder to identify Alternates in the Bidder’s Tender. The first method is to identify Alternates at the time of the Tender submission on an Alternate Form to be attached to the Form of Tender. This document is to be entitled ALTERNATE PRICES TO BASE BID: .1 Wherever possible or practical, the specifications are written on a “Base Bid”

principle. When “Base Bid” product or service is identified, a number of “alternates” have been listed. The Bidder must tender on the “Base Bid” and indicate, on a separate sheet, Alternates and a credit to the Contract if one of the specified alternate supplier/manufacturer/installer or material/method of construction is being proposed by the Bidder. Only those identified Alternates in the Specification may be listed on the Alternate Form. If the Specification identifies a “Base Bid” with a number of Alternates and the Bidder does not identify on the Alternate Form any of the indicated Alternates with a credit, then the Contractor shall provide, in all instances, the “Base Bid” supplier/manufacturer/installer or material/method of construction.

.2 The Contractor shall accept full responsibility that a proposed Alternate will not exceed space requirements as indicated on the drawings and that coordination of the Contractor’s own and related work and cost of installation is included in the Contractor’s work. Approved alternate products or assemblies shall comply with all technical and design requirements specified in the “Base Bid”. (E.g. materials, gauge, finish, colour, size, fit, mounting, strength, durability, operation and warranty.) If any additional design fee, either Architectural or Engineering, is required due to a change or substitution requested by the Contractor, the cost of such fee must be paid by the Contractor.

.2 The second method is to identify alternates on an Alternate Form to be attached to the Supplementary Information Form and submitted, as requested by the Consultant, within the specified 24 hour period. This document is to be entitled. SUPPLEMENTARY ALTERNATE PRICES: .1 Mechanical and Electrical Alternates may be submitted on the Supplementary

Information Form. .2 If proposals for Alternates (not already identified as Alternates in the

specification) are submitted by the Contractor to the Consultant during the tender period in sufficient time to allow for analysis and the issuance of an Addendum to include the proposals, then such proposal may be included in the Form of Tender under In Lieu of Prices.

48 forty eight



.3 Proposed alternates which are not covered by an Addendum and when listed in the Form of Tender under In Lieu of Prices, may be considered if the proposed entitled Supplementary Alternate Prices accompanies the Supplementary Information Form as a separate document on which the Alternate is completely specified and described, and on which is given the reason for substitution.

.4 Any proposed Alternates will not necessarily be accepted.

.5 The Contractor shall accept full responsibility that a proposed Alternate will not exceed space requirements as indicated on the drawings and that coordination of the Contractor’s own and related work and cost of installation is included in the Contractor’s work. Approved alternate products or assemblies shall comply with all technical and design requirements specified in the “Base Bid”. (E.g. materials, gauge, finish, colour, size, fit, mounting, strength, durability, operation and warranty.) If any additional design fee, either Architectural or Engineering, is required due to a change or substitution requested by the Contractor, the cost of such fee must be paid by the Contractor.

.3 Unless substitutions are submitted in this manner and subsequently accepted, provide products as specified.



Part 2 OWNER The Owner of the Project is:

PEEL DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD H.J.A. Brown Education Centre

5650 Hurontario Street Mississauga, Ontario L5R 1C6

Phone: (905) 890-1099 Fax: (905) 890-9453

2.1 ARCHITECT The Architect on this Project is: Company: Address: City: Phone: Fax/E-Mail: Direct questions BY FAX to the office of

2.2 SUB CONSULTANT The Structural Engineer for this Project is: Company: Address: City: Phone: Fax/E-Mail:

2.3 The Mechanical Consultant on this Project is: Company: Address: City: Phone: Fax/E-Mail:

2.4 The Electrical Consultant on this Project is: Company: Address: City: Phone: Fax/E-Mail:



2.5 The Site Services Consultant on this Project is: Company: Address: City: Phone: Fax/E-Mail:

2.6 SITE ASSESSMENT suggested wording

.1 Site Examination

.1 Visit project site and surrounding area before submitting Bid.

.2 Notwithstanding the responsibility, a Site Visit and a mandatory site meeting to the project site has been arranged for General Contractors and their sub trades as follows:

MANDATORY SITE MEETING WILL BE HELD ON

[ ] All potential bidders to meet at the front entrance of the school and await direction from the Board representative(s). Failure of the potential bidder to be present and signed in from the time the meeting is called to order until the meeting is adjourned will result in disqualification from bidding. In addition to signing in, the potential bidders will be required to sign out at the adjournment of the meeting as called by the Board representative(s).

.3 FAILURE TO ATTEND THE MANDATORY SITE MEETING AS DIRECTED WILL RESULT IN THE REJECTION OF YOUR BID SUBMISSION

.4 Before tendering, the Bidder shall examine the site, and the soils Reports provided with the Tender Documents.

.5 Proposals shall include the cost imposed by existing conditions and limitations of site and the accepted proposal shall be held to have included such costs. NO ALLOWANCE WILL BE MADE FOR FAILURE TO EXAMINE THE EXISTING SITE.

.6 The levels and other information shown on the drawings are furnished in good faith for the guidance of the Contractor, but shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of ascertaining to the Contractor’s own satisfaction the nature of all conditions at the site.

…Set out address of site and date and time of Site Meeting…



2.7 BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS

.1 Security Deposit

.1 Each tender shall be accompanied by a Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond in the most recent form approved by the Canadian Construction Association from a Surety Company, acceptable to the Board. The Bid Bond shall be in the amount of

of Tender Price .2 together with an Agreement to Bond. The Bid Bond must be valid for a minimum of

( ) Calendar Days from the closing date. Tenders not accompanied by a Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond will be declared informal.

.3 A Performance Bond, equal to 50 % of the contract price, shall be furnished through a Surety Company or Insurance Company approved by the Consultant and the Board according to terms and conditions acceptable to the Board and the Consultant.

.4 On completion of the work, the Performance Bond shall remain in force as a MAINTENANCE BOND for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the building by the Board. It shall form a guarantee of workmanship and materials for the one (1) year period.

.5 When specifically required The Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors are required to furnish a 50% Performance Bond and a 50% Labour and Material Payment Bond covering the work of their respective subcontracts. Refer to Divisions 26 and 33. These bonds are to be assigned jointly to the Board and the General Contractor. The General Contractor must submit an Agreement to Bond from the proposed Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors within 48 hours of close of tender. [NOTE TO CONSULTANTS: THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION 2.7.1.5 MAY BE DELETED ON SMALLER PROJECTS, WITH THE CONSENT OF THE BOARD.]

.6 Use latest edition CCDC approved bond forms.

.2 Performance Assurance

.1 Tenders must include all costs involved in having the contract Fit for Legal Occupancy, and Substantial Performance, and having the entire building Totally Completed as stipulated on Form of Tender.

.3 Fees for Changes in Work suggested words

.1 It must be clearly understood that the Board cannot accept any price variation in the supply or installation of products or labour or materials from those submitted and carried by the Contractor at the time of tender. During the contract period, the Board will not be responsible for, or entertain any price increase in to the cost of materials or labour carried in the tender amount.

.2 The tender amount shall not include H.S.T. but shall include all other applicable excise taxes, custom duties, freight, exchange and all other charges in effect and known to come into effect during the construction of the building described in this Contract.

.3 Unit Prices are exclusive of H.S.T.

.4 The successful Bidder must provide the Bidder’s H.S.T. Registration Number and each request for payment must show this number and the amount of H.S.T. payable.

.5 At the time of tender submission, and when so clearly requested include In Lieu of Prices listed in the Form of Tender for the identified items. Express each In Lieu of Price as a Credit or an Extra to the amount tendered. Contract Amount will be adjusted consistent with their acceptance or rejection by the Board. In Lieu of Prices DO NOT include H.S.T.

60-90 sixty-ninety

5-10%



.4 Unit Prices suggested wording

.1 UNIT PRICES FOR ADDITIONAL WORK SHALL NOT EXCEED UNIT PRICES FOR DEDUCTED WORK BY MORE THAN 25%.

.2 Unit prices must be submitted at time of Tender.

.3 The Board reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices prior to entering into a contract.

.4 The Board reserves the right to negotiate any or all of the unit prices with the Contractor prior to signing a contract.

.5 Should the Board and the Contractor be unable to mutually agree on the amounts of the unit prices, the Contractor agrees that the Board has the right to hire outside contractors to perform the work concerned under a separate contract, without any financial penalty whatsoever to the Board and without additional overhead and profit to the Contractor.

.6 Refer to Peel District School Board Stipulated Price Contract, Standard Document PDSB-2011, as attached, “Valuation and Certification to Change in the Work” regarding valuation of changes not covered by Unit Prices.

.5 Subcontractors suggested wording

.1 Bidders are required to submit the list of subcontractors. The list is to be submitted within twenty-four (24) hours of tender opening, on the Form of Tender included in the Contract Documents. The Bidder shall name in these lists the subcontractors proposed to perform the work under the contract. No substitutions to these lists shall be made without the written approval of the Consultants.

.2 The selection of Subcontractors must be acceptable to the Board and to the Consultants. If the required substitution of a Subcontractor affects the sub-tender price, an adjustment will be made in the amount of the General Contract by the amount only of the difference in sub-tenders, without additional overhead or profit to the Contractor.

.3 If the Bidder proposes to do work with persons directly employed by the Bidder and not subcontract then the Bidder shall insert the words “Contractor” provided the Bidder can submit proof that the Bidder’s forces have had previous experience in this field.

.4 Subcontractors shall be actually engaged as their own recognized business, in the line of work required by the specifications and shall carry out themselves the work which they are awarded by subcontract. They shall not be permitted to re-subcontract their work or portions thereof, to other contractors. THIS INCLUDES SHOP DRAWINGS.

.6 Fair Wage and Labour

.1 Rate of wages, hours and conditions of work shall be in accordance with Provincial Codes and as generally recognized and accepted in the locality. Building mechanics and laborers resident in the district are to be employed where suitable.

.2 Labour forces employed on the site may have compatible affiliation with any labour organization. Union contract itself is not a prerequisite.

.7 Discrepancies and Omissions suggested wording

.1 Bidders, including subcontractors, finding specified items unavailable, finding discrepancies in, or omissions from, the drawings or specifications or other contract documents, or having any doubt as to the intent or meaning of any part thereof, shall at once notify the Consultant, who will issue an Addendum to all bidders in explanation of the inquiry if necessary.

.2 All information will be issued by the Consultant during the time of bidding in the form of typewritten addenda and such addenda will be available to all Bidders. These shall become part of the contract documents and must be shown on the Form of Tender as having been received.

.3 NO ORAL INSTRUCTIONS WILL BE VALID.



.8 Bidding Assumptions suggested wording

.1 All bids submitted, including bids by subcontractors are assumed to be based upon the complete set of Contract Documents. No alterations in prices for items of Work will be considered if it is determined by the consultants or the Contractor that bids were not based on the complete set of documents (e.g. bids based upon Specifications but not on drawings and vice-versa).

.9 Errors in Tender suggested wording

.1 . The Board shall not entertain requests for gratuitous payments arising from errors alleged to have been made in a tender which the Board has accepted.

.10 Building Permit

.1 Building Permit has been applied for by the Consultant and shall be paid for by the Board.

.2 The Contractor must, however, pay all other necessary fees, deposits and charges related to Municipal, Provincial and Federal Requirements. The General Contractor is responsible for determining the amounts of these permits, fees, etc.

.11 Contract Documents

.1 The Contract shall be subject to the Requirements of the Stipulated Price Contract, Standard Document PDSB-2011, as attached. The successful bidder must sign the “Agreement between Board and Contractor” using this document and these specifications and drawings, within ten (10) Working Days of notification of award. Failure to do so may result in termination of the award. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment until this document is signed.

.2 All Contractors will be held to have examined and made themselves familiar with the various articles of these Standard Documents and shall be as binding for all sections of the following specifications as though written in full therein.

2.8 OFFER ACCEPTANCE/ REJECTION

.1 Privilege and Waiver of Non-Compliance

.1 Notwithstanding anything elsewhere herein set out, the lowest or any proposal will not necessarily be accepted by the Board, and the Board reserves the right in its sole discretion to reject any and all proposals at any time or to accept any proposal which is considered advantageous by the Board. In addition, the Board reserves the right to re-bid or cancel this bid request in its entirety, or any portion thereof and proceed by way of negotiations. Proposals which are non-compliant with the requirements of this Tender, or which contain qualifying conditions, may be disqualified or the Board may waive any non-compliance with the Tender documents, and in its sole discretion, retain for consideration proposals which are non-conforming or non-compliant. In addition, the Board reserves the right to invalidate any submission from a bidder; (i) who has threatened or is currently involved in any legal disputes with the Board with respect to any previously awarded tenders, whether or not such legal disputes arise prior to or subsequent to the issuance of this tender; or (ii) whose past performance has been unsatisfactory with respect to any previously awarded tender, in the sole and unfettered discretion of the Board, whether or not such unsatisfactory performance occurs prior to or subsequent to the issuance of this tender.

.2 Awarding of work for multiple sites

.1 The Board reserves the right to award contractors only the amount of work to which the Board is confident can be completed on schedule by the successful bidder. In order to expedite the completion of work within the Term of Contract, the Board may distribute awards from bids at its sole and unfettered discretion. The decision of the Board will be final.



.3 Acceptance of Offer

.1 It must be clearly understood that the final acceptance of this contract is subject to approvals of the Board and other bodies and these may delay final approval. There will be no adjustments in the tendered price for a period of ( ) Calendar Days from receipt of Tenders due to delays resulting from obtaining necessary approvals.

.4 No Change in Pricing

.1 It must be clearly understood that the Board cannot accept any price variation in the supply or installation of products or labour or materials from those submitted and carried by the Contractor at the time of tender. During the contract period, the Board will not be responsible for, or entertain any price increase, in the cost of materials or labour carried in the tender amount for any reason, including acts of war or world events.

END OF SECTION

Part 3 Products

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

90 ninety



Part 4 INFORMATION TO BIDDERS 4.1 General

.1 The Board reserves the right to alter the closing date in this Tender or to cancel this Tender without any penalty or cost to the Board.

.2 Awarding of Work for multiple sites - the Board reserves the right to award Contractors only the amount of work which the Board is confident can be completed on schedule by the successful Bidder. In order to expedite the completion of work within the Term of Contract, the Board may distribute awards from bids at its sole and unfettered discretion. The decision of the Board will be final.

.3 Proceedings against the Board – The Bidder represents and warrants that the bidder is not party to any suits, actions, litigation proceedings, arbitrations, alternative dispute resolutions, investigations or claims (the “Claims”) by or against or otherwise involving the Board and the Bidder. The Bidder acknowledges that the Board will reject the bid in view of current, pending or threatened litigation, arbitration, alternative dispute resolution or disputes involving the Board and the Bidder. Note: Certificate: The successful Bidder(s) may also be required, at the discretion of the Board, to sign a Certificate in a form satisfactory to the Board confirming that the successful Bidder(s) is not associated with any company involved in litigation with the Board.

.4 Change in scope – The Board reserves the right in its sole and unfettered discretion to change the scope of the goods and or services requested in this Tender and invite the re-submission of such Tender on, before, or after the closing date, without necessitating a new Tender.

.5 The following condition may apply to all vendors who are successful in obtaining business from the Board for the first time. Any Vendor who is successful in obtaining business from the Board for the first time may not be allowed to bid on any further work required by the Board, until such time as the vendor has successfully completed the first awarded contract in a proper and satisfactory manner in the opinion of the Board. The Board reserves this right in its sole and unfettered discretion.

.6 Goods, services and construction valued at $100,000.00 or more are subject to Ontario’s trade agreements.

.7 The Board shall have the right, in its sole discretion to verify any bidders statement or claim made in the bidders tender or made subsequently in an interview, site visit, oral presentation, demonstration or discussion by whatever means the Board may deem appropriate, including contacting persons in addition to those offered as references, and to reject any bidders statement or claim, if such statement or claim or its tender is patently unwarranted or is questionable; or the bidder shall cooperate in the verification of information and is deemed to consent to the Board verifying such information.

.8 Not later than 60 days following the date of posting of a contract award notification in respect to the Tender, a bidder may contact the applicable Board contact to request a debriefing. Any request that is not timely received will not be considered and the bidder will be notified in writing. A request for a debriefing must be submitted in writing, detailing with reasonable particularity the questions the Bidder is requesting to be answered.

END OF SECTION


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.2 – SITE WORK Page 1 of 5

C.2 – SITE WORK SITE DESIGN & SITE COMPONENTS Municipal Requirements Refer also to notes in ‘Planters and Landscape Features’ subsection below. For components listed here in meet these Board requirements and also where under the jurisdiction of the Municipality negotiate reasonable minimum levels on behalf of the Owner, especially with regard to extents of curbing, concrete islands, signage, etc. Parking • For all projects provide no more than 12 additional parking spaces beyond the

By-Law requirement for that project. • In unusual circumstances discuss with the owner any deviations from this

number. • Review with Board parking requirements for additional parking spaces for

“Full day Kindergarten” (FDK) as additional spaces may be required. • Avoid raised parking islands in interior of parking areas or the ends of parking

aisles which may obstruct snow clearing Asphalt, Curbing and Sidewalks • Ensure the requirements of the Geotechnical Reports match the Board’s

standards referred to herein, otherwise Board standards for medium and heavy duty asphalt and sub-base are considered minimum standards. Ref. Arch. B.2.10.a

• Consider incorporating a ledge detail into the concrete curbs that meet sidewalks to support sidewalks in the event that settlement occurs Ref. Arch. B.2.2.a, B.2.3.a

• Ensure the Fire Route and main drop off (Kiss’n’Ride’) aisles are paved with Heavy Duty Paving Ref. Arch. 2.10.a

Traffic Safety and Control • Board standard pavement marking lines and messages Ref. Arch. B.2.4.a, B.2.5.a, B.2.6.a • Refer to the Board Standard Specification following this section. Ref.Arch.C.2 – Std. Spec. Pavement Markings Fire Route • Ensure that designation of bus parking or bus lanes on site plans does not

conflict with fire route proximity to front entrance as required by the code. Ref. Arch. B.2.7.a Fire Gate • Position fire gate so that when in open or close position, the gate does not

pose a hazard for children in the asphalt play area. Where possible consider placing the fire gate between the main school and the garbage enclosure. Ref. Arch. B.2.9.a



Site Signage • Do not post a PDSB job site sign for renovations or additions. • Determine fire route signage with the municipality • For new schools use the standard job site sign with current telephone number

received from the Owner. Ref. Arch. B.2.8.a, B.2.11.a

Garbage Enclosure • Design garbage enclosure ensuring a reasonable compromise between

proximity to custodian room and proper vehicular access route for loading and unloading.

• Design garbage enclosures to fit two 6yd standard bins for new and renovated school.

• Provide wood siding on doors to garbage enclosures if doors are required. • Review with owner if existing schools have a recycling program which may

have additional requirements. Ref. Arch. B.1.14.4.a, B.1.14.4.b Chain Link Fencing • Board standard fencing is black vinyl coated chain link with 38x38mm mesh

and 6 Ga wire; posts, top and bottom rails to be black painted schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.

• Fencing where required at perimeter of site adjacent to residential areas shall be 1800mm high; fencing at kindergarten shall be 1200mm high; fencing where required adjacent parks or streets may be 1200mm high however review individual conditions with owner.

• Where minimum requirements are exceeded by Municipal standards, negotiate reasonable minimums and comply in order to expedite site plan approval and review requirements with owner.

Bicycle Racks • Provide tubular galvanized and pre-finished bicycle racks to suit site design. • Acceptable products model TC-7 Cobra Rack as manufactured by Tristan,

Ayr, Ontario or acceptable alternative meeting similar design. Include detail for concrete anchorage into asphalt where required.

Flag Pole • Provide one (1) with internal lanyard type with stepped aluminum shaft, spun

aluminum base. Acceptable products: Model No. TS 30 as manufactured by Daf Indal Ltd. or acceptable alternates by John Ewing or All-Canadian Flagpole Co.



Planters and Landscape Features • Landscaped areas do not include an irrigation system. • Design exterior hose bib locations on façades at closest practical point to

shrub beds or sod which will require maintenance. • Avoid raised planter beds; where required consider “armour stone” rather than

poured concrete or unit masonry planters which require a concrete cap. • Planter beds shall be planted out in material which is “self maintaining” and

fills in appropriately to avoid weed growth and maintenance. • Provide trees to minimum standards of Municipal requirements. • Do not include landscaped buffers along the sides of schools and do not

design flower beds. • Typically design to minimum Municipal standards with planted beds or trees

and shrubs along the front boulevard of the school. • Playfields and non-hard surface open space is to be sod; include in contract

for a minimum of four (4) cuts and watering for an appropriate period (typically one year) until sod is established.

• Specify a minimum 48 day maintenance period for new sod after installation, including watering and cutting.

• Review with owner timing of sod and include temporary fencing to protect if occupancy of the school is before sod is appropriately established.

• Avoid designing berms or slopes in any landscaped areas which will pose a safety concern for students in winter or in wet conditions.

• Compaction of materials under playfield areas shall be 95% standard proctor dried density (SPDD).

• Specify an extended warranty for full replacement materials and labour on trees and shrubs for 2 years Ref. Arch. C.1 General Req’mnts - Warranties

• Specify in the base contract for temporary protection fencing to surround the main soccer field and/or entire area of new sod for a period of 6 weeks after sod is laid. Review with the owner if this requirement is waived if the school will not be occupied until sod has been established at least 6 weeks.

• No mesh topsoil • Provide weed double filter cloth for gardens, flower beds, etc. Renovations and Additions: • Parking spaces: note that design includes for no more than 12 parking spaces

beyond by-law requirement–ensure adequate parking for portables. If portables are temporary due to addition, negotiate to meet parking by law after completion of the addition.



PLAY AREAS AND SPORTS FIELDS General Issues Asphalt Play Area • Design an asphalt apron play area, typically at the back of the school, which is

at least 15 meters deep. Ensure connection to all entrance doors with ample space for lining up students outside the door. Construction to be medium duty paving.

• Kindergarten outdoor play areas shall be all medium duty asphalt. • Extent of pathway connections to other areas of the school site are to be

reviewed at concept design stage. Construction may be asphalt or concrete sidewalk.

• Review with the owner the applicability of basketball half courts in the asphalt area.

Soccer Pitch/Sports Fields • Where space permits the Board constructs a soccer pitch on Junior and Middle

Schools. The ideal size of the soccer pitch is 70 x 110 metres. Painted lines are not in contract. Ref. Arch. B.2.1.a

• If site area restricts a full size soccer pitch the filed may be reduced proportionally in length to width at a ratio of 1.46:1.

• If a Middle School site is too restrictive for a full size soccer pitch, review with the Owner the potential to design 2 smaller soccer pitches.

• Playfields and soccer fields are to be irrigated. • provide an underground drainage system under the soccer pitch consisting of

100 and 50 mm perforated PVC weeping tiles with an outlet to connect to the storm system




PORTABLE CLASSROOMS Design Issues: • New school sites are to be designed to accommodate up to 12 portables. • Portables sitting design issues to be reviewed include:

• Proximity to school entrance(s) • Aisle orientation for supervision and snow removal • Route for portables moving truck to enter or exit the site • Location of fire route and hydrant • Extent of heavy duty paving for fire route • Grading and drainage for hard surface and pathways to school building • Setbacks from property lines • OBC requirements for spatial separation and limiting distances • OBC and/or by law requirements that are applicable beyond 12 portables • Review Municipality Fire Dept. by-laws related to fire route coverage • Parking spaces: note that basic site design standard is for no more than 12

parking spaces beyond by-law requirement – ensure adequate parking for portables. If portables are temporary due to addition, negotiate to meet parking by law after completion of the addition.

• Confirm barrier free compliance in the main building, as portables typically have no washroom provision and may not have a ramp entrance.

• Coordinate with the owner, the timing and sequencing of portable moves to and from the site if it occurs during the construction of new schools, renovations or addition.

Construction Issues: • If portables are considered for the site during the construction Phase, confirm

and coordinate scope and responsibility of the general Contractor and Portables Contractor for grading preparations, paving and fencing/gates.

Renovations and Additions: • During the school year, confirm fire access route is maintained to all site

areas-including portables-and not through the Hoarded construction area. • Confirm and coordinate scope and responsibility of the general Contractor and

Portables Contractor for grading preparations, paving and fencing/gates.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.2 – Guide Spec. Painted Pavement Markings Page 1 of 3

Guide Specification: Painted Pavement Markings PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. Scope:

.1 It is the intention of the Peel District School Board to obtain the services of a

qualified and competent contractor(s), with a minimum of 5 years experience in supplying and installing the products specific to this quote.

.2 This contract does not create an exclusive right for the successful bidder@) to perform all work. The Board reserves the right to have all or any part of the proposed work done by others.

.3 Comply with the requirements of the General Conditions Section 01000 and this specification.

.4 The contractor shall supply all labour, materials, equipment, plant, services and incidentals to complete all work as specified and as required for the: a) Removal of pavement markings as specified and as outlined on drawings. b) Painting of new pavement markings as specified and as outlined on drawings. c) Re-painting of existing markings.

1.2 Location of Work:

1. Any Peel District School Board site within the region of Peel. 1.3 Work Schedule:

1. All work to commence on dates as agreed to and as assigned by the Board designee. Ensure weather conditions are acceptable. Ensure Board site personnel, custodian and administration staff have been advised of work scheduling.

2. When requested and required (and all costs to be included in your unit bids), and as part of the service provided by the successful bidder, visit site, meet with Board designee, confirm dimensions and all quantities; determine existing conditions and limitations and requirements for protection of adjacent areas, repairs, replacement etc.

3. If required it will be the responsibility of the contractor to notify Board Representative of any power hook-up requirements 48 hours in advance.

4. If required provide temporary protection to all adjacent areas whether in work area or outside of work area. Keep all adjacent doors closed to seal areas from dust etc. Cover vents and air intakes to control dust/paint migration.

1.4 Measurement For Payment:

1. Pavement marking will be measured in meters of solid lines and as per game layout unit.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Removing Pavement Markings:

1. Abrasivesandsolventsusedforremovalofpaint,oil,grease,rubberdeposits:

proprietary products specially designed for pavement cleaning, subject to approval by the Board Designee.

2. In areas designated by the Board, remove paint markings by rotary grinding, other methods must be approved by the Board Designee.

3. Exercise care to avoid dislodging of coarse aggregate particles, excessive removal of lines, damage to bituminous binder or damage to joint and crack sealers.

2.2 Paint:

1. To CGSB 1 -GP-74M, alkyd traffic paint. 2. Colour: to CGSB 1-GP-12C, yellow 505-308

3. Thinner: to CAN/CGSB-1.5. 2.3 References:

1. CGSB 1 -GP-12c-68, Standard Paint Colours. 2. CAN/CGSB-1.5-M91, Low Flash Petroleum Spirits Thinner. 3. CGSB 1-GP-71-83, Method, of Testing Paints and Pigments.

4. CGSB 1-GP-74M-79, Paint, Traffic, Alkyd. 2.4 Samples:

1. When requested, submit to the Board the following material sample quantities at least 1 week prior to commencing work.

Sampling to CGSB 1-GP-71.

2. Mark samples with name of project and its location, paint manufacturer's

name and address, name of paint, CGSB specification number and formulation number and batch number.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Equipment Requirements:

1. Paint applicator to be an approved pressure type mobile distributor capable of applying paint in single, double and dashed lines. Applicator to be capable of applying marking components uniformly, at rates specified, and to dimensions as indicated, and to have positive shut-off.

3.2 Condition of Surfaces:

1. Pavement surface to be dry, free from ponded water, frost, ice, dust, oil, grease and other foreign materials.

3.3 Application:

1. Pavement markings to be laid out as per Board drawings, 2. Unless otherwise approved by Board Designee, apply paint only when air

temperature is above 10°C, wind speed is less than 60 km/h and no rain is forecast within next 4 h.

3. Apply traffic paint evenly at rate of 3 m2/L. 4. Do not thin paint. 5. Symbols, letters and game layouts to conform to plans and details. 6. Paint lines to be of uniform colour and density with sharp edges. 7. Thoroughly clean distributor tank before refilling with paint of different

colour. 3.4 Tolerance:

1. Paint markings to be within plus or minus 12 mm of dimensions indicated. 3.5 Protection of Completed Work

1. Insure that all concrete curbs, automobiles and the buildings are protected. 2. Protect pavement markings until dry.

END OF SECTION


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.2 – Guide Spec. Traffic Safety and Control Page 1 of 5

Guide Specification: Traffic Safety and Control SITE DESIGN & SITE COMPONENTS Municipal Requirements Refer also to notes in ‘Planters and Landscape Features’ subsection below. For components listed here in meet these Board requirements and also where under the jurisdiction of the Municipality negotiate reasonable minimum levels on behalf of the Owner, especially with regard to extents of curbing, concrete islands, signage, etc. Parking • For all projects provide no more than 12 parking additional parking spaces

beyond the By-Law requirement for that project. • In unusual circumstances discuss with the owner any deviations from this

number. • Avoid raised parking islands in interior of parking areas or the ends of parking

aisles which may obstruct snow clearing Asphalt, Curbing and Sidewalks • Ensure the requirements of the Geotechnical Reports match the Board’s

standards referred to herein, otherwise Board standards for medium and heavy duty asphalt and sub-base are considered minimum standards. Ref. Arch. B.2.10.a

• Consider incorporating a ledge detail into the concrete curbs that meet sidewalks to support sidewalks in the event that settlement occurs Ref. Arch. B.2.2.a, B.2.3.a

• Ensure the Fire Route and main drop off (Kiss’n’Ride’) aisles are paved with Heavy Duty Paving Ref. Arch. 2.10.a

• Heavy Duty paving to meet spec drawings TD3 Traffic Safety and Control • Specify Board standard pavement marking lines and messages Ref. Arch. B.2.4.a, B.2.5.a, B.2.6.a Fire Route • Ensure that designation of bus parking or bus lanes on site plans does not

conflict with fire route proximity to front entrance as required by the code. Ref. Arch. B.2.7.a • Fire route signage to be not less than .080 gauge material Fire Gate • Position fire gate so that when in open or close position, the gate does not

pose a hazard for children in the asphalt play area. Where possible consider placing the fire gate between the main school and the garbage enclosure. Ref. Arch. B.2.9.a



Site Signage • Do not post a PDSB job site sign for renovations or additions. • Determine fire route signage with the municipality • For new schools use the standard job site sign with current telephone number

received from the Owner. Ref. Arch. B.2.8.a, B.2.11.a Garbage Enclosure • Design garbage enclosure ensuring a reasonable compromise between

proximity to custodian room and proper vehicular access route for loading and unloading.

• Design garbage enclosures for only 2 standard 6 yard bins. • Provide wood siding on doors to garbage enclosures if doors are required. • Review with owner if existing schools have a recycling program which may

have additional requirements. Ref. Arch. B.1.14.4.a, B.1.14.4.b Chain Link Fencing • Board standard fencing is black vinyl coated chain link with 38x38mm mesh

and 6 Gage wire; posts, top and bottom rails to be black painted schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.

• Fencing where required at perimeter of site adjacent to residential areas shall be 1800mm high; fencing at kindergarten shall be 1200mm high; fencing where required adjacent parks or streets may be 1200mm high however review individual conditions with owner.

• Where minimum requirements are exceeded by Municipal standards, negotiate reasonable minimums and comply in order to expedite site plan approval and review requirements with owner.

Bicycle Racks • Provide tubular galvanized and pre-finished bicycle racks to suit site design. • Acceptable products model TC-7 Cobra Rack as manufactured by Tristan,

Ayr, Ontario or acceptable alternative meeting similar design. Include detail for concrete anchorage into asphalt where required.

Flag Pole • Provide one (1) with internal lanyard type with stepped aluminum shaft, spun

aluminum base. Acceptable products: Model No. TS 30 as manufactured by Daf Indal Ltd. or acceptable alternates by John Ewing or All-Canadian Flagpole Co.



Planters and Landscape Features • Landscaped areas do not include an irrigation system. • Design exterior hose bib locations on façades at closest practical point to

shrub beds or sod which will require maintenance. • Avoid raised planter beds; where required consider “armour stone” rather than

poured concrete or unit masonry planters which require a concrete cap. • Planter beds shall be planted out in material which is “self maintaining” and

fills in appropriately to avoid weed growth and maintenance. • Provide trees to minimum standards of Municipal requirements. • Do not include landscaped buffers along the sides of schools and do not

design flower beds. • Typically design to minimum Municipal standards with planted beds or trees

and shrubs along the front boulevard of the school. • Playfields and non-hard surface open space is to be sod; include in contract

for a minimum of four (4) cuts and watering for an appropriate period (typically one year) until sod is established.

• Specify a minimum 48 day maintenance period for new sod after installation, including watering and cutting.

• Review with owner timing of sod and include temporary fencing to protect if occupancy of the school is before sod is appropriately established.

• Avoid designing berms or slopes in any landscaped areas which will pose a safety concern for students in winter or in wet conditions.

• Compaction of materials under playfield areas shall be 95% standard proctor dried density (SPDD).

• Specify an extended warranty for full replacement materials and labour on trees and shrubs for 2 years Ref. Arch. C.1 General Req’mnts - Warranties


Renovations and Additions: • Parking spaces: note that design includes for no more than 12 parking spaces

beyond by-law requirement–ensure adequate parking for portables. If portables are temporary due to addition, negotiate to meet parking by law after completion of the addition.



PLAY AREAS AND SPORTS FIELDS General Issues Asphalt Play Area • Design an asphalt apron play area, typically at the back of the school, which is

at least 15 meters deep. Ensure connection to all entrance doors with ample space for lining up students outside the door. Construction to be medium duty paving.

• Kindergarten outdoor play areas shall be all medium duty asphalt. • Extent of pathway connections to other areas of the school site are to be

reviewed at concept design stage. Construction may be asphalt or concrete sidewalk.

• Review with the owner the applicability of basketball half courts in the asphalt area.

Soccer Pitch • Where space permits the Board constructs a soccer pitch on Junior and Middle

Schools. The ideal size of the soccer pitch is 70 x 110 metres. Painted lines are not in contract. Ref. Arch. B.2.1.a

• If site area restricts a full size soccer pitch the filed may be reduced proportionally in length to width at a ratio of 1.46:1.

• If a Middle School site is too restrictive for a full size soccer pitch, review with the Owner the potential to design 2 smaller soccer pitches.

• Playfields and soccer fields are to irrigated. • provide an underground drainage system under the soccer pitch consisting of

100 and 50 mm perforated PVC weeping tiles with an outlet to connect to the storm system




PORTABLE CLASSROOMS Design Issues: • New school sites are to be designed to accommodate up to 12 portables. • Portables sitting design issues to be reviewed include:

• Proximity to school entrance(s) • Aisle orientation for supervision and snow removal • Route for portables moving truck to enter or exit the site • Location of fire route and hydrant • Extent of heavy duty paving for fire route • Grading and drainage for hard surface and pathways to school building • Setbacks from property lines • OBC requirements for spatial separation and limiting distances • OBC and/or by law requirements that are applicable beyond 12 portables • Review Municipality Fire Dept. by-laws related to fire route coverage • Parking spaces: note that basic site design standard is for no more than 12

parking spaces beyond by-law requirement – ensure adequate parking for portables. If portables are temporary due to addition, negotiate to meet parking by law after completion of the addition.

• Confirm barrier free compliance in the main building, as portables typically have no washroom provision and may not have a ramp entrance.

• Coordinate with the owner, the timing and sequencing of portable moves to and from the site if it occurs during the construction of new schools, renovations or addition.

Construction Issues: • If portables are considered for the site during the construction Phase, confirm

and coordinate scope and responsibility of the general Contractor and Portables Contractor for grading preparations, paving and fencing/gates.

Renovations and Additions: • During the school year, confirm fire access route is maintained to all site

areas-including portables-and not through the Hoarded construction area. • Confirm and coordinate scope and responsibility of the general Contractor and

Portables Contractor for grading preparations, paving and fencing/gates.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.4 – MASONRY Page 1 of 1

C.4 – MASONRY General Notes: • Interior Partitions should be concrete block, primed (block filler) and painted

ONLY. If Gypsum Board is unavoidable, refer to "Typical Gypsum Board Base Detail". Ref. Arch. B.1.15.4.a

• ALL Exposed block corners to be bull-nosed • Avoid split faced or similarly textured concrete block on interior areas. • Note requirements for amount of block filler or finish paint required to

achieve suitable paint finished depending on type of block or manufacture of block Ref. Arch. C.9 finishes - Paint

Renovations and Additions • Note that in schools built in the 1970’s and earlier block size is imperial;

block depth and coursing is different than metric block. Make appropriate accommodation for this condition in design details and specifications.

Design Issues: • Walls in corridors or areas receiving porcelain tile base are to have the first

course detailed as square edge corners to allow full contact with tile base • Walls where rubber base is used are to have bullnose corners to allow for

rubber base to be applied with better contact • Where possible design masonry wall and opening lengths between openings

based on modular concrete block units. • In Office areas and Classrooms, interior partition walls are to extend to the

underside of the floor above for soundproofing, whether or not this is required for fire separation.

Specification Issues: • Note locations where normal weight and / or light weight block if any are to

be used recognizing finish may be different depending on manufacturer.

Construction Issues: • Refer to Painting articles for recommendation to review painting sample at

outset of construction to ensure quality of finish Ref. Arch. C.9 Finishes-Painting Exterior Masonry: • Cavity wall construction to come with mortar net “Mortar Dropping

Collection” products or an approved equal alternate


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.6 – CARPENTRY & MILLWORK Page 1 of 2

C.6 –CARPENTRY & MILLWORK General Notes: • For new schools, renovations and additions, melamine finish cabinetry is

currently the base standard for millwork. Ref. Arch. B.6 • In some Renovations it may be applicable to use the veneer on plywood

system: review the applicability of these standards to match existing millwork in the school.

• Guide Specifications for both the melamine and veneer systems of architectural woodwork are provided.

Design Issues • All millwork to be keyed alike (per room). Exception: the Teacher's Cabinet

which will receive a lockset to match the classroom door. Ref. Arch. B.6 Dwg. C1 • All glazing to cabinet doors to be 3 mm minimum and tempered glass Ref. Arch. C.8 - Glazing • Melamine sheet for millwork to be a light colour, natural wood grain pattern

such as ‘hard rock maple’ or similar. • Review colour and finish as part of the Colour Schedule. Ref. Arch. C.9-Colour Schedule • All full height cabinets (C1-C4, K1, K2) to have 35 mm solid wood door. Ref. Arch. B.6 • Heavy duty castors and solid rubber bumper required for Kindergarten toy

cart. Ref. Arch. B.6 Dwg. K5 • Provide adjustable glides on bottom Kindergarten moveable bench legs. Ref. Arch. B.6 Dwg. K6 • Factory seconds not acceptable Specification Issues Refer to Guide Specifications for Architectural Millwork enclosed • If barrier free skirts are used beneath sinks, consider assigning supply and

install to the millwork installer. Quality Standard • Designers are encouraged to reference a recognised standard or association in

qualifying contractors. • Recommended standard: Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers' Association

of Canada (AWMAC) Custom Grade Warranty • Require a 2 year warranty using the AWMAC Guarantee inspection system or

equivalent 2 year warranty from the manufacturer. High Pressure Plastic Laminate (Counters) • should be matte finish and in colours which disguise markings and wear. Fine

patterns-especially mottled or speckles should be used. Solid colours should NOT be used. Do NOT use gloss and metallic finishes.

• Specify heat and/or acid resistant laminates for counters in SMT rooms and art rooms. If possible, also ensure the laminate has anti-abrasion characteristics that are being produced now by several manufactures. Suggest using a ‘base bid’ as standard.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.6 – CARPENTRY & MILLWORK Page 2 of 2

• Specify post form grade with integral backsplash and bullnose edge. At exposed corners “relieve” 90º vertical edge into oblique angle junction with post-formed bullnose front edge, to minimise extent of sharp corners. Ref. Arch. B.6

Melamine System- Melamine Faced Doors and Bodies • Ensure use of a separate 100 mm toe kick and base made from water resistant

plywood • Melamine for all faces, gables and modular carcases (including edges) to be

19 mm particle board with 8 mil thick melamine facing sheet both sides. • Melamine sheet for millwork to be a light colour, natural wood grain pattern

such as ‘hard rock maple’ or similar. • Review colour and finish as part of the Colour Schedule. Ref. Arch. C.9-Colour Schedule • Specify 3 mm PVC edge banding in complementary colour to the natural

wood colour. • Shelving to be birch veneer on plywood core construction • Use Modular construction. Ref. Arch. B.6 Veneer System- Plywood and Hardwood Components • cabinet carcasses to be plywood construction only • drawer front and cabinets doors to be veneer on particle board c/w 6mm solid

edges • Ensure use of a separate 100 mm toe kick and base made from water resistant

plywood • Shelves are 19 mm birch veneer plywood with minimum 6mm solid

hardwood edge. • Finish on all hardwood and veneered plywood to be sanded, then sealer coated,

and sanded with two finish coats of catalytic type, moisture resistant lacquer. (25 to 35 degree sheen)

Cabinet Hinges • Hinges are to be to be top of line and reputable manufacturer, ‘European’ style

concealed, three way adjustable, metal boss, for full and half overlay doors with opening arms to 135º, and 170º to suit application. Avoid hinges which open less than 135º due to damage during use.

• Some acceptable manufacturers are Blum, or Hafele; select other acceptable alternatives recognising identical quality standards for durability.

Construction Issues: • Observe that particle board sink cut-outs receive a coating of a water resistant

sealer, such as construction adhesive, on the concealed cut edge to resist the absorption of moisture.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.6 – Guide Spec. Arch’l Woodwork-MelamineSystemPage 1 of 6

Guide Specification: Architectural Woodwork: Melamine-Faced System (Note: only typical millwork items have been specified in this Guide.)

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Work

1. General Requirements Section XXX 2. Rough carpentry Section XXX 3. Painting Section XXX 4. Supply and installation of locksets for teacher’s closets Section XXX

1.2 Reference Standards

1. Do millwork to Millwork Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers' Association of Canada (AWMAC) Custom Grade.

1.3 Samples

1. Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples of each type of paneling laminate including heat resistant laminate, manufacturer’s data sheets and each type of solid wood or plywood to receive stain or natural finish with finish applied as specified.

2. Submit sample of each type of hardware specified in accordance with Hardware Schedule Accpeptable alternate products must meet or exceed these specifications and will be only reviewed and accepted if submitted within five business days of the close of tenders.

3. If requested, submit a typical prototype unit representative of the work of this section. 1.4 Shop Drawings

1. Submit shop drawings for approval. 2. Clearly indicate details of construction, profiles, jointing, fastening and other related details.

1.5 Qualification

1. Millwork manufacturer to have not less than 5 years proven first class experience in institutional millwork, shall be a member of AWMAC or shall be able to provide any sureties as specified.

1.6 Guarantee

[Designers to review with the Owner if the Guarantee and/or inspection service shall apply to each project. Acceptable alternate for a Guarantee may be that the subtrade provides a 2 year Maintenance Bond or similar warranty in a suitable alterative format.] 1. This architectural woodworker shall furnish the owner with a two (2) year AWMAC Guarantee

Certificate, or an equivalent maintenance bond, to the full value of the architectural woodwork sub-contract, certifying that the architectural woodwork has been manufactured and/or installed in accordance with the standards incorporated in the AWMAC Quality Standards Manual, (edition in effect at time of tender). Those providing the maintenance bond, instead of the



Guarantee Certificate, to submit a letter from their insurer stating that they will provide the bond. A copy of this letter is to be attached to their tenders. The Guarantee shall cover replacing and/or refinishing to make good any defects in architectural woodwork due to faulty workmanship or defective materials supplied by this architectural woodworker, which appear during a two (2) year period following the date of Substantial Performance of the project.

1.7 Inspection

1. Architectural woodwork shall be manufactured and/or installed to the specified AWMAC Quality Standards and shall be subject to an inspection at the plant and site by an appointed inspector, approved by the AWMAC Chapter.

2. Such inspection costs shall be paid from Cash Allowances. Shop drawings shall be submitted for review or approval before any work is commenced.

3. Any work which does not meet AWMAC Quality Standards, as specified, shall be replaced by this architectural woodworker, at no additional cost to the owner and to the satisfaction of the consultant and the inspector.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials

1. Softwood lumber: to CSA 0121-M1978 and National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) requirements, with maximum moisture content of 6-8% for interior work. Yard lumber select for natural finish of species, indicated to AWMAC premium grade.

2. Hardwood lumber: to National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) requirements, moisture content of maximum 10% for interior work, of species indicated to AWMAC premium grade. .1 Species: Maple, unless otherwise noted.

3. Hardwood plywood: to CSA 0115-1967 of thickness indicated, rotary cut face veneer, birch plywood, veneer core, No. 1 grade. Select veneers to provide book match veneer strips to be 240 mm wide minimum.

.1 Species: Birch, unless otherwise noted. 4. Nails and staples: to CSA B111-1974 galvanized for exterior work, interior high-humidity areas and

for treated lumber; plain finish elsewhere. Use spiral thread nails except where specified elsewhere. 5. 19 mm (¾") Particle Board core complete with 8 mil resin impregnated melamine cover sheet-both

sides for door and drawers, gables and casework carcases to CAN3-0188.1-M78, Grade R, 720 kg/m3 density (19 mm or as to thicknesses indicated.)

6. 19 mm (¾") Plywood veneer core with birch veneer, G2S, Rotary cut on tops, bottoms, gables and shelves to CSA 0120 for all cabinet millwork shelves



2.2 Plastic Laminate

1. Conforming to CAN3-A172, General Purpose - standard grade (GP-S), 1.25 mm thick for tops, Post Forming - standard grade (PF-S) 1.25 mm thick for post forming. Balance all panels with 0.5 mm backing sheet (BK) by same manufacturer as face panel. Use waterproof adhesive capable of holding materials together without failure. Provide heat resistant grade where shown. “Matte” finish is typical.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers …[Designers to review]… “Nevamar-ARP abrasion resistant surface” distributed by McFaddens. Acceptable alternate products as manufactured by Wilsonart, Formica or Arborite only to meet this exact standard if approved during tender period.

2. Submit product data. 3. Allow for maximum of six (6) colours from full range as chosen by Consultant.

2.3 Melamine Faced Particleboard

1. To CAN3-0.188.1-M78, Grade “R” particleboard sanded faces, 13 mm, 16 mm, and 19 mm thickness, faced with laminated plastic. Melamine resin impregnated cover sheet with coloured and/or pattern paper inner layer. Thermally fuse to rigid particleboard substrate. Melamine faces shall be 8 mil thickness. Wood grain pattern to be chosen by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range. .1 Acceptable Material: Melamine faced particleboard as manufactured by Flakeboard, Formica or Arborite Division of Domtar Construction Materials Ltd., are of acceptable quality but colour/pattern requires approval prior to confirmation of full acceptance.

2.4 Edge Banding

1. Solid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), 3 mm thickness x full width of panel edge, colour/pattern to match finished face of melamine panel or as selected by Consultant. All exposed edges of banding to be radiused to 2 mm radius after installation on panels. Submit sample of edge-banded panel with radiused edges to Consultant for approval prior to fabrication of architectural woodwork. .1 Acceptable Material: Solid PVC edging as manufactured by “Woodtape” Edge-Banding.

.2 Acceptable Material: Solid PVC edging as manufactured by “Complast Inc.” 2.5 Cabinet Hardware

[NOTE: See sample list of Hafele and Accurride products and other product names and numbers listed in this article are a representative quality standard for hinges, handles, shelving pilasters and clips, drawer slides, elbow catches, locks, deadbolts, furniture glides, cupboard locks, door pulls, etc. Designers to review products by other manufacturers to meet or exceed this quality standard]

1. Furnish and install all hardware to custom casework as follows:

.1 Cupboard Doors - 19 mm thick.: hardware from list for hinges and locks .2 Drawers - 19 mm thick.: hardware from list for drawer slides, drawer pulls, drawer

locks



.3 Shelving: hardware from list for pilaster strips, shelf clips

Sample list of product catalogue numbers as referenced above.: HINGE 165D 3903 FULL SC DOW MOD14 HINGE 165D 3904 HALF SC DOW MOD 6 MPL F.W.SCREW MOD 1 3000/4000 MPL PRE/11MM MOD 1 3000/4000 HANDLE BR SATIN CHR 8/32 CTC 96MM SHELF SUP. STRIP ST. NIP 16X6X3500 SHELF SUPPORT ST. ZIP. 16X28MM ACCURIDE C3832-C10 ST. ZIP. 100LB ACCURIDE C3832-C12 ST.ZIP. 100LB ACCURIDE C3832-C14 ST. ZIP. 100LB ACCURIDE C3832-C16 ST. ZIP. 100LB ACCURIDE C3832-C18 ST. ZIP. 100LB ACCURIDE C3832-C20 ST. ZIP. 100LB ELBOW CATCH SOLID BRASS CHR. PL. LOCK CORE ZN.NI.MATT KEY DIFF TA DEADBOLT LOCK BODY RD.R.H./L.H. DEADBOLT LOCK BODY RD.DR. STRIKE PLATE ANGLED ST. BL. CYL. ROSETTE BR.NI.MATT 17.4/24MM FURNITURE GLIDE PL. WH. DIA. 16MM

.4 Cupboard Doors - 35 mm thick.: Hinges F179 76x76 Stanley C15 Roller Catches 504N Onward C26 Surface bolt 043-4 X Angle Strike C15 Door Pulls CBH245-4 1/2” C32D

Cupboard Locks ‘Best’ cylinder and core as supplied/installed under Finish Hardware

.5 Closet Rods and Flanges Rods: chrome finish, Ø 33 mm. Flanges: chrome finish, closed flanges at both ends of rods.

.6 Shelf and Rod Steel, white enamel, model No. 1797, manufactured by Hager.

2. This section shall also include accessories such as rubber door silencers (2 per drawer or door), and other items necessary for the completion of the millwork.

3. Cabinet Keying: Key all cabinet and drawer locks alike for each room, except teachers’ closets which

are to be keyed to match the classroom door.



2.6 Melamine Clad Cabinetwork

1. All cabinet frames whether for base, wall or tall floor standing cases, shall be fabricated so each is a self-contained module. Front side top and bottom, exterior and interior surfaces shall be finished allowing future relocation of any module, into any bench arrangement, without need of any additional finishing.

2. Gables and panels shall be fabricated from 19 mm thick melamine surfaced panels with a P.V.C. edging applied to exposed edges.

3. Bottoms shall be fabricated utilizing the same materials and edge finish as gables. Front edge will be edged with P.V.C. edging. All other edges will be thoroughly sealed and moisture proofed prior to attachment to gables.

4. Rails shall be fabricated and machined to join the gables and form a rigid cabinet frame. 5. Tops (applies to wall and tall units only) shall be fabricated utilizing the same material and edge

finish as gables. Front edge will be edged with P.V.C. edging. 6. Toe kick rail shall have a 100 mm x 19 mm section, machined to receive four screw nails for

attachment to bottom front edge of gables. Cabinet base shall be water resistant plywood attached to melamine cabinet separately, insuring the melamine particle core gables do not come in contact with the floor.

7. Backs in base cupboards shall be fabricated from a 6 mm hardboard.

8. Backs in wall and tall cabinets shall be fabricated from 13 mm thick melamine surfaced panels securely glued and screw nailed into the check out provided in the backs of gables, tops, and bottoms.

9. Shelves shall be fabricated from 19 mm birch plywood with solid birch edge and lacquer finish. All shelves shall be adjustable at 13 mm increments and each will be supported by a shelf support resting in four pilaster strips attached to the gables. Shelves at cabinet B.9 similar to above, except thickness to be 25 mm.

10. Doors shall be fabricated from 19 mm thick melamine surfaced panels. All four edges shall be P.V.C. edging.

11. Drawer fronts shall be fabricated utilizing the same material and edge finish as doors. All four edges shall P.V.C. edging. Fronts will be secured to drawer bodies with five screw nails through the front of the drawer body into the core of the drawer front.

12. Drawer bodies shall consist of box construction fabricated from 13 mm birch plywood with solid birch edge, front, sides and back with a 6 mm hardboard bottom dadoed and glued into box members. Joint front, sides and back with carefully fitted glued and tenoned joints.

13. 35 mm thick doors shall be solid core with plastic laminate both sides and on all four edges, color and grain to match melamine.

14. Solid hardwood glazed door fronts and frames shall receive lacquer finish. Glazing shall be 3mm tempered clear glass.

15. Finish:

.1 Melamine surfaced panels shall be finished both sides in the same colours, patterns, and grain as

selected by the Consultant. .2 Solid hardwood glazed doors and drawer bodies shall be sanded, then sealer coated, and

sanded with two finish coats of catalytic type acid resistant varnish.



2.7 Shop Fabrication

1. Shop install cabinet hardware. 2. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures. Cut out

edges to be treated with water proof caulking, where applicable, i.e.: sinks. 3. Shop assemble work for delivery to site in size easily handled and to insure passage through building

openings. 2.8 Plastic Laminated Tops

[Note: designers are to review with the owner possible use of a 90 degree contrast colour edge strip if to be designed for visually impaired pupils.] .1 19 mm thick particle board core with post-forming grade plastic laminate finish bonded with

resorginal formaldehyde resin glue to a particleboard core. The countertop front face to return vertically 35 mm ± . All front and backsplash edges to be rounded. Front edge nosing to be full half round.

.2 Underside to receive a backing sheet, sanded one side and bonded same as surfacing material. .3 Exposed edges to be finished with same material as used for the top. .4 Splash backs, curbs and curb shelves are to be of similar construction as the tops. .5 Use heat resistant post-forming grade laminate, where indicated on drawings. Colours as indicated. .6 At all wall termination, provide backsplash return. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation .1 Set and secure all material and components in place, rigid, plumb and square. .2 Provide heavy duty fixture attachments for wall mounted cabinets. .3 Use draw bolts in countertop joints.

.4 At junction of plastic laminate counter back splash and adjacent wall finish, apply small bead of sealant.

.5 Apply water resistant building paper over wood framing members in contract with masonry or cementitious construction.

.6 After installation, fit and adjust operating hardware for wood and laminated plastic cabinet doors, drawers and shelves.

END OF SECTION


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.6 – Guide Spec. Arch’l Woodwork-Veneer SystemPage 1 of 5

Guide Specification: Architectural Woodwork-Hardwood Veneer System (Note: only typical millwork items have been specified in this Guide.)


1. General Requirements Section XXX 2. Rough carpentry Section XXX 3. Painting Section XXX 4. Supply and installation of locksets for teacher’s closets Section XXX

1.2 Reference Standards

1. Do millwork to Millwork Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers' Association of Canada (AWMAC) Custom Grade.

1.3 Samples

1. Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples of each type of paneling laminate including heat resistant laminate, manufacturer’s data sheets and each type of solid wood or plywood to receive stain or natural finish with finish applied as specified.

2. Submit sample of each type of hardware specified in accordance with Hardware Schedule Acceptable alternate products must meet or exceed these specifications and will be only reviewed and accepted if submitted within five business days of the close of tenders.

3. If requested, submit a typical prototype unit representative of the work of this section. 1.4 Shop Drawings

1. Submit shop drawings for approval. 2. Clearly indicate details of construction, profiles, jointing, fastening and other related details.

1.5 Qualification

1. Millwork manufacturer to have not less than 5 years proven first class experience in institutional millwork, shall be a member of AWMAC or shall be able to provide any sureties as specified.

1.6 Guarantee

[Designers to review with the Owner if the Guarantee and/or inspection service shall apply to each project. Acceptable alternate for a Guarantee may be that the subtrade provides a 2 year Maintenance Bond or similar warranty in a suitable alterative format.] 1. This architectural woodworker shall furnish the owner with a two (2) year AWMAC Guarantee

Certificate, or an equivalent maintenance bond, to the full value of the architectural woodwork sub-contract, certifying that the architectural woodwork has been manufactured and/or installed in accordance with the standards incorporated in the AWMAC Quality Standards Manual, (edition in effect at time of tender). Those providing the maintenance bond, instead of the



Guarantee Certificate, to submit a letter from their insurer stating that they will provide the bond. A copy of this letter is to be attached to their tenders. The Guarantee shall cover replacing and/or refinishing to make good any defects in architectural woodwork due to faulty workmanship or defective materials supplied by this architectural woodworker, which appear during a two (2) year period following the date of Substantial Performance of the project.

1.7 Inspection

1. Architectural woodwork shall be manufactured and/or installed to the specified AWMAC Quality Standards and shall be subject to an inspection at the plant and site by an appointed inspector, approved by the AWMAC Chapter.

2. Such inspection costs shall be paid from Cash Allowances. Shop drawings shall be submitted for review or approval before any work is commenced.

3. Any work which does not meet AWMAC Quality Standards, as specified, shall be replaced by this architectural woodworker, at no additional cost to the owner and to the satisfaction of the consultant and the inspector.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials

1. Softwood lumber: to CSA 0121-M1978 and National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) requirements, with maximum moisture content of 6-8% for interior work. Yard lumber select for natural finish of species, indicated to AWMAC premium grade.

2. Hardwood lumber: to National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) requirements, moisture content of maximum 10% for interior work, of species indicated to AWMAC premium grade. .1 Species: Maple, unless otherwise noted.

3. Hardwood plywood: to CSA 0115-1967 of thickness indicated, rotary cut face veneer, birch plywood, veneer core, No. 1 grade. Select veneers to provide book match veneer strips to be 240 mm wide minimum.

.1 Species: Maple or Birch, unless otherwise noted. 4. Nails and staples: to CSA B111-1974 galvanized for exterior work, interior high-humidity areas and

for treated lumber; plain finish elsewhere. Use spiral thread nails except where specified elsewhere. 5. 19 mm (¾") Particle Board core complete with G2S birch veneer for door and drawer fronts only to

CAN3-0188.1-M78, Grade R, 720 kg/m3 density in thicknesses indicated. 6. 19 mm (¾") Plywood veneer core with birch veneer, G2S, Rotary cut on tops, bottoms, gables and

shelves to CSA 0120 for all cabinet millwork carcass's (e.g.: upper, lower cupboards, teachers closets, etc.)

7. 19 mm (¾") Plywood core, G1S, birch veneer backs for large (full height) cupboards and closets. 8. 6 mm (¼") Plywood veneer core G1S birch veneer for backs on upper and lower cupboards c/w

13mm x 100 mm with screw cleats. 9. 12 mm (½") Baltic Birch for drawer construction only.



2.2 Plastic Laminate

1. Conforming to CAN3-A172, General Purpose - standard grade (GP-S), 1.25 mm thick for tops, Post Forming - standard grade (PF-S) 1.25 mm thick for post forming. Balance all panels with 0.5 mm backing sheet (BK) by same manufacturer as face panel. Use waterproof adhesive capable of holding materials together without failure. Provide acid & heat resistant grade where shown. “Matte” finish is typical.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers …[Designers to review]… “Nevamar-ARP abrasion resistant surface” distributed by McFaddens. Acceptable alternate products as manufactured by Wilsonart, Formica or Arborite only to meet this exact standard if approved during tender period.

2. Submit product data. 3. Allow for maximum of six (6) colours from full range as chosen by Consultant. Do NOT use solid

colours.

2.3 Cabinet Hardware

[NOTE: See sample list of Hafele and Accurride products and other product names and numbers listed in this article are a representative quality standard for hinges, handles, shelving pilasters and clips, drawer slides, elbow catches, locks, deadbolts, furniture glides, cupboard locks, door pulls, etc. Designers to review products by other manufacturers to meet or exceed this quality standard]

1. Furnish and install all hardware to custom casework as follows:

.1 Cupboard Doors - 19 mm thick.: hardware from list for hinges and locks .2 Drawers - 19 mm thick: hardware from list for drawer slides, drawer pulls, drawer locks .3 Shelving: hardware from list for pilaster strips, shelf clips

Sample list of product catalogue numbers as referenced above.: HINGE 165D 3903 FULL SC DOW MOD14 HINGE 165D 3904 HALF SC DOW MOD 6 MPL F.W.SCREW MOD 1 3000/4000 MPL PRE/11MM MOD 1 3000/4000 HANDLE BR SATIN CHR 8/32 CTC 96MM SHELF SUP. STRIP ST. NIP 16X6X3500 SHELF SUPPORT ST. ZIP. 16X28MM ACCURIDE C3832-C10 ST. ZIP. 100LB ACCURIDE C3832-C12 ST.ZIP. 100LB ACCURIDE C3832-C14 ST. ZIP. 100LB ACCURIDE C3832-C16 ST. ZIP. 100LB ACCURIDE C3832-C18 ST. ZIP. 100LB ACCURIDE C3832-C20 ST. ZIP. 100LB ELBOW CATCH SOLID BRASS CHR. PL. LOCK CORE ZN.NI.MATT KEY DIFF TA DEADBOLT LOCK BODY RD.R.H./L.H. DEADBOLT LOCK BODY RD.DR. STRIKE PLATE ANGLED ST. BL. CYL. ROSETTE BR.NI.MATT 17.4/24MM FURNITURE GLIDE PL. WH. DIA. 16MM



.4 Cupboard Doors - 35 mm thick.: Hinges F179 76x76 Stanley C15 Roller Catches 504N Onward C26 Surface bolt 043-4 X Angle Strike C15 Door Pulls CBH245-4 1/2” C32D

Cupboard Locks ‘Best’ cylinder and core as supplied/installed under Finish Hardware

.5 Closet Rods and Flanges Rods: chrome finish, Ø 33 mm. Flanges: chrome finish, closed flanges at both ends of rods.

.6 Shelf and Rod Steel, white enamel, model No. 1797, manufactured by Hager.

2. This section shall also include accessories such as rubber door silencers (2 per drawer or door), and other items necessary for the completion of the millwork.

3. Cabinet Keying: Key all cabinet and drawer locks alike for each room, except teachers’ closets which

are to be keyed to match the classroom door. 2.4 Cabinetwork

[NOTE: designers may review as an Acceptable Alternate to 6mm solid hardwood edging: 3mm minimum solid PVC edging in colour to match hardwood veneer.]

1. All cabinet frames whether for base, wall or tall floor standing cases, shall be fabricated so each is a

self-contained module. Front side top and bottom, exterior and interior surfaces shall be finished allowing future relocation of any module, into any bench arrangement, without need of any additional finishing.

2. Gables and panels shall be fabricated from 19 mm thick G2S maple or birch veneer, plywood core panels with a 6mm (¼") solid maple or birch edging applied to exposed edges.

3. Bottoms shall be fabricated utilizing the same materials and edge finish as gables. Front edge will be edged with 6mm (¼") minimum solid maple or birch edging. All other edges will be thoroughly sealed and moisture proofed prior to attachment to gables. Rails shall be fabricated and machined to join the gables and form a rigid cabinet frame.

5. Tops (applies to wall and tall units only) shall be fabricated utilizing the same material and edge finish as gables. Front edge will be edged with 6mm (¼") solid maple or birch edging.

6. Toe kick rail shall have a 100 mm x 19 mm section, machined to receive four screw nails for attachment to bottom front edge of gables. Cabinet base shall be plywood.

7. Backs in base cupboards shall be fabricated from a 6 mm maple or birch veneer G1S plywood core. 8. Backs in wall and tall cabinets shall be fabricated from 13 mm thick maple or birch veneer G1S

plywood core surfaced panels securely glued and screw nailed into the check out provided in the backs of gables, tops, and bottoms.

9. Shelves shall be fabricated from 19 mm maple or birch plywood with solid birch edge and catalyzed lacquer finish. All shelves shall be adjustable supported by a shelf support resting in four pilaster strips attached to the gables (see Cabinet Hardware).

10. Doors shall be fabricated from 19 mm thick maple or birch veneer G1S particle board core panels. All four edges shall be solid 6mm (¼") birch veneer edging complete with mitered corners.



11. Drawer fronts shall be fabricated utilizing the same material and edge finish as doors. Fronts will be secured to drawer bodies with five screw nails through the front of the drawer body into the core of the drawer front.

12. Drawer bodies shall consist of box construction fabricated from 13 mm birch plywood with solid birch edge, front, sides and back with a 6 mm hardboard bottom dadoed and glued into box members. Joint front, sides and back with carefully fitted glued and tenoned joints.

13. Finish:

.1 Solid hardwood, veneer cupboards, doors, drawers, shelves and millwork in general shall be sanded, sealer coated and finished with two (2) top coats of a clear non-yellowing, catalytic, 35 degree industrial lacquer, sanded between coats.

2.5 Shop Fabrication

1. Shop install cabinet hardware. 2. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures. Cut out

edges to be treated with water proof caulking, where applicable, i.e.: sinks. 3. Shop assemble work for delivery to site in size easily handled and to insure passage through building

openings. 2.6 Plastic Laminated Tops

[Note: designers are to review with the owner possible use of a 90 degree contrast colour edge strip if to be designed for visually impaired pupils.] .1 19 mm thick particle board core with post-forming grade plastic laminate finish bonded with

resorginal formaldehyde resin glue to a particleboard core. The countertop front face to return vertically 35 mm ± . All front and backsplash edges to be rounded. Front edge nosing to be full half round.

.2 Exposed edges to be finished with same material as used for the top. .3 Splash backs, curbs and curb shelves are to be of similar construction as the tops. .4 Use heat resistant post-forming grade laminate, where indicated on drawings. Colours as indicated. .5 At all wall termination, provide backsplash return. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation .1 Set and secure all material and components in place, rigid, plumb and square. .2 Provide heavy duty fixture attachments for wall mounted cabinets. .3 Use draw bolts in countertop joints.

.4 At junction of plastic laminate counter back splash and adjacent wall finish, apply small bead of sealant.

.5 Apply water resistant building paper over wood framing members in contract with masonry or cementitious construction.

.6 After installation, fit and adjust operating hardware for wood and laminated plastic cabinet doors, drawers and shelves.

END OF SECTION


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section : C.7 – ROOFING & CLADDING Page 1 of 1

C.7 – ROOFING AND CLADDING PREFINISHED METAL FLASHING AND TRIM General Notes: • Avoid custom colour runs of material that do not meet minimum industry

standard quantities, as they will incur significant premium costs. Specification Issues • Minimum gauge base metal for prefinished metal flashings and trim shall be

22 gauge or heavier depending on the application. • Finishes for all prefinished metal flashing and trim and or cladding shall be a

minimum standard of Stelco “StelColour 8000+ series” by Stelco/BayCoat or better.

Warranty: • 5 year extended warranty on prefinished metal against chalking, fading and

rust. BUILT UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING General Notes: • The Board standard flat roofing system roof is a four ply built-up bituminous

roofing system. • Refer to the Guide Specification on the following pages. Specification Issues: Warranty • Contractor to supply five year materials and labour warranty • Product manufacture to supply system warranty for twenty years materials and

labour • Refer to guide specification-warranty Construction Issues: • Roofing inspection- ensure a roofing inspector conducts a coordination

meeting before roofing is under way. Renovations and Additions: • For work occurring during the occupied school year, ensure that the Principal

of the school is advised of the roofing schedule. • Specify that roofing will take place outside of school hours and on weekends

in order to avoid asphalt fumes from affecting staff and students


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.7: Guide Spec. Built-Up Roofing Page 1 of 15

Guide Specification: Four Ply Built-Up Bituminous Roofing PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 This section specifies requirements for the installation of a new one (1) ply plus four-(4) ply built-up roof assembly on the roofs indicated on the drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 General Requirements Section XXXXX

.2 Metal Flashing Section XXXXX

.3 Sealant Section XXXXX

.4 Drains Section XXXXX 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Work on this section is to be conducted only by individuals specifically trained and qualified for this work.

.2 Provide one thoroughly experienced, reliable, qualified and competent person in charge of the Work and present on site at all times.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 CSSBI - Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute

.2 CSA - Canadian Standards Association

.3 CGSB - Canadian General Standards Board

.4 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

.5 CRCA - Canadian Roofing Contractors Association 6 National Building Code, Provincial Building Code (Ontario Regulation 413/90 (Ontario

Building Code)) and Municipal Building Code .7 ULC & FM - Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada and Factory Mutual .8 ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-

Conditioning Engineers 1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide the Board Designee/Engineer with layout shop drawing(s) of the tapered insulation system for review showing the direction of flow, percentage of slopes, board thickness and layout. Obtain review and acceptance of shop drawings before ordering materials.

.2 Provide the Board Designee/Engineer with work schedule, project manager, site foreman and number of roofing crews assigned for the Work. Changes in personnel shall be indicated in writing to the PDSB.



1.6 MATERIAL, HANDLING AND STORAGE

.1 Deliver materials in original containers or wrappings, with manufacturers' seals and labels intact.

.2 Ensure that stored porous materials absorb no moisture. Remove wet materials from the site and replace with new, undamaged materials.

.3 Store materials off the ground and, when work is not in progress, under cover (fully covered by tarpaulins and not be shrinkage wrap – manufacturers' wrap).

.4 Protect edges of roll goods from damage during handling. Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations to prevent damage, inclusion of foreign matter, rusting, staining, and defects which may affect appearance or performance.

.5 Materials shall be stored in a manner so as not to exceed the maximum design loads of structural elements.

.6 When storing bulk asphalt in heated tanker, avoid modification of asphalt physical properties resulting from long periods of overheating.

.7 Do not apply roofing materials unless proper asphalt application temperatures (EVT - plus or minus 15 oC ) can be maintained, or when water in any form (i.e. rain, dew, ice, frost, snow, etc.) is present on the deck. Do not heat asphalt above flash-point.

.8 The roofing crews must have access at all times to a working, accurate liquid thermometer and a digital thermometer.

.9 Locate bitumen kettles to avoid smoke discoloration of the existing building or damage to landscaping material.

.10 Proper attire must be warm when handling products. User must read container label and material safety data sheets prior to use.

.11 Products containing tar and asbestos are prohibited on this project. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

.1 Do not roof over damp or unsuitable surfaces.

.2 Adjustments to specified roofing procedures caused by weather and site conditions shall be made only with the prior approval of the Board Designee/Engineer.

.3 Work to proceed only during approved time periods as designated by the Board Designee/Engineer.

.4 Unless otherwise noted, all roofs scheduled for replacement are assumed to be watertight.

Contractor shall be responsible for keeping these roofs watertight at all times during the course of the re-roofing work.

.5 It is a requirement of this contract to have the Roof Manufacturer (of each component of

the new roof system) review all substrate conditions and applications of the new roof to ensure full compliance with the project and manufacturers' project specifications. A minimum of two (2) visits per Manufacturer shall be included for the project and a full written report for each visit outlining "compliance" with project specifications shall be forwarded to the Peel District School Board within 48 hours of the said site visit. Reports shall be faxed and mailed to the attention of the ‘Structural Supervisor’, at the Peel District School Board (Fax: 905-279-0859). This is a requirement for substantial completion.



1.8 WARRANTY

It is a fundamental condition of this tender and subsequent contract that the roofing Contractor complies with all of the conditions of the guarantee/warranty as stated below.

.1 The Contractor shall make good, and promptly, any and all defects and deficiencies

which occur or become apparent within a five (5) year guarantee period, such defects including but not limited to, leaking and failure to stay in place. Supply all labour, materials, tools and equipment to repair and/or replace any work judged defective by the Board Designee/Engineer and any other work damaged due to faulty or defective work, at no additional cost, for a period of five (5) years.

.2 The Contractor shall provide a written guarantee for all work of this section against defects in labour, materials and workmanship for a period of five (5) years.

.3 The Contractor shall provide a single source manufacturer's system warranty (non pro-rated warranty – no dollar limit) for all work of this section against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twenty (20) years. The written warranty shall be in a form approved by the owner. The warranty shall cover all components of the roof system; including, but not limited to, the vapour retarder, roof insulation, roof membrane, flood coat/gravel and base flashings. The manufacturer supply all labour, materials, tools and equipment to repair and/or replace any material defects, at no additional cost, for a period of twenty (20) years. The warranty shall not be non pro-rated over the twenty (20) year period. The warranty shall be issued to the Peel District School Board within two (2) working days following the date of substantial completion (as indicated in writing by the Board Designee).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

Acceptable Manufacturers of the built-up roof components include the following: Lexcan, GAF, Bakor, IKO, Atlas, Soprema, Thaler, Posi-Slope, Accu-Plane, Johns Manville, Garland, Tremco or an approved alternate. The latest (i.e. the most recent and most updated information) Manufacturers' technical data shall apply on this project. Upon request only - Following awarding of the contract, the contractor shall supply all technical data information and material safety data sheets for all products used on the project to the Peel District School Board for formal approval – prior to the start of the project.

.1 Roofing Felts and Accessories

.1 Roofing Asphalt .1 For insulation, interply moppings and flood coat: Type 2 oxidized

roofing asphalt conforming to CSA A123.4-M1979 and ASTM D312. Roofing asphalt shall be from a single source supplier.

Note: Include for smokeless kettle(s) if requested by the Peel District School Board.



.2 For base flashings: Type 3 oxidized roofing asphalt conforming to CSA A123.4-M1979 and ASTM D312. Roofing asphalt shall be from a single source supplier.

.2 Vapour Retarder (over metal deck with DensDeck Prime Roof Board ½ in. (12 mm) Overlay .1 Two plies of No. 15 asphalt saturated perforated roofing felt: conforming

to CSA A123.3-M1979 with a minimum mopped glaze coat of 15 lbs. per Square (0.73 kg/sm) of the same grade of asphalt.

.2 Adhesive (for both plies): Type II oxidized roofing asphalt conforming to CSA A123.4- M1979 and ASTM D312. Minimum mopped glaze coat of 15 lbs. Per Square (0.73 kg/sm) of the same grade of asphalt.

.3 Primer: cut back asphalt conforming to CSA 37-GP-9M. Install as per Manufacturer’s latest literature.

.3 Vapour Retarder (over concrete, Syporex, Tectum and precast concrete roof decks) .1 Two plies of No. 15 asphalt saturated perforated roofing felt: conforming

to CSA A123.3-M1979 with a minimum mopped glaze coat of 15 lbs. per Square (0.73 kg/sm) of the same grade of asphalt.

.2 Adhesive (for both plies): Type II oxidized roofing asphalt conforming to CSA A123.4- M1979 and ASTM D312. Minimum mopped glaze coat of 15 lbs. Per Square (0.73 kg/sm) of the same grade of asphalt.

.3 Primer: cut back asphalt conforming to CSA 37-GP-9M. Install as per Manufacturer’s latest literature.

.4 Roof Felt Membrane Over ½ in. (12 mm) Fibreboard Overlay .1 One ply of No. 15 asphalt saturated perforated roofing felt conforming to

CSA A123.3-M1979. .2 Adhesive: Type II oxidized roofing asphalt conforming to CSA A123.4 -

M1979 and ASTM D312. .5 Roof Felt Membrane Over No. 15 Roof Felt:

.1 Four plies of glass fibre felt: 100% glass fibre roofing felt, asphalt coated, conforming to ASTM D2178-85, Type VI..

.2 Adhesive: Type II oxidized roofing asphalt conforming to CSA A123.4 -M1979 and ASTM D312.

.6 Modified Bituminous Base Flashing .1 SBS modified bituminous base sheet: Base sheet to have a minimum

thickness of .09 in. (2.2 mm) and 180 g/m2 of non-woven polyester reinforcement. SBS modified bituminous base sheet is to be mop adhered to the substrate with Type III hot asphalt. Elastophene 180 PS by Soprema or an approved equivalent.

.2 SBS modified bituminous cap sheet: Cap sheet to have a minimum thickness of .18 in. (4.0 mm) and 250 g/m2 of non-woven polyester reinforcement with granulated surfacing.

Sopralene Flam 250 by Soprema or an approved equivalent. SBS modified bituminous cap sheet is to be torch adhered to the base sheet and substrate.



.3 Fixing Bar (at vertical upstands): galvanized metal or aluminum, and of sufficient stiffness to prevent bowing of bar between fasteners. Seal top of fixing bar with mastic based sealant.

.7 Pre-fabricated Flashing .1 Vandal proof stack jack flashing: aluminum pre-insulated stack jack for

plumbing pipe penetrations, Model SJ-31 for plumbing vent stacks, by Thaler Roofing Specialties Products Inc. or an approved alternate.

.2 Exhaust vent flashing: aluminum pre-insulated general purpose exhaust vent, Model EVF-1 or EVF-2 for dryer exhaust vents, by Thaler Roofing Specialties Products Inc. or an approved alternate.

.3 Flexible conduit flashing: copper pre-insulated flashing for flexible conduit penetrations, Model MEF-2C, by Thaler Roofing Specialties Products Inc. or an approved alternate.

.4 Rigid conduit flashing (from 54 mm to 222 mm): aluminum pre-insulated flashing for rigid conduit penetrations, Model MEF-1A, by Thaler Roofing Specialties Products Inc. or an approved alternate.

.5 Rigid conduit flashing (from 152 mm to 1092 mm): aluminum pre-insulated flashing for rigid conduit penetrations, Model MEF-3A, by Thaler Roofing Specialties Products Inc. or an approved alternate.

.6 Pipe (any) flashings/supports: see item no. 4 above or as designed/approved by the Consultant.

.7 Pitch Pockets not permitted. .8 Roof Patch Compound

.1 Plastic roof patch compound: conforming to CGSB 37-GP-5Ma-1982. .

.2 Roof Insulation .1 Polyisocyanurate foam roof insulation: closed cell rigid foam core, faced with an

integral fibreglass facer on each side, insulation is to be manufactured HCFC free, minimum 3 inches (76 mm) thick in the main roof areas and 3 inches (50 mm) thick in the sumped roof drain areas.

.2 Fibreboard: 1/2 in (12.5 mm) asphalt impregnated fibreboard, conforming to CAN/CSA-A247-M86, Type I,

.3 Tapered insulation for sumped roof drain areas: pre-tapered and pre-cut fibreboard, conforming to CSA A247-M86 and ASTM C165, by Accu-Plane Systems Inc., Posi-slope Enterprises Inc., or an approved alternate. Provide a minimum 1% slope to drains unless otherwise indicated on the Roof Drainage Layout Drawings. Boards are to be tapered, and all valley corners and crickets are to be factory mitred in accordance with the Board Designee Engineer approved shop drawings. Unless indicated otherwise in the drainage layout drawings, provide pre-tapered and pre-cut fibreboard around roof drains, tapering from 1/8 in. to 1 in. (3 mm to 25 mm), to form 16 ft by 16 ft (4.88 m by 4.88 m) sumped areas around roof drains (see Roof Drainage Layout Drawings).

.4 Tapered insulation for roof perimeters: unless indicated otherwise in the Drainage Layout Drawings, pre-tapered and pre-cut fibreboard from 1/8 in. to 1 in. (3 mm to 25 mm), 8 ft (2.44 m) wide across the slope, by Accu-Plane Systems Inc., Posi-slope Enterprises Inc., or an approved alternate.



.5 Tapered insulation for roof tie-ins: pre-tapered and pre-cut from 1/8 in. to 1 in. (3 mm to 25 mm), 24 inches (600 mm) wide across the slope, by Accu-Plane Systems Inc., Posi-slope Enterprises Inc., or an approved alternate.

.6 Cant: fibreboard, 4 in. by 4 in. (100 mm by 100 mm).

.3 Vertical Upstands, Blocking and Fasteners .1 Lumber: unless specified otherwise, softwood, S2S, moisture content 19% or less

in accordance with the following standards: .1 CSA O141-1070. .2 NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, 1980 edition

revised according to Supplement No. 1, 1981. .2 Use standard or better grade plywood and softwood members.

.1 Douglas Fir, standard grade, thickness as indicated on the drawings.

.2 Reinforcement: 3/4 in. (20 mm) exterior grade Douglas Fir plywood. .3 Preformed metal upstands

.1 18 gauge sheet steel with predrilled holes spaced at 12 in. (300 mm) on centre in a staggered pattern. Components of the metal upstands are to be as indicated on the Drawing Details (where found to be applicable).

.4 Fasteners .1 Nails and spikes: Large head roofing nails, galvanized, with special

barbed washers having a minimum diameter of 25 mm, to conform to CSA B111-1974, length as recommended by manufacturer.

.2 Screw fasteners to metal: Dekfast or Roofgrip screw fasteners, length as recommended by manufacturer.

.3 Fasteners to concrete or masonry: Sleeve Anchor by Hilti or Parol Hollow Masonry Anchor by The Rawlplug Co. Inc., length as recommended by manufacturer.

.4 Fasteners and plates for foam insulation: As recommended by the manufacturer.

.4 Coverings .1 Pea gravel: clean, washed, dry, pea gravel conforming to ASTM D1863, size 7,

round and opaque to ultraviolet light. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions .1 Before proceeding with roofing application ensure that the following have been

completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer: .1 Roof deck is constructed smoothly, in true planes and level or sloped to

drain in conformity to design intent. .2 Roof drains are set at a level to drain. Take spot levels to verify that

pools of water will not form on applied roofing. Tabulate levels and submit to Board Designee/Consultant at all times and as when requested in writing (to be done prior to the application of insulation).

.3 Removal of the existing vapour retarder over the roof deck (including concrete roof decks). Roof deck is clean and sufficiently dry for application under specified guarantee. Where an existing vapour retarder is well adhered to the roof deck, it will



be the discretion of the Consultant whether the existing vapour retarder can be overlaid with a new vapour retarder. All loose plies and wet areas of the existing vapour retarder shall be removed. On Siporex decks where the existing felt and gravel roof membrane is directly applied onto the deck, the existing roof membrane may be used as the new vapour barrier. The contractor shall remove all loose gravel, clean (power broom and/or wash) and prime existing roof membrane to the satisfaction of the Board Designee/Consultant repair defects in the existing roof membrane with two (2) plies No. 15 felts adhered with solid moppings of Type II asphalt. Apply a sufficient flood coat of Type II asphalt over the existing roof membrane to provide significantly level surface onto which the insulation can be applied.

.4 Adjacent construction and installation of work of others (e.g. mechanical/electrical trades) incorporated with roof is completed.

.5 Roofing surfaces are free of cracks that are wider than bridging ability of roofing materials.

.6 Preparations have been made for bases on which equipment will be installed.

.2 Notify the Board Designee/Consultant of any defects, deficiencies or deterioration of the substrate. Do not commence roofing work until defects, deficiencies, deterioration and incorrect levels are rectified. Defective work resulting from application of roofing on satisfactory surfaces will be considered the responsibility of those performing the work of this Section.

.3 It should be noted that the existing roof assembly is shown on the Drawings as a guide only. Submission of a bid/tender price for the project shall mean acceptance of the existing roof conditions and assemblies as noted on the Drawings.

.2 General Open Flame Precautions

.1 Training .1 The Roofing Contractor shall thoroughly train all personnel in the

recommended safety procedures for the use of kettles asphalt moppings, propane torching and the application of roofing products.

.2 Roofing industry associations have developed training programs for the safe use of kettles and torches. All applicators of modified bituminous roof membranes shall have attended appropriate training for the safe installation of the materials.

.3 The contractor shall train all personnel in the proper use of fire extinguishers as well as fire prevention and related fire fighting procedures.

.4 The Contractor shall train all personnel on first aid procedures. .2 Propane Torch Precautions

.1 The Contractor shall train all personnel in the proper set up and use of propane and torch equipment. All Contractors shall follow all HOT WORK procedures as outlined by the PDSB and Factory Mutual.

.2 The torch operator shall maintain control over the torch flame at all

times.



.3 Provide at least one fully charged twenty (20) pound (9 kg.) type ABC rated fire extinguisher for each torching device on the roof. The fire extinguishers should be stored in the immediate work area away from where the propane is being stored.

.4 Never torch directly to combustible materials. Personnel shall exercise extreme caution around the exposed edges of insulation to prevent flames from coming in contact with combustible materials.

.5 Do not use torching equipment in confined spaces or areas without sufficient ventilation.

.6 Conduct fire prevention inspections periodically during installation. A minimum one (1) hour fire watch should be conducted after the last torch has been extinguished for the day. The length of the fire watch may vary depending on the specifics of the project and the work completed each day.

Hot Works Program would be in effect for all Peel District School Board roof projects.

.3 General Workmanship

.1 Substrate: Free of foreign debris prior to and during the laying of roof membrane.

.2 Traffic and equipment: Keep off completed plies until adhesive has set.

.3 Wrapper and packaging materials: Not to be included in roofing system.

.4 Presence of entrapped aggregate: within new membrane, is sufficient cause for rejection.

.5 Fit plies into roof drain rims; install flashing and finishing plies; secure clamping collars; install domes.

.6 Extend 4-ply felt roofing membrane to top edge of cant at wall and projection bases.

.7 Cut out fishmouths/side laps which are not completely sealed; patch with additional moppings of hot asphalt. Replace all sheets which are not fully and continuously bonded.

.8 Types II and III roofing asphalt: .1 Using low burner flames during initial melt-downs. Circulate after initial

melt-down. .1 Maximum bitumen temperature: Type II heat to

450°F (232°C) and apply between 350°F to 415°F (177°C to 213°C), Type III heat to 500°F (260°C) and apply between 365°F to 435°F (185°C to 224°C).

.2 Application temperature range: EVT plus or minus 14°C.

.3 Application rates: quantities for waterstops / tie-offs, flashings, miscellaneous detail applications, and minimum kettle capacity are not included in application rates. To account for these factors, add additional quantities as required.

.9 Insulation: .1 Install insulation boards with mopping surface up.

.1 Firmly butt each insulation board to surrounding

boards. Do not jam or deform boards.



.2 Eliminate open joints and uneven surfaces. .3 Maximum insulation gap: 1/4 inch (6 mm). .4 Fill insulation board joint gaps larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) with roof

insulation. .5 Maximum elevation variation between boards at joints: 1/8 inch (3 mm). .6 Cut and fit insulation boards where roof deck intersects vertical surfaces.

Cut board 1/4 inch (6 mm) from vertical surface. .7 Stagger joints at least 6 inches (150 mm). .8 Filler size: 18 inches (450 mm) in length or width, minimum.

.4 Preparation .1 Protection:

.1 Contractor shall be responsible for protection of Board property during course of work. Lawns, shrubbery, paved areas, and building shall be protected from damage. Repair damage at no extra cost to Board.

.2 Prior to commencing roofing work, the Contractor shall notify the Board Designee/Consultant regarding any potential damage to vehicles in the immediate vicinity of the work.

.3 Provide at site prior to commencing removal of debris, a dumpster or dump truck to be located adjacent and parallel to the building where directed by Owner or the Board Designee/Consultant.

Note: During working hours, opened bins are not permitted on the school site. After hours, all bins must be covered and be protected for security reasons for the duration of the project.

.4 Preparation, roofing, flashings, membrane repairs, and insulation shall be installed and sealed in a watertight manner on same day of installation or before arrival of inclement weather.

.5 At the start of each work day roof drains within the daily work area shall be plugged and reviewed for leakage. Note all discrepancies to the Peel District School Board in writing. Plugs to be removed at end of each work day or before arrival of inclement weather.

.6 Arrange work sequence to avoid using newly constructed roofing for storage, walking surface, and equipment movement.

.7 Spilled or scattered debris shall be cleaned up immediately. Removed material to be disposed from roof as it accumulates.

.8 At end of each work day, removal areas shall be sealed with water stops (minimum 3-plies no. 15 felts) along edges and made watertight.

.9 Provide clean plywood walkways and take other precautions required to prevent tracking of aggregate/debris from existing membrane into new work area where aggregate/ debris pieces can be trapped within new roofing membrane. Contractor shall instruct and monitor his work crews to ensure that aggregate/debris is not tracked into new work areas on workmen's shoes or equipment wheels. Presence of entrapped aggregate/debris within new membrane is sufficient cause for its rejection.

.2 Surface preparation prior to installation roof replacement: .1 Remove and dispose of the existing roofing, insulation and vapour

retarder. Any loose or wet areas of the existing vapour retarder will be removed. For fully adhered vapour retarders, it will be at the discretion of the



Board Designee/Consultant (written approval only) whether the existing vapour retarder can be overlaid with the new vapour retarder. On concrete and precast concrete decks, all partially adhered vapour retarders shall be removed by mechanical abrasion. On Siporex decks where the existing felt and gravel roof membrane is directly applied onto the deck, and the existing roof membrane will be used as the new vapour retarder. The contractor shall remove all loose gravel, clean (power broom and/or wash) and prime existing roof membrane to the satisfaction of the Board Designee/Consultant.

.2 Sweep and blow clean roof deck or membrane after removals. .5 Carpentry

.1 Remove areas of rotted and deteriorated wooden or steel decking, blocking and cants as outlined for specific Schools.

.2 Mechanically attach wood blocking and metal upstands in accordance with Factory Mutual loss prevention data I.49.

.3 Parapet upstands: .1 Fasten 18 gauge metal upstands as indicated on the Roof Details. .2 Fasteners shall be installed in two (2) rows staggered. Spacing in any on

(1) row shall not exceed 16 inches (400 mm). Within 8 feet (2940 mm) of outside corners, spacing shall not exceed 12 inches (300 mm) in any one (1) row.

.4 Wall upstands: .1 Fasteners shall be installed in two (2) rows staggered. Spacing in any

(1) row shall not exceed 24 inches (600 mm). Within 8 feet (2440 mm) of outside corners, spacing shall not exceed 12 inches (300 mm) in any one (1) row.

.2 Offset blocking layers 12 inches (300 mm); weave corners. a. Blocking thickness: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) above final insulation

thickness. b. Width: 4 inches (100 mm) nominal.

.5 Sleepers and Mechanical Unit Upstands (equipment support): .1 Extend wood blocking at mechanical unit upstands to a minimum height

of 200mm above the surface of the new roof. Thickness to match existing. .2 Install new horizontal and vertical blocking at designated location.

.a Vertical blocking: 1) Thickness: 6 inches (150 mm), nominal. 2) Height: 8 inches (200 mm) above surface of roofing.

.b Horizontal blocking: 1) Thickness: Equal to final insulation thickness, including

tapered edge. 2) Width: 12 inches (300 mm), nominal.

Note: Finished height (clearance) of all parapets and curbs shall be eight (8) inches above the finished roof (field of the roof).



.3 Mechanically attach horizontal blocking to deck. Fasteners shall be installed in two (2) rows staggered. Spacing in any one (1) row shall not exceed 24 inches (600 mm)

.4 Mechanically attach vertical blocking to horizontal blocking. Fasteners shall be installed in two (2) rows staggered. Spacing in any one (1) row shall not exceed 24 inches (600 mm).

.6 Through deck piping box: .1 Secure using minimum two (2) fasteners per section. .2 Offset blocking layers 12 inches (300 mm), weave corners.

.a Blocking thickness: Equal to final insulation thickness including tapered edge.

.b Blocking width: 4 inches (100 mm), nominal. .6 Vapour Retarder

.1 On steel and wood decks, two (2) plies of asphalt laminated kraft paper as specified. Single ply kraft papers with multiple ply construction will not be considered as two (2) plies. All laps are to be sealed with uniform ribbons of cold process adhesive. Maintain uniform side laps of 4 inches (100 mm) and end laps of 18 inches (450 mm).

.2 On concrete and precast concrete, two (2) plies of No. 15 asphalt saturated perforated roofing felts adhered with solid moppings of Type II asphalt. Asphalt applied with uniform lap sides 4 inches (100 mm) and lap ends 18 inches (450 mm). Strip mop (parallel to precast panels) first ply of felt on precast concrete decks. Glaze over completed 2-ply vapour barrier system with Type II asphalt to seal system.

.3 On Siporex decks where the existing felt and gravel roof membrane is directly applied onto the deck, and the existing roof membrane will be used as the new vapour barrier. The contractor shall repair defects in the existing roof membrane with two (2) plies of No. 15 felts adhered with solid moppings of Type II asphalt, prime existing roof membrane and apply a flood coat of asphalt over the existing roof membrane to the satisfaction of the Board Designee/Consultant.

.4 On all roof decks, ensure laps are sealed and all tears repaired. .7 Insulation

.1 Adhere foam roof insulation/cants, tapered roof insulation and fibreboard overlay with a uniform (full width) and continuous mopping application of Type II asphalt applied at a minimum rate of 30 lbs. per 100 sq. ft. (1.5 kg/m2). The hot asphalt must be within 25F (14C) of the EVT temperature during application. .1 Immediately after placement, walk boards into hot bitumen to achieve

solid bond. .2 Promptly spread any bitumen pools that may accumulate on surfaces to

achieve smooth surface for roofing installation. .2 On steel and wood roof decks, all foam insulation shall be mechanically fastened

with screw (colour of screws to match the colour of the exposed roof deck) and plate fasteners (refer to Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 pages 12 - 13 for fastening guidelines). A minimum of 5 plates and fasteners are required per 4 ft by 4 ft (1.23 m by 1.23 m) insulation board and a minimum of 8 fasteners are required per 4 ft by 8 ft (1.23 m by 2.46 m) insulation board. The number of plates and fasteners shall be doubled in the perimeter and corner fields of the roof area. The fastener spacing and pattern are to be as detailed in



the Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28. .3 On precast, concrete and siporex decks where the foam insulation is fully adhered

in hot asphalt, mechanical fastening is not required. .4 Install tapered roof insulation according to insulation manufacture's

shop drawings. .5 Install 12.7 mm asphalt impregnated fibreboard over tapered roof insulation as

an insulation overlay. .6 At wall flashing (with thru-wall counter flashing), adhere cant strip to flashing

base in a continuous application of hot asphalt (fully mopped – Type II asphalt – minimum 15 lbs. per square of asphalt).

.7 At vertical upstands, adhere cant strip to flashing base in a continuous application of cant adhesive.

.8 At roof drains, use tapered roof insulation to form minimum 16 ft by 16 ft (4.88 m by 4.88 m) sumped areas around roof drains (see Drawing Details).

.8 Roof Membrane Application

.1 One ply No. 15 felt roof overlay .1 Install one (1) ply of No. 15 felt, shingle fashion. Overlap starter strips

26 inches (660 mm) with first ply, then overlap each succeeding ply 2 inches (50 mm). Lap ply membrane ends 4 inches (150 mm). Stagger end laps 3 feet (.91 metre) minimum. Place ply sheets to ensure water will flow over or parallel to; but, never against exposed edges.

.2 Install plies running perpendicular to the insulation's long joint.

.3 Apply Type II asphalt no more than 10 feet (3 metres) ahead of each roll being embedded.

.4 Ensure complete and continuous seal and contact between bitumen and ply sheets, including ends, edges, and laps without wrinkles, fishmouths, or blisters.

.5 Apply uniform and continuous pressure to exposed edge and end laps to ensure complete adhesion.

.6 Avoid walking on plies until adhesive/asphalt has set.

.7 Overlap previous day's work 600 mm (24 inches).

.8 The edges of a roofing membrane shall never butt together, even at roof edges, laps, tapered edge strips, and cants.

.9 Cut out fishmouths/side laps which are not completely sealed; patch. Replace all sheets which are not fully and continuously bonded.

.10 Type II asphalt application rate: (Minimum 25 lbs/100 sq. ft. or 1.2 kg/sm).

.1 Four ply glass fibre felt roof membrane .1 Install four (4) plies of glass fibre ply sheets, shingle fashion. Overlap

starter strips 26 inches (660 mm) with first ply, then overlap each succeeding ply 24-2/3 inches (625 mm). Place ply sheets to ensure water will flow over or parallel to; but, never against exposed edges.

.2 Install plies running perpendicular to the insulation's long joint.

.3 Use 12, 24 and 36 inch (300, 600 and 900 mm) wide plies to start and finish roof membrane along roof edges and terminations.

.4 Apply Type II asphalt no more than 10 feet (3 metres) ahead of each roll being embedded.



.5 Ensure complete and continuous seal and contact between asphalt and ply sheets, including ends, edges, and laps without wrinkles, fishmouths, or blisters.

.6 Apply uniform and continuous pressure to exposed edge and end laps to ensure complete adhesion.

.7 Avoid walking on plies until adhesive has set. “Kicking out” of the roof felt rolls is not permitted.

.8 Overlap previous day's work 600 mm (24 inches).

.9 The edges of a roofing membrane shall never butt together, even at roof edges, laps, tapered edge strips, and cants.

.10 Cut out fishmouths/side laps which are not completely sealed; patch. Replace all sheets which are not fully and continuously bonded.

.11 Lap ply membrane ends 4 inches (150 mm). Stagger end laps 3 feet (.91 metre) minimum.

.12 Type II asphalt application rate: Minimum 25 lbs/100 sq. ft. (1.2 kg/sm).

.9 Temporary/Permanent Waterstop/Tie-Ins .1 Remove and dispose of embedded gravel /debris and dirt from top ply of felt

along termination. .2 Width: 18 inches (450 mm). .3 Adhere 12 and 18 inch (300 and 450 mm) wide No. 15 asphalt ply sheets from

exposed deck to existing roofing with a continuous mopping application of Type II asphalt at (20 lbs./100 sq. ft.(square)). Glaze cut-off with Type II asphalt (minimum 20 lbs. per square). Extend 18 inch (450 mm) wide felt 3 inches (75 mm) either side 12 inch (300 mm) felt.

.4 Where the new roof butts existing roof install fill gap with insulation and overlay board as required.

.5 Extend roofing system at least 24 inches (600 mm) onto prepared area of adjacent roofing.

.6 At beginning of next day's work remove temporary connection by cutting felts evenly along edge of existing roof system. Remove insulation fillers as directed or required – though the specified insulation value must be maintained for the new roof assembly at all tie-in joints).

.10 Modified Bituminous Membrane .1 Modified bituminous base sheet:

.1 Cut membrane in 39 in. (1 m) wide, the roll width, by the length required to suit detail.

Allow the modified bitumen sheet to relax by complete unwinding the roll, and then turning it upside down.

.2 Extend membrane base flashing from minimum 8 in. (200 mm) out onto roof from toe of cant to minimum 8 in. (200 mm) above completed roof assembly surface. At parapet and open curb areas, carry base flashing over and fasten to front face (see Roof Detail Drawings). When rolling the modified bitumen sheet into the asphalt, the mechanic should mop no more than six (6) feet (1.83m) in front of the roll to assure that the temperature of the asphalt does not cool and fall below the temperature necessary for good embedment.



.3 Stagger side laps in membrane base flashing from side and end laps in roof membrane, as recommended by the manufacturer.

.4 Adhere membrane base flashings with uniform moppings of Type III roofing asphalt. As a minimum carry the base flashing over top of canted eaves or parapets and mechanically fasten to front edge according to the Roof Detail Drawings (Drawings D1-D20).

The asphalt must have a minimum temperature of 400F (204C) when the base sheet is set into place or to minimum requirements as specified by the Manufacturer (latest literature).

.5 Bevel torch membrane base flashing edges and seams with a flexible torch-heated trowel. This shall be the only roof area where the use of an open flame torch shall be permitted.

.2 Modified bituminous cap sheet: .1 Cut membrane in 39 in. (1 m) wide, the roll width, by the length required

to suit detail. Allow the modified bitumen sheet to relax by complete unwinding the roll,

and then turning it upside down.

.2 Torch adhere membrane cap flashings to base flashing and roofing (minimum roll surface temperature to be 330F (166C) for application purposes). Extend membrane cap flashing from minimum 12 in. (300 mm) out onto roof from toe of cant to minimum 8 in. (200 mm) above completed roof assembly surface). At parapet and open curb areas, carry base flashing over and fasten to front face (see Roof Detail Drawings).

Please note that the generation of smoke is an indication that the cap sheet is being overheated. At the discretion of the Board Designee/Consultant the work can be rejected.

.3 Stagger side laps in membrane cap flashing from side and end laps in roof membrane, as recommended by the Manufacturer.

.4 Carry cap flashing over top of canted eaves or parapets and mechanically fasten to front edge according to the Roof Detail Drawings.

.5 Bevel torch membrane cap flashing edges and seams with a flexible torch-heated trowel. This shall be the only roof area where the use of an open flame torch shall be permitted.

.6 Check all laps for proper adhesion. Correct as directed by the Board Designee/Consultant.

.11 Flood Coat and Gravel

.1 Single pour the main field of the roof with 60 lbs. per square (100 sq. ft.) or (2.9 kg/sm) of Type II asphalt and while the asphalt is still hot, embed 400 lbs. of gravel per 100 sq. ft. (19.5 kg/sm). Ensure that a complete film of asphalt covers the roofing felts and that the pea gravel covers all of the asphalt.

.2 Do not use wet or poorly washed pea gravel.

.3 Double pour all exposed outside corners of the roof by sweeping off the loose gravel from the first pour and pouring an additional flood coat and gravel. Minimum area of 25 SF per corner. Minimum 60lbs per square.



.12 Patio Stone Protection .1 One concrete patio stone along with 1 inch thick SM insulation board to suite

shall be installed at the base of all rainwater leaders/downspouts draining onto the roof membrane.

.2 Two concrete patio stones (except if noted otherwise) along with 1 inch thick SM insulation board to suite shall be installed at the bottom and top of all access ladders on the roof membrane.

.3 Two concrete patio stones (except if noted otherwise) along with 1 inch thick SM insulation board to suite shall be installed outside all doors accessing the roof membrane.

.13 Deficiency, Repair, Clean-up and Follow-up Work

.1 Repair of deficiencies: .1 Installations of details noted as deficient during Final inspection must be

repaired and corrected by applicator, at his/her expense and made ready for inspection, within two (2) working days after receiving the deficiency or deficiency list.

.2 Clean-up (Daily and at Job Completion): .1 Immediately upon job completion, roof membrane and flashing surfaces

shall be cleaned of debris to the satisfaction of the Board Designee. .2 Clean gutters and downspouts of all debris. .3 Ensure all plumbing lines are clear and free flowing. .4 Re-instate damaged landscaping as directed and as required. .5 Clean all windows and exterior wall surfaces affected by the work – all to

the satisfaction of the Peel District School Board. .6 Clean all grounds of the property affected by the work. .7 Re-instate damaged on-grade paving as noted by the Consultant. .8 All interior and exterior surfaces affected by the roof work shall be made

good immediately (within 24 hrs.) as directed by the Consultant. Failure to do this work (within a 24 hours written notice) shall in turn permit the Peel District School Board (PDSB) to engage a third party to complete the required clean-up and follow-up work. All costs (material and labour) including the Consultants cost ($200/hr plus disbursements and travel ($0.75/km)) shall be charged back to the designated roof contractor.

.9 Paint all gas lines affected by the work. PDSB vendor to be engaged for this work. All to the Ontario Fire Code (latest edition).

.10 Ensure all mechanical and electrical equipment are in working order. During summer (or when ambient air temperature is above 23C) all functioning air conditioning units shall be made operable for students and staff immediately (within a 2 hr notice). Failure to do so – see item No. 8 above.

.11 Remove from the roof any excess gravel deemed not required by the Consultant.

.12 Contractor to be present on site with the Consultant and the School Principal to discuss final deficiency clean-ups – as required.

END OF GUIDE SPECIFICATION


Version 2.2 Issued: March 4, 2016 Section: C.8 Windows & Glazing, Doors & Hardware Page 1 of 7

C.8 – WINDOWS & GLAZING (see Doors & Hardware Following) ALUMINUM WINDOWS & SKYLIGHTS General Issues Standard Approach The PDSB wishes to standardise, where possible the construction and quality

of school windows. The parameters of those standardized aspects are outlined in this section.

Energy Efficiency Consider specifying argon filled and/or Low Emissivity (“Low E”) coating

sealed units, giving consideration to factors such as energy savings, timing of production/availability, premium cost and warranty period.

Design Issues Each classroom shall have windows that open. The suggested minimum

number of operable windows is 2 per standard size classroom based on a single awning window size of about 600mm x 1200mm.

Design only “awning” style operators Shall be constructed of Aluminum sections Finish to be anodised (clear or coloured) or minimum PPG Duranar

(minimum 8000 series) finish or approved alternative finish by other manufacturers.

Do not specify aluminum doors or entrances, except main entrance(s) - See Hollow Metal Doors following

Avoid awnings projecting into paths of travel Avoid operators at heights that require persons to require a step up to reach

the handles/locks Review projection of operators into the position of blinds Avoid skylights when windows can be used for daylighting. Specification Issues: For new schools and additions, do not specify insect screens on windows In renovations, if insect screens are on existing windows to remain, discuss

with the owner providing screens to match existing conditions. Review manufacturers’ lead time for obtaining product-this can be significant

and may affect the intended construction schedule-especially for renovations and additions. Review with the Owner.

Quality Standards The following are Board standard requirements: install metal bar restrictors to each hinge at jamb to allow maximum 225 mm

opening



Provide telescopic operator and manual crank operating system for all windows where cams are required to be higher than 1800 above finished floor.

Glazing is to be tempered glass for outer panes of sealed units. The following are suggested guidelines for quality standards: The overall thermal transmittance of fenestration assemblies shall be less than

0.81 Btu. using ASHRAE 90.1 calculation procedures. Fenestration shall meet the following criteria and be referred to the latest

CAN/CSA standard: For wind load Air Leakage: A3 Fixed (maximum air leakage - 0.55 (m3/h)m-1) Water Leakage: B7 Wind Load Resistance: C5 Condensation Resistance: fixed frame: 71 minimum; glass: 67 minimum

Hinging hardware to be 4 bar concealed hinge 301 Series Heavy Duty Steel 4 bar hinges by Anderberg with positive stop and adjustable friction shoe. Acceptable alternates should be reviewed against this standard.

sills are to be extruded metal; . Break form shapes are not permitted unless heavy gauge samples submitted for approval.

Cam handles and keepers shall be solid cast white satin bronze. Provide a minimum of two (2) solid bronze or stainless steel cam handles per awning unit.

Glazing tapes shall be preformed polyisobutylene-butyl glazing tape with integral shim strip, 10-15 durometer, hardness, paper release, black color. Acceptable materials: Tremco Polyshim II by Tremco Ltd.

Submittals In addition to other submittals, require test certificates to be submitted. Warranties require 5 year extended warranties for windows and frames against leakage,

defects and malfunction and manufacturer’s extended warranty against defects in materials and workmanship covering the components of the window system.

Approved Manufacturers or Suppliers: Sherwood Windows Ltd, Aluminum Window Designs Ltd., Alwind Industries

Ltd., Windspec Inc., Alumicor Ltd., Kawneer Company Canada Ltd., or approved alternates who meet the performance and construction criteria listed above.

Construction Issues: On-site air and water test to meet the specified standard is recommended ensure limiters are placed on operators



GLAZING Design Issues If glazing, as opposed to ‘Lexan’ or ‘Plexiglas’ is used for skylights use

tempered glass outer lites and laminated glass for inner lites to prevent broken glass shards.

If windows are within a gymnasium area, consider use of ‘Lexan’ or ‘Plexiglas’ for vision panels, at the same time considering fire resistance requirements. Avoid these materials for skylights and other applications.

Specification Issues: All glazing to cabinet (millwork) doors to be 3 mm minimum and tempered

glass Ref. Arch.C.6 Carpentry & Millwork The following are standards for glazing of windows and screens: Exterior Sealed Units and non-fire-rated screens to be sealed insulating units:

The interior lites are to consist of minimum 4 mm (.16 in.) thick clear float glass and the exterior lites are to consist of 6 mm (.24 in.) thick tempered safety glass c/w low e-Film and etched tempered glass designation shall be visible.

Double glazed units to have an integral metal spacer creating a 13 mm hermetically sealed air space. Spacers shall be continuous with butt joints (if any) at corners only. Pieces are not permitted. Butyl based spacers are not permitted.

Interior Tempered Safety Glass: All interior Vision Glass to non-fire rated interior doors and screens to be tempered 6 mm tempered clear float glass complete with etched tempered glass designation visible.

Setting blocks: neoprene, 80 durometer hardness, 102 mm x 6 mm width to suit glass to extend from the fixed stop to the opposite face of the glazing unit.

Spacer Blocks: neoprene, thickness to provide a minimum glass to face clearance of 3mm.

Glazing tape: preformed polyisobutylene-butyl glazing tape with integral shim strip, 10-15 durometer, hardness, paper release, black color. Acceptable materials: Tremco Polyshim II by Tremco Ltd. or approved alternate.

Gasket: black neoprene "U" cavity type with lock strip. Sealant: one component silicone, Spectrem 2 by Tremco Ltd. Warranties Specify a 10 year extended warranty for sealed glazing units against defects.



C.8 – DOORS & HARDWARE STEEL HOLLOW METAL DOORS FRAMES AND SCREENS General Issues Refer to the Board Standard Specification following this section Ref.Arch.C.8-Std. Spec. for Hollow Metal A limited number of manufacturers currently meet the Board Standard for

Hollow Metal Doors. Should other manufacturers make submittals, designers are requested to pay

detailed attention to construction quality standards of any prospective acceptable alternate manufacturer.

Design Issues: Design of doors shall allow standard mounting heights of finished hardware,

refer to Board Standard for finished hardware following this section Ref.Arch.C.8-Std. Specification for Hardware Refer to typical door elevation Ref. Arch. B.8.1.a Review requirements for removable mullions in at least one location on the

ground and upper levels of the school in order to move in large furniture and equipment

Specification Issues: Co-ordinate Door Schedules with design of security system (in contract), fire

rating, and barrier free access requirements, etc. Note requirements for a door with no windows or sidelites to be provided to a

room as described in Lock Down Procedures. Ref. Arch.A.9-Lock Down Procedures Do not specify “Knock Down Frame” All doors are to be prepared for full mortise lock sets (except in A.L.E. room). Co-ordinate the designation of high traffic or heavy duty doors in door

schedule with suggested designation “HT” in Standard Specification. Warranties: Specify extended warranty of 3 years materials and labour including full

replacement in the event of failure. Materials shall be replace at no cost to the owner during the warranty period. Ref. Arch.C.1-Warranties

Approved Manufacturers or Suppliers: Fleming Steel Doors and Frames, tel. (905)683-3667 Ref.Arch.C.8 –Standard Specification for Hollow Metal Baron Metal Industries, tel. (416) 749-2111 Ref. to std. spec. Ref. detail drawing X Construction Issues: Review suggested Specification portion related to Hardware Inspection from

Cash Allowance. If used, activate inspection process immediately after Tender



To avoid future maintenance issues enforce proper storage of doors and frames on site and proper prime painting of hollow metal doors and frames Ref.Arch.C.9-Finishes

Construction Issues Stated to Renovations and Additions Review possible non-standard hollow metal frames and door heights in

existing buildings and consider lead time for hollow metal supply. If existing buildings requiring hollow metal door replacement are Imperial

size block and different than standard metric height, consider: removal of existing frame, insertion of Ashlar coarse or other lintel for height adjustment to standard metric height and new metric size door and frame—in lieu of potential long lead time for custom-made Imperial height doors.

ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES General Issues Refer to the Board Standard Specification following this section Ref.Arch.C.8-Std. Spec. Aluminum Doors A limited number of manufacturers currently meet the Board Standard for

Aluminum Doors. Should other manufacturers make submittals, designers are requested to pay

detailed attention to construction quality standards of any prospective acceptable alternate manufacturer.

Design Issues: Aluminum doors to be used at Front Entrance only Design of doors shall allow standard mounting heights of finished hardware,

refer to Board Standard for finished hardware following this section Ref.Arch.C.8-Std. Specification for Hardware Refer to typical door elevation Ref. Arch. B.8.1.a Review requirements for removable mullions in at least one location on the

ground and upper levels of the school in order to move in large furniture and equipment

Specification Issues: Co-ordinate Door Schedules with design of security system (in contract), fire

rating, and barrier free access requirements, etc. Doors are to be prepared for full mortise lock sets Co-ordinate the designation of high traffic or heavy duty doors in door

schedule with suggested designation “HT” in Standard Specification. Warranties: Specify extended warranty of 3 years materials and labour including full

replacement in the event of failure. Materials shall be replace at no cost to the owner during the warranty period. Ref. Arch.C.1-Warranties



Approved Manufacturers or Suppliers: Alumicor Ltd., Kawneer Company Canada Ltd., Sherwood Windows, Aerloc

Industries, Alwind Industries or Windspec Inc. Ref.Arch.C.8 –Std. Specification for Aluminum Doors Construction Issues: Review suggested Specification portion related to Hardware Inspection from

Cash Allowance. If used, activate inspection process immediately after Tender Construction Issues Stated to Renovations and Additions Review possible non-standard aluminum frames and door heights in existing

buildings and consider lead time for aluminum supply. If existing buildings requiring hollow metal door replacement are Imperial

size block and different than standard metric height, consider: removal of existing frame, insertion of Ashlar coarse or other lintel for height adjustment to standard metric height and new metric size door and frame—in lieu of potential long lead time for custom-made Imperial height doors.

FINISH HARDWARE General Issues Refer to the enclosed Board Standard specification for Finish Hardware

Ref.Arch.C.8-Std. Specification for Hardware Design Issues: Entrance Locking Configuration Note that locking hardware for school entry/exit doors must be carefully

integrated with Barrier Free access hardware. Board Standard requirements follow:

Entry doors provided with barrier free access hardware shall have an electric strike on the active outer barrier free power operated leaf

A Key Switch over ride shall be provided for this outer power operated leaf to disengage the exterior push button when the door is locked

Exit devices on outer doors (Panic Bars) shall have ability to be dogged open

Either doors of vestibules require latch mechanisms without the ability to be dogged open

Inner vestibule doors with power assist shall be supplied with electric strike which opens when barrier free push button is activated

Removable mullions in such doors shall be provided with contactors for electric strike in head of the removable mullion

Review possible use of low voltage magnetic hold opens for doors in areas of high traffic such as stair wells

Magnetic locks (Mag Locks) are not allowed on school doors.



Switch to over-ride shall have IC core best N2 core Specification Issues: Refer to Board Standard Specification attached. Refer to Cash Allowance for provision of value of permanent lock cylinders

and cores Ref. Arch.C.1–Gen’l Requirements - Allowances The Board supplies, installs and maintains records of its own permanent lock

cores. In order to allow competitive pricing for hardware suppliers, the Board

requires designers to allocate the supply and installation cost of all brass construction cores and permanent lock cores to Cash Allowances.

For current Cash Allowance value refer to Assistant Supervisor, ‘Structural Department’, Maintenance Services Department, PDSB, tel. 905-279-4310, ext. 241.

Indicate in hardware specification that this component is a Cash Allowance and not to be included in the supply cost for Finish Hardware

Note that all door lock sets are mortise type (except in A.L.E. room) Ensure no deviation from Board Standard Specification from list of

acceptable products and alternates. Millwork Locking: All millwork to be keyed alike (per room). Exception: the

Teacher's Cabinet (C1) should be locked to match classroom door. Ref. Arch. B.6-Millwork details For the lockset in all A.L.E. rooms use the following special lockset:

Corbin Russwin CL3390-626 Warranties: Specify a full 3 year warranty including all labour and materials for repairs or,

in the event of irreparable conditions, total replacement of hardware. Refer to clauses in standard specifications.

Construction Issues: To co-ordinate the supply and installation of the permanent lock cylinders and

cores, forward to Assistant Supervisor, ‘Structural Department’, Maintenance Services Department, (cc. the PDSB Project Manager) the tender award, approved hardware list architectural drawings showing all door numbers, and information on anticipated hardware installation period.

Ensure the supply of brass construction cores, installed in a timely fashion to secure the project after doors are installed.

Renovations and Additions: Follow identical procedures for Renovations and Additions.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.8 – Std. Spec.: Hollow Metal Page 1 of 12

Standard Specification: Steel Hollow Metal Doors, Frames and Screens [Consultants may revise to suit preferred numbering system for headings, articles, sentences] PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Work

[insert list of related work here; examples follow]

1. Building-in of frame product into unit masonry, previously placed concrete, structural steel or wood stud walls.

2. Supply and installation of wood, plastic or composite core doors. 3. Supply and installation of builders’ hardware except as specified for acoustic assemblies. 4. Drilling and tapping for surface mounted or non-templated builders’ hardware. 5. Caulking of joints between frame product and other building components. 6. Supply and installation of gaskets or weather-strip. 7. Supply and installation of louvers or vents. 8. Supply and installation of glazing materials. 9. Site touch-up and painting. 10. Wiring for electronic or electric hardware. 11. Field measurements. 12. Fasteners for frame product in previously placed concrete, masonry or structural steel. 13. Steel lintels, posts, columns or other load-bearing elements. 14. Field welding. 15. Doors and frame primed with marine grade primer. 16. Reinforced, key removable mullions. Mullion stabilizers.

1.2 Work Included

1. A single manufacturer shall fabricate products included within the scope of this Section. 2. Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Canadian Steel Door

Manufacturers Association (CSDMA). 3. Supply only of steel frame products including frames, transom frames, sidelight and window

assemblies with provision for glazed, paneled or louvered openings, fire labeled and non-labeled, as scheduled or detailed by the Architect.

4. Supply only of flush steel doors with provision for glazed, paneled or louvered openings, insulated and un-insulated, fire labeled, with or without temperature rise ratings and non-labeled, as scheduled or detailed by the Architect.

5. Supply only of steel panels, similar in construction to steel doors, with flush or abetted bottoms for steel frames, transom frames, sidelight and window assemblies, fire labeled and non-labeled, as scheduled or detailed by the Architect.

1.3 Requirements of regulatory agencies

1. Install fire labeled steel door and frame product in accordance with NFPA-80, current edition, unless specified otherwise.



1.4 References 1. ANSI A115.IG-1994 Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware 2. ANSI A250.4-1994 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical

Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings. 3. ASTM A653-M97 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

4. ASTM A924-M97 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Sheet, Metalic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

5. ASTM B117-95 Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing. 6. ASTM C177-97 Test Method for Steady-State heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.

7. ASTM C518-91 Test method for Steady State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission properties by means of the heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

8. ASTM C578-95 Specification for Rigid, Cellular polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 9. ASTM C665-95 Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for

Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 10. ASTM D1735-92 Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coating Using Water Fog

Apparatus. 11. CAN4-S104-M80 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 12. CAN4-S105-M85 Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting the

performance required by CAN4-S104. 13. CAN4-S106-M80 Standard Method for Fire Tests of Window and Glass Block

Assemblies. 14. CGSB 41-Gp-19Ma Rigid Vinyl Extrusions for Windows and Doors 15. CGSB 82.5-M88 Insulated Steel Doors. 16. CSA A101-M83 Mineral Fiber Thermal insulation for Buildings. 17. CSA W59-M89 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). 18. ISO 9001:1994 Quality Systems – Model for Quality Assurance. 19. NFPA-80, 1999 Fire Doors and Windows 20. CSDMA Dimensional Standards for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames. 21. Manufacturers Standard and Galvanized Sheet Gauges 22. Fleming Fire Labeling Specifications 23. ULC List of Equipment and Materials, Volume 2

1.5 Testing and Performance

1. Door constructions covered by this specification shall be certified as meeting Level “A” (1,000,000 cycles) and Twist Test Acceptance Criteria (deflection not to exceed 6.4 mm /13.6kg force, total deflection at 136.1kg force not to exceed 63.5 mm and permanent deflection not to exceed 3.2 mm) when tested in strict conformance with ANSI-A250.4-1994. Test shall be conducted by an independent nationally recognized accredited laboratory.

2. Fire labeled product shall be provided for those openings requiring fire protection and temperature rise ratings, as determined and scheduled by the Architect. Doors, frames, transom frames and sidelight assemblies shall be tested in strict accordance with CAN4-S106. Product shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories of Canada under an active



Factory Inspection Program and shall be constructed as detailed in Follow-Up Service procedures issued to the manufacturer.

3. Should any door or frame specified by the Architect to be fire rated, not qualify for labeling due to design, hardware, glazing or any other reason, the Architect shall be so advised before manufacturing commences.

4. Core materials for exterior doors shall attain a thermal resistance rating of RSI 1.06 (R6.0) when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518.

5. Product shall be manufactured by a firm experienced in the design and production of standard and custom commercial steel door and frame assemblies, the integration of builders’ or electronic hardware and glazing materials and their impact on the scope of work.

6. Product quality shall meet standards set by the Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association.

1.6 Test Reports

1. All alternates to this specification shall be submitted to the Architect for acceptance ten (10) days prior to bid date, complete with test reports from independent, nationally recognized testing authorities, certifying that: 1. Steel door and frame assemblies furnished under this section meet the acceptance

criteria of ANSI-A250.4-1994, Level “A”. 2. Insulated door cores furnished in exterior doors under this Section meet the specified

thermal resistance rating. 2. All reports shall include name of testing authority, date of test, location of test facility,

descriptions of test specimens, procedures used in testing and indicate compliance with acceptance criteria of the test.

1.7 Submittals

1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. 2. Indicate each type of door, frame, steel, core, material thickness, mortises, reinforcements,

anchorages, locations of exposed fasteners, openings (glazed, paneled or louvered) and arrangement of standard builders’ hardware.

3. Include a schedule identifying each unit, with door marks or numbers referencing the numbering in Architect’s schedules or drawings.

4. Provide confirmation in writing that all aspects to reinforcing, construction, and gauge of metal are met as written in this section.

1.8 Extended Warranty

1. All steel door and frame product shall be warranted from defects in workmanship for a period of three (3) years from date of shipment.

2. All steel door and frame product shall be warranted against rust perforation for a period of ten (10) years when the installed and finish painted with a commercial quality paint to the manufacturers recommendations.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Doors 2.1.1 Materials

1. Doors shall be fabricated from tension leveled steel to ASTM A924-M97, galvanized to ASTM A653-M97, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, coating designation ZF75, known commercially as paintable ‘Galvanneal’. .1 Acceptable Manufacturers: SW Fleming Ltd., Baron Metal Industries Inc., Trillium

Steel Doors Ltd. .2 Acceptable Alternative Manufacturers may be accepted providing they demonstrate

prior to the close of tender, products meeting or exceeding exact specifications outlined in this section.

2. Door Cores: [Designers to note: honeycomb doors are not to be specified for high traffic areas; they

are-suitable for, closets and storage room doors or doors, possibly for doors on magnetic hold open other than corridors and stairwells.]

Honeycomb: Structural small cell (25.4 mm maximum) kraft paper “honeycomb”. Weight: 36.3 kg per ream (minimum), density: 16.5 kg/m3 (minimum), sanded to the required thickness.

1. Polystyrene: Rigid extruded, fire retardant, closed cell board, density 16kg/m2, thermal values: RSI 1.06 minimum, conforming to ASTM C578.

2. Temperature Rise Rated (TRR): Solid slab core of non-combustible, inorganic composite to limit temperature rise on the “unexposed” side of door to 250°C at 30 or 60 minutes, as required by governing building code requirements and determined and scheduled by the Architect.

3. Adhesives: 1. Honeycomb Cores and Steel Components:

Heat resistant, spray grade, resin reinforced neoprene/rubber (polychloroprene) based, low viscosity, contact cement or ULC approved equivalent.

2. Interlocking Edge Seams: Resin reinforced polychloroprene (RRPC), fire resistant, high viscosity, sealant/adhesive or UL approved equivalent.

3. Polystyrene Cores: Heat resistant, epoxy based, low viscosity, contact cement.

4. Primer: Rust inhibitive touch-up only. Marine grade. 5. Exterior Top Caps: Rigid polyvinylchloride (PVC) extrusion.



2.1.2 Construction

1. General: 1. This section is based on doors and frames as manufactured by Fleming. Doors and

frames by other manufacturers are acceptable and subject to be similar to the one specified and meeting the terms of this section.

2. Doors shall be swinging, 44.4 mm thick of the types and sizes indicated on the Architect’s schedules or drawings.

3. Exterior doors shall have continuously welded edge seams. 4. Face sheets for exterior doors shall be fabricated from (16) gauge steel. 5. Longitudinal edges of exterior doors shall be fully welded, ground smooth with no

visible seams. 6. Face sheets of interior doors shall be fabricated from 18 gauge steel, except for heavy

traffic doors [may be noted HT in Door Schedule] face sheet to be 16 gauge. 7. Longitudinal edge of heavy traffic doors [may be noted HT in Door Schedule] shall be

continuously welded, ground smooth with no visible seams. Do not fill seams. 8. Interior doors shall be stiffened, insulated and sound deadened with honeycomb core

laminated under pressure to each face sheet. 9. Temperature Rise Rated (TRR) fire labeled doors as specified on the Architect’s

schedules shall be stiffened, insulated and sound deadened. 10. Longitudinal edges of interior doors shall be mechanically interlocked, adhesive assisted

with edge seams and tack-welded every 150 mm and filled flush. 11. Door faces of all steel doors shall be fabricated without visible seams, free of scale,

pitting, coil brakes, buckles and waves. 12. Formed edges shall be true and straight with a minimum radius for the thickness of steel

used. 13. Lock and hinge edges shall be beveled 3 mm in 50 mm unless builders’ hardware or

door swing dictates otherwise. 14. Top and bottom of doors shall be provided with inverted, recessed, 16 gauge steel end

channels, welded to each face sheet at 150 mm on center maximum. 15. Exterior doors shall be provided with factory installed flush PVC top caps. Fire labeled

exterior doors shall be provided with factory installed flush steel top caps. 16. Unless ineligible due to design, size, hardware or glazing specified on the Architects’ or

hardware Suppliers’ schedules or details, fire labeled doors shall be provided for those openings requiring fire protection ratings and temperature rise ratings, as determined and scheduled by the Architect.

17.Exterior doors and High Traffic [HT] doors shall be internally reinforced with 20 gauge continuous; interlocking steel stiffeners at 150mm O.C. max, with voids between stiffeners filled and insulated with 24kg/m3 density loose batt type fiberglass material to suit fully welded design.

[Designers Note: the PDSB is reviewing an alternate High Traffic door type consisting of

stiffened face sheets using urethane adhesive-applied 20 ga. vertical steel channel reinforcing sections in lieu of welded 20 gauge interlocking stiffeners. All other preparations, welds and reinforcing as specified. Manufactured by Baron Metal; review if acceptable to PDSB before Tender and may be specified as an acceptable alternate to reinforcing system in sentence 17. above.]

2. Hardware Preparations:



1. Doors shall be factory blanked, reinforced, drilled and tapped for fully templated mortised hardware only, in accordance with the final approved schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier.

2. Doors shall be factory blanked and reinforced only for mortised hardware that is not fully templated.

3. Doors shall be factory reinforced only for surface mounted hardware. 4. Templated holes 12.7mm diameter and larger shall be factory prepared, except

mounting and through bolt holes, which shall be by the contractor responsible for installation on site, at the time of application. Templated holes less than 12.7mm diameter shall be factory prepared only when required for the function of the device (for knobs, levers, cylinders, thumb or turn pieces) or when these holes over-lap function holes.

5. Drilling and tapping for surface mounted hardware or mortised hardware that is not fully templated shall be by the contractor responsible for installation on site, at the time of application.

6. Hinge and pivot reinforcements shall be 10 gauge steel minimum high frequency type reinforcing.

7. Hinge reinforcements for acoustic doors and doors in excess of 2450mm rabbet height shall be 10 gauge minimum with each cutout provided with 114.3mm heavy weight (4.6mm) high frequency type.

8. Lock, strike and flush bolt reinforcements shall be 12 gauge steel minimum. 9. Reinforcements for concealed closers and holders shall be 12 gauge steel minimum. 10. For surface mounted hardware, reinforcements shall be 16 gauge steel minimum. 11. All pairs of fire labeled doors shall be provided with 12 gauge steel surface mounted flat

bar astragal, shipped loose for application on site, by the contractor responsible for installation.

12. Pairs of doors up to 2450mm x 2450mm, to 1½ hour fire rating maximum shall be provided without astragals. Lock edge seam of such doors shall be tacked-welded and ground smooth. All other fire labeled pairs shall be provided with 12 gauge steel surface mounted flat bar astragal, shipped loose for application on site, by the contractor responsible for installation.

13. Where electrically or electronically operated hardware is specified on the Architects’ schedules or details of the final approved schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier, hardware enclosures and/or junction boxes, where indicated on the templates, shall be provided and interconnected with CSA Approved 12.7mm diameter conduit and connectors.

14. Prepare doors to receive security door contacts – refer to electrical drawings for locations. Door contacts to be installed at 100 mm from the latch side door edge.

3. Glazing:

1. Where 6mm thick glazing materials are specified on the Architects schedules or details, doors shall be provided with 20 gauge steel glazing trim and snap-in glazing stops.

2. Where other that 6mm glazing is specified on the Architect’s schedules or details, doors shall receive 20 gauge steel trim and screw fixed glazing stops. Screws shall be #6 x 32mm oval head scrulox (self-drilling) type at 300mm on center maximum.

3. Glazing trim and stops shall be accurately fitted, butted at corners, with removable glazing stops located on the ‘push’ side of the door.

4. Louver Preparations:



1. Where specified on the Architect’s schedules or details, non-labeled doors shall be prepared on accordance with the louver manufacturer’s details.

2. Where specified on the Architect’s schedules or details, fire labeled doors shall be prepared for UL listed sight-proof fusible link louvers in accordance with the louver manufacturer’s details.

3. Louvers shall be supplied and installed by others. 5. Finishing:

1. Remove weld slag and splatter from exposed surfaces. 2. All tool marks, abrasions and surface blemishes shall be filled and sanded to present

smooth uniform surfaces. 3. On exposed surfaces where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication, doors

shall receive a factory applied touch-up primer. 4. Primer to be (1) coat galvanized oil based primer (Glidden #4120 or approved

alternate). All base metals to be chemically cleaned and degreased prior to priming. Finish painting by others per Painting specification.

2.2 Panels

1. Panels shall be fabricated form the same materials, construction and finished in the same manner as doors as specified in Section 2.1.

2.3 Frame Product 2.3.1 Materials

1. Steel: Frame product shall be fabricated from tension leveled steel to ASTM A924-M97, galvanized to ASTM A653-M97, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, coating designated ZF75, known commercially as paintable ‘Galvanneal’.

2. Primer: Rust inhibitive touch up only. Marine grade.

3. Miscellaneous: 1. Door Silencers:

GJ-64, Single Stud rubber/neoprene type 2. Thermal Breaks:

Rigid polyvinylchloride (PVC) extrusion 3. Fiberglass:

Loose batt type, density: 24kg/m3 (minimum), conforming to ASTM C665 2.3.2 Construction

1. General: 1. All steel frame product shall be of the types, sizes and profiles indicated on the

Architects’ schedules or details. 2. Exterior frames shall be thermally broken, fabricated from 16 gauge steel. 3. Exterior frame product shall be supplied profile welded (PW) 4. Interior and exterior sections of thermally broken frames shall be separated by a

continuous PVC thermal break.



1. Thermally broken sections shall not be assembled by means of screws, grommets or other fasteners and welds shall not cause thermal transfers between interior and exterior surfaces of the frame sections.

2. Closed sections (mullions and center rails) of thermally broken frames shall be factory insulated with 24kg/m3 loose batt type fiberglass material.

5. Insulation of open sections (jambs, heads and sills) on exterior frame product shall be provided and installed by the contractor responsible for installation.

6. Interior frames shall be fabricated from 16 gauge steel. 7. Interior frame product shall be supplied profile welded (PW) 8. Knocked-down and knocked-down drywall frames shall not be acceptable. 9. Jambs, heads, mullions, sills and center rails shall be straight and uniform throughout

their lengths. 10. Frame product shall be square, free of defects, wraps or buckles. 11. Corner joints shall be profile welded (PW) (continuously welded on the inside of the

profiles’ faces, rabbets, returns and soffit intersections with exposed faces filled and ground to a smooth, uniform, seamless surface)”

12. Joints at mullions, transom bars, sills or center rails shall be coped accurately, butted and tightly fitted, with faces securely welded, matching corner joint faces.

13. All steel mullions will be fabricated from the same materials as specified for the steel frames. Steel mullions will be fabricated as a fully assembled three piece unit consisting of a front, back and full height one piece attachment clip. The attachment clip will completely fill the stop area of the mullion on both sides and span the void between each side forming a grid channel like structure. Mullions used as hinge mullions or strike mullions between doors will be filled with grout by the general contractor either prior to or following installation of the frame. The head of the frame shall have an opening sufficient for the grout to be poured in to the mullion.

14. Mullions shall be fabricated with continuous 20 gauge galvanneal steel internal reinforcing clips.

15. Frame product shall be fabricated with integral door stops having a minimum height of 16mm.

16. Glazing stops shall be formed 20 gauge steel, 16mm height channel, accurately fitted, butted at corners and fastened to frame sections with #6 x 32mm oval head scrulox (self-drilling) type screws at 300mm on center maximum.

17. Where required due to site access, as indicated on the Architects’ schedules or details, when advised by the contractor responsible for co-ordination or installation, or when shipping limitations so dictate, frame product shall be fabricated in sections for splicing in the field.

1. Field spliced jambs, heads and sills shall be provided with 16 gauge steel splice plates securely welded into one section, extending 100mm minimum each side of splice joint.

2. Field splices at closed sections (mullions or center rails) shall be 16 gauge steel splice angles securely welded to the abutting member. Face of splice angle shall extend 100mm minimum into closed sections when assembled.

3. Field splice joints shall be welded, filled and ground to present a smooth uniform surface by the contractor responsible for installation after assembly.

18. Each door opening shall be provided with two (2) temporary steel jamb spreaders welded to the base of the jambs or mullions to maintain proper alignment during shipping and handling. Spreaders shall be removed by the contractor responsible for installation prior to anchoring of frame to floor.



19. Each door opening shall be prepared for GJ-64 or equivalent, single stud door silencers, three (3) for single door openings, two (2) for double door openings. Silencers shall be shipped loose for installation by the contractor after finish painting.

20. Unless ineligible due to design, size, hardware or glazing specified on the Architects’ or Hardware Suppliers’ schedules or details, fire labeled frame product shall be provided for those openings required fire protection ratings as determined and scheduled by the Architect.

2. Hardware Preparations

1. Frame product shall be blanked, reinforced, drilled and tapped for fully templated mortised hardware only, in accordance with the final approved schedule and templated provided by the hardware supplier.

2. Frame product shall be factory blanked and reinforced only for mortised hardware that is not fully templated.

3. Frame product shall be reinforced only for surface mounted hardware. 4. Drilling and tapping for surface mounted hardware or mortised hardware that is not

fully templated shall be by the contractor responsible for installation on site, at the time of application.

5. Frames shall be prepared for 114.3mm standard weight hinges (minimum). 6. Hinge and pivot reinforcements shall be 10 gauge steel minimum reinforcing, high

frequency type shall be provided. 7. Hinge reinforcements for acoustic frames and frames in excess of 2450mm rabbet height

shall be 10 gauge minimum with each cutout provided with 114.3mm heavy weight (4.6mm) high frequency type.

8. Strike reinforcements shall be 16 gauge steel minimum. 9. Reinforcements for surface mounted hardware, concealed closers and holders and flush

bolts shall be 12 gauge steel minimum. 10. Mortised cutouts shall be protected with 22 gauge steel minimum guard boxes. 11. Where electrically or electronically operated hardware is specified on the Architects

schedules or details or the final approved schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier, hardware enclosures and/or junction boxes, where indicated on templates, shall be provided and inter-connected with CSA Approved 12.7mm diameter conduit and connectors.

12. Prepare frames to receive security door contacts – refer to electrical drawings for locations. Door contacts to be installed at 100 mm from the latch side door edge.

3. Anchorage:

1. Frame product shall be provided with anchorage appropriate to floor, wall and frame construction.

2. Each wall anchor shall be located immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on the hinge jamb and directly opposite on the strike jamb, except as indicated below.

3. Frame product installed in unit masonry partitions shall be provided with 4.0mm diameter steel wire anchors, 18 gauge steel adjustable stirrup and strap or “T” type anchors as conditions dictate.

4. Where frame product is installed prior to construction of the adjacent wall, each jamb shall be provided with 16 gauge steel floor anchors. Each anchor shall be provided with two (2) holes for mounting to the floor and shall be securely welded to the inside of the jamb.



5. Floor anchors for thermally broken exterior frames shall be designed so as not to permit thermal transfers from exterior to interior surfaces of the frame sections.

6. Frame product installed in drywall partitions shall be provided with 20 gauge steel snap-in or “Z” type stud type anchor.

7. Jambs of frames in previously placed concrete, masonry or structural steel shall be punched and dimpled to accept machine bolt anchors, 6.4mm diameter, located not more than 150mm from the top and bottom of each jamb. Anchor preparations and guides shall also be located immediately above or below the intermediate hinge reinforcings and directly opposite on the strike jamb. Each preparation shall be provided with 16 gauge anchor bolt guides.

8. Anchor bolts and expansion shell anchors for the above preparations shall be provided by the contractor responsible for installation.

9. After sufficient tightening of the anchor bolts, the heads shall be welded do as to provide a non-removable application. Welded bolt head and dimple shall be filled and ground to present a smooth uniform surface by the contractor responsible for installation, prior to finish painting.

10. Where indicated on the Architects’ schedules or details, channel extensions shall be provided from the top of the frame assembly to the underside of the structure above. Extensions shall be fabricated from 12 gauge steel formed channel, mounting angles welded to inside of frame head and adjusting brackets. Formed channels, adjusting brackets and fasteners shall be shipped loose. Channels shall be mechanically connected to mounting angles and adjusting brackets with supplied fasteners, on site, by contractor responsible for installation.

4. Finishing:

1. Remove weld slag and spatter from exposed surfaces. 2. All tool marks, abrasions and surface blemishes shall be filled and sanded to present

smooth and uniform surfaces. 3. On exposed surfaces where zinc has been removed during fabrication, frame product

shall receive a factory applied touch-up primer. 4. Primer to be (1) coat galvanized oil based Glidden #4120. All base metal to be

chemically cleaned and degreased prior to priming. Finish painting by others per Painting specification.

2.4 Sizes and Tolerances

1. All sizes and tolerances shall be in accordance with the Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association “Recommended Dimensional Standards for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames” as follows: 1. Widths of door openings shall be measured from inside of frame jamb rabbet with a

tolerance of +1.6mm, -0.8mm. 2. Heights of door openings shall be measured from the finished floor (exclusive of floor

coverings) to the head rabbet of the frame with a tolerance of + 1.2mm. 3. Unless builders’ hardware dictates otherwise, doors shall be sized so as to fit the above

openings and allow a 3mm clearance at jambs and head. A clearance of 19mm between the bottom of the door and the finished floor (exclusive of floor coverings) shall be provided. Tolerances on door sizes shall be + 1.2mm.

4. Manufacturing tolerances on formed frame profiles shall be + 0.8mm for faces, door stop heights and jamb depths. Tolerances for throat openings and door rabbet shall be



+ 1.6mm and + 0.4mm respectively. Hardware cutout dimensions shall be as per template dimensions, +0.4mm, -0.

2.5 Hardware Locations

1. Hardware preparations in frame product shall be as noted below and locations on doors shall be adjusted for clearances specified in 2.4.

2. Top of upper hinge preparation for 114.3mm hinges shall be located 180mm down from head, transom mullion or panel as appropriate. The top of the bottom hinge preparation for 114.3mm hinges shall be located 310mm from finished floor as defined in 2.4.3. Intermediate hinge preparations shall be spaced equally between top and bottom cutouts. For dutch door frames, top and bottom hinge locations shall be as above, with the tops of intermediate hinges located at 930mm and 1403mm from finished floor.

3. Strike preparations for unit, integral, cylindrical and mortise locks and roller latches shall be centered 1033mm from finished floor. Strikes for deadlocks shall be centered at 1200mm from finished floor. Strikes for panic or fire exit hardware shall be located as per device manufacturer’s templates.

4. Push and/or pulls on doors shall be centered 1070 mm from finished floor. 5. Preparations not noted above shall be as per hardware manufacturer’s templates. 6. Hardware preparation tolerances shall comply with the ANSI A115 series standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Site and Protection of Materials

1. The contractor responsible for installation shall remove wraps or covers from door and frame product upon delivery at building site.

2. All materials shall be thoroughly inspected upon receipt and all discrepancies, deficiencies and/or damages shall be immediately reported in writing to the supplier, All damage shall be noted on the carriers’ Bill of Landing.

3. Contractor responsible for installation shall ensure all materials are properly stored on planks or dunnage in a dry location. Product shall be stored in a vertical position, spaced with blocking to permit air circulation between them. Materials shall be covered to protect them from damage from any cause.

4. Contractor shall notify the supplier in writing of any errors or deficiencies in the product itself before initiating any corrective work.

3.2 Installation

1. Install doors and frames in accordance with the Door and Hardware Institute “Installation guide for doors and hardware”.

2. Set frame product plumb, square, aligned, without twist at correct elevation. 3. Frame Product Installation Tolerances:

1. Plumbness tolerance, measured through a line from the intersecting corner of vertical members and the head to the floor, shall be + 1.6mm.

2. Squareness tolerance, measured through a line 900 from one jamb at the upper corner of the product, to the opposite jamb, shall be + 1.6mm.

3. Alignment tolerance, measured on jambs, through a horizontal line parallel to the plane of the wall, shall be + 1.6mm.



4. Twist tolerance, measured at face corners of jambs, on parallel lines perpendicular to the plane of the wall, shall be + 1.6mm.

4. Fire labeled product shall be installed in accordance with NFPA-80. 5. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. 6. Brace frame product rigidly in position while building-in. Remove temporary steel shipping

jamb spreaders. Install wood spreaders at mid points of frame rabbet height and at floor level to maintain frame widths. Provide vertical support at center of head for openings exceeding 1250mm in width. Remove wood spreaders after product has been built-in.

7. Frame product in unit masonry shall be fully grouted in place. 8. Install doors maintaining clearances outlined in Section 2.4. 9. Install louvers and vents. 10. Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and function. 11. Steel surfaces shall be kept free of grout, tar or other bonding materials or sealers. 12. Any grout or other bonding material shall be cleaned from products immediately following

installation. 13. Exposed field welds shall be finished to present a smooth uniform surface and shall be

touched-up with a rust inhibitive primer. 14. Exposed surfaces that have been scratched or otherwise marred during shipment, installation

or handling shall be touched-up with a rust inhibitive primer. 15. Install glazing materials and door silencers. 16. Fixed windows lites to be glazed with Tremco (pre-shimmed ) Polyshim 11 exterior glazing

tape. Needle point/ cap-bead with clear silicone Spectrem 2 to any glazing and exterior stops so as to avoid trapping of water

17. For exterior sealant only, metal to masonry, metal to wood and metal to metal joints use a high performance , single component modified elastomeric joint sealant conforming to CAN 19.24-M80, Type 1 and 2, colour to match existing materials urethane based Sonolastic Ultra by Degussa or an approved alternate.

18. For interior sealant only, use low odour silicone based Spectrem 2 by Tremco 3.3 Inspection

1. In accordance with Division One, upon assignment of an inspection agency the following inspections shall be performed:

.1 review of shop drawings for compliance with specification .2 shop inspection during production. Should inspection notification not be given suitable

to review fabrication, destructive testing of one or more doors will be undertaken either in the shop or on site at no additional cost to the owner. Doors destroyed for invasive inspection shall be replaced as part of the contract price.

.3 upon notification of initial door inspection, contractor shall notify inspector to witness installation practice and at periodic points for duration of installation period.

END OF SECTION


Version 1.5 Issued: February 28, 2013 Section: C.8 – Std. Spec.: Aluminum Doors Page 1 of 4

Standard Specification: Aluminum Doors [Consultants may revise to suit preferred numbering system for headings, articles, sentences]


[insert list of related work here; examples follow]

1. Building-in of frame product into unit masonry, previously placed concrete, structural steel or wood stud walls or glazed Aluminum Curtain wall.

2. Supply and installation of wood, plastic or composite core doors. 3. Supply and installation of builders’ hardware except as specified for acoustic assemblies. 4. Drilling and tapping for surface mounted or non-templated builders’ hardware. 5. Caulking of joints between frame product and other building components. 6. Supply and installation of gaskets or weather-strip. 7. Supply and installation of louvers or vents. 8. Supply and installation of glazing materials. 9. Wiring for electronic or electric hardware. 10. Field measurements. 11. Fasteners for frame product in previously placed concrete, masonry or structural steel. 12. Steel lintels, posts, columns or other load-bearing elements. 13. Reinforced, key removable mullions. Mullion stabilizers.

1.2 References 1. AAMA 2605-05 Voluntary Specification for high Performance Coating on Architectural

Extrusions and Panels. .2 AAMA CW-10-04 Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site. .3 ANSI H35.1N-2009 Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Aluminum (Metric) .4 ASTM A167-99(2009) Specifications for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet and Strip. .5 ASTM B221M-08, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wires, Shapes

and Tubes. 6. ASTM F738M-02(2008) Specification for Stainless Steel Metric Bolts, Screw and Studs 7. CAN/CGSB-1.108-M89 Bituminous Solvent Type Paint 8. CSA W59-M-03(R2008) Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) 1.3 Design Requirements

.1 Design aluminum doors in accordance with Climatic Design Data contained in the Ontario Building Code:

.1 Design aluminum doors to accommodate following without producing detrimental effect:

.1 Cyclic 40 degrees C daily thermal swing of components.



.1 Cyclic, dynamic loading and release of loads such as wind loads.

.1 13 mm vertical deflection in supporting structure and movement of supporting structure due to live, dead load, and creep or deflections, seismic load, sway displacement and similar items.

.1 Prevent deflection and permanent or progressive glazing displacement. Restrict horizontal and

vertical deflection to less than L/175 (under uniformly distributed positive design wind load), and 10 mm maximum regardless of span.

1.4 Submittals

.1 Shop drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Submittal Procedure indicating:

.1 Plans, sections, details, type of extrusions, profiles, anchorage, glazing details, and finishes.

.1 Section and hardware reinforcement.

.2 Samples: .1 Submit sampled in accordance with the Submittal Procedure of the following:

.1 One complete corner detail of door frame, glazing, and finish for each door type.

.1 Each door hardware item for the Consultant’s approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Acceptable Manufacturer(s) and Systems(s)

.1 Aluminum doors: .1 Exterior: .1 ‘400A Insuldoor’ by Alumicor Limited. .2 ‘360 Insulclad Doors' by Kawneer Company Canada Limited. .3 ‘W2000 Series’ by Sherwood Windows.

.4 Or approved alternatives by Aerloc Industries, Alwind Industries or Windspec Inc. 2.2 Materials

.1 General: .1 All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to, sealants and

coatings are to have low VOC content limits. .1 Wherever possible, metals used in work of this Section are to contain recycled content.

.1 Aluminum extrusions and channels: ASTM B211 and ANSI H35.1 AA6063 alloy, T6 temper.

.1 Reinforcements and anchors: ASTM A167, Type 304 to AISI No. 2B finish. Size as shown.

.1 Glass and glazing materials: As specified in Section 08 80 50.

.1 Frame sealant: Type as recommended by the aluminum work manufacturer.

.1 Screws, bolts and other fasteners: ASTM F738M; Stainless Steel Type 304.

.1 Isolation coating: CAN/CGSB-1.108-M; Bitumastic coating, acid and alkali resistant material.

.1 Foam insulation: One component polyurethane foam for installation within closures and fillers;



Enerfoam by Dow Chemical Canada Inc. .1 Weatherstripping: Durable, non-absorbing material resistant to deterioration by aging and

weathering. .10 Door hardware: Supplied by Finish Hardware, preparation and installation by this Section.

2.3 Fabrication

.1 Fabricate sections true to detail, free from defects impairing appearance, strength and durability. Fabricate extrusions with sharp, well defined corners.

.1 Fabricate, fit, and secure framing joints and corners accurately, with flush surfaces, and hairline

joints. Apply frame sealant at joints for weatherproof seams.

.1 Conceal anchors, reinforcement and attachments from view. Fabricate reinforcement in accordance with design requirements.

.1 Do not expose manufacturer's identification labels on aluminum assemblies.

.1 Fabricate doors and frames complete with internal reinforcements, cut-outs, and recesses to

accommodate finish hardware. Reinforce cut-outs to assure adequate strength.

.1 Double weatherstrip doors. Install weatherstripping in specially extruded ports and secure to prevent shrinkage or movement.

.1 Fabricate doors of welded construction.

.1 Glazing stop: Square, snap-on type, designed for neoprene glazing system.

2.4 Finish

.1 Extrusion finish: Clear anodized to AAMA 611 per Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes AA-M12C22A41.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation

.1 Install aluminum doors in accordance with reviewed shop drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions.

.1 Install Work of this Section securely, in correct location, level, square, plumb, at proper

elevations, free of warp or twist.

.1 Apply isolation coating at 0.8 mm dry film thickness to prevent corrosive or electrolytic action between dissimilar materials such as aluminum to concrete, masonry, galvanized steel and similar conditions.



.1 Fill voids between aluminum framing and adjacent construction with foam insulation.

.1 Install aluminum door manufacturer's standard weatherstripping at door frame perimeter. Install

weatherstripping throughout entire length and width of doors at jambs and heads.

.1 Install doors and hardware to manufacturers' written instructions. Clean and adjust hardware for correct performance.

.1 Adjust operable parts for correct function.

.1 Remove damaged or unacceptable Products and assemblies from Site and replace to Consultant's

acceptance.

.2 Install glass presence markers, in two cross stripes extending from diagonal corners. Maintain markers until final clean-up.

END OF SECTION


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.8 – Std. Spec.: Finish Hardware Page 1 of 14

Standard Specification: Finish Hardware [Consultants may revise to suit preferred numbering system for headings, articles, sentences] PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope: .1 For continuity and ready reference, this section includes hardware Supply, Installation and

Inspection which in total will involve more than one contractor, as described following. The General Contractor will ensure in submitting his tender that specific roles and scope delineations are clear.

.2 Hardware Supply: It is the intention of this Section that supply is by a specialist Hardware

Supplier as prequalified herein for the following scope: .1 Supply only of door hardware for exterior steel doors. .2 Supply only of door hardware for interior steel doors. .3 Supply of locksets for millwork units. .4 Supervision of door hardware installation (Hardware Consultant). .5 Supply and installation of automatic operators. .3 Hardware Installation: It is the intention of this section that Installation is by the General

Contractor—if so qualified and prepared to meet warranty requirements of the installation—or qualified personnel appointed by the General Contractor for all systems and methods described herein. .1 Scope: Installation of door hardware for all interior and exterior steel doors, locksets to

teachers closets and coordination of installation of automatic operators with Division 16. .2 Receipt and installation of door lock cylinders and cores as supplied by the Owner from

Cash Allowances. [Designers Note: the Inspection program in article 1.1.4 and 3.3.3 is optional and may be revised or deleted to suit the scope of the project. A nominal inspection fee suitable to the scope of approximately 2 inspections is suggested in Allowances]

.4 Hardware Inspection: It is the intention of this section that Inspection is by the Hardware

Inspector (Cash Allowance) for all systems and methods described herein. .1 Scope: inspection of installation of door hardware.

1.2 Related Work .1 Division 1 – General Requirements .2 Section XXX – Architectural Woodwork .3 Section XXX – Steel Doors & Frames .4 Section XXX – Folding Partitions .5 Division 16 (Electrical) – Electric power supply for power door operators

and hold open devices. 1.3 Reference Standards [check for current standards] .1 CAN/CGSB-69.17-M86 – Bored and Pre-assembled Locks and Latches .2 CAN/CGSB-69.18-M90/ANSI/BHMA-A156.1-1981 – Butts & Hinges



.3 CAN/CGSB-69.19-M93/ANSI/BHMA-A156-3-1989 – Exit Devices .4 CAN/CGSB-69.20-M90/ANSI/BHMA-A156-4-1986 – Door Controls (Closers) .5 CAN/CGSB-69.29-93/ANSI/BHMA-A156-13-1930 – Mortise Locks & Latches

.6 CAN/CGSB-69.34-93/ANSI/BHMA-A156.18-1987 – Materials & Finishes .7 Canadian Steel Door & Frame Manufacturers Association (CSDFMA), Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors & Frames (Modular Construction) .8 NFPA 80-1995 – Fire Doors and Fire Windows 1.4 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies .1 Hardware for doors in fire separations and exit doors shall be certified by a

Canadian Certification Organization accredited by the Standards Council of Canada.

1.5 Submittals .1 Samples:

.1 Submit to the Consultant one sample of each of the following items in accordance with Section XXXX – Submittals.

.1 Butt hinges

.2 Continuous hinges

.3 Door closers

.4 Exit devices

.5 Overhead stops

.6 Storeroom set with lever trim .2 Identify each sample by a label indicating location for installation, applicable

specification paragraph number, brand name and number, finish, and hardware package number.

.3 Samples will be retained by the Consultant during the initial review period, but not exceeding one month. Samples will be returned at that time and, if acceptable, they may be incorporated into the Work.

.4 Substitute new samples for those rejected by the Consultant.

.5 Do not supply door hardware to the site until all samples are approved by the Consultant.

.2 Door Hardware List: .1 Submit six copies of a detailed final door hardware list prepared by a qualified

Architectural Hardware Consultant. .2 List all items to be furnished and delivered under this section. .3 Indicate door hardware proposed, identifying each item by manufacturer name,

manufacturer’s catalogue model number, material, function, finish, location, and other pertinent information.

.4 The list shall be in the same format as the door hardware list bound in this project manual.

.5 Approval of the Final Door Hardware List by the Consultant and the Owner shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for providing all required door hardware.

.3 Templates: .1 Within ten working days of being requested by the Consultant or the Contractor, submit

templates for door and frame preparations and mounting of door hardware items.



.2 Identify each template by label indicating applicable specification paragraph number, brand name and number, door number, and hardware package number.

.3 Submit manufacturer’s specifications, catalogue cuts, and other data required to identify individual components listed and to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements for items contained in the final door hardware list. Submission of manufacturer’s full line brochures is not acceptable.

.4 Best Locks from Cash Allowance: (formerly was called Best Factory Order) [Note this a requirement of the Designer’s office]

.1 Within 2 days of receiving an approved Finish Hardware List, submit to the Board for the separate order of the Best cylinders and lock cores as allocated in Cash Allowances. Send one (1) copy of the order with at least (30) days notice prior to need c/w the approved Hardware List and a copy of the Architectural Drawings showing all door numbers, to the Peel District School Board, Attention: Assistant Supervisor, ‘Structural Department’, Maintenance Services – 933 Central Parkway West, Mississauga, ON L5C 2T9 (Tel. 905 279-4310 ext. 241, Fax:905-279-0859.)

1.6 Maintenance Data

.1 Provide parts list, manufacturers’ instructions, and operation and maintenance data for each type of door hardware for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section XXXX – Project Record Documents.

.2 Brief the Owner’s maintenance staff regarding proper care, cleaning, and general

maintenance of door hardware in accordance with Section XXXX – Systems Demonstrations.

1.7 Maintenance Materials .1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section XXXX – Spare

Parts and Maintenance Materials. .2 Supply four sets of wrenches for door closers, locksets, latchsets, and exit

devices. .3 Supply four sets of other special parts or tools required for proper

maintenance and adjustment of door hardware (excluding tools required for keying.) 1.8 Delivery and Storage .1 Package each item of hardware, including fastenings, separately or in like

groups of hardware. Label each package as to item definition and location and corresponding with the hardware list.

.2 Ensure shipments are made in a timely manner to ensure progress of the Work and to comply with the Contractor’s construction schedule.

.3 Store hardware in a locked, clean and dry area and in a manner to allow easy access to each item group as needed, without disruption of the storage arrangement. Provide a written confirmation to the Consultant that the storage area is adequate and secure.



1.9 Warranty

.1 Submit a warranty for door hardware on a form approved by the Owner and in accordance with the General Conditions, but for a period of three (3) years Where a manufacturer’s standard warranty period exceeds three years it shall prevail.

.2 Warranty shall cover the labour and materials to cover both the hardware products and installation for the entire period and shall be submitted by the hardware installer.

.3 In the event of damaged hardware due to faulty products or installation the warranty shall cover materials and labour for the complete replacement-including repair or replacement of damaged hollow metal doors affected by the product failure or faulty installation.

.4 Door hardware warranties shall cover all defects in material and workmanship that become apparent during the warranty period and such defects shall be made good or the defective product shall be replaced, to the satisfaction of the Owner and at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 Door Hardware - General .1 The hardware supplier shall thoroughly review the door hardware list

included with this project manual, the architectural door and hardware schedules, and the drawings prior to preparing the final door hardware list.

.2 The base bid shall be based on the manufacturers and products specified and listed in the attached Door Hardware List and Article 2.2 below.

.3 Use one manufacturer’s products only for all similar items. .4 Ensure that the hardware specified is suitable in both dimension and

function for the intended purpose and complies with building code requirements. Advise the Consultant of discrepancies or omissions.

.5 HARDWARE SUPPLIERS – Door hardware shall be by a dealer approved to supply or distribute all of the specified products and is not limited to the list below:

.1 Commercial Doors & Hardware, Toronto 416 749-7231

.2 Upper Canada Hardware, East York, 416 696-8358

.3 Great Lakes Architectural Hardware, Hamilton 905 383-3334

.4 Regional Doors & Hardware, St. Catharines, 905 684-8161 .6 KEY CONTROL CABINET: .1 Enamel finish steel cabinet .2 Three-way cross reference index card system .3 Provide all accessories to accommodate all keys .4 Size cabinet to allow for 25% expansion .7 KEYING: .1 All locks shall be a 7-Pin removable core by Best Locks. .2 As part of the cost of this Section, the door hardware Subcontractor

shall obtain ONLY brass construction cores for all locks from Best Locks. .3 From the Cash Allowance, all locks and cylinders are to include

Best permanent cores set to Grandmaster keying system to the Owner’s requirements.

.8 STRIKES: ANSI with lip, except deadlock strikes which shall be ANSI without lip.



2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS .1 The following tables list acceptable door hardware manufacturers and products. .2 The tables may list acceptable equivalent products. .1 Equivalent products are considered equal and may be substituted for the

products listed in the attached Door Hardware List without further approval from the Owner.

.2 Where equivalent products are not listed, provide the named base bid products only.

.3 No other door hardware items other than those listed below will be accepted unless formal approval of an alternative is granted in writing by the Owner prior to the close of the Bid period.

.4 FINISH: Take special care to co-ordinate all of the various manufactured items furnished under this Section to ensure an acceptably uniform finish.

.5 HARDWARE FINISH CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS: Note: Not all of the codes listed in this table are necessarily used in the

Work. Refer to the attached Door Hardware List for final finishes.

BHMA CODE

CANADIAN CODE

U.S. CODE DESCRIPTION

600 CP USP Primed for Paint (Steel) 619 C15 US15 Satin Nickel Plated (Brass Bronze) 626 C26D US26D Satin Chromium Plated (Brass

Bronze) 628 C28 US28 Satin Aluminum, Clear Anodized 630 C32D, AL US32D Satin Stainless Steel 689 SB, AL ---- Aluminum, Painted B ---- ---- Brush

NEO ---- ---- Neoprene P ---- ---- Pile V ---- ---- Vinyl

.6 MANUFACTURER NAME ABBREVIATIONS:

ABBREVIATION MANUFACTURER NAME BEST Best Locks CBH Canadian Builders Hardware Mfg. Inc.

CORBIN Corbin-Russwin Architectural Hardware (Yale-Corbin Canada)

DB Dominion Brass DORMA Dorma Door Controls

GSH Gallery Specialty Hardware GJ Glynn-Johnson (Ingersoll-Rand Architectural Hardware)

HAGER Hager Hinge (Canada) Ltd. KNC K.N. Crowder Mfg. Inc. LCN LCN Closers (Ingersoll-Rand Architectural Hardware)

MARKAR Markar Products Inc. NORTON Yale/Rixson Firemark Canada Ltd.



HUNTER HUNTER AUTOMATILS PEMKO Pemko Mfg. Co. RIXSON Yale/Rixson Firemark Canada Ltd.

SARGENT Sargent of Canada Ltd. SCHLAGE Schlage Lock Company(Ingersoll-Rand Architectural

Hardware) STANLEY Stanley Security Solutions Canada Corp. THOMAS K.M. Thomas

VON-DUPRIN Von-Duprin Inc. (Ingersoll-Rand Architectural Hardware) YALE Yale/Rixson Firemark Canada Ltd. ZERO Zero International Inc.

STANDARD METAL Standard Metal Hardware Manufacturing Ltd. .7 HARDWARE LIST ABBREVIATIONS:

ABBREVIATIONS TERM B/S Back Set CIF Channel Iron Frame CTB Countersunk Through-Bolts D/A Double Acting D/E Double Egress

HMD Hollow Metal Door HMF Hollow Metal Frame H/O Hold Open LH Left Hand

LHR Left Hand Reverse LS Lead Shields

MFR Minutes of Fire-Rating MS Machine Screws

NRP Non-Removable Pin O/H Overhead O/S Opposite Swing

PR. DRS Pair of Doors PSF Pressed Steel Frames RH Right Hand

RHR Right Hand Reverse SGL. DR. Single Door

STS Self-Tapping Screws TB Through-Bolts

TMS Template Machine Screes U/C Undercut WD Wood Door

WDF Wood Frame WS Wood Screws



.8 BUTT HINGES – FULL MORTISE:

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM ITEM ITEM HAGER BB1168 BB1199 BB1279

STANLEY FBB168 FBB199 FBB179 DORMA BB55x630 No alternate

.1 Interior: 626 finish .2 Exterior: 630 finish .3 Non-removable pins at out-swinging exterior doors and all vestibule

doors. .4 Where doors are required to swing 180 degrees, furnish hinges of sufficient throw to clear trim. .5 All full mortise hinges shall be ball bearing, standard duty or heavy duty as required. .6 Reinforcing pivot hinge to be installed at all exterior pair of doors.

.9 CONTINUOUS HINGES:

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM ITEM MARKAR FM300 FM200

GSH CH-951 CH0941 .1 Interior: 600 finish .2 Exterior: 630 finish .10 LOCKSETS: 630 Finish

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

ITEM ITEM ITEM KNOB STYLE

BEST 45H 7J 45H 7EW L-15-H 4A SARGENT 8237 8204 LNL LB SCHLAGE L9070 L9080 06B 42B

.1 Where lever handles are listed, they shall be solid, not hollow. .2 All lever handles listed must be 630 finish. 626 finish will not be

accepted. Note: Best is standard for PDSB

.11 LATCHSETS: 630 Finish

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM ITEM ITEM BEST 45H-N 45H-T-VIN L-15-H

SARGENT 8215 50-8225 LNL SCHLAGE L9010 L-9496 06B



.1 Where lever handles are listed, they shall be solid, not hollow. .2 All lever handles listed must be 630 finish. 626 finish will not be accepted.

.3 All washroom doors (except kindergarten) to be supplied with visual indicator. .12 This item From Cash Allowance: CYLINDERS AND 7-PIN REMOVABLE CORES & TEACHER’S CLOSET LOCKS 626

Finish; Removable and interchangeable 7-Pin core design

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM ITEM BASE BID BEST 1E74 1E72

NO EQUIVALENTS & NO ALTERNATIVES ---- ---- Teachers Closet Lock BEST 73KC 7R 15D STK x 626

[Note this a requirement of the Designer’s office]

.1 Within 2 days of receiving an approved Finish Hardware List, submit to the Board for the separate order of the Best cylinders and lock cores as allocated in Cash Allowances. Send one (1) copy of the order c/w the approved Hardware List and a copy of the Architectural Drawings showing all door numbers, to the Peel District School Board, Attention: Assistant Supervisor, ‘Structural Department’, Maintenance Services – 933 Central Parkway West, Mississauga, ON L5C 2T9 (Tel. 905 279-4310 ext. 241, Fax:905-279-0859.)

.13 EXIT DEVICES – RIM TYPE: 626/630 Finish

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM ITEM ITEM SARGENT 8800 Series NB 8700

Series 8500

Series VON-DUPRIN 98 Series 9827-LBR

Series 35A Series

YALE 7100 Series 7170 Series LBR

7200 Series

STANLEY BEST 2100 Series 2200 Series LBR

2400 Series

.1 Use hex key dogging and cylinder dogging at power operated doors only.

.2 Use sex bolts or through-bolts complete with sleeves for exit devices on mineral core doors.

.3 All exit device trim must be free-wheeling design. .14 DOOR CLOSER: 689 Finish

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM ITEM LCN 1460 4110

NORTON 8501BF 7500 STANLEY BEST D-3500 D-4500

.1 Where required, out swinging doors and interior doors shall have closers with

parallel arms. .2 Back-checking feature shall be of a proper size to operate the door efficiently.



.3 All closers shall be complete with full cover of same design and manufacturer.

.4 All interior closers shall be reduced-force type.

.5 All interior doors for barrier-free use shall be delayed action and reduced-force type, meeting OBC requirements. .6 Mount closers on interior room side of doors. .7 All door closers shall be mounted with through-bolts.

.15 DOOR PULLS: 630 Finish

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM ITEM CBH 7009-1 353 GSH 1181-2 2616H MOD

STANDARD METAL 3112-2 H 412 .1 All exterior doors requiring door pulls shall be supplied with 32mm diameter

solid stainless steel door pulls. .2 All interior doors requiring door pulls shall be supplied with 25mm diameter solid stainless steel door pulls. .3 Offset door pulls shall be supplied on exterior doors at main entrance only equipped

with night-latch function exit devices to accommodate rim cylinders. Ensure that interior push pull doors are equipped with identical offset pulls to match.

.4 Exterior door pulls to be installed with finger grip facing down at all location.

.16 KICKPLATES: 630 Finish

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

SIZE (mm) SIZE (mm)

CBH 200 x Length Listed 400 x Length Listed DB 200 x Length Listed 400 x Length Listed

GSH 200 x Length Listed 400 x Length Listed .1 Confirm kickplate sizes prior to ordering. .2 Minimum thickness: 1.3mm. .3 Stainless steel: Type 304, No. 4 Finish – free from rough or sharp edges. .4 Corners and edges shall be slightly rounded. .5 Drill plates for countersunk fixing with stainless steel flathead screws flush

with finished surface. .17 PUSH PLATES: 630 Finish

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM CBH 127 x Length Listed DB 127 x Length Listed

GSH 127 x Length Listed .1 Confirm push plate sizes prior to ordering. .2 Minimum thickness: 1.3mm. .3 Stainless steel: Type 304, No. 4 Finish – free from rough or sharp edges. .4 Corners and edges shall be slightly rounded.



.5 Drill plates for countersunk fixing with stainless steel flathead screws flushed with finished surface.

.18 OVERHEAD STOPS/HOLDERS: 626 Finish

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM ITEM

GJ 104S 454S RIXSON 1-336/436 10-336/446

SARGENT 693 1543 .1 Use appropriate overhead door stop & holder where wall stops cannot

be used. .2 Do not use floor stops. .19 WALL STOPS: 630 Finish

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM GSH GSH 240 CBH CBH 145

STANDARD METAL S121 .1 Do not use floor stops. .2 Do not use wall stops on non-masonry walls. .20 WEATHERSTRIPPING: 628P Finish

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM ITEM KNC W16P W20P

PEMKO 309AP x Height 2891AP x Width ZERO 98A x Height ----

.1 Install head weatherstripping uncut in one continuous length prior to

installation of door closers or other hardware to the head of the door frame. .2 Install jamb weatherstripping uncut in one continuous length, except that it may be cut at the strike location of surface mounted fire exit hardware.

.21 DOOR SWEEPS: 628NEO Finish

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM KNC W13S x Width

PEMKO 315CN x Width ZERO 39A x Width



.22 THRESHOLDS: 628 Finish

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM HAGER 412SA x Width

KNC CT45 x Width PEMKO 252 x 3AFG x Width

.1 Confirm threshold sizes prior to ordering.

.23 POWER DOOR OPERATORS

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM BESAM SW100

STANLEY MAGIC ACCESS LE HUNTER HA-Series

.24 HOLD-OPEN DEVICES:

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM YALE-CORBIN FM998 x Tri-Volt

LCN SEM 7830 .25 Locksets to A.L.E. Rooms:

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ITEM ITEM BASE BID Corbin-Russwin CL3390-626

NO EQUIVALENTS & NO ALTERNATIVES

---- ----

2.3 FASTENINGS .1 Supply screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices

required for the satisfactory installation and operation of hardware, and as recommended by the hardware manufacturers for long life under hard use.

.2 Exposed screws for installing hardware shall have Phillips or Robertson heads.

.3 Exposed fastening devices shall match the finish and material of hardware. .4 Where a pull is scheduled on one side of a door and a push plate on the

other side, supply fastening devices, and install so the pull can be secured through the door from the reverse side. Install the push plate to cover fasteners.

.5 Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass. .6 All door closers shall be through-bolt mounted.



PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS .1 Furnish door and frame manufacturers with complete instructions and

templates for preparation of their work to receive hardware. Advise door and frame manufacturers to be aware that strike heights as listed in the table below are required for this project.

.2 Furnish manufacturers’ instructions for proper installation of each

hardware component. 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 ALL DOORS, FRAMES, AND FINISHING HARDWARE SHALL BE

INSTALLED BASED ON DHI INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR DOORS AND HARDWARE (ANSI/DHI A115.1G-1994 – Approved 8/19/94) .1 Door hardware shall be installed by an approved Hardware Installer acceptable to

the Hardware Supplier. .2 Power door operators, complete with hook-up to power rough-in, low voltage

control wiring, and exit device release, shall be installed by the manufacturers’ recommended installer.

.2 Power door operators to be installed by hardware supplier. Low voltage control wiring to push button locations, exit device release, and 4” x 4” back boxes to be completed by Division 16 (Electrical Contractor.)

.3 ARCHITECTURAL HARDWARE CONSULTANT: .1 The hardware supplier shall have in its employ an Architectural

Hardware Consultant who is a current member of the American Society of Hardware Consultants, and who shall be made available for consultation during the course of construction at no additional cost to the Owner.

.2 The Architectural Hardware Consultant must supervise hardware installation, provide assistance to the Hardware Installer, and carry out inspection and provide written certification of the finished door hardware installation.

.3 Allow for a minimum of three inspections during the course of hardware installation and one final inspection.

.4 Ten percent (10%) of this subtrade’s contract will be considered as fair value for supervision and inspection with regard to progress certificates.

.5 Locate and mount hardware at standard location dimensions in accordance with CSDFMA, Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and

Frames (Modular Construction), and as indicated in the following table:



HARDWARE MOUNTING HEIGHTS HARDWARE ITEM DIMENSION ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR

LOCKSET or LATCHSET 1024mm to Centreline of Strike DEADLOCK 1200mm to Centreline of Strike

EXIT DEVICE 950mm to Centreline of Strike PUSH PLATE/DOOR PULLS

1066mm to Centreline of Plate or Pull

.1 The Hardware Installer shall carefully check manufacturer’s installation instructions

supplied with hardware products for conflicts with the above noted dimensions. .2 The Hardware Installer shall use manual or “Yankee” screw drivers to turn screws into

pre-drilled pilot holes for installation of hinges on mineral core fire protection rated doors. Please note that other methods of installation may void the door manufacturer’s warranty.

.3 The recommended mounting heights shall be considered a general guide unless conditions such as intermediate rails and lines of glass dictate otherwise.

.4 Locate door stops to contact doors 75mm from latch edge.

.5 Install hardware and trim square and plumb to doors.

.6 Install mullion stabilizers at centre mullions at double doors and intermediate mullions on multiple door arrangements.

.7 Supply locksets to Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork for 35mm and 45mm thick doors where such doors are a part of millwork units. Keying shall be in accordance with the building keying system for doors.

3.3 ADJUSTING, INSPECTION, AND CLEANING

.1 Adjust hardware so that latches, locks and closers operate smoothly and without binding and with minimal resistance in use.

.2 Ensure doors with closers close firmly and against wind and building air pressure, and can be opened readily as suitable for installation.

.3 Inspection .1 The Hardware Supplier shall have in his employ an Architectural Hardware

Consultant who is a current member of the American Society of Hardware Consultants, and who shall be made available for consultation during the course of construction at no additional cost to the Board.

.2 In addition to this available consultant, a Hardware Inspector shall be engaged upon recommendation to the Board by the Consultants and costs for inspection paid for from Cash Allowances.

.3 The Consultant shall advise the Contractor that Hardware Inspector shall be assigned to supervise the hardware installation, provide assistance to the Hardware Installer, and carry out inspection and provide written certification of the finished door hardware installation. Costs for this inspection shall be paid from the Cash Allowance. The Contractor shall notify the Hardware Inspector at least 72 hours prior to commencing the installation and cooperate with the advice of the inspector.

.4 Upon completion of door hardware installation, the Architectural Hardware Inspector shall conduct an inspection of all door hardware as installed, accompanied by the Consultant, the Owner’s representative, and the Contractor.



.5 If requested by the Consultant, the manufacturer’s technical representative for each make of the hardware used in the Work shall be in attendance during the hardware inspection.

.6 During the inspection, the Architectural Hardware Inspector shall note all unsatisfactory installations and products and re-inspect these items after re-adjustment or replacement to ensure all hardware is in optimum working condition and specified function.

.4 Upon completion of door hardware installation, the Hardware Supplier shall submit a written certificate that all hardware has been correctly supplied and installed in accordance with the drawings, specifications, schedules, and approved final door hardware list, for type, function, and location, and that door hardware has been checked and adjusted.

.5 Clean hardware after installation following the hardware supplier’s recommendations.

.6 At project completion all items of door hardware shall be clean and free from disfigurement. The Contractor shall repair or replace hardware found to be defective.

END OF SECTION


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 Section: C.9 - FINISHES Page 1 of 8

C.9 - FINISHES General Notes: • Designers are to bear in mind that finishes must be selected recognizing the

criteria of initial construction costs, maintenance costs and life cycle replacement costs.

Typical Interior Finishes: Revision 2.0 • Flooring: porcelain tile for foyers and corridors with rubber base; vinyl

composite tile (VCT) for classrooms gyms with rubber base; and one piece rubber tread/ riser or porcelain tile for stairs.

• Walls: paint on concrete block partitions • Ceilings: lay in acoustic tile panels and grid. • No one room shall have both VCT & carpet. COLOUR SCHEDULE: Review with the Owner the following procedure which addresses the review and approval of Colour Schedules: • Neutral colour schemes are to be used and bright or deep colours are to be

avoided. • Designers shall develop 3 colour schemes based on a range of neutrals

following initial discussion with the Owner. One to be selected by Principal upon approval by Owner.

• Designers to review colour scheme options with Owner’s rep. and Principal and receive approval to proceed on one colour scheme.

• Mandatory submission of colour photocopy to Owner. • Solid VCT, porcelain and carpet colours are NOT permitted. • Provide contrasting paint colours on doors and frames. GYPSUM WALL BOARD: General Issues • Gypsum Wall Board (“drywall”) is to be avoided for use in walls or any area

subject to humidity (except for washroom ceilings), or moisture from the elements or water applied during maintenance.

Design Issues: • If drywall must be used in wall conditions, refer to "Typical Drywall Base

Detail" to avoid moisture absorption. Ref. Arch. B.1.15.4.a Specification Issues: • If drywall is necessary, specify products that are a minimum 16 mm thick,

have mould resistant characteristics and review with the Owner, the possible use of abuse resistant gypsum board.



• If abuse resistant gypsum board is used in combination with metal studs it is recommended that the studs be minimum 20 gauge metal, as drywall screws pull out from lighter gauge studs during installation

ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE General Issues • Shall be economical and in standard available sizes. • Typically use of imperial size 2’ x 4’ white tiles and standard white grid for

use in classrooms, corridors and office areas. • Use of sizes and types of tile other than 2’ x 4’ for feature design areas should

be reviewed with the Owner Design Issues: • Use only white colour ceiling tile and grid Specification Issues: • Ensure the products specified are approved for use in non-air conditioned

rooms with a “high humidity” (90% R.H.) rating. • Specify only “mould resistant” products Specialty Component: • Provide projector support suspended ceiling plate in all classrooms as

applicable. • Acceptable products as manufactured by Peerless. Model: CMJ 455 Ref. Arch.Biii, B.1 • Include on tender form an itemized price for the supply and installation of this

component as identified in section C.1 – bid procedures. Ref. Arch.C.1 Warranties: • Specify a 2 year warranty Approved Manufacturers or Suppliers: • For main areas: ‘Fine Fissured 1729’ by Armstrong or approved alternate by

CGC Interiors or BPB Canada Inc. (ensure suitability as non-fire rated tile for sprinklered ceiling assembly).

Supply of Extra Materials • specify quantity of min. two (2) full boxes of additional spare ceiling tiles, to

be provided by contractor. Construction Issues: • Data Wiring is typically in contract; confirm that contractor coordinates

installation of data wiring in advance of ceiling grid installation where possible to avoid marking or damage to grid or ceiling tiles

Renovations & Additions: • Where required, in new or renovation projects specify fire resistant products

to meet fire resistant assembly requirements.



ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT General Issues • Designer to use of acoustical wall panels in gymnasia • Other locations for acoustical wall treatment are music practice rooms and

instrumental music room and vocal music room in middle schools Design Issues: • Consider durability and vandal resistance of products • ‘Tectum’ panels or acoustical concrete block (‘SoundBloc’) may be

considered for use in upper level gymnasium walls for sound control. • Acoustic metal deck may also be considered in gymnasia or areas of exposed

metal deck ceilings. PAINTING General Issues • Paint all exposed concrete block and hollow metal doors, frames and screens

and similar materials requiring finished paint Design Issues: • Review the colour schedule with the Owner before issuing. Specification Issues: • Prep for HM doors: ensure that the proper cleaning and priming is specified to

be applied to the galvanised wipe coat for hollow metal work. • The Ontario Painting Contractor’s Association Architectural Specification

Manual is the PDSB preferred quality standard. The OPCA manual is to be used for specifying paint formulations and systems. The OPCA may be contacted at: (416) 498-1897

• ONLY oil based (Alkyd) gloss paint for: concrete block corridor walls, washroom walls, stairwell walls, miscellaneous metal, and hollow metal doors, frames and screens.

• ONLY latex enamel paint, semi-gloss for: all other concrete block walls and surfaces.

• Consider that texture of new concrete block varies from one manufacturer to the next and may require more than one coat of either block filler or finish paint. For concrete block walls, OPCA system may need to be modified if 2 coats of block filler are specified.

• Consider 2-part water-based Epoxy paint (OPCA system Int. 12-G) for exposed steel components stair stringers, handrails and pickets as alternate to Alkyd.

• Ensure appropriate primer is used in accordance with OPCA formulations



• Sample guide of level of finish required for hollow metal listed below. Refer to OPCA for system code numbers:

“Primer to be (1) coat galvanized oil based primer (e.g. Glidden #4120). All base metals to be chemically cleaned and degreased prior to priming. Shop primed preferred where possible. Top finish to be (2) coats semi-gloss oil based paint (e.g. Glidden #4336 semi gloss). Sanded between all coats….”

• Paint entire walls including behind millwork to be installed Submittals:

• Request technical data sheets and draw downs for paint formulations Warranties:

• In addition, review with the Owner. if the scale of the project warrants use of the OPCA Guarantee Inspection System, which also provides a 2 year warranty. If used, inspection by the OPCA is an integral part of the warranty program and the contractor must register the project and pay a fee to the OPCA; value dependent on the size of the subcontract. It is acceptable to use the Cash Allowance for the costs of the OPCA inspection and warranty program.

• The following is a sample Guide Specification of the warranty format for the OPCA warranty or alternate (if any) acceptable warranty format:

“1. Furnish an OPCA 2 Year Guarantee or alternately a 100% 2 Year Maintenance Bond on completion of the work. The Guarantee or Maintenance Bond shall warrant that the work has been performed with respect to the standards and requirements incorporated in the OPCA specification manual-latest edition.

2. Painting contractor using a Maintenance Bond type guarantee shall

supply at the time of tender a copy of the form of Bond to be used together with proof of ability to furnish same at no additional cost to the Owner. In either case, the specification will be as referred to in the OPCA Specification Manual.”

Approved Manufacturers or Suppliers: • All premium line products for the particular application as listed in the OPCA

manual • Alternate products not listed should be reviewed with the technical

representative of the manufacturer for suitability, performance and warranty. Construction Issues: • If one coat of block filler is specified on new block masonry, inspect for

adequate filling and coverage before the painter receives approval to put on finish coats.

• Follow up on site to ensure the application of primer to Hollow Metal doors and frames.



Renovations & Additions: • Using the OPCA system noted above for Renovation work, attempt to have

contiguous areas re-painted to avoid difficulty in matching existing colours and finishes.

PORCELAIN TILE General Issues • Use typically in interior entrance foyers, washrooms, corridors and stairwell

possibly including treads and landings as an alternate to one piece rubber tread riser material. To be reviewed with Owner prior to installation.

Design Issues: • Ensure finish that provides slip resistance and at the same time ease of

maintenance – typically a mat finish without excessive texture. Do not used highly polished finishes.

• Use typically 300 x 300 mm size tile for corridor spaces; smaller size tile may be more appropriate for use in washroom were specified.

• Avoid grout colours which will be difficult to keep clean • Use purpose designed tile wall base incorporating bull nose top edge and

square bottom edge • Use purpose made corner pieces suitable for square concrete block corners to

avoid tiles “popping off” as may happen when impacted by floor cleaning equipment.

Specification Issues: • Dry pressed, frost resistant, non-slip finish porcelain tile is the preferred

product for use in corridors on grade and upper levels • Specify flush metal edge at termination of tile where meeting other floor

finishes • Acceptable products: Centura, Olympia or Datile Warranties: • Provide for 3 year material and replacement warranty Supply of Extra Materials • specify quantity of min. of one box of tile of all colours and minimum of 12

accent tiles. VINYL COMPOSITE TILE (VCT) FLOORING & RUBBER BASE General Issues • Avoid solid or deep colours as restricted by Colour Schedule notes and also

due to poor wear characteristics under heavy traffic.



Design Issues: • Tile pattern shall be staggered (ashlar) in classrooms rather than corner to

corner (grid layout) pattern. • Do not combine with carpet finishes within a room. Specification Issues: • Specify solvent-free white acrylic tile adhesive approved by tile manufacturer.

Acceptable products: ‘Mapei Eco 575’ rubber base adhesive or ‘Mapie Chembond 3200’.

• Contractor is NOT to seal and wax floors; this is done by Board custodial staff.

• Ensure products specified have colour characteristics throughout full depth of the tile.

• Acceptable products: Armstrong Standard Excelon ‘Imperial Texture’ or approved equivalent by Azrock, Tarkett, Mannington, Amtico or others

• Acceptable products for coved rubber wall base with toe: Johnsonite (Colourite) or acceptable alternative.

• Request samples of preformed corners if requested in specifications Supply of Extra Materials • One complete carton of each main colour specified and 12 tiles of any accent

colours Construction Issues: • Note that manufacturer’s recommendations are that products must be used on

cured floor slabs. Renovations and Additions Issues: • If schedule requires application to “green floor slabs” consider use of clear

water resistant low odour adhesive such as ‘Roberts Consolidated #2057.’ RUBBER COMBINATION ONE PIECE STAIR TREAD& RISER General Issues This product is suggested for stairwells in lieu of porcelain tile. Board experience is that exposed painted steel risers in the porcelain tile application become a maintenance issue. Design Issues: The performance of the stair finish has been an ongoing concern of the Board. The rubber product outlined herein has been found acceptable on new work. Also porcelain tile treads with slip resistant treatment may be compared. Issues include: • Cost and product availability. (Historically one piece stair tread has been a

“long-lead” item.) • Detailing of concrete-filled steel pan stairs to suit the particular finish.



• Potential rust and lack of paint adhesion to exposed metal (in the case of using porcelain treads and painted risers).

• Raised patterns for safety (patterns other than raised “rondelles” may pose a maintenance cleaning issue).

• Integral colour strips at tread edges can be used as a safety feature. • Acceptable products: Johnsonite or acceptable alternative. Renovations and Additions: • Product may be a long lead item for Renovations and Additions. CARPET TILE General Issues • Typically used only in libraries of Junior and Middle schools • Ensure product selected is available to suit construction schedule. Design Issues: • Review products with the Owner as part of colour schedule. • Do not combine with VCT finishes within a room. • Ensure patterns of products selected or considered are submitted with the

Colour Schedule. Ref. Arch. C.9-Finishes-Colour Schedule Specification Issues: • Base Bid products for new work is to be carpet tile. In Renovation work,

where removal of previous finish may prove problematic for laying carpet tile, either specify scarification of existing finish to suit.

• Pre-glued products are NOT acceptable • Use rubber cove base in conjunction with carpet floor finishes Warranties: • Carpet and installation shall carry a minimum Manufacturer’s warranty of 10

years Submittals/Qualifications: • Specify that installer submit a letter of good standing with supplier. • Samples, MSDS sheets and installation procedures to be submitted. • Seaming layout (for Broadloom) to be submitted. End seams not generally

acceptable. Acceptable materials: • Based on previous installations the Board has accepted the following

products. Other acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding the specifications above may be accepted. List of previously approved products follows:



• Lees: ‘In Town’, ‘Faculty IV’, Artstone III Carpet Tile • Interface ‘Cubics’, ‘Geometry’, ‘Grillwork’, ‘Ground Level’,

‘Urban Grid’, ‘Space’, ‘Jakarta’ Carpet Tile • Collins & Aikman: ‘Explorer’, ‘Crayon’, ‘Renegade/Scandal’ Carpet Tile • Mannington, ‘R&D II’, ‘Solutions Collections’ Carpet Tile RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING General Issues • Typically only used in Kindergarten play areas. Review this item with Owner

prior to specifying. • Review with Owner the use of this flooring in other locations in lieu of vinyl

composite tile (VCT). Design Issues: • Review products selected with Owner as part of colour schedule Specification Issues: • Resilient sheet flooring consisting of PVC top layer with urethane backing • Specify product including colour matched heat welded seam • Select from range of products by various manufactures suitable to the

application of Kindergarten play areas


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.10 – EQUIPMENT & MISC. SPECIALTIES Page 1 of 8

C.10 EQUIPMENT & MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES General Issues • Any fitments or components which are fastened to the building structure

should be specified to have an Engineer’s Seal on the shop drawings certifying the fastening system that is to connect to the structure. Examples of the types of components to which this applies include: gym partitions, stage rigging and lighting, stage draperies, basketball backstops, projector mounts and similar items.

FIRE SAFETY PLAN BOX: • In a location within the entrance vestibule acceptable to the local Fire

Department and the Board, a Fire Safety Plan storage box shall be provided in the Contract.

• Ensure that if any ‘areas of refuge’ (OBC) have been designed into the school that they are explained to the Owner for Owner’s coordination with Fire Dept. and Fire Safety Plan

WASHROOM ACCESSORIES: • The Board Standard washroom accessories are listed below: [CH] Coat Hooks • NO coat hooks in any student washrooms, incl. breakaway type plastic hooks

for Barrier free stalls: [CS] Convenience Shelf • Acceptable manufacturers/models: .1 Bobrick B-298x18 or Frost F-950-18 .2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. [FSS] Folding Shower Seat • Acceptable manufacturers/models:

.1 Bobrick B-5181 or F974-P

.2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. [GB] Grab Bar (600mm straight bar) • Acceptable manufacturers/models:

.1 Bobrick B-5806.99x24 or Frost F-1001D-24P with concealed mounting

.2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. [GBF] Folding Grab Bar • Acceptable manufacturers/models:



.1 Bobrick B-4998 (does not have toilet paper dispenser) or Frost F-1055-FRS (has toilet paper dispenser)

.2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. [GBL] Grab Bar “L” Shape • Acceptable manufacturers/models:

.1 Bobrick B-5846-99-30x30 or Frost F-L1003-30x30 DP

.2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. [GBS] Shower Grab Bar • Acceptable manufacturers/models:

Straight type: .1 Bobrick B-5806.99x24 or Frost F-1001D-24P with concealed mounting .2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. Or ‘L’ type: .1 Bobrick B-5846-99-30x30 or Frost F-L1003-30x30 DP .2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements.

[PCT] Privacy Curtain Track including Curtain • Acceptable manufacturers/models:

.1 Model No. 2001 hospital cubical curtain, Model No. 2007 removable end stop at one end, No. 2015 at other end; Model No. 2005 nylon roller carriers with swivel hook (1 for each 150 mm of track) all as supplied by Quality Cubical Curtain Edmonton, Alberta, Tel: 403-484-3052

.2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. [SD] Soap Dispenser • Acceptable manufacturers/models:

.1 GO JO 1 liter [SND] Sanitary Napkin Disposal • Acceptable manufacturers/models:

.1 Bobrick B-254 or Frost F-622

.2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. [SNDisp] Sanitary Napkin and Tampon Dispenser • Acceptable manufacturers/models:

.1 Bobrick B-3500x2 or Frost F-615-5-25

.2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. [SR+C] Shower Rod and Curtain • Acceptable manufacturers/models for Shower Rod:

.1 Bobrick B-6047 or Frost F-1145-S

.2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. • Acceptable manufacturers/models for Shower Curtain:



.1 Bobrick B-204-2 or Frost F-1144-502

.2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. [TD] Toilet Tissue Dispenser • Acceptable manufacturers/models:

.1 Frost Code: 159 (Elementary School)

.2 Frost Code:159 (Senior Elementary School or High School)

.3 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. [TM] Tilted Mirror • Acceptable manufacturers/models:

.1 Bobrick 290 series or Frost F974FT series

.2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. TOILET PARTITIONS • Metal partitions are to be specified for staff washrooms; plastic laminate faced

partitions are to be specified for student washrooms. • Acceptable manufacturers and products – plastic laminate partitions: .1 Bobrick Washroom Equipment of Canada Ltd., Model 1042 series .2 Watrous, Series 130GP .3 Twin-Cee, Series 3 Style 2 .4 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. • Acceptable manufacturers – metal partitions:

.1 Hadrian Manufacturing

.2 Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements • Design Features: floor mounted type; all hardware to be stainless steel;

student washroom partitions to have stainless steel channel bracket at wall to full height of partition.

• Ensure quality ball bearing hinge and gravity close or consider piano hinge with similar self closing mechanism.

• Select plastic laminate to meet requirements of Section Arch. C.9 – Finishes – Plastic Laminate.

GYM EQUIPMENT: General: • Provide demonstration and training for the Owner rep. on use and

maintenance of all equipment. Equipment List: Motorized Basketball Backstops to Main Court • total of two complete assemblies required.



• Acceptable Products for Middle Schools: Operators: Individual operator motors for each backstop: Model BB-55 remote control electric winch, mounted directly to backstops, remote key switch, to individually operate 1/2 HP motors. Backstops: Model GHE BB-15 RG complete with all subframing and fittings to allow full upward folding action to underside of steel joists, Backboard, Goal and Nets: Model BB-29-RG1,rectangular backboard, Model BB-34 snap back goal and net BB-40 and hardware all by Gymnasium and Health Equipment, Markham all by Gymnasium and Health Equipment, Markham.

• Acceptable Products for Junior Schools: Operators: Individual operator motors for each backstop: Model BB-55 remote control electric winch, mounted directly to backstops, remote key switch, to individually operate 1/2 HP motors. Backstops: Model GHE BB-15 RG complete with all subframing and fittings to allow full upward folding action to underside of steel joists, Backboard, Goal and Nets: Model BB-25-RSB, rectangular backboard, Model BB-34 snap back goal and net BB-40 and hardware all by Gymnasium and Health Equipment, Markham all by Gymnasium and Health Equipment, Markham.

• Acceptable Alternates: meeting or exceeding the quality and features specified as by Porter and supplied by Hussey Seating Co.; or Laurentian Gymnastics Industries Ltd.; or Sheridan Gym Equipment or Centaur Products Inc; or Ash-Stevenson.

Adjustable Height Basketball Backstops at Cross Courts • 4 in total, located at cross courts and practice areas other than main court • manually operated. • Acceptable products for Middle Schools: Backstops: BB-12 with fixed frames

by Gymnasium and Health Equipment, Markham; Backboard, Goal and Nets: Model BB-22 backboard, Model BB-30 net and BB-40 hardware all by Gymnasium and Health Equipment, Markham

• Acceptable products for Junior Schools: Backstops: BB-3 with adjustable frames and manual crank system by Gymnasium and Health Equipment, Markham; Backboard, Goal and Nets: Model BB-22 backboard, Model BB-30 net and BB-40 hardware all by Gymnasium and Health Equipment, Markham

• Acceptable Alternates: meeting or exceeding the quality and features specified as by Porter and supplied by Hussey Seating Co.; or Laurentian Gymnastics Industries Ltd.; or Sheridan Gym Equipment or Centaur Products Inc; or Ash-Stevenson.

Basketball Backstop Wall Anchorage



• Prime Consultant/Designers shall ensure that the details of the anchorage of basketball backstops to walls has been reviewed and accepted by the structural consultant of the owner for adequacy to support the intended loads.

• Ensure that the anchorage is suitable for adult usage, including withstanding forces that are exerted on the hoop rim, regardless of whether the school is Junior, Elementary or Secondary.

• Dependent on the wall type, materials and location, suggested methods for anchorage include through-wall bolting into reinforced solid-filled masonry, epoxy anchorage into reinforced solid-filled masonry, or other systems designed by the owners consultants.

• Consultants to ensure during the construction phase, that evidence of the design details are being followed per approved shop drawings.

• In addition, ensure compliance with the requirement that Shop Drawings bear the seal of a professional engineer as noted below.

Floor Sockets • 16 in total; Model MA Series, 47.6 mm (1-7/8") I.D. By Murray Anderson

Ltd. complete with retainer ring, removable cap and threaded assembly. • Acceptable Alternates: meeting or exceeding the quality and features specified

by Porter and supplied by Hussey Seating Co.; or Laurentian Gymnastics Industries Ltd.; or Sheridan Gym Equipment or Centaur Products Inc; or Ash-Stevenson.

Gymnasium Divider Curtain • Electrically operated, vertically folding divider curtain. • Ensure one operator switch in each side of the double gym. • Allow for access through to both sides of gymnasium from Girl’s and Boy’s

Change rooms. • Curtain is to fold accordion style. • Abrasion resistant polyester reinforced vinyl curtain for the lower 3m, the

remaining upper section being 1¼” net. Provide for valence in same colour as curtain fabric on each side of retracted curtain and motor mechanism so as to fully conceal curtain and motor.

• Heavy duty curtain weight 25 oz/sq yd minimum. • Vinyl curtain and net to meet ULC S109, S102.2 and NFPA 701, flame spread

not to exceed 75. Fire label to be fixed permanently to the curtain. • Colour: To later selection by architect from manufacturer’s full range, net to

be white, curtain colour to be included in Colour Schedule. • Extended Warranty: Total warranty for a period of 5 years • Acceptable products: noting or exceeding these specifications by Moderco

Inc., Arpro Folding partitions, Porter, Hufcor, or Quad. • Acceptable Alternates: meeting or exceeding the quality and features specified

as by Porter and supplied by Hussey Seating Co.; or Laurentian Gymnastics Industries Ltd.; or Sheridan Gym Equipment or Centaur Products Inc; or Ash-Stevenson.



Submittals-all equipment • along with shop drawings, details of attachment to the building structure

(walls and roof structure) must bear stamp of a professional engineer licenced to design structures in the Province of Ontario certifying their strength and safety.

• At completion of installation provide written certification from professional engineer that the installation is structurally safe and in accordance with approved shop drawings.

STAGE RIGGING AND DRAPERY This section is SUBJECT TO REVIEW FOR EACH PROJECT with the Owner, and the requirements in the Guide Specification are to be tailored to suit individual stage designs and configurations for both New Schools and Renovations and Additions. Design Issues:

• Mounting heights of stage rigging and drapery lengths to suit overall depth and height of stage. Ref. Arch B.1.9.1.b, B.1.9.1.c

Specification Issues: • A Guide Specification for Junior and Middle School stage rigging and drapery

is included after this Section. Ref. Arch. C.10 Guide Specification-Stage Rigging Shop Drawings to include: • Written certification bearing the seal of a Professional Engineer registered in

the Province of Ontario, confirming that the connection strengths of the rigging system to the building structure. State that such design has been reviewed to withstand load conditions as may be imposed by the dead and live loads of both the equipment and persons using this equipment.

• full layout shop drawings, including a layout of the components as they will be applicable to each stage design and gymnasium roof structure, coordinated with gymnasium equipment and mechanical and electrical equipment and systems.

• Samples: Submit samples of fabric for Consultant's approval Submittals • Request maintenance and operating instructions for incorporation into

maintenance manual. • Request Test Reports from an independent laboratory

.1 confirming that fabric conforms to flame resistance specified. .2 confirming that the stage curtain meets the flame spread ratings

specified.



Warranties: • No extended warranty required Approved Manufacturers or Suppliers: • The following is a list of pre-qualified Suppliers/Installers: JOEL Theatrical Rigging Contractors Ltd. Ontario Staging Limited 365 Watline Avenue 78 Mack Street Mississauga, ON Toronto, ON L4Z 1P3 M1L 1M9 Contact: Van Marineau Contact: Tony Physenzou (905) 890-8802 (416) 694-8980 Scenework Jack A. Frost Limited 67 Watson Rd. S. Unit 7 3245 Wharton Way Guelph, ON Mississauga, ON N1L 1E3 L4X 2R9 Contact: Ron Foley Contact: Craig Blackley (519) 837-0583 (905) 624-5344 STUDENT COAT RACKS & SHELF • Coat racks are a combination prefinished metal shelf with integral plastic coat

hooks; to be used in corridors of Junior schools. • [CR] Coat Rack: acceptable products: Student line Model STL 1001 as

manufactured by Architectural School Products, Mississauga, or acceptable alternates meeting or exceeding theses requirements.

LOCKERS • Student lockers are to be designed in the corridors of Middle schools, not

elementary schools to meet student population requirements. • Reinforced 16 gauge outer panel steel locker complete with continuous piano

hinge, recessed aluminium lock pocket and metal hasp, individual number plate, two interior shelves, three single hooks and galvanized floor.

• Provide lockers on 100mm concrete base with base finish to suit corridor floor finish

• Size of locker to be 385 x 380 deep x 1830 high. • Acceptable manufacturers: Hadrian Manufacturing, Lincor Metal Inc.,

Shanahan Lockers, or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements.

• Provide handicap locker with bottom shelf 355mm from locker bottom and hook at 1100mm from locker bottom; provide number to suit overall design of project.

• Ensure lockers tops are 45 degrees slopes.



WINDOW BLINDS • Window blinds are NIC. CHALKBOARDS, WHITEBOARDS, TACKBOARDS [CB] Chalkboards • Black colour porcelain enamel on steel, extruded chalk tray Model No. 212,

complete with tack strip and display rail above chalkboard. • Acceptable products as manufactured by Architectural School Products

Model: “Vit – Rite”, Global, Claridge Products Inc., or Marteks Specialty Ltd. • Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. [WB] Whiteboard • 22 gauge porcelain enamel on steel, extruded chalk tray Model No. 212,

complete with tack strip and display rail above chalkboard. • Acceptable products as manufactured by Architectural School Products

Model: “Vit – Rite”, Global, Claridge Products Inc., or Marteks Specialty Ltd. • Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. [TB] Tackboard • 6mm layer cork, natural colour on 6mm particle board complete with

aluminium trim • Acceptable products as manufactured by Architectural School Products

Model: “Vit – Rite”, Global, Claridge Products Inc., or Marteks Specialty Ltd. • Or acceptable alternatives meeting or exceeding these requirements. Note: CB’s, TB’s and WB’s to be mounted at 800mm AFF for Junior Schools and mounted at 930mm AFF for Middle Schools GYM STAGE PROJECTION SCREEN • At the Gym Stage, provide a motorized projection screen • Acceptable products as manufactured by Audio Visual Furniture &

Equipment. Model: 7022M complete with 18” extendable brackets. Ref. Arch. B.1.9.1.a • Shop drawings to bear seal of a professional engineer. STAGE FOLDING PARTITION • Located at Stage proscenium Ref. Arch. B.1.9.1 • Manually operated, roll formed steel frame single panels folding partition. • Include Integral chalkboards and recessed chalktray on stage side of partition

on all panels, automatic floor seal; end panel modified to suit end wall condition. Carpet finish both sides.

• Acceptable manufacturers: Modernfold 931 - STC 50 or acceptable alternate by Moderco, Arpro Corporation, Hufcor or C.S.I. Sales and Manufacturing.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Section: C.10 – Guide Spec. Stage Rigging Page 1 of 10

Guide Specification: Stage Rigging [Designers to Note: • this specification is a guide to a fully outfitted new school stage. • This specification has been applied to new stage designs where the dimensions are:

proscenium: 4.4m high x 9m wide with a stage depth of over 7m and wings not less than 1.5m wide. These stage dimensions are not standards or requirements and some new designs or renovation conditions may be more restrictive, requiring modification to rigging, drapery and lighting.

• As such it is subject to review to suit the requirements and layout dimensions of each new school design or renovation/addition.

• It is advised that for each project the concept layout and scope of drapery/rigging and lighting components be reviewed with the owner prior to tender.]

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 List of Pre-Qualified Sub-Contractors 1.2 Submittals

1. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for Consultant's review, in accordance with Section 01340.

Shop Drawings to include the following drawings: .1 Typical Plan – Support System

.2 Typical Plan – Track .3 Typical Section (including all heights) .5 Main Drape Elevation .6 Main Drape Support Brackets details .7 Pipe Hanger details .9 Unistrut support system (if required) .10 Upstage traveler track details .11 Border track details .12 Leg track details

2. Samples: Submit samples of fabric for Consultant's approval, in accordance with Section 01340.

3. Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions: Provide maintenance and operating instructions for incorporation into maintenance manual in accordance with Section 01730.

4. Test Reports .1 Submit test reports to the Consultant confirming that fabric conforms to flame

resistance as listed in these Specifications. .2 Submit test reports from an independent laboratory confirming that the stage

curtain meets the flame spread ratings specified. 5. Engineer’s Certificate:

.1 Submit certificate from Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario, confirming that the connection strengths of the rigging system to the building structure. State that such design has been reviewed to withstand load



conditions as may be imposed by the dead and live loads of both the equipment and persons using this equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Standard Assemblies 1. Rigging Support Rigging support shall consist of:

1. Proscenium Brackets. There shall be: (a) Type A Brackets, each of which will require: • One (1) 450 mm Unistrut P3300 channel • Three (3) Unistrut P1068 90 degree angle fittings • Various quantities of nuts, spring nuts, washers, bolts and

woodscrews as indicated by Main Drape support bracket detail drawing (b) Type C Brackets, each of which will require: • One (1) Unistrut P2452 Bracket • Two (2) Unistrut P1068 90 degree angle fittings • Various quantities of nuts, spring nuts, washers, bolts and

woodscrews as indicated by Main Drape support bracket detail drawing • Two (2) ½” threaded rods secured with Epcon 6 Ceramic Epoxy System or

equal. 2. Unistrut Channel.

2.2 Valance Rigging 1. The valance rigging shall consist of:

• One (1) 1” x 6” Birch attached to main drape brackets. 2.3 Main Drape Track 1. The main drape rigging shall consist of: Track: There shall be:

• Two (2) lengths of H&H Specialties Inc. #110A, 6063-T5 extruded aluminum, or similar

• Lengths allow for 600mm track overlap at proscenium centre. • Hand line position shall be determined • One (1) H & H Specialties Inc. #103 Double End Pulley. • One (1) H & H Specialties Inc. # 104 Single End Pulley. • Two (2) H & H Specialties Inc. # 105 Overlap Clamp • Two (2) H & H Specialties Inc. #109 End Stop and Cord Support. • H & H Specialties Inc., #106 Clamp Hanger, as required: please refer to

beam clamp description below. • H & H Specialties Inc., #126 Centre Support Hanger: please refer to beam

clamp descriptions below. • One (1) H & H Specialties Inc., #108 Floor Block with #108DK Detachable

Floor Block Kit, complete with attachment hardware: • Hand line position shall be determined on site. • H & H Specialties Inc., #114 Operating Line, as required.



• Two (2) H & H Specialties Inc., #102 Master Carriers. • H & H Specialties Inc., #101 Single Carrier, one (1) per grommet. • Install the main drape panels on track carriers using Turner & Seymour #105

Special s-hooks to attach each grommet. 2.4 Border Tracks 1. Border track rigging shall consist of: 1. Rigging Points. There shall be:

• Seven (7) rigging points securing the track to the bottom cords of the open web steel joists.

2. Track. There shall be: • One (1) length of H & H Specialties Inc. #110A, 6063- T5 extruded

aluminum, or similar, complete with: • Two (2) H & H Specialties Inc., #109 End Stops. • H & H Specialties Inc., #101 Single Carrier, one (1) 300 mm of

track length plus one (1). 2.5 Electric Pipes 1. Electric pipe rigging shall consist of: 1. Rigging Points. There shall be:

• Seven (7) rigging points securing the pipe to the bottom of the open web steel joists.

2. Pipe. • 1.5” ID schedule 40 steel pipe. • Alvin A8-8 Straight Coupling, or similar, to join pipe lengths.

2.6 Leg Tracks 1. Leg tracks rigging shall consist of:

1. Brackets: There shall be: • Seven (7) rigging points securing the track to the bottom cords of the open

web steel joists. • Required quantities of rigging points securing the track to the rigging support

members. 2. Track: There shall be:

• One (1) continuous length of H & H Specialties Inc., #300. • H & H Specialties Inc. #307 splices to connect track lengths. • H & H Specialties Inc.321 end stops on each end of the leg track. • Two (2) H & H Specialties Inc., #30 Pivot Devices, on each of the leg track

each complete with: • One (1) #30BK brake kit complete with operating lanyard. • One (1) 1” ID schedule 40 steel pipe, 1,550 mm long, centred

on each device.

2.7 Traveler Track 1. The main drape rigging shall consist of:



1. Brackets: There shall be: • Seven (7) rigging points securing the track to the bottom cords of the open

web steel joists. • Required quantities of rigging points securing the track to the rigging

support members. 2. Track: there shall be: • Two (2) lengths of H & H Specialties Inc. #310A, 6063-T5 extruded

aluminum, or similar. • Lengths allow for 600mm track overlap at proscenium centre. • Hand line position shall be determined on site. • Two (2) H & H specialties Inc., #309 End Stop. • H & H Specialties Inc., #301 single Carrier, one (1) per 300 mm of track

plus one (1). • Install the traveler drape panels on track carriers using Turner &

Seymour #105 Special s-hooks to attach each grommet. • Provide two (2) H & H Specialties Inc. #342 Walk Along Master Carriers.

3.1 Panels 1. All fabric, including jute webbing, shall meet the requirements for a high degree of

flame resistance, as described in NOTE 4 of CAN 2-4M77: “TEXTILE TEST METHODS”. Method 27.

2. A certificate confirming compliance with the above standard shall be shipped with all drapery panels” - One (1) additional copy of the certificate must be forwarded to the Consultant by mail or fax. - The following information must be displayed on the certificate: (a) Project Name. (b) Date of Certificate Issue. (c) Material Used. (d) Material Colour (e) Fabrication Date.

3.2 Valance and Main Drape as manufactured by:

1. JB Martin Ltd. (21 oz.Concertino) 2. JL DeBall (21 oz. Sydney)

3.3 Upstage Masking as manufactured by:

1. Melfabco 2. Fred Krieger & Co. Inc.



4.1 Panels

1. Approximate dimensional information is noted throughout this specification and on associated drawings, but, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to confirm exact measurements in accordance with the intent of this specification.

2. Panels showing blemishes, puckers or any irregularity will not be accepted. 3. Each panel shall have six (6) 40mm wide x 130mm long flame test swatches sewn

to an offstage, bottom corner. - The swatches shall be made from the same fabric used to construct the drape These fabric swatches shall be used for flame testing purposes.

4. Provide on each panel a sewn-on label which clearly states: - Manufacturer’s Name - Material Used. - Material Colour. - Fabrication Date. - Flame Resistance Compliance. - Finished Panel Size. - This information label shall be sewn next to the flame test swatches.

4.2 Valance Drape Panel 1. The panel shall be fabricated as follows:

It shall be made of • 21 oz. velour • single backed • 100% cotton • Concertino 2603 • or similar.

2. Colour to be determined; please provide fabric samples for selection. 3. Sewn with 50% fullness. 4. Minimum 100 mm flame-resistant jute webbing sewn across the top. 5. Minimum 76 mm offstage hems with 50 mm turn backs. 6. Minimum 152 mm bottom hem with 76 mm turn under. 7. Use new, black, tie line, 1,000 mm long at each grommet.

4.3 Main Drape Panels 1. Each panel shall be fabricated as follows: It shall be made of

• 21 oz. velour • single backed • 100% cotton • Concertino 2603 • or similar.

2. Colour to be determined; please provide fabric samples for selection. 3. Sewn with 50% fullness.



4. Minimum 100 mm flame-resistant jute webbing sewn across the top. 5. #6 brass grommets installed 25 mm in from each end with additional grommets equally spaced on maximum 305 mm centres. 6. Minimum 150 mm offstage hems with 50 mm turnbacks. 7. Minimum 300 mm onstage hems with 76 mm turnbacks. 8. Minimum 300 mm bottom hem with 76 mm turnunder. 9. Special Turner & Seymour #105 s-hooks to attach each grommet to a carrier.

4.4 Leg Panels 1. Each panel shall be fabricated as follows:

• Each shall be made of: -16oz. heavy duty -100 % cotton -Commando Cloth -or similar

• Colour to be: Black • Sewn flat. • Minimum 100 mm flame-resistant jute webbing sewn across the top. • #6 brass grommets installed 25 mm in from each end with additional

grommets equally spaced on maximum 305 mm centres. • Minimum 76 mm offstage hems with 50 mm turnbacks. • Minimum 152 mm bottom hem with 76 mm turnunder. • Use new, black, tie line, 1,000 mm long at each grommet.

4.5 Border Panels 1. Each panel shall be fabricated as follows:

• Each shall be made of -16oz. heavy duty -100 % cotton -Commando Cloth -or similar

• Colour to be: Black. • Sewn flat. • Minimum 100 mm flame-resistant jute webbing sewn across the top. • #6 brass grommets installed 25 mm in from each end with additional

grommets equally spaced on maximum 305 mm centres. • Minimum 76 mm offstage hems with 50 mm turnbacks. • Minimum 152 mm bottom hem with 76 mm turnunder. • Use new, black, tie line, 1,000 mm long at each grommet.

4.6 Traveler Panels 1. Each panel shall be fabricated as follows:

• Each shall be made of: -16oz. heavy duty



- 100 % cotton - Commando Cloth - or similar

• Colour to be: Black • Sewn with 50% fullness. • Minimum 100 mm flame-resistant jute webbing sewn across the top. • #6 brass grommets installed 25 mm in from each end with additional

grommets equally spaced on maximum 305 mm centres. • Minimum 150 mm offstage hems with 50 mm turnbacks. • Minimum 300 mm bottom hem with 76 mm turnunder. • Special Turner & Seymour #105 s-hooks to attach each grommet to a

carrier.

5.1 Miscellaneous Hardware

• Eye Bolts - Shoulder type, ½”, forged eyebolts, Crosby S-279 or equal.

• Turnbuckles - Jaw & eye turnbuckles, 5/16”, forged, Crosby HG-227 or equal.

• Compressions Sleeves - Crosby “Cold TuffTM” Sleeve, or Nicopress copper, use recommended turn back and manufacturer’s grip verification methods.

• Shackles - Anchor shackles, bolt type, 5/16”, Crosby G-2130 or equal. - Any equals must be pre-approved by the Owner or Consultant before use.

• Channel - Channel, 1 5/8” x 1 5/8”, structural channel, Unistrut P1000 or equal. - Flat plate fitting, 1 5/8” x 1 5/8”, Unistrut P1045 or equal. - Spring nuts, Unistrut P1010 or equal. - Remove all burrs and break sharp edges.

• Cable Cradle - Manufacturer, Altman Lighting - Part Number, Altman 512, ¾” to 1 ¼” or

• Drapery Trim Chain - Description. No. 8 Jack Chain - Length, 12”. - Quantity, one (1) per grommet on main drape.

• Main Drape Operating Line (a) Manual

- Description, 3/8” black cord - Length, as required

(b)Winch - Description, 1/8” galvanized aircraft cable - Length, as required.



• Steel Pipe - Schedule 40 steel pipe, diameters as noted. - Remove all burrs and break sharp edges

• Unistrut Spring Nuts. - Hex nuts and bolts, SAE Grade 3 typical - -13 UNC threaded rod (remove burrs and sharp edges).

• Washers and Flat Plates - ANSI standard plain and helical spring lock washers. - Unistrut Flat Plate fittings.

• Beam Clamps - Unistrut clamp assemblies as noted.

• Batten Clamps - H&H Specialties Inc., styles as noted. - Alvin or Kee clamps, styles as noted.

• Wire Rope - Galvanized 7 x 19, diameter as noted, use recommended turn back.

• Thimble - Wire rope thimbles, ¼”, hot dip galvanized steel, Crosby G-411 or equal.

• Other - Additional hardware, components and responsibilities may be described in this section, on drawings and in SECTION 3: EXECUTION.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 General Conditions

• Approximate dimensional information is as noted throughout this Specification and on associated drawings, but is the responsibility of the Contractor to exact dimensions, quantities of hardware and final placement of equipment in accordance with the intent of this Specification.

• Tighten all hardware to manufacturer’s specifications. • Use hardware only for its designed purpose. • Install all equipment generally as described by this documentation, as

required by codes, and as intended by the manufacturers. • Install all pipes, track and channel parallel to the stage floor. • Report unforeseen or unsafe conditions to the Owner or the Consultant

immediately. • The position of installed electrical and mechanical equipment shall take

precedence during installation. • Inform the Consultant prior to adjusting any rigging positions. • All positions shall be finally determined on site.

3.2 Installation Drapery

• The Contractor will install the drapery panels.



• The drapery will be installed as soon as possible after the completion of the rigging installation.

• Report unforeseen or unsafe conditions immediately. • Use trim chain with s-hooks on carriers as required. • Drapery panels, when installed, shall hang between 5mm and 25mm from

the stage floor when in playing position. • This project involves installation as part of new construction. • All dimensions shall be finally determined by site conditions.

3.3 Dimensions (1) Distance from Plaster Line

• 1st Electric Pipe -4000 • Valance -200 • Main Drape 60 • 2ndElectric Pipe 600 • 1st Border 1400 • 1st Legs 1600 • 3rd Electric Pipe 2200 • 2nd Legs 2450 • 2nd Border 3900 • 3rd Legs 4600 • Upstage Traveler 6700

(2) Distance from Stage Floor • 1st Electric Pipe 6620 • Valance 4130 • Main Drape 4570 • 2nd Electric Pipe 4750 • 1st Border 5400 • 1st Legs 5400 • 3rd Electric Pipe 4875 • 2nd Legs 5400 • 2nd Border 5400 • 3rd Legs 5400 • Upstage Traveler 5400

(3) Length • 1st Electric Pipe 7400 • Valance 12100 • Main Drape 12100 • 2nd Electric Pipe 7400 • 1st Border 14000 • 1st Legs 15000 • 3rd Electric Pipe 7400 • 2nd Legs 15000 • 2nd Border 14000 • 3rd Legs 17000



• Upstage Traveler 20000

3.4 Quantities and Dimensions

• There is one (1) Valance Drape Panel - Its height is 750mm. - Its width is 12100 mm.

• There are two (2) Main Drape Panels - Their height is 4570 mm. - Their width is 6150.

• There are six (6) Leg Panels. - Their height is 5400 mm. - Their width is 1800 mm.

• There are two (2) Border Panels - Their height is 1300 mm. - Their width is 12800 mm.

• There are two (2) Traveler Panels. - Their height is 5400 mm. - Their width is 6500 mm.

3.5 Installation Conditions

• The supplier will install the drapery panels on the rigging hardware. • The drapery will be installed as soon as possible after the completion of

the rigging installation. • The Supplier will co-ordinate the delivery of the drapery with the rigging

Contractor. • All discarded materials are to be removed from the site and disposed of in

an environmentally responsible and legal manner. • Report unforeseen or unsafe conditions immediately. • Use trim chain with s-hooks on carriers as required. • Drapery panels, when installed, shall hang between 5 mm and 25 mm

from the stage floor when in playing position. • This project involves installation as part of new construction. All

dimensions shall be finally determined by site conditions. 3.6 Demonstration and Training

1. Provide demonstration of operation to the Owner and his representatives. 2. Provide training or maintenance and repairs to the Stage Rigging and

Drapery.

END OF GUIDE SPECIFICATION


Version 1.5 Issued: February 28, 2013 Section: C.13 – RENOVATIONS & ADDITIONS Page 1 of 2

RENOVATIONS & ADDITIONS General Issues: • Note that this Section relates to general issues pertaining to the design of

Renovations and Additions. • Note that individual Sections elsewhere in Parts B and C also list Renovation

and Addition comments relative to those topics or areas. • It is the intent of the Guidelines to be applicable to all Renovation and

Addition projects. Design Issues • Notwithstanding the above, Renovations or Additions may present a variety of

existing conditions which are not in compliance with Board standards. The designer must assess the applicability of any and all aspects of these Guidelines.

• At the outset of concept design, as a minimum: • Obtain an updated Hazardous Materials report from the PDSB. Ref. Arch. C.1- Health and Safety Issues • Include in the Design Brief details regarding matching and/or continuance

of existing systems. Ref. Arch. A.5 • Survey and document all existing conditions • Review the applicability of standards to the renovation or addition in

terms of the building as a whole and the particular renovation or addition. • Prepare and present Design Brief to Owner including items outlined in

Section A.5. Ref. Arch. A.5 • Report to the Design Department findings where deviations from

Guidelines may be warranted. • Obtain clear direction from Owner for possible deviations from the

Guidelines. • In the case of existing buildings, “matching existing” components or systems

may be preferential to strictly applying these Guidelines, for design, operational or Maintenance reasons.

• Examples where matching existing mechanical and electrical systems may be applicable are: HVAC, security, PA and in some cases, finishes and fitments. Ref. Mech./ Elect Sections

• As a policy, the Board installs a Passenger Elevator in new Schools and where appropriate in renovations and additions. Review requirement with Owner. Ref. Arch. C.11

• Review with Owner requirement of addition and/or renovations to occur within an occupied School.

• In the case that the School is occupied review the requirement for temporary Portables to be placed on the site to accommodate students, including negotiation to meet parking by law after the completion of the addition. Ref. Arch. C.2


Version 1.5 Issued: February 28, 2013 Section: C.13 – RENOVATIONS & ADDITIONS Page 2 of 2

Construction Issues: • Recognising that construction of renovations often happens in the summer

months, have special regard for schedule of construction, including: • ensure that products requiring long lead times such as windows, elevators,

rubber stair treads, etc. are delivered to the site in time for project completion. • If existing school is occupied, new roofing work is to take place outside of

school hours and on weekends in order to avoid asphalt fumes from affecting staff and students Ref. Arch. C.7


Version 1.5 Issued: February 28, 2013 Section: C.14 – BARRIER-FREE DESIGN Page 1 of 3

C.11 – BARRIER-FREE DESIGN General Issues: • Reference latest edition of Ontario Building Code (OBC) for Compliance • As a policy the Board installs a Passenger Elevator in new Schools and where

appropriate in renovations and additions. Review this requirement with Owner.

• Refer to Guide Specification for Passenger Elevator following this section. • Refer to locking hardware requirements at automatic barrier free entrances Ref. Arch. C.8. Design Issues: • Review barrier free design approach with the Owner as part of Design Brief. Ref. Arch. A.5 • Coordinate with Owner a consultation meeting to review needs of the School. • Ensure that if any ‘areas of refuge’ (OBC) have been designed into the school

that they are explained to the owner and coordinated with the Owner’s intentions on the Fire Safety Plan

• Include barrier free stalls within every student and staff washrooms. • Provide one (1) unisex Barrier Free Washroom per floor Ref. Arch. B.1.3.3, B1.3.3.a • Provide one (1) Orthopedic Washroom in proximity to Administrative area

and Special Education Classroom. Ref. Arch. B.1.7.2, B1.7.2.a • Designers to include Barrier Free lockers within Middle School corridors • Provide a Barrier Free perimeter workstation within each S.M.T and Art

Classrooms Ref. Arch. B.1.5.2, B1.5.4 Ref. Arch. B.6 Dwg. B6, B7 Specification Issues: • Drinking Fountains to be specified to include dual units with standard

mounting and barrier free mounting heights. Ref. Mech.C.4 • Ensure that specified hardware products meet Barrier Free compliance Construction Issues: Renovations and Additions: • Determine in concept stage the extent of anticipated Barrier Free compliance

that may be required as a retrofit in the main building. • Renovations or additions may require upgrades to the main school entrance or

other areas to be Barrier Free compliant. • Renovations or additions may require the installation of an elevator or

passenger lift to be Barrier Free compliant. See subsections below for Guide Specification notes.



HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATOR General Issues: • Refer to the point form Guide Specification notes attached Ref. Arch. C.11-Elevator Guide Spec. Design Issues: • Locate near the main entrance where possible. Specification Issues: • Typically floor finish and hoist beam are the only items not supplied by the

elevator company • Coordinate paint finish on door if not included in elevator contract • It is anticipated that elevators in school configurations are not required under

the OBC to be designated for Fire Fighting purposes. Nevertheless, some elevator car telephone requirements must meet the Elevator Code. Refer to Guide Specification-Product and Scope to ensure the requirements for an emergency telephone are met and included in the total Contract. Ref. Arch. C.11-Elevator Guide S

• Note that TSSA inspection fees are paid by elevator contractor; the TSSA licensing fee (typically $100.) is to be paid by the owner and should come from Cash Allowances in advance of TSSA approval as payment of the all TSSA fees are required before elevator is certified for use.

Construction Issues: • Elevators require a long lead time; monitor the project schedule to ensure the

elevator is delivered to the site in time for project completion. • In case of renovations and additions Owner requires that a Geotechnical

Investigation be conducted for area in within which elevator will be located.



PERSONAL ACCESS LIFT General Issues: • Personal access lift to be used in the event that the stage does not have barrier

free ramp access Design Issues: • Locate at stage where required Specification Issues: Product and Scope:

• Scope: Supply, install, certification and approval, demonstration and maintenance including TSSA approval.

• Product: 550 lb. capacity personal access lift “P.A.L” Acceptable Manufacturers:

• Concord • Garaventa

• Note that TSSA inspection fees are paid by elevator contractor; the TSSA

licensing fee (typically $100.) is to be paid by the owner and should come from Cash Allowances in advance of TSSA approval as payment of the all TSSA fees are required before elevator is certified for use.


Version 1.5 Issued: Feb. 28, 2013 Section: C.14 – Guide Spec. Hydraulic Elevator Page 1 of 4

Guide “Point Form” Specification Notes-Hydraulic Passenger Elevator

[NOTE: the following is not in specification format, but provides a checklist of guideline standards to be included with the elevator specification.]

Product and Scope

• Scope: Supply, install, certification and approval, demonstration and maintenance • Product: 3000 lb. capacity passenger hydraulic elevator. • unless requested differently by the Owner, Tender price shall include the supply and install and

the 3 year maintenance contract.(Confirm if all manufacturer’s will meet a shorter maintenance period-if so specified)

• Telephone Requirements: - General Contract to include a telephone line to the elevator machine room - Elevator subcontract includes connection from this point to a hands-free emergency call

panel in the elevator car. - Telephone line to machine room must be a dedicated line OR School Board may connect

it to a line seizure device providing a call from the elevator is given priority over all other calls

- Telephone call to go out to a 24/7 monitoring point: as an Elevator Code requirement this must be monitored to be answered within 30 seconds. Therefore outside monitoring should be considered and confirmed with the School Board. Should the school also wish calling to a point within the school-e.g. the office, this is in addition to the monitored call location and the base contract or School Board must configure the internal telephone lines accordingly.

• Elevator shall be designed to meet all barrier free requirements of the Ontario Building Code (OBC) and Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)

• Permits and Inspections: Provide licenses and permits and perform required inspections and tests to enable the elevator to be fully functional, including TSSA approval. (Board to pay licensing fee from Cash Allowances, contractor to submit to TSSA).

Acceptable Manufacturers: • Otis • Delta • ThyssenKrupp

[NOTE: confirm and coordinate if any variations in specifics or dimensions between acceptable manufacturers]: Non-Proprietary Equipment

• Car controller shall be “non-proprietary” such that maintenance and service can be performed by others without proprietary tools and special devices or equipment.

Performance Requirements

• Quantity & Elevator Numbers: 1 Elevator • Type: hydraulic cylinders without well holes (may be required to be telescopic if serving over 2

storeys) • specify number of stops • specify number and location of openings (front or front and back) • specify total rise • Rated Capacity/Speed: 3000 pounds, 100/ fpm (1361 kg, 0.50/ m/sec.)



• Minimum Car Inside: Front Opening: 6’ 8” wide x 4’ 9” deep (2032 mm x 1448 mm) • Inside Cab Height: 8’0”(2438 mm); Height Under Ceiling: 7’ 4 1/2”(2223mm) • Entrance Width & Type: Single-Slide Door 3’ 6” x 7’ 0” or 8’ 0” (1067 mm x 2134 mm or 2438

mm) • Confirm voltage: e.g. 208 Volts, 3 Phase, with a separate equipment grounding conductor. • Lighting Power Supply: 120 Volts, 1 Phase, 15 Amp, 60 Hz. • Stopping Accuracy: ±1/4" (6.4 mm) under any loading condition or direction of travel. • Door Opening Time for 7ft. painted hoist way and car doors: 4.0 seconds – Single Slide 42”

door. Car Operating Features

• Selective/ collective operation • Single Speed Fan. • On/Off Light Switch. • Solid State Starting • Car-Stall Protection. • Top of Car Inspection.

Door Control Features:

• microprocessor based door operator system to facilitate smooth operation under varying environmental influences and monitor the door’s actual position and velocity compared to its desired position and velocity. The Closed Loop Door Operator control system shall not require machine room door control equipment.

• Door noise not to exceed 58dBA. • Door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at a landing in response to a normal

hall or car call. • Elevator doors shall be provided with a reopening device that will stop and reopen the car

door(s) and hoistway door(s) automatically should the door(s) become obstructed by an object or person.

Other Features

• A manual lowering feature shall permit lowering the elevator at slow speed in the event of power failure or for adjusting purposes by a valve control in the machine room.

• An auto lowering feature shall lower the elevator at slow speed to the ground level in the event of a fire

• Wiring: Wiring for hoistway electrical devices included in scope of the elevator system, hall panels, pit emergency stop switch, and the traveling cable for the elevator car, operating telephone handset call system in Cab.

Submittals

• Product Data: to include the following: Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels and indicators. Cab design, dimensions and layout. Hoistway-door and frame details. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in machine room (BTU).

• Shop Drawings: to include the following: Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway. Maximum rail bracket spacing.



Maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to building structure. Loads on hoisting beams. Clearances and travel of car. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions. Location and sizes of access doors, hoistway entrances and frames.

• Operations and Maintenance Manuals Hoistway Entrances Materials and Finishes

• Frames: Entrance frames shall be of bolted construction for complete one-piece unit assembly. All frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in the hoistway and shall be of 14-gauge (2 mm) sheet steel. Sills shall be extruded aluminum.

• Doors: Entrance doors shall be of hollow metal construction with vertical internal channel reinforcements.

• Fire Rating: Entrance and doors shall be UL fire rated for 1-1/2 hour-unless floor assembly requirements for base building exceed this rating.

• Entrance Finish: Prime white paint, baked enamel. All doors & frames, suitable for finish painting.

• Entrance Markings: Entrance jambs shall be marked with 4” x 4” (102 mm x 102 mm) plates having raised floor markings with Braille adjacent. Markings shall be provided on both sides of the entrance.

• Sight Guards: Black sight guards will be furnished with any metal finish door. Powder paint matching sight guards will be furnished with powder paint doors.

Car Components and Fitments

• Car Frame: A suitable car frame shall be provided with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosure. The buffer striking plate on the underside of the car-frame platform assembly must fully compress the spring buffer mounted in the pit before the plunger reaches its lower limit of travel.

• Platform, Heavy Loading Type: The car platform shall be arranged to accommodate one-piece loads weighing up to 25% of the rated capacity, such as wheeled food carts, stretchers, x-ray equipment, etc. The platform shall be recessed for flooring by others.

• Cab walls to have attached vertical non-removable panels, laminated front and back with plastic laminate.

• Car Door Finish: Car front(s) and door finish can be independent [Boards preference is to have car door exterior and frame prime painted and door interior in satin stainless steel.]

• Car top to be of wood material clad on both sides with a natural finish aluminum panel. • Ceiling Type: Aluminum “Egg-crate” suspended ceiling shall consist of aluminum egg-crate

diffusers set in frame of extruded aluminum with fluorescent lighting fixtures. • Handrail: satin finish stainless steel flat bar • Threshold: aluminum. • Electrical devices and lighting:

emergency lighting Emergency Pulsating Siren: rated at 80 dba at a distance of 3.0 m. Exhaust Fan on the car top. A 125V 15 amperes GFI utility outlet on top of the cab.

Signal Devices and Fixtures

• Car-Operating Panel: A panel shall be provided which contains all push buttons, key switches, Digital Car Position Indicator and message indicators for elevator operation. Raised markings



Braille markings shall be provided for each push-button. Car Fixture Finish: satin stainless steel.

• Self contained Barrier Free compliant self-powered telephone handset integral with the car operating panel.

• Car Lantern and Chime: lighting the entrance way and chiming when the elevator stops. • Hall Fixtures: as required by Code. Hall Fixture Finish: satin stainless steel. • Landing Passing Signal: A chime bell shall sound in the car to tell a passenger that the car is

either stopping at or passing a floor served by the elevator. • Security Lockout Key switches to disable activation of hall buttons at all floor locations.

END OF POINT-FORM GUIDE SPEC.

Peel District School Board Design Guidelines Manual for Elementary Schools Electrical

Version 1.5 Issued: Febraury 28, 2013 Section: C15 – Guide Spec. Computer System Page 1 of 10

Guide Specification: Computer System

Annexes Annex A is informative and is not considered a requirement of this standard. Introduction K-12 facilities are designed with an information transport system (ITS) to support facility and technological growth. Planning this infrastructure prior to building construction or renovation is less disruptive than after the facility is placed and into operation. Life of the Standard This standard is a living document. The criteria contained in this standard are subject to revision and updating as warranted by advances in building construction techniques and telecommunications technology. 1 - SCOPE 1.1 Applicability .1 This standard specifies minimum requirements and guidelines for the design of Information

Transport Systems Infrastructure for K-12 educational institutions. It is intended to be used as a guideline for architects, project managers and telecommunications/IT technology installers. It is not intended to be used as the sole source of information for the design of ITS for K-12 institutions. Examples of classroom layouts are illustrated in figures 1, 2, 3 and 4. A detailed materials list is also provided to be used at time of tender for telecommunications/IT technology installers and will be referred to as Appendix 4.1 throughout this document. Appendix 4.1 is to be provided on a project by project basis by the PDSB LTSS Infrastructure Department prior to the tender date.

1.2 Normative References .1 The following standards contain provisions that, through reference in this text, represent provisions of

this standard. At the time of publications these standards referenced are valid. All standards are subject to revision, current versions of standards documents are to be considered valid.

- ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - ANSI/EIA/TIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and

Spaces - ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of

Commercial Buildings - ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications - Building Industries Consulting Services, International (BICSI)Telecommunications

Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) - BICSI Outside Plant Design Reference Manual (OSPDRM) - National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) – 70



- National Electrical Code (NEC) - Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) - AMP NETCONNECT Design and Installation Contractor Agreement (current)

.2 If a conflict exists between applicable documents, then the order in the list above shall dictate the order

of precedence in resolving conflicts. This order of precedence shall be maintained unless a lesser order document has been adopted as code by a local, state or federal entity. If a conflict exists, documents adopted as code shall take precedence.

.3 If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, then the more stringent

requirement shall apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents, the vendor is responsible to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the proposal for installation.

.4 All ITS systems must be installed and certified by system manufacturers certified systems

installers/vendors who are certified and experienced in implementing the selected ITS system and to perform related testing programs. Dates of certification of both installers and company must be submitted.

.5 The cabling system layout must be performed by a RCDD and defined by Building Industry Consulting

Service International (BICSI). 1.3 Warranty .1 The contractor shall provide a system warranty covering the installed ITS system against defects

in workmanship, components, and performance and follow-up support after project completion for a period of one year. Two (2) hours on-site emergency response must be included. The warranty shall also cover all labor and materials necessary to correct a failed portion of the system and to demonstrate performance within the original installation specifications after repairs are completed. This warranty shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

.2 The Contractor shall facilitate the 25 Year Performance Warranty between AMP Incorporated

and the Peel District School Board. The performance warranty shall warrant properly installed 350 MHz horizontal and backbone copper cabling as well as the backbone optical fiber portions of the cabling system. Copper links shall be warranted against the link performance minimum expected results defined in the TIA/EIA 568A, TSB-67, and the AMP ND&I Contractor Agreement. Fiber optic links shall be warranted against the link and segment performance minimum expected results defined in the TIA/EIA 568A, Annex H and the AMP ND&I Contractor Agreement.

.3 The system manufacturers shall provide a minimum fifteen (15) year performance warranty on

all passive components including the structural cabling system. These warranties shall be provided in written certificate form.



.4 The system manufacturers shall provide in writing to the owner that in event of the demise or failure of the installing certified system installer, the manufacturer shall be responsible for providing another certified system installer/vendor to fulfill the remainder of the warranty conditions.

.5 The contractor shall provide a guaranteed twenty four-(24) hour response time to any warranty

claims. .6 Contractors must ensure that the selected ITS infrastructure component manufacture and the

wiring manufacture have contractual relationships to ensure that the system warranty is a true “end to end” structured cabling system warranty.

2 – ITS Infrastructure 2.1 Horizontal Cabling System .1 The horizontal cabling system shall be plenum rated FT6 UTP with a blue sheath and shall comply with

EIA/TIA TSB-36 requirements for Enhanced Category 5. The minimum cable specification shall be:

- Conductors: 4 pair, 24 AWG solid copper conductors, unshielded twisted pair. - Worst pair near end crosstalk loss <32 dB/1000 ft. (32 dB/300 M) @ 100 MHz - Maximum mutual capacitance: 17 pF/ft (17pF/300M) - D.C. resistance: 28.6 ohms/1000ft (28.6 ohms.300 M) - Nominal impedance (1-100 MHz) = 100 +/- 15% - Maximum signal attenuation: 67dB/1000 ft. (67 dB/300 M) @ 100 MHz. - Maximum length of each horizontal cable shall be 295-ft. (90 M)

2.2 Backbone Cabling System .1 Backbone Cabling Design is to be a star topology.

.2 Copper backbone cables will be run from the Main TR to each Remote TR when the distance between the

Main TR and Remote TR does not exceed 295’ft (90m).

.3 1 Copper backbone cable is to be installed in each Remote TR for every 22 horizontal cables terminated in each corresponding Remote TR. In Addition, 2 spare copper backbone cables will be installed to each Remote TR.

.4 Copper backbone cabling system shall be plenum rated FT6 UTP with a yellow sheath and shall comply

with EIA/TIA TSB-36 requirements for Enhanced Category 5. The minimum cable specification shall be:

- Conductors: 4 pair, 24 AWG solid copper conductors, unshielded twisted pair. - Worst pair near end crosstalk loss <32 dB/1000 ft. (32 dB/300 M) @ 100 MHz - Maximum mutual capacitance: 17 pF/ft (17pF/300M) - D.C. resistance: 28.6 ohms/1000ft (28.6 ohms.300 M) - Nominal impedance (1-100 MHz) = 100 +/- 15% - Maximum signal attenuation: 67dB/1000 ft. (67 dB/300 M) @ 100 MHz. - Maximum length of each horizontal cable shall be 295’-ft. (90 M)



.5 Fiber Optic backbone cables are to be installed from the Main TR to each Remote TR ONLY when the distance between the Main TR and Remote TR exceeds 295’ft (90m)

.6 Fiber Optic backbone cabling system shall be plenum rated FT6 with an orange sheath.

The minimum cable specification shall be: - Bandwidth: 500 MHz-km at 850 nm. - Attenuation: 3.0 dB/km at 850 nm. - Cables are to terminate with SC Duplex connectors - 50/125 microns

.7 A Minimum of 1(one) 12 Strand Fiber Optic Backbone cable is to be installed from the Main TR to each

Remote TR.

.8 1(one) 6 Strand Single Mode Fiber Optic cable is to be installed from the Entrance Facility to the Main TR. .9 Single Mode Fiber Optic cable shall be plenum rated FT6 with a yellow sheath.

The minimum cable specification shall be: - Attenuation: 0.4/0.25 dB/km at 1310 nm. - Bandwidth: - Cables are to be terminated with Duplex SC/LC connectors, LC Connector to be

terminated at the EF and SC to be terminated at the Main TR. - 8-9/125 microns

3 – Work Area Outlets .1 Work area outlets shall be of a type that will support multiple data and telecommunications

systems interface requirements without re-termination of the building wiring. Adaptation to communications equipment requirements shall be through the use of adapter inserts that provide the required connector interface.

.2 Connection of the work area outlet to twisted pair building wiring shall be through 110-style contacts

which will terminate 22-26 AWG solid or stranded conductors. .3 Work area outlets shall be comprised of AMP Enhanced Category 5, unshielded jacks (Refer to Appendix

A 4.1 for Part #) mounted in single gang box or where surface mounted conduit is required within DS4000 series wire mold.

.4 The typical classroom (refer to figure 1.1 for detailed layout) shall consist of 2(two) work area outlets

provided by division 16, located 1/3 of the way from the back of the room on both the front wall (black board/white board wall) and the back wall. (Refer to figure 1. For detailed layout) each location shall consist of 1(one) minimum ¾” EMT conduit terminated onto a single gang outlet box for termination of a data outlet and 1(one) minimum ¾” EMT conduit terminated onto a single gang outlet box for termination of an AV outlet.



.5 In a typical classroom the data contractor will install a minimum of 1 (one) AMP 350MHz. Cat. 5e cable with blue jacket inside each data outlet. The data outlet cable will be terminated onto 1(one) AMP ACO single gang unshielded dual Installation Kit, complete with 1(one) AMP ACO single gang faceplate kit, 1(one) AMP ACO Dual RJ45 Insert and 1(one) AMP ACO Blank Insert Cover (where only one cable is terminated).

.6 In a typical classroom the data contractor will install 2(two) AMP 350MHz. Cat. 5e cables with blue

jacket inside 1(one) of the AV outlets provided. The length of these cables shall be a minimum length of 60’ and shall be terminated onto 1(one) AMP ACO single gang unshielded dual Installation Kit, complete with 1(one) AMP ACO single gang faceplate kit, 1(one) AMP ACO Single RJ45 Insert and 1(one) AMP ACO Blank Insert Cover at both ends. AV Cables will terminate at the projector plate located in the ceiling approximately 10’ from the teaching wall.

.7 The computer room (see figure 1.2 for detailed layout) shall be outfitted with surface mounted DS4000

series wire mold installed around the perimeter of the room. The data contractor shall install a minimum of 17(seventeen) AMP 350MHz. Cat. 5e cable with blue jacket. Each data cable will be terminated onto 1(one) AMP ACO single gang unshielded dual Installation Kit, complete with 1(one) AMP ACO single gang faceplate kit, 1(one) AMP ACO Dual RJ45 Insert and 1(one) AMP ACO Blank Insert Cover (where only one cable is terminated).

.8 In the computer room (see figure 1.2 for detailed layout) the data contractor will install 2(two) AMP

350MHz. Cat. 5e cables with blue jacket inside 1(one) of the AV outlets provided. The length of these cables shall be a minimum length of 60’ and shall be terminated onto 1(one) AMP ACO single gang unshielded dual Installation Kit, complete with 1(one) AMP ACO single gang faceplate kit, 1(one) AMP ACO Single RJ45 Insert and 1(one) AMP ACO Blank Insert Cover at both ends. AV Cables will terminate at the projector plate located in the ceiling approximately 10’ from the teaching wall.

.9 The library (see figure 1.2 for detailed layout) shall be outfitted with surface mounted DS4000 series wire

mold installed typically on the wall adjoining the computer lab complete with a minimum of 3 data outlets. The data contractor shall install a minimum of 3(three) AMP 350MHz. Cat. 5e cable with blue jacket. Each data cable will be terminated onto 1(one) AMP ACO single gang unshielded dual Installation Kit, complete with 1(one) AMP ACO single gang faceplate kit, 1(one) AMP ACO Dual RJ45 Insert and 1(one) AMP ACO Blank Insert Cover (where only one cable is terminated).

.10 The library (see figure 1.2 for detailed layout) shall also be outfitted with a minimum of 3(three) ¾”

conduits terminated onto single gang outlet boxes to be used as data outlets and a minimum of 1(one) additional ¾” conduit terminated onto a single gang outlet box to be used as an AV outlet. The data contractor shall install a minimum of 3(three) additional AMP 350MHz. Cat. 5e cable with blue jacket. Each data cable will be terminated onto 1(one) AMP ACO single gang unshielded dual Installation Kit, complete with 1(one) AMP ACO single gang faceplate kit, 1(one) AMP ACO Dual RJ45 Insert and 1(one) AMP ACO Blank Insert Cover (where only one cable is terminated).

.11 In the library the data contractor will install 2(two) AMP 350MHz. Cat. 5e cables with blue jacket inside

1(one) of the AV outlets provided. The length of these cables shall be a minimum length of 60’ and shall be terminated onto 1(one) AMP ACO single gang unshielded dual Installation Kit, complete with 1(one) AMP ACO single gang faceplate kit, 1(one) AMP ACO Single RJ45 Insert and 1(one) AMP ACO Blank Insert Cover at both ends. AV Cables will terminate at the projector plate located in the ceiling approximately 10’ from the teaching wall.



.12 Classrooms designated as Special Education classrooms shall be outfitted either with a minimum of

2(two) ¾” conduits terminated onto a single gang outlet box for a data outlet plus an additional 2(two) ¾” conduits terminated onto a single gang outlet box for an AV outlet or DS4000 series wire mold complete with 4 data outlets plus 1 AV outlet. The data contractor shall install a minimum of 4(four) AMP 350MHz. Cat. 5e cable with blue jacket. Each data cable will be terminated onto 1(one) AMP ACO single gang unshielded dual Installation Kit, complete with 1(one) AMP ACO single gang faceplate kit, 1(one) AMP ACO Dual RJ45 Insert and 1(one) AMP ACO Blank Insert Cover (where only one cable is terminated).

.13 In the Special Education classrooms the data contractor will install 2(two) AMP 350MHz. Cat. 5e cables

with blue jacket inside 1(one) of the AV outlets provided. The length of these cables shall be a minimum length of 60’ and shall be terminated onto 1(one) AMP ACO single gang unshielded dual Installation Kit, complete with 1(one) AMP ACO single gang faceplate kit, 1(one) AMP ACO Single RJ45 Insert and 1(one) AMP ACO Blank Insert Cover at both ends. AV Cables will terminate at the projector plate located in the ceiling approximately 10’ from the teaching wall.

.14 Work Areas designated as Office, Seminar Rooms, Work Rooms, Staff Rooms etc. shall be outfitted with a

minimum of 2(two) ¾” EMT conduits terminated onto single gang outlet box for data outlets and 1(one) additional ¾” EMT conduit terminated onto a single gang outlet box for an AV Outlet. The data contractor shall install a minimum of 1(one) AMP 350MHz. Cat. 5e cable with blue jacket. Each data cable will be terminated onto 1(one) AMP ACO single gang unshielded dual Installation Kit, complete with 1(one) AMP ACO single gang faceplate kit, 1(one) AMP ACO Dual RJ45 Insert and 1(one) AMP ACO Blank Insert Cover (where only one cable is terminated).

.15 In designated Seminar Rooms, Work Rooms, Staff Rooms etc. the data contractor will install 2(two) AMP

350MHz. Cat. 5e cables with blue jacket inside 1(one) of the AV outlets provided. The length of these cables shall be a minimum length of 60’ and shall be terminated onto 1(one) AMP ACO single gang unshielded dual Installation Kit, complete with 1(one) AMP ACO single gang faceplate kit, 1(one) AMP ACO Single RJ45 Insert and 1(one) AMP ACO Blank Insert Cover at both ends. AV Cables will terminate at the projector plate located in the ceiling approximately 10’ from the teaching wall.

4 – Equipment (Equipment Rooms) 4.1 Rack Mount Patch Panels .1 All Patch Panels shall mount on a standard 19” equipment rack or rack enclosure. .2 Copper Patch Panels for termination of horizontal cables shall be 2U 16 Port AMP ACO

Enhanced Category 5 patch panels. .3 Copper Patch Panels for termination of backbone cables shall be 1U 24 Port AMP Enhanced

Category 5 patch panels. .4 Patch Panels must be installed complete with all required accessories such as bezels, connectors,

jumpers and retaining rings, interlay racking panels, finishing plates etc.



.5 With each patch panel the data contractor shall also provide 1(one) 1U horizontal cable manager for patch cable management.

4.2 Equipment Racks .1 Each equipment room will consist of a minimum of 1(one) 19” open frame 44U equipment rack

complete with 2(two) vertical cable managers per rack and 1 vertical power bar per rack mounted on the back of the equipment rack.

.2 Each equipment rack shall be grounded using 1(one) T90 #6 AWG ground cable. .3 Equipment racks shall be bolted to the floor. .4 Equipment racks shall be installed so that a minimum of 36”’s of clearance is achieved at the

front and at least one of the sides and a minimum of 48”’s of clearance must be achieved in the back.

5 – Installation and Execution .1 The ITS infrastructure System shall be installed and properly handled in accordance with the

manufacturers specifications. Undue pulling tension, abrasion or rough handling must be avoided to ensure that the cables will permit transmission up to the design speed of 100 Mb/s.

.2 All cables must be installed without splices or cuts to ensure the elimination of reflections,

discontinuities, impedance mismatches, etc. .3 The maximum horizontal length from the work area outlet to the corresponding equipment room

shall not exceed 290’ (90M). .4 The data contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the following minimum installation

guidelines are followed: • Manufacturers recommended installation specifications for all equipment and

materials must be adhered to. • ITS Infrastructure cabling and power cables will not share the same conduit or pull

box. • Cabling conduits and pathways will be used to minimize cable bends. • Must use the same pin/pair assignments throughout the entire system. • Must maintain pair twists as close as possible to the point of mechanical termination. • Must never allow untwisting of level 5 data cabling more than half inch at

termination. • Each cable installation will not exceed a Maximum of 1(one) 90 degree bend. • Cable ties used to secure cabling must not be tightened to a point where they are

unable to be fully rotated. • Appropriate professional methods for dressing and securing cables. • Must never allow cables to rest on drop ceilings.



.5 Wiring shall be mechanically protected by runs in cable tray or down drops in conduits. The

Contractor will use 'J' hooks to ensure proper installation of all cables that are not supported by a cable tray or other conduit system.

.6 Examination of the work site conditions should be completed before installation commences. If

any discrepancies exist, report them to the Board. Installation of any part of the work will be construed as acceptance of such conditions as being satisfactory.

6 – System Identification .1 A complete identification system shall be provided that clearly designates the following:

• The Equipment Rooms • The Patch Panels • The Patch Panel Ports to identify each cable run

.2 Cable Identification:

a. Each equipment Room shall be identified with a letter code starting with the main equipment room being designated as “A”.

b. Each patch panel shall be identified with a number code starting with the 1st mounted patch panel being designated as “1”.

.3 Horizontal Cables:

c. Each horizontal cable shall be identified at the work area outlet end in a manner that corresponds with the labeling identified in the corresponding equipment room. .equipment room letter code – patch panel # code – port #

i.e. Horizontal cable terminating in the main equipment room on patch panel #2 port #5 shall be labeled A-2-5 at both ends.

.4 Backbone Cables:

d. Each backbone cable shall terminate on identical ports at either end. e. Each backbone cable shall be identified at both the main equipment room end and the

remote equipment room end as follows: .destination equipment room letter code – patch panel # code – port #

i.e. Backbone cable terminating from the main equipment room on patch panel #1 port 23 to remote equipment room designated as B on patch panel #1 port 23 shall be labeled as A-1-23 in the remote equipment room and B-1-23 in the main equipment room.

.5 Printed Labels:

a. Labels shall be printed in black text on a white background. b. Label material shall be durable, flexible vinyl and rated for -40°F to 176°F. c. Labels must be clear and fully legible.



7 – ITS Infrastructure testing and Certification

.1 The ITS Infrastructure system post installation testing and certification shall be performed in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA TSB-67 and TSB-40 Performance Specifications.

.2 The data contractor shall be responsible for performing UTP End-to-End System performance

testing and certification on the entire ITS Infrastructure system. .3 Tests must consist of but are not limited to the following five tests to be performed on the UTP link:

a. Wire map b. * Length c. * Attenuation d. * Near end crosstalk (NEXT) e. * Propagation delay

8 – Submittals

.1 All documentation related to the ITS Infrastructure system must be provided upon completion of

the job to the PDSB LTSS Department. The following documentation must be provided but is not limited to:

a. As-Built Drawings: Prepare “As Built” drawings to detail exact locations of

equipment, indicate wiring runs, raceways, pull boxes, junction boxes, terminal boxes, work area outlet locations, cable numbers, grounding and bonding systems and equipment rack profiles.

b. Identification Logs: All cable and workstations shall be recorded in a hard copy

“CABLE IDENTIFICATION LOG” which is to be handed over to the School Board or Information Systems Manager after cable testing and certification is complete. A duplicate copy is to be retained on site in the completed building.

c. ITS Infrastructure Testing and Certification Documentation: A detailed one page cable

test documentation sheet shall be provided for each cable run. Testing shall include, but not be limited to the following:

i. Proper polarity ii. No reversals

iii. No transpositions iv. Continuity v. No shorts

vi. No AC voltage vii. No DC voltage

viii. No opens ix. Proper labeling at each termination



9 – Project Completion

The project will not be considered complete and the invoice will not be paid until all documentation as been provided and school staff is satisfied with the set-up and system operation has been confirmed.

END OF SECTION


Version 1.5 Issued: February 28, 2013 Section: C.15 – Emergency Generator Page 1 of 7

Standard Specification: Emergency Generator

[Consultants may revise to suit preferred numbering system for headings, articles, sentences]

Ref.Elec. C.3 Essential Service (Standby Provision) 1.1 GENERAL

.1 Work Included

.1 Supply and install an emergency electrical power supply for the School, comprised of one natural

gas driven electric generator set with all auxiliaries to comprise an independent, fully automatic power plant for generation of 600/347 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire electrical power.

.2 Provide connections from the emergency electrical power system to equipment shown on the drawings, utilizing an entirely independent wiring system.

.3 The unit shall provide standby power for essential electrical loads in the building and shall automatically start in the event of a power failure.

.4 The unit shall be SG080 Generac by Total Power Ltd. or approved equal.

.5 Emergency generator remote trouble panel shall be sprinkler-proof.

.2 Code Requirements

.1 Ontario Building Code (latest edition).

.2 The latest edition of the CSA Standard "Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings", C282.

.3 National Board of Fire Underwriters for the Installation and Use of Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines.

.4 Electrical Safety Code, 25th. Edition.

.5 The latest edition of the CSA Standard, "Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code" B149.1.

.6 All other standards referred to in the above.

.7 Where applicable, equipment is to bear CSA approval and ULC approval.

.3 Description of System

.1 Provide a standby power system to supply electrical power in the event of failure of normal supply, consisting of a liquid cooled engine, an AC alternator and system controls with all necessary accessories for a complete operating system, including but not limited to the items as specified hereinafter.

.4 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies

.1 An electric generating system, consisting of a prime mover, generator, governor, coupling and all

controls, must have been tested, as a complete unit, on a representative engineering prototype model of the equipment to be sold.

.2 The generator set(s) must conform to applicable CSA standards.

.3 The unit(s) shall be supplied with Canadian Standards Association certification.

.4 The generator set(s) must meet EPA federal emission guidelines for stationary standby power generation, as applicable for natural gas engines.

.5 Manufacturer Qualifications

.1 This system shall be supplied by Total Power Ltd., phone 888-870-9152, fax 905-670-

1317 or an approved equal who has been regularly engaged in the production of engine-



alternator sets, automatic transfer switches, and associated controls for a minimum of twenty years, thereby identifying one source of supply and responsibility.

.2 To be classified as a manufacturer, the builder of the generator set must manufacture, at minimum, engines or alternators.

.3 The manufacturer shall have printed literature and brochures describing the standard series specified, not a one of a kind fabrication.

2.1 PRODUCTS

.1 Engine

.1 The prime mover shall be a liquid cooled, natural gas fueled, naturally aspirated engine of 4-cycle design. It will have 10 cylinders with a minimum displacement of 6.8 liters (417 cubic inches), with a minimum rating of 128 BHP. The unit requires a minimum rated output of 80 kW at an operating speed of 2300 RPM.

.2 The engine is to be cooled with a unit mounted radiator, fan, water pump, and closed coolant recovery system providing visual diagnostic means to determine if the system is operating with a normal engine coolant level. The radiator shall be designed for operation in 122 degrees f, 50 degrees c ambient temperature.

.3 The intake air filter(s) with replaceable element must be mounted on the unit. Full pressure lubrication shall be supplied by a positive displacement lube oil pump. The engine shall have a replaceable oil filter(s) with internal bypass and replaceable element(s). Engine coolant and oil drain extensions, equipped with pipe plugs, must be provided to outside of the mounting base for cleaner and more convenient engine servicing. A fan guard must be installed for personnel safety.

.4 The engine shall have a battery charging DC alternator with a transistorized voltage regulator. Remote 2-wire starting shall be by a solenoid shift, electric starter.

.5 The engine fuel system shall be designed for primary operation on natural gas having a BTU content of 1000 BTU per cubic foot delivered to the unit in a vapor state. A carburetor, secondary regulator, fuel lock-off solenoid and all piping must be installed at the point of manufacturing, terminating at a single pipe opening external to the mounting base.

.6 The engine shall have (a) unit mounted, thermostatically controlled water jacket heater(s) to aid in quick starting. The wattage shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. The contractor shall provide proper branch circuit from normal utility power source.

.7 Sensing elements to be located on the engine for low oil pressure shutdown, high coolant temperature shutdown, low coolant level shutdown, overspeed shutdown and overcrank shutdown. These sensors are to be connected to the control panel using a wiring harness with the following features: wire number labeling on each end of the wire run for easy identification, each sensor connection shall be sealed to prevent corrosion and all wiring to be run in flexible conduit for protection from the environment and any moving objects.

.8 Provide the following items installed at the factory: - The manufacturer shall supply its recommended stainless steel, flexible

connector to couple the engine exhaust manifold to the exhaust system. - The manufacturer shall provide exhaust system catalytic converter. - The engine oil pan will contain a 120VAC, 150 watt, thermostatically controlled

crankcase oil heater. The operating temperature to be set at 80 deg. on and 100 deg. off. .9 The following equipment is to be provided by the engine-generator set manufacturer and shipped

loose with the unit: - The manufacturer will supply an approved flexible fuel line to connect the engine to the

external natural gas fuel supply line. On stationary applications the fuel line shall match



the fuel fitting on the unit and have braided stainless steel covering with brass fittings. .10 Engine speed shall be controlled by isochronous governor with no change in alternator

frequency from no load to full load. Steady state regulation is to be 0.25%. .11 One step load acceptance shall be 100% of engine-generator set nameplate rating and meet the

requirements of NFPA 110 paragraph 7.13.7 .12 The generator system shall support generator start-up and load transfer within 10 seconds.

.2 Alternator

.1 The alternator shall be a 4 pole revolving field type, 6 lead, wired for 600 VAC 3 phase, 60

Hz, rated at 80 kW with a permanent magnet driven exciter. Photosensitive components will not be permitted in the rotating exciter. The stator shall be gear drive connected to the engine to ensure permanent alignment. The generator shall meet temperature rise standards for Class "H" insulation, operate within Class "F" standards for extended life. All leads must be extended into an AC connection panel. The alternator shall be protected by internal thermal overload protection and an automatic reset field circuit breaker.

.2 One step load acceptance shall be 100% of engine-generator set nameplate rating and meet the requirements of NFPA 110 paragraph 5-13.2.6. The generator set and regulator must sustain at least 300% short circuit current for 10 seconds during 3 phase fault.

.3 A NEMA 1 panel (120/208V, 1Ø, 3W) that is an integral part of the generator set must be provided to allow the installer a convenient location in which to make electrical output connections. A fully rated, isolated neutral must be included by the generator set manufacturer to insure proper sizing.

.4 The electric plant (engine and alternator) shall be mounted with internal vibration isolation onto a welded steel base. External vibration isolation shall not be required for normal pad mounted applications.

.5 Provide the following items installed at the factory: - A main line circuit breaker carrying the UL/CSA mark shall be factory installed.

The breaker shall be rated as per the manufacturer's recommendations. The line side connections are to be made at the factory. Output lugs shall be provided for load side connections. A system utilizing manual reset field circuit breakers and current transformers is unacceptable. The breaker must be equipped with position indicating contacts and wired for alarm as per CSA C282, Table 1.

.3 Controls

.1 The generator control system shall be a fully integrated microprocessor based control system

for standby emergency engine generators meeting all requirements of CSA C282, latest edition. .2 The generator control system shall be a fully integrated control system enabling remote

diagnostics and easy building management integration of all generator functions. The generator controller shall provide integrated and digital control over all generator functions including: engine protection, alternator protection, speed governing, voltage regulation and all related generator operations. The generator controller must also provide seamless digital integration with the engine’s electronic management system if so equipped. Generator controller’s that utilize separate voltage regulators and speed governors or do not provide seamless integration with the engine management system are considered less desirable.

.3 Communications shall be supported with building automation via the Modbus protocol without network cards or protocol exchangers. Optional internet and intranet connectivity shall be available.

.4 The control system shall provide an environmentally sealed design including



encapsulated circuit boards and sealed automotive style plugs for all sensors and circuit board connections. The use of non-encapsulated boards, edge cards, and pc ribbon cable connections are considered unacceptable.

.5 Circuit boards shall utilize surface mount technology to provide vibration durability. Circuit boards that utilize large capacitors or heat sinks must utilize encapsulation methods to securely support these components.

.6 A predictive maintenance algorithm that alarms when maintenance is required. The controller shall have the capability to call out to the local servicing dealer when maintenance is required.

.7 Diagnostic capabilities should include time-stamped event and alarm logs, ability to capture operational parameters during events, simultaneous monitoring of all input or output parameters, callout capabilities, support for multi-channel digital strip chart functionality and .1msec data logging capabilities.

.8 The control system shall provide pre-wired customer use I/O: 4 contact inputs, 2 analog inputs, 4 relay outputs, and communications support via RS232, RS485, and an optional modem. Customer I/O shall be software configurable providing full access to all alarm, event, data logging, and shutdown functionality. In addition, custom ladder logic functionality shall be supported to provide application support flexibility. The ladder logic function shall have access to all the controller inputs and customer assignable outputs.

.9 The control panel will display all user pertinent unit parameters including: - Engine and alternator operating conditions - Oil pressure and optional oil temperature - Coolant temperature and level alarm - Fuel level (where applicable) - Engine speed - DC battery voltage - Run time hours - Generator voltages, amps, frequency, kilowatts, and power factor - Alarm Status - Current alarm(s) condition per CSA C282, latest edition - Alarm Log of last twenty alarm events (date and time stamped)

.10 For system reliability and security concerns, access to and manipulation of the internal operating parameters and alarm limits shall be conducted via password protected PC based software by trained personnel System configuration support shall be provided locally or remotely by the manufacturers servicing representatives.

.11 The following equipment is to be installed at the engine-generator set manufacturer's facility:

- A DPDT relay shall be socket mounted in the generator control panel and operate on engine start and run for customer connection.

.12 The following equipment is to be provided by the engine-generator set manufacturer and shipped loose with the unit: - Provide a CSA C282 compliant alarm annunciator panel for remote indication per local

and national code requirements. The annunciator shall be controlled using RS485 communications from the generator controller. Annunciators requiring individual contacts and wires per indication point are not preferred. The panel shall have an ALARM switch that when moved to the OFF position silences the audible alarm. A TEST/RESET switch must be included to verify the lights are functional and reset any condition after if has cleared. The remote annunciator shall have provision for installing a switch with the capability of starting, and stopping the standby generator set from the annunciator panel.



3.1EXECUTION .1 Unit Accessories

.1 The following equipment is to be installed at the engine-generator set manufacturer’s facility: - Supply a weather protective sound attenuating enclosure: The engine-generator set shall

be factory enclosed in a 14 gauge steel enclosure constructed with corner posts, uprights and headers. The roof shall be made of aluminum, aid in the runoff of water and include a drip edge. The enclosure shall be coated with electro-statically applied power paint, baked and finished to manufacturer's specifications. The color will be tan-standard. The enclosure shall be completely lined with 1" thick, UL 94 HF-1 listed, sound deadening material. This material must be of a self extinguishing design. The enclosure is to have large, hinged, removable doors to allow access to the engine, alternator and control panel. The hinges shall allow for door fit adjustment. Hinges and all exposed fasteners will be stainless steel or JS5000. The use of pop rivets weakens the paint system and not allowed on external painted surfaces. Each door will have lockable hardware with identical keys. Padlocks do not meet this specification. The enclosure shall include an air discharge hood that protects the radiator core and directs the hot discharge air upward preventing re-circulating hot air. Sound level of the enclosed unit shall not exceed 76 dbA at 7m in any direction around the unit.

- The enclosure shall be equipped with a space heater/thermostat designed to maintain a minimum of 10˚C temperature at all times. Motorized damper(s) shall be fitted as required to maintain the ambient temperature specified. Provide a suitable emergency lighting unit to comply with requirements of CSA C282, clause 6.11. Provide a main lug type loadcentre for all AC accessories and wire in accordance with local codes, with CSA/ESA approval. Submittal drawings must reflect all items provided.

- The exhaust silencer(s) shall be provided of the size as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be of critical grade. The silencer(s) shall be mounted within the weather protective enclosure for reduced exhaust noise and provide a clean, smooth exterior design. It shall be connected to the engine with a flexible, seamless, stainless steel exhaust connection. A rain cap will terminate the exhaust pipe. All components must be properly sized to assure operation without excessive back pressure when installed.

- A heavy duty, lead acid 12VDC battery set rated at 925 CCA, BCI group 31 shall be installed by the generator set manufacturer. Provide all inter-cell and connecting battery cables as required.

- Provide an automatic dual rate battery charger. The automatic equalizer system shall

monitor and limit the charge current to 10 amps. The output voltage is to be determined by the charge current rate. The charger must be protected against a reverse polarity connection. The battery charger is to be factory installed on the generator set. Due to line voltage drop concerns, a battery charger mounted in the transfer switch will be unacceptable.

.2 Applied Standards

.1 The unit shall be Canadian Standards Association certified. .2 The equipment shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s

requirements and recommendations and the requirements of the Authorities having jurisdiction. - Canadian Electrical Code. - Canadian, Provincial and Local Building Codes. - Local Authorities having jurisdiction. - ULC, BSA. - Underwriters Laboratories of Canada Inc.



.3 Factory Testing

1 Before shipment of the equipment, the engine-generator set shall be tested under rated load for performance and proper functioning of control and interfacing circuits. Tests shall include: - Verifying all safety shutdowns are functioning properly. - Verify single step load pick-up per NFPA 110-1996, Paragraph 5-13.2.6. - Verify transient and voltage dip responses and steady state voltage and speed

(frequency) checks. .4 Service

.1 Supplier of the electric plant and associated items shall have permanent service facilities in this

trade area. These facilities shall comprise a permanent force of factory trained service personnel on 24 hour call, experienced in servicing this type of equipment, providing warranty and routine maintenance service to afford the owner maximum protection. Delegation of this service responsibility for any of the equipment listed herein will not be considered fulfillment of these specifications. Service contracts shall also be available.

.5 W arranty .1 The standby electric generating system components, complete engine-generator and

instrumentation panel shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defective materials and factory workmanship for a period of 24 months. Such defective parts shall be repaired or replaced at the manufacturer’s option, free of charge. Travel and labor shall be included for the first 12 months.

.2 The warranty period shall commence when the standby power system is first placed into service. Multiple warranties for individual components (engine, alternator, controls, etc.) will not be acceptable. Satisfactory warranty documents must be provided. Also, in the judgment of the specifying authority, the manufacturer supplying the warranty for the complete system must have the necessary financial strength and technical expertise with all components supplied to provide adequate warranty support.

.6 Start-Up and Check-Out

.1 The supplier of the electric generating plant and associated items covered herein shall provide

factory trained technicians to checkout the completed installation and to perform an initial startup inspection to include: - Ensuring the engine starts (both hot and cold) within the specified time. - Verification of engine parameters within specification. - Verify no load frequency and voltage, adjusting if required. - Test all automatic shutdowns of the engine-generator. - Perform a load test of the electric plant, ensuring full load frequency and voltage are

within specification by using building load. .2 Provide all testing per CSA C282 latest edition (Clause 10 – all parts), including load bank testing,

and provide copies of all reports to the consultant promptly.

.7 Submittals

.1 Provide shop drawings of Engineering Submittal for approval, prior to production release, showing all components, in addition to the engine and generator. Submittals shall include compliance with these specifications.



.8 Substitutions

.1 The emergency power system has been designed to the specified manufacturer’s electrical and physical characteristics. The equipment sizing, spacing, amounts, electrical wiring, ventilation equipment, fuel and exhaust components have all been sized and designed around Generac Power System's equipment. Should any substitutions be made, the contractor shall bear responsibility for the installation, coordination and operation of the system as well as any engineering and redesign costs which may result from such substitutions. Alternate equipment suppliers shall furnish equipment submittals 14 days prior to bid date for approval to bid. As part of the submittals, the substitute manufacturer shall supply as a minimum engine, alternator and control panel wiring diagrams and schematics. A separate list of all printed circuit boards with part numbers and current pricing must also be included.

.9 Installation

.1 Move the equipment into place and connect. Contractor shall install the complete electrical

generating system including all fuel connections in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as reviewed by the Engineer.

.2 Supply and install anchors for the engine/generator base in the pad and connect to isolating devices on base.

.3 Install batteries, fill with electrolyte, charge and connect.

.4 Install control panel. Supply and install interconnecting wiring between control panel, engine/generator, transfer switch, remote annunciator, dampers and other equipment.

.5 Provide 120V, 1 Phase normal power connection to all accessories. Use a separate suitably sized branch circuit for each separate component. Label load centre accordingly.

.6 Dampers to be fail safe in the open position.

.10 Applications

.1 Electrical Contractor shall apply to Ministry of Environment for approval of generator exhaust system to suit Code requirements.

.11 Emergency lighting level test report, with on-site readings to show lighting levels in all areas with emergency lighting fixtures, shall be performed by a qualified emergency lighting manufacturer/vendor representative and submitted to the Consultant for review. Also provide emergency lighting certificate.

END OF SECTION


Version 1.5 Issued: February 28, 2013 Section: C.15 – Transfer Switch Page 1 of 3

Standard Specification: Transfer Switch

[Consultants may revise to suit preferred numbering system for headings, articles, sentences]

Ref. Elec. C.3 Essential Service (Standby Provision) 1.1 GENERAL

.1 Work Included

.1 Supply and install automatic transfer switches (total of 2) designed to satisfactorily

disconnect the load from one power source and reconnect it to another source. Transfer switch shall be suitable for use in the system in which it is to be installed.

.2 Codes

.1 The transfer switch shall, as a minimum, comply with C.S.A. Standard C22.2 No. 178.

.2 The transfer switch shall be type A, ie: a unit that does not employ integral overcurrent devices, and shall be equipped with a bypass isolation switch.

2.1PRODUCTS

.1 Enclosure

.1 The transfer switch shall be enclosed in a wall-mounted cabinet of dust tight construction.

The cabinet shall be constructed for code gauge painted steel with engraved nameplates for all indicating and control devices.

.2 The transfer switch shall be of sprinkler-proof construction complete with drip hood and gaskets.

.2 Rating

.1 The transfer switch shall be suitable for resistive or inductive loads. It shall have a short circuit

capacity such that it can be used safely on the system in which it is to be installed. .2 It shall be capable of handling the starting and in-rush currents of the load, capable of

withstanding fault current available at transfer switch from Utility source. .3 The ampere rating shall be nominally as indicated or larger if required by the load or

electrical system characteristics. .4 The switch shall be rated for 600V at 60 hertz, 3 pole complete with single side by-pass.

.3 Mechanism

.1 The transfer switch shall be electrically operated mechanically-held contactor type having arc-

protected open contactors complete with copper bussing. .2 The inductive loads connected to the transfer switch are to be switched from the normal and

emergency power sources without damage to the loads and without disruption, failure or tripping of the power supply. In the case of fast-acting transfer switches, a form of phase sensing shall be used to ensure in-phase transfers.

.3 Provide an integral by-pass feature for maintenance or emergency operation.



.4 Operating Features

.1 Provide for the operation specified. It is intended that the transfer switch signal for engine start-up on normal power failure, switch the load to the emergency power supply during the outage, retransfer back to normal power following restoration, and then allow for no-load running prior to shutting off. Provision for other specified features shall be provided for, including full manual operation.

.5 Voltage Sensing

.1 The transfer switch shall obtain control and transfer power from the source to which it is being

transferred. .2 The preferred source shall be the source designated as normal. .3 Provide one solid state voltage sensing relay per phase. The relays shall be adjustable type, with drop

out and pick-up independently adjustable. .4 The transfer switch shall initiate transfer of the load when the normal power supply drops to a pre-

set value on any phase. .5 An auxiliary contact shall be provided to initiate generator start-up. .6 The transfer shall not occur until the voltage and frequency have reached pre-set values and are

stable.

.6 Retransfer Time Delay

.1 Provide a time delay relay to provide a delay on the retransfer of power from emergency to normal after the restoration of normal power. This is to prevent subsequent restarts of the engine in the event of continued short-duration normal power outages. The relay is to be adjustable between 1 minute and 30 minutes.

.7 Engine Shut Down Delay

.1 Provide a time delay relay to allow the engine to run unloaded for a pre-set interval following transfer

to normal power. This to prevent multiple restarts should the normal power supply fail more than once over the delay period. The relay is to be adjustable from approximately 0 minutes to 30 minutes.

.8 Control and Indicating Devices

.1 Provide the following devices, cover mounted:

- Green "normal power on" pilot light - Red "emergency on" pilot light - "Test" pushbutton (momentary contact) which will simulate a failure of emergency power

and cause engine start-up, transfer to emergency, and retransfer to normal, via all standard time delays.

.9 Frequency Sensing

.1 Provide an adjustable frequency sensing device which will control the transfer to sources

operating within acceptable frequency limits, with a range of 90 to 100%.



.10 Manufacturer

.1 The transfer switch shall be ASCO 7000 Series, combining an ASCO 940 transfer switch with a single bypass isolation switch, with the accessories and features described herein, or approved equal providing they meet the specifications.

3.1EXECUTION

.1 Installation

.1 Install the transfer switch and all accessories to provide the required operation all in accordance

with the applicable codes, these specifications, and the manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Provide an engraved nameplate on the outside of the cabinet which completely describes the system

operation, especially the effect of the various time-delay relays.

.2 Settings

.1 Set all relays. Provide an engraved nameplate attached to the relay which properly identifies the relay by name and function and indicates the recommended setting.

.2 Set the voltage sensing relay at 85% of the nominal supply voltage.

.3 Set the retransfer time delay relay at 3 minutes.

.4 Set the engine shut down delay relay at 5 minutes.

.5 Set the frequency control device at 95%.

.3 Wiring

.1 Install and connect all associated control wiring between the transfer switch and remote mounted devices.

.2 Install and connect the normal, emergency and load feeder cables.

.4 Testing

.1 Factory trained technician employed by the transfer switch manufacturer to supervise and check the installation. This person shall conduct a complete test of the system and demonstrate to the Owner that the system is in perfect operating condition, and provide suitable certification of such operation.

END OF SECTION

Peel District School Board Design Guidelines Manual for Elementary Schools Mechanical

Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 Index Part A Page i

INDEX TO PART A INSTRUCTIONS TO DESIGNERS PART A - INSTRUCTIONS TO DESIGNERS GENERAL ISSUES A.ii INTRODUCTION A.1 - FORMAT OF THE GUIDELINES A.3 - OTHER DOCUMENTS A.4 - RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS A.5 - GENERAL DESIGN STANDARDS A.6 - DIGITAL AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A.7 - HEALTH & SAFETY/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A.8 - MECHANICAL DESIGN PROCEDURES


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 A - Instructions to Designers Page 1 of 5

PART A - INSTRUCTIONS TO DESIGNERS GENERAL ISSUES A.ii INTRODUCTION These Design Guidelines are issued by the Peel District School Board (PDSB) School Accommodation Department and are int ended for use exclusively by Board-designated Architects and Engineers ("Designers") for the purpose of assisting in new construction and renovation school projects. From time to time, these Guidelines will be revised and updated by the Board. Feed-back and suggestions for revisions are encouraged and are to be directed to the Design Department, School Accommodations of the Peel District School Board. These Guidelines are issued for new Junior and Middle Schools and related Renovations and Additions and consist of 3 manuals: • The Architectural Manual, • Mechanical Manual and • The Electrical Manual. All three manuals are to be read in conjunction with one another in order that the design team coordinates from a comprehensive set of guidelines. A.1 - FORMAT OF THE GUIDELINES • The Mechanical Manual of these Design Guidelines is further separated

into in 3 main "PARTS". PART A - INSTRUCTION TO DESIGNERS PART B - GUIDELINES TO MAJOR SCHOOL SPACES PART C - GUIDELINES FOR SPECIFICATIONS • "PARTS" are arranged into "Sections": e.g. Section "C2 - Insulation" • Sections contain subsections: e.g. "C2.3 - Pipe Insulation" Hierarchical indexes are provided: • A main Table of Contents provides a list of each PART and Sections. • An Index is provided at the beginning of each PART which lists both the

Sections and subsections for that PART.



• It is the intent of this structure to provide a ready-reference to the design team in a way that supports the design process and the assembly of Contract Documents.

• A modular format has been developed for the various subsections of these guidelines also to provide a ready-reference when information is required in a particular section or a particular room and also to simplify updates.

• Part A: provides a general background to "across the board" design issues or standards.

• Part B: provides a "room by room" guide to spaces within Junior and Senior schools. It has a text section and a complementary schematic sample drawing section.

• Part C: has subheadings arranged in the basic chronology of a standard

specification and includes information needed both by designers and specifiers. The text of each subheading in part B is typically arranged to address, in order: General issues Design issues Specification issues Construction issues

• These 3 Parts are also cross-referenced in the right hand margin.

• Indexing of the various parts of the manuals is provided to assist in ready reference and understanding the structure of the document.

• Use of a bulleted format and use of check lists and guide specifications are employed to assist the designer(s).

• It is important to recognize that all parts of the Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical manuals are to be read as a complete package.

A.2 - DEFINITIONS (for the purpose of using these Guidelines) Board Standard: Any statement or standard which is the policy of the Peel District School Board and should not by deviated from without express approval from the Design Department. Design Department: Refers to the design and construction group within the school accommodations department



Guide Specification: Use of the word "guide" information is provided for the final discretion of the designer and it is not to be implied that this is a strict standard. In many cases, guide specifications are suggestions of what has been acceptable and successful in previous projects. Junior School: Typically a kindergarten to grade 5 accommodation (K-5). Sometimes K-8 accommodations which will possible involve design criteria for middle schools. Middle Schools: Also known as Senior Elementary schools; consisting of grades 6, 7, 8. A.3 - OTHER DOCUMENTS These guidelines must be read in conjunction with the following standard Peel District School Board Documents. • Form of Agreement with the Peel District School Board and Architect

• Stipulated Price Contract, Peel District School Board, latest edition - this

is the agreement between the Board and the Contractor.

• Barrier Free policies as issued by the Peel District School Board

• Health and Safety policies as issued by The Peel District School Board

• Architectural and Electrical Design Guidelines any other standard documents issued by the Peel District School Board

• These Guidelines do not reference in any detail, if at all, Building Codes, Fire Codes, Municipal Bylaws or any other legal Statues or Regulations, as they are understood to be within the standard sets of governances pertaining to any construction project.

• It is not the intention of these Guidelines or the above reference 'Other Documents' to be in conflict with other codes, regulations, bylaws, statues, etc. Should the designer note any inconsistencies or conflicts between documents, these should be brought to the Board's attention immediately.

• Format of Specifications

• Authorities Having Jurisdiction



A.4 - RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS It is anticipated that these Guidelines will be used extensively by Engineers preparing documents for Renovations and Additions. These guidelines attempt to provide assistance in the case of renovations and additions by listing information for renovations and additions as a subsection within each individual section of Part C. For the most part these guidelines will be applicable to Additions in that new spaces are typically created in full compliance with Peel District School Board standards. Renovations, on the other hand, can present a variety of existing conditions which are not in compliance and the designer must assess the applicability of any and all aspects of these Guidelines. For renovations and additions the designer shall, as a minimum: • Survey and document all existing conditions

• Review the applicability of standards to the renovation or addition in

terms of the building as a whole and the particular renovation or addition.

• Report to the Design Department findings where deviations may be warranted.

• Obtain clear direction for possible deviations from the Guidelines. As stated above, Mechanical aspects of the Guidelines are usually applicable whether or not existing conditions are in full compliance. However, specific mechanical systems such as HVAC maybe such that "matching existing" are preferable. Refer also to Architectural and Electrical manuals for directions when exceptional existing conditions are found. A.5 - GENERAL DESIGN STANDARDS Best Practice • The Board expects that each of its consultants respect "best practice"

standards for project design, documentation and administration, as may be maintained by the governing Professional Association for the consultant.

Approach to Cost • The Peel District School Board insists that its designers recognize and

respect cost-conscience design.



• Designers must be aware of the affect of design decisions on operation and maintenance, since these are very significant factors to the School Board's fiscal management.

• Designers are encouraged to provide feed-back to the Design Department if first costs, operation and maintenance costs (life cycle) costs are seen to provide information such that existing design standards may be reviewed or challenged.

A.6 - DIGITAL AS-BUILT DRAWINGS • Consultants shall provide digital as-built drawings to the Board at the

completion of the work. A.7 - HEALTH & SAFETY/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS • Designers shall be familiar with Board Health and Safety Policies.

• Refer to Part C - General Requirements for more related to Health &

Safety and Hazardous Materials in Design, Specifications and Construction phases.

A.8 - MECHANICAL DESIGN PROCEDURES Approval of Mechanical Design: • Before proceeding with Working Drawings, the design engineer shall

prepare a Mechanical Systems Report which will describe the design intent of the following:

• Plumbing • HVAC • Fire Protection • Site Services • Controls • Heating Plant

• The Mechanical Systems Report shall be submitted to the Architect and

the School Board for their review and approval.

• A Mechanical Systems Report shall be prepared for all School Board projects; new schools, additions and renovations.


Version 2.5 Issued: June 21, 2017 Ci - Index Page i of iii


C1 - MECHANICAL TECHNICAL DESIGN PROCEDURES

C1.1 - Specifications

C1.2 - Standard Of Drawings & Details

C1.3 - Project Commissioning

C1.4 - Permits, Fees & Licences

C1.5 - Operating & Maintenance Manuals

C2 - INSULATION

C2.1 - General Notes

C2.2 - Description of Work

C2.4 - Pipe Insulation

C2.5 - Duct Insulation

C3 - SITE SERVICES



C3.4 - Excavation, Trenching, Backfilling & Bedding

C3.5 - Materials, Piping, Valves, Manholes and Catchbasins

C4 - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE

C4.1 - General Notes/Approach To Design

C4.2 - Piping Products

C4.3 - Piping Installation

C4.4 - Plumbing Accessories

C4.5 - Plumbing Fixtures - Board Standard

C5 - SPRINKLERS/FIRE PROTECTION



C5.3 - Sprinkler Guide Specifications

C5.4 - Submittals

C5.5 - Design Criteria

C5.6 - Fire Protection Equipment

C5.7 - Fire Booster Pump System

C5.8 - Tests

C5.9 - Identification Signs

C5.10 - Final Inspection

C5.11 - Fire Extinguishers

C6 - HEAT GENERATION


C6.2 - Description Of Work

C6.3 - Board Standard Boiler Specification


Version 2.5 Issued: June 21, 2017 Ci - Index Page ii of iii

C7 - HEATING, PIPING, FITTINGS

C7.1 - General Notes/Approach to Design


C7.3 - Guide Specifications

C7.4 - Steel Piping & Fittings

C7.5 - Copper Piping & Fittings

C7.6 - PVC Piping & Fittings

C7.7 - Gas Pipe & Fittings

C7.8 - Pipe Grading

C7.9 - Piping Tests

C7.10 - Spring Isolators and Vibration Isolation

C7.11 - Drain Valves

C7.12 - Gas Service Provisions

C7.13 - Piping Devices

C7.14 - Hot Water Heating Devices

C7.15 - Pumps

C7.16 - Heating Units

C7.17 - Water Treatment - Board Standard

C8 - AIR DISTRIBUTION

C8.1 - General Notes/Approach to Design - New Schools

C8.2 - General Notes/Approach to Design - Additions & Renovations

C8.3 - General Description of Work

C8.4 - Duct Construction

C8.5 - Ductwork Accessories

C8.6 - Vibration Isolation & Duct Silencers

C8.7 - Grilles & Diffusers

C8.9 - Air Filters - Board Specification

C8.10 - Gas Vents & Flues

C8.11 - Penthouse Multi-Zone Rooftop Unit Guide Specifications

C8.12 - Sawdust Collector Guide Specification

C17- ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

C17.1 - Board Standard Specification

C17.2 - Reference Standards

C17.3 – Intent Version 2.1

C17.4 - Related Work Specified Elsewhere Version 2.1

C17.5 - Quality Assurance

C17.6 - Submittals Version 2.1

C17.7 - Guarantee

C17.8 - Maintenance

C17.9 - Instruction Adjustment and "As-Built" Drawings Version 2.1

C17.10 - Acceptance Procedure

C17.11 - EMCS Operation Summary Version 2.1

C17.12 - Dampers Version 2.1


Version 2.5 Issued: June 21, 2017 Ci - Index Page iii of iii

C17.13 – Actuators Version 2.1

C17.14 - Automatic Control Valves Version 2.1

C17.15 – Reserved Version 2.1

C17.16 - Space and Air Temperature Sensors Version 2.1

C17.17 – Components Version 2.1

C17.18 – Wiring Version 2.1


C17.20 - Energy Management Control System Version 2.1

C17.21 - Direct Digital Control Processor Software

C17.22 - Execution - Components

C17.23 - Manufactured Equipment Version 2.1


C17.25 - Sequences of Operation Version 2.1

C17.26 - PDSB BAS Schedule Version 2.1

C20 – FIELD IRRIGATION Version 2.5

Peel District School Board Design Guidelines for Junior & Middle Schools Mechanical

Version 2.1 Issued: Dec. 1, 2014 Cii - Introduction Page 1 of 1

PART C - GUIDELINES FOR SPECIFICATIONS

Cii - INTRODUCTION

This Part of the Guidelines groups issues into Sections similar to the organization

of a standard specification so that issues related to that part of the work can be

captured in one area and reviewed by the designer.

Extensive use is made of point form format and lists.

Typically, issues are grouped in the following categories:

General Issues

Design Issues

Specification Issues

Construction Issues


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C1 - Mechanical Technical Design Procedures Page 1 of 2

C1 - MECHANICAL TECHNICAL DESIGN PROCEDURES C1.1 - Specifications • Mechanical specifications shall follow a three part specification format for

each section namely "General", which shall include general requirements and a brief scope of work, "Materials", which shall include standards of materials and acceptable manufacturers and "Installation" which shall include clear direction for expected quality of workmanship and for precision of scope of work.

• A Mechanical Specification Index together with a List of Drawings shall be bound in front of the Specification Documents submittal for Tender.

C1.2 - Standard of Drawings & Details • The final set of Mechanical drawings must be done in a AutoCAD, latest

edition, system compatible with the Board's systems.

• Mechanical Room and Boiler details shall be shown at a scale of 1-25 or 1-50 with equipment shown in plan view and elevation. Any details in need of further clarification shall be shown in section or as an isometric detail with explanatory notes incorporated.

• Details shall show column lines with notations so that persons reading the drawings can determine the location and orientation of rooms as they appear on the floor plans.

• Unless previous approval has been obtained from the Board, separate floor plans must be provided, as a minimum, for Plumbing and Drainage and for Heating and Ventilation. All floor plans are to show north arrows, column lines and, when the plan is not of the complete floor, a key plan in the right hand margin.

• Floor plans of additions to schools shall indicate in outline, as much as possible of the existing building and be divided by a cut off line marked "new work" and "existing building".

C1.3 - Project Commissioning As a minimum service to the Board, the design engineer shall: • prepare equipment data forms for each piece of mechanical equipment;

and prepare deficiency lists for same;


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C1 - Mechanical Technical Design Procedures Page 2 of 2

• confirm to the Board, that equipment specified, and/or approved on shop drawings, is equipment installed on the Project;

• co-ordinate the preparation of maintenance manuals, making certain that these are complete before the release of the Completion Security Account;

• co-ordinate the tendering of Air and Water Balancing; coordinate the scheduling of training as specified in the Contract Documents;

• review control system sequences of operation and prepare deficiency lists for same;

• represent the Board during final and "eleven month" inspections of the Project.

C1.4 - Permits, Fees & Licences • The specifications shall make it understood that all permits, fees and

licences, for services required to perform the work of the mechanical division, shall be obtained and paid for by the Mechanical subcontractors.

C1.5 - Operating & Maintenance Manuals • The Consulting Engineer shall review the Operating and Maintenance

Manuals submitted by the Mechanical Contractor and advise the Architect when they are acceptable for release to the Board.

• It shall be the responsibility of the Consulting Engineer to review and approve each of the operating and maintenance manuals to the Board. They shall be delivered before release of holdback via the Architect.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C2 - Insulation Page 1 of 5

C2 - INSULATION C2.1 - General Notes • This part of the work shall be performed by a Contractor experienced in

this type of work. Insulation for all piping, ductwork and equipment shall be provided to reduce heat transfer, prevent condensation, afford protection for personnel and for a neat appearance.

C2.2 - Description of Work Insulation work includes, but is not limited to, the following: • Domestic cold water piping • Domestic hot water and recirculating piping (all temperatures) • Domestic tempered water and recirculation piping • Intake and exhaust air plenums within two metres of an outside wall. • Rainwater leaders and hopper sumps • Hot water heating piping • Cold drains from refrigeration, and cooling equipment • Radiant ceiling panels • Water meter



C2.4 - Pipe Insulation Materials: • Insulation shall conform to ASHRAE Standard 90.1 (latest edition).

• All piping and fittings shall be insulated with inorganic glass fibres,

bonded with a thermosetting resin complete with self sealing lap, "ASJ" all service jacket.

Buried Piping: • Buried hot water, cold water and heating pipes shall be insulated with 2"

(50 mm) thick, foam glass insulation complete with vapour retarder. Insulated pipes shall be wrapped together with 55 lb/100 cu.ft. (2.7 kg/cu. m) building felt and all joints sealed with a vapour-proof mastic.

Fire Safety: • All insulation, reinforced foil faced tape, adhesive and finishes shall be

treated so that maximum flame spread rating is 25 or less and the smoke development rating is 50 or less or according to local by-laws.

Pipe Penetrations through Fire Separations: • Where pipes pass through fire separations (walls, floor and partitions)

ULC listed and/or approved fire stopping mineral fibre insulation shall be specified.

• Insulation shall be sealed with approved fire-retardant sealing compounding.

• Sealing compound to be installed to Manufacturer's specifications and detail.

• Fire stopping shall comply with the Ontario Building Code and approved by local Building Department.

Domestic Water Piping, Heating Piping and Fittings: • Specify that all fittings up to 2" (50 mm) shall be insulated with mitre-cut

pieces of insulation and pressure-sensitive, colour-matching tape.

• All exposed fittings 2" (50 mm) and larger be specified with pre-molded PVC insulating fittings covers.



• Cold water trapseal piping from the priming tank down to the header or floor shall be insulated as above including the header.

Rainwater Leaders: • All rainwater leaders inside the building, the roof hopper pan at the

underside of the roof, horizontal and vertical piping shall be specified to be insulated with 1" (25 mm) fibreglass faced flexible insulation.

Cooling Equipment Condensate Drains: • The condensate drains from the drain pan to the vertical stack/floor drain

shall be insulated. Water Meter: • Specify that the water meter is to be insulated with a removable,

oversized, rigid fibreglass cover to allow future access to the water meters. Specify finish as insulating cement and canvas.

Pipe Insulation Finish: • Specify all exposed insulated piping and fittings shall be finished with a

fire retardant PVC jacket, as follows: PVC cover shall be minimum 0.02 gauge, hot rolled complete with self seal lap. All seams to be fused by Shurweld reinforcement. Provide PVC end caps for piping 1-1/2"Ø (40 mmØ) and larger. Caulk end fittings with silicone sealant equal to Dow Corning 999-A on piping 1-1/4"Ø (32 mm Ø) or less. Joints for pipe fitting connections (Tees, Wyes, etc.) shall be sealed with silicone sealant as above.

• Note: PVC fittings do not require jacketing.

• No PVC finish shall be applied until the Consultant has inspected the insulation for type, adhesive and cracks.



C2.5 - Duct Insulation Materials: • Insulation shall conform to ASHRAE Standard 90.1 - latest edition.

• Reinforced foil faced tape, adhesive and finishes shall have a UL723

rating of 25 or less flame spread and 50 or less smoke development rating, or according to local bylaws.

• Duct thermal insulation board shall be made from inorganic glass fibres, preformed and bonded by a thermosetting resin, complete with factory applied commercial foil-skrimkraft (FSK) vapour retarder.

• Concealed rectangular ductwork, except outdoors, up to 16" x 12" (400 mm x 300 mm) and round ducts (all sizes) shall be 1" (25 mm) thick, 1 lb/cu.ft. (16 kg/cu.m) density insulation blanket.

• Concealed rectangular ductwork, except outdoors, larger than 16" x 12" (400 mm x 300 mm) shall be 1-1/2" (40 mm) thick, 3 lb/cu.ft. (48 kg/cu.m) density insulation board.

• Insulation board installed in Mechanical Room shall be unfaced complete with canvas cover.

Exposed Ductwork Inside: • Specify that all exposed ductwork located in Mechanical Rooms, etc.,

shall be plastic covered.

• Note that exterior insulation is not required where interior sound insulation is installed.

Ductwork Passing Through Fire Separations: • Where ducts pass through fire separations (walls, floor and partitions)

ULC listed and/or approved fire stopping mineral fibre insulation shall be specified.

• The insulation shall be sealed with approved fire-retardant sealing compounding.

• Sealing compound to be installed to Manufacturer's specifications and detail. Fire stopping shall comply with the Ontario Building Code and approved by local Building Department.



Insulation of Outdoor Ductwork: • Specify that all exterior, exposed ductwork on roof shall be insulted with

2" (50 mm) thick, fibreglass asphalt impregnated insulation board, complete with mechanical fasteners.

• Specify that the entire surface be covered with fibreglass membrane and two coats of sealant.

• Specify that the corners of the ductwork are to be framed with 16 gauge angle stiffeners the full length of corners. Specify the thickness of insulation on top of the duct is to be increased from outside edge to centre to provide a slope to shed water.

• Specify an Aluminum Roll jacketing finish with clear coat finish on jacketing and moisture barrier liner.

Ductwork Installation - General: • Specify all breaks sealed with Bakor 230-06. Specify covering seals with

foil-faced tape. • Specify that board insulation shall be applied according to the

manufacturer's installation procedure using welded pins or perforated base metal fasteners adhered with Bakelite #230-35 and speed washers.

• Specify that corners of insulation be provided with a preformed protective edge applied to the insulation before canvassing. Specify exposed edges to be concealed with reinforced foil faced tape.

See also Section C8


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C3 - Site Services Page 1 of 5

C3 - SITE SERVICES C3.1 - General Notes • Specify that all the work in this Section is to conform to the Ontario

Building Code (Chapter 7), Ontario Provincial Standards for the Installation of Storm and Sanitary Sewers and Watermains: Volume 1 - Construction, Volume 2 - Material and Book 3 - Standard Drawings. Where these Standards are superseded by published local Municipal and/or Regional Standards and Design Criteria, the Municipal and/or Regional Standards shall apply. These Standards apply to all phases of the work including excavation, backfill, tamping, shoring, sheet piling, bedding, pipe strength criteria, and connection details for service connections, and manhole and catch basin installation details.

• Allow for future building additions when designing site water, storm and sanitary services.

• Obtain Regional and Municipal approval for storm and sanitary services.

• Obtain Fire Department approval for fire service including post indicating valve.

• Obtain Regional approval for storm water management reports.

C3.2 - Description of Work Site Services work includes, but is not limited to, the following: • Specifying of a complete sanitary sewer system from street connection to

within 3'-0" (900 mm) of school building, including manholes. The Site Services contract is to include all work associated with street connection.

• Specifying a complete storm sewer system from street to within 3'-0" (900

mm) of school building, including manholes, all planter drains and catchbasins and all work associated with street connection.

• Specifying a domestic water service complete with meter, by-pass and remote reading device mounted on wall to the Authorities Standards, from street connection into the school building, including all work associated with the street connection.

• Specifying a gas service and meter from street connection to school building complete with isolating valves.



• Specifying fire a service/domestic water service system from street connection, complete with site fire hydrants and valve box, post indicating valve.

Existing Services: • Specify that the Contractor shall locate and protect existing gas, electrical,

telephone, storm, sanitary and water pipe services during construction of new work.

C3.3 - Guide Specification C3.4 - Excavation, Trenching, Backfilling & Bedding • The Site Services Contractor shall do all excavation, trenching, backfilling

and bedding in connection with Site Services work.

• All trenching and excavation shall be done in strict accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act latest revision thereof.

• All excavations shall be protected with fencing, timber sheeting, bracing or shoring as required. Provide adequate temporary cross-overs for pedestrian and vehicular traffic, including guard rails, lamps and flags as directed.

• Specify that all timber and protective devices be removed before backfilling or when the necessity of protection ceases.

• Excavated areas shall be kept free of water by providing pumps, hoses, strainer, other appurtenances, power, labour and maintenance as required.

• All tanks, piping and equipment shall be tested, inspected and approved before backfilling.

• Specify that all piping and equipment shall have adequate bedding.

• Trenches shall be excavated 6" (150 mm) below the intended grade of the piping.

• Bedding shall be compacted to 98% modified Proctor test.

• Specify that compaction of the backfilled material shall be to 95% Proctor density for native material and 98% Proctor density for granular material.



• Pipes must be protected with a minimum of 20" (500 mm) of compacted cover before backfill by mechanical means.

• Specify that the Site Services Section will be responsible for restoring to its original condition, all pavements, curbs, walks, sodding, shrubs, etc. removed or damaged in connection with this work.

• Specify that street cuts shall be equal to above and as required by the governing Municipality and/or Region.

C3.5 - Materials, Piping, Valves, Manholes and Catchbasins Pipe Materials: • For Sanitary Sewers, specify that polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe shall be

certified to CSA B182.1 and B182.2 where acceptable to the Region. Pipe stiffness shall be equal to or greater than 46 psi (320 kPa).

• For Storm Sewers, specify that Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe 15" (375 mm) diameter and smaller shall be certified to CSA B182.1 and B182.2.

• Water Mains: Specify that the pipe and fittings shall conform to the latest revised American Water Works Association Standard. Specify for domestic water service and fire service the supply and installation of polyethylene pipe and fittings, certified to CAN/CSA-B137.1, with a rated working pressure equal or greater than 150 psi (1035 kPa).

• Fire Hydrants:

Hydrants to be specified to AWWA C-502 and ULC Standards. Specify all hydrants shall have isolating gate valves complete with extension stem, grade valve box complete with key, to Authorities Standard.

• Thrust Blocks:

Specify all plugs, caps, tees, bends shall have poured-in-place thrust blocks or suitable alternative (i.e. non-corrosive clamps, bell bolt joints, restraining-type glands).



• Buried Gas Piping: Specify that Buried piping shall be Shaw Pipe "Yellow Jacket", protected pipe with PVC coating and protective tape wrapped on the joints. Buried joints: Specify welded in all sizes. Welded fittings: Specify to ASTM-A-120 or ASTM-A-53. Specify polyethylene piping for gas service to CSA Standard B137.4 where allowed by local Gas Company.

Precast manholes: • Specify that precast manholes shall be manufactured to ASTM C478 with

wall thickness to C76. Manhole frames and covers shall be unperforated with two 1" (25 mm) lifting holes. Manhole steps shall be cast-in-place aluminum with safety gratings in manholes exceeding 15'-6" (4800 mm).

• Specify for storm manhole the supply and installation of 4"Ø (100 mm) drainage pipe with fabric cover on four sides to 36" (900 mm) from manhole. Invert of pipe to be approximately 22" (550 mm) below top of precast concrete manhole.

• Specify that manholes shall be benched with 3000 psi (20 MPa) concrete. Benching shall be centred in the manhole and shall extend to the crown of the pipe as shown on OPSD details. The base shall be factory precast with the benching cast in place with the opening cored to receive the piping shown. The drop through the manhole shall be 1-1/2" (40 mm) for 180° straight through piping and 3" (80 mm) for 90° to 135° bends. Secondary side connections are at the top of the benching. No secondary connections shall be flooded. Field installed bases and benching may be installed by permission of the Consultant.

• Specify for each manhole, the supply and installation of a Sediment Trap.

• Specify an Open Cover and Frame for Storm Sewer System and a Closed Cover and Frame for Sanitary Sewer System.

Precast Catch Basins: • Specify that Catch basins shall have Goss Traps or inlet tees, unless

otherwise requested by local Municipality.



• Specify for each catch basin, the supply and installation of 4"Ø (100Ø) PVC drainage piping on four sides to 36" (900 mm) from catch basin. Invert of pipe to be approximately 22" (550 mm) below top of precast concrete catch basin.

• Specify for each catchbasin, the supply and installation of a Sediment Trap.

Flushing and Disinfecting Water Mains: • Specify that the water mains be flushed and disinfected to local Region

Standards with chlorine.

• Note that the taking of samples and testing for chlorine residual will be done by the Municipal Inspector.

• Specify that a copy of the Test Certificate for both the pressure test and the chlorination shall be submitted to the Consultant.

Pipe Clearance - Specify the following pipe clearances: • Maintain minimum 18" (450 mm) vertical clearance between sanitary and

storm pipes.

• Maintain minimum 16" (400 mm) horizontal clearance between sanitary and storm pipes.

• Maintain minimum 8'-4" (2500 mm) horizontal clearance between water pipe and any sewer pipe (storm and sanitary).

• Maintain minimum 6" (150 mm) vertical distance between water pipe above any sewer pipe.

• Maintain minimum 20" (500 mm), or as indicated on drawings, vertical distance between water pipe below any sewer pipe.

• Verify all clearances with the local Municipality and/or Regional departments.


Version 1.5 Issued: Feb. 28, 2013 C4 - Plumbing & Drainage Page 1 of 22

C4 - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE C4.1 - General Notes/Approach to Design • Specify a complete sanitary drain, waste and vent systems to serve all

fixtures, floor and hub drains and equipment, to 3'-0" (900 mm) outside building.

• Specify a storm water system complete, including roof drains and rainwater leaders, to 3'-0" (900 mm) outside building.

• Specify a domestic hot, cold, tempered and recirculation water systems to serve all fixtures and equipment.

• Specify drainage piping from direct expansion coil units to sanitary drainage system.

• Co-ordinate location and depth of sanitary, storm and water services with civil engineering drawings. Ref: C3 - Site Services

• Specify a single, gas-fired, water heater to provide domestic hot water and tempered water to the entire school. Electric hot water heaters shall not be specified. Water heater to be located in the main Mechanical Room/

• The following fixtures shall be specified with domestic hot & cold water: • One Custodian Room per floor • SMT Instructors Bench • Staff Room sink/dishwasher • Special Education dishwasher rough-in

• Tempered water shall be provided by either of two methods:

• Method 1: Central tempered water mixing valve complete with

tempered water recirculation. Central tempered water mixing valve to be located adjacent water heater.

• Method 2: Install individual in-line mixing valves at each lavatory and sink. This approach eliminates separate tempered water distribution piping, pumps, etc.



• Eyewash stations to be specified at the following locations: • Custodian Service Rooms

• SMT Rooms (located at Instructors Bench)

• Boiler Room adjacent Chemical Treatment Pot Feeder

• Eyewash stations are to be supplied with tempered water to suit

latest Code requirements

• All water closets shall be with flush valves. Tank type water closets shall not be specified.

• Instrumental Music Room and Art Room shall be specified with standard stainless steel sink and a large, 10" deep stainless steel sing for instrument cleaning.

• Drinking fountain bubblers shall not be specified in Classrooms

• Pressalit type, telescoping orthopaedic sinks are required only in Junior School orthopaedic washrooms. Middle Schools shall be a standard, barrier-free, wall hung lavatory.

• Devro "baby bowl" water closets shall not be specified. Standard size water closets to be specified for Kindergartens.

• Showers shall be specified only for the Orthopaedic Washrooms. Instructors Washrooms adjacent the Multipurpose Room shall not be specified with a shower.

• Water Matrix infrared urinal control shall be specified for all multiple urinal installations.

Connections to Other Sections: • Specify air, water and waste connections required for equipment of Owner

or other Sections. Plumbing: • Specify water connections to all equipment requiring same. Install the

shut-off valve, strainer, solenoid, and OWRC approved backflow preventer as required for these connections.



• Specify drain piping from all equipment requiring same such as pumps, ventilating apparatus and system drains, to the floor drains provided by the Plumbing Contractor. In no case will drains from equipment, relief valves, overflows, or systems be permitted to spill onto the floors or release into the space.

Water Feed Pressure Regulator Systems: • Specify as part of each system water feed regulator, a 1" (25 mm)

diameter manual feed independent of pressure regulator for quick filling.

• Specify backflow preventer to meet plumbing regulations with upstream shut-off valve on each assembly.

C4.2 - Piping Products Specify Piping Materials Drainage, Waste, Vents and Rainwater Leaders, as follows: • Soil, Vent and Rainwater Leaders Not Buried 3" (80 mm) and Larger:

Class 4000 cast iron shall be certified to CSA B70-M91 -mechanical joint.

• Drainage Vents and Wastes 2-1/2" (65 mm) and Smaller: Class 4000 cast iron shall be certified to CAN/CSA B70-M91 - mechanical joint. Drainage copper pipe DWV shall comply with ASTM B306 - solder joints.

• All Buried Drainage Piping Within Building: PVC pipe shall be certified to CAN/CSA B181.2 and B182.2. Plastic pipe shall have a pipe stiffness equal or greater than 46 psi (320 kPa).

C4.3 - Piping Installation • Specify all excavation, backfilling and bedding for all buried piping.

• Specify provision of a minimum 4" (100 mm) thick granular 'A' bedding

underneath drain.



• Backfill shall be granular compacted to 95% modified Proctor.

• Specify shut-off valves on water piping leading to each battery or group of two (2) or more fixtures. Each washroom shall be considered as a group and be valved as a unit, unless valved in two (2) or more groups. Locate for easy operation through suspended ceilings and access doors.

• Specify 1/2" (13 mm) lock-shield brass hose cocks at base of each water riser, on branch mains and run-outs, and at low points. Install sufficient valves to ensure complete draining of all water piping.

For above ground pipe hanging installations see C7 Pipe Grading: • Specify drains and waste piping to grade down in direction of flow as

follows: Up to and including 3" (80 mm) size - 1/4"/ft. (1:50). 4" (100 mm) and larger - 1/8"/ft. (1:100).

• Grade vent piping up from fixtures so it is self draining. Expansion Provisions: • Specify piping to allow for expansion and contraction complete with

swing joints, expansion loops, and anchors as necessary. Sanitary Drainage System: • Specify a sanitary drainage system complete to all fixtures, floor and hub

drains shown, complete with cleanouts in every change of direction.

• All floor drains to be primed.

• Drawings to indicate piping to terminate at 3'-0" (900 mm) outside the building. Co-ordinate locations and elevations with Site Services Engineer.

Storm Drainage System: • Specify a storm drainage system complete with cleanouts in every change

of direction.



• Drawings to indicate piping to terminate at 3'-0" (900 mm) outside building.

• Co-ordinate locations and elevations with Site Services Engineer. Refer to C3 - Site Services

Tests: • Specify ball test drains to Ontario Building Code (Chapter 7).

• Specify final air test drains, waste and vent piping to Ontario Building

Code (Chapter 7) and smoke test to local authorities request.

• Specify pressure test water piping with 150 psi (1034 kPa) cold water for not less than four (4) hours without decrease in pressure.

Underground Video Inspection: • The engineer shall include in the specification for the services of a

qualified video production company specializing in pipe inspection to video inspect underground storm and sanitary piping. Video production company shall co-ordinate with the Plumbing Contractor to inspect 6" (150 mm) diameter and larger underground pipes prior to backfilling and again after completed installation of sewer systems. The Inspection Company shall inspect the pipe by television camera and submit to the Consultant one (1) video cassette (VHS format) and descriptive booklet. Specify the video and booklet to indicate the following:

• Start and stop points using tender set drawing designations.

• Type of pipe installed

• Direction of camera travel (compass heading)

• Chainage (see tender set site plan for metric/imperial designation)

• Slope of pipe in percentage. Pipework Sterilization: • Specify for the Chlorination of domestic hot water, cold water, tempered

water and hot water recirculation system before placing into service to local municipality requirements. Note: This applies to piping 50 mm and larger.



• Request a copy of the Test Certificate for the chlorination to be submitted to the Consultant and inserted in the Maintenance Manual.

C4.4 - Plumbing Accessories Specify the following roof drains, as listed below: • Standard roof drains shall be cast iron body complete with large sump,

roof membrane waterproof flange, under-deck clamp, sump extension, roof sump receiver, aluminum or cast iron dome strainer and vandal-proof secured dome. Note: Use flow control roof drains as required based on Storm Water Management Calculations.

Specify the following floor drains, as listed below: • In finished areas, floor drains shall be cast iron body with 5" (127 mm)

nickel bronze strainer, and trap primer connection.

• In Boiler Rooms and Mechanical Rooms, floor drains shall be cast iron body with 8" (200 mm) dura-coated secured grate, levelling frame, clamp collar and trap prime connection.

• Hub drains shall be installed next to equipment where only one (1) pipe has to relieve to drain and shall be cast iron body with 4" (100 mm) lacquered cast iron funnel and trap primer connection.

• Funnel floor drains shall be installed next to equipment where more than one (1) pipe has to relieve to drain and shall be cast iron body with 4" x 8" (100 mm x 200 mm) lacquered cast iron funnel and trap primer connection.

Hose Bibbs: • Specify outside hose bibbs to be loose key, non-freeze wall hydrants for

garden hose use, complete with vacuum breaker. • No by-pass allowed on Backflow preventers. Backflow Preventers: • Specify a backflow preventer, where required by Code, on potable water

connections to equipment. For each backflow assembly specify a by-pass assembly complete with isolation valve and pipe, size equal to assembly.

• Protect potable water distribution system against contamination due to



backflow to CAN/CSA-B64 Series-01 (latest edition) Standards. Shock Absorbers: • At each group of fixtures specify a shock absorber. For shock absorbers

concealed in walls specify access door for servicing.

C4.5 - Plumbing Fixtures - Board Standard The following plumbing fixtures shall be specified for all Junior, Middle and JK-8 schools. Refer to Architectural Design Guidelines for quantity and location requirements. Sinks: [S-1] General - Basin (Two Handle Faucet, 203 mm - 4" C.C. - Wall

Mounted) • Basin: American Standard Lucerne Model 0355 012 OR Eljer OR Crane

complete with wall carrier

• Faucet: Delta Commercial Model 21T131, 102 mm (4"), two handle, cast brass centre-set, polished chrome plated finish, Tuf-Teck compression structures, 90% flow with first 1/4 turn of operation, positive shutoff even in poor water conditions, metal hold-down package, 4" Cast Centre-set Less Pop-up (no pop-up hole) - 2 hole installation, Outlet#: 3, VR Aerator-1.5 USGPM (5.68 L/min), Vandal Resistant(VR) Handle#: 1, VR Five Flute Handles-Metal-Colour indexed-Vandal resistant(VR) screws. (Please note: no ceramic cartridges)

• Drainage: Delta Commercial Model 33T260 drain, 32 mm (1-1/4") size P.O. plug with overflow holes, chrome plated, open grid, cast brass waste strainer OR Brasscraft OR OS&B #3700 (Heavy Gauge) alternate.

• Supplies: Delta Commercial Model 47T2312SD, two heavy duty, chrome plated finish, angle lavatory supplies, screw driver slot, flexible riser tubes and stainless steel wall flange OR Brasscraft. OR Dahl alternate

• 'P' Trap: Delta Commercial Model 33T311, 32 mm (1-1/4") size P trap, 369 mm (14.5") from centreline of inlet to outlet, with cleanout, polished chrome plated, cast brass body, adjustable OR Brasscraft OR OS&B #95 (Heavy Gauge) alternative



[S-2] General - Basin (Two Handle Faucet, 203 mm - 4" C.C. - Wall

Mounted - Barrier Free) • Basin: American Standard Lucerne Model 0355 012 OR Eljer OR Crane


• Faucet: Delta Commercial Model 21T133, 102 mm (4"), two handle, Cast Brass centre-set, polished chrome plated finish, Tuf-Teck compression structures, 90% flow with first 1/4 turn of operation, positive shutoff even in poor water conditions, metal hold-down package, 4" Cast centre-set Less Pop-up (no pop-up hole) - 2-hole installation, Outlet#: 3 - VR Aerator-1.5 USGPM (5.68 L/min) - Vandal Resistant (VR), Handle#: 3 - VR 76 mm (3") Hooded Lever Handles- ADA Compliant-Metal-Colour indexed-Vandal Resistant (VR) screws (Please note: no ceramic cartridges)

• Drainage: Delta Commercial Model 33T290 drain, 32 mm (1-1/4") size P.O. plug with overflow holes, chrome plated, open grid, cast brass waste strainer OR Brasscraft OR OS&B 3700WC (Heavy Gauge) alternate.

• Supplies: Delta Commercial Model 47T2512SD, Pair of heavy pattern, chrome plated finish, angle lavatory supplies, lockshield, screw driver slot, stuffing box cartridge, 10 mm (3/8") IPS brass inlet supply nipple, 9.5 mm (3/8") OD x 305 mm (12") long flexible braided stainless steel risers and wall flange OR Brasscraft OR Dahl alternate.

• "P" Trap: Delta Commercial Model 33T311, 32 mm (1-1/4") size P trap, 369 mm (14.5") from centreline of inlet to outlet, with cleanout, polished chrome plated, cast brass body, adjustable OR Brasscraft OR OS&B #95 (Heavy Gauge) alternate

[S-3] Kindergarten - Basin (Single Handle Faucet, Deck Mounted) • Basin: American Standard Lucerne Model 0356 421 OR Eljer OR Crane


• Faucet: Delta Commercial Model 22C631, 102 mm (4"), single handle, Cast Brass centre-set, polished chrome plated finish, Tuf-Teck compression structures, positive shutoff even in poor water conditions, metal hold-down package, Outlet#: 3 - VR Aerator-1.5 USGPM (5.68 L/min) - Vandal Resistant (VR), Handle#: 1 - VR 90 mm (3.5") Hooded Lever Handle - ADA Compliant- indexed-Vandal Resistant (VR) screws (Please note: no ceramic cartridges)



• Drainage: Delta Commercial Model 33T260 drain, 32 mm (1-1/4") size P.O. plug with overflow holes, chrome plated, open grid, cast brass waste strainer OR Brasscraft OR OS&B #3700 (Heavy Gauge) alternate.

• Supplies: Delta Commercial Model 47T2312SD, two heavy duty, chrome plated finish, angle lavatory supplies, screw driver slot, flexible riser tubes and stainless steel wall flange OR Brasscraft OR Dahl alternate.


[S-4] Hands Free - Basin (203 mm - 4" C.C. - Wall Mounted - Barrier

Free): • Basin: American Standard Murro Model 0954 000 w/ 0059 020 shroud

OR Eljer OR Crane

• Faucet: Delta Commercial Model 591T0268, Hard Wire, 102 mm (4") electronic faucet, Cast one-piece body, Polished chrome plated trim, Serviceable filter screen upstream of solenoid valve, Metal hold-down package, Spout#: 2 - 4" Cast Lavatory Faucet, Outlet#: 6 - Vandal Resistant 1.0 USGPM (3.8L/min) Flow Control Non-Aerating Outlet, Factory assembled in Recessed mounting 250 mm (10") metal box with stainless steel cover - includes thermostatic mixing valve Transformer Delta Commercial Model RP3250


• "P" Trap Delta Commercial Model 33T311, 32 mm (1-1/4") size P trap, 369 mm (14.5") from centreline of inlet to outlet, with cleanout, polished chrome plated, cast brass body, adjustable OR Brasscraft OR OS&B #95 (Heavy Gauge) alternate.

[S-5] Basin (203 mm - 4" C.C. Goose Neck Faucet - Wall Mounted - Barrier Free)

• Basin: American Standard Murro Model 0954 000 w/ 0059 020 shroud

OR Eljer OR Crane complete with wall carrier



• Faucet: Delta Commercial Model 3000T3438, Infrared electronic hand

wash system, Chrome plated one piece cast main body with integral sensor, field adjustable water resistant program controller, backlit indicator adjustment buttons. Unit retains adjusted settings in event of power failure, Adjustable sensing distance 76 to 406 mm (3" to 16") factory set to 203 mm (8") based on Kodak grey card R27 90% reflective, 110 to 24 VAC Transformer required for hardwire models-NOT included-must be purchased separately, Spout: R5 - VR Gooseneck-6.0" radius-12.0" height (un-mounted)-rigid/swivel-Vandal resistant(VR).090" wall thickness, Outlet#: 3 - Vandal Resistant 2.2 USGPM (8.3L/min) Flow control Aerator, 3 hole 4" deck mount gooseneck spout with integral sensor in base (forged coverplate), Factory assembled in Recessed mounting 250 mm (10") metal box with stainless steel cover - includes THERMOSTATIC mixing valve

• Transformer: Delta Commercial Model RP3250



[S-6] Hands Free - Basin (203 mm - 4" C.C. Goose Neck Faucet - Counter

Mounted) • Basin: American Standard Aqualyn Model 0476 028 OR Eljer OR Crane


wash system, chrome plated one piece cast main body with integral sensor. Field adjustable water resistant program controller. Adjustable sensing distance 76 to 406 mm (3" to 16") factory set to 203 mm (8") based on Kodak grey card R27 90% reflective, 110 to 24 VAC Transformer required for hardwire models-NOT included-must be purchased separately, Spout: R5 - VR Gooseneck - 6.0" radius - 12.0" height (un-mounted) - rigid/swivel - Vandal resistant (VR) .090" wall thickness, Outlet#: 3 - Vandal Resistant 2.2 USGPM (8.3L/min) Flow Control Aerator, 3-hole 4" deck mount gooseneck spout with integral sensor in base (forged coverplate). Factory assembled in recessed mounting 250 mm (10") metal box with stainless steel cover - includes



THERMOSTATIC mixing valve. • Transformer: Delta Commercial Model 060704A

• Power: 15A, 120V, 1 phase, power outlets CCT#N-67 for electronic

faucets. 15A, 1 pole GFI breaker in electrical panel, as required.

• Drainage: Delta Commercial Model 33T260 drain, 32 mm (1-1/4") size P.O. plug with overflow holes, chrome plated, open grid, cast brass waste strainer. Delta Commercial Model 33T290 if offset required OR Brasscraft OR OS&B 3700 (Heavy Gauge) alternate.

• "P" Trap Delta Commercial Model 33T311, 32 mm (1-1/4") size P trap, 369 mm (14.5") from centreline of inlet to outlet, with cleanout, polished chrome plated, cast brass body, adjustable OR Brasscraft OR OS&B #95 (Heavy Gauge) alternate

[S-7] General - Basin (203 mm - 4" C.C. Goose Neck Faucet - Counter


Faucet Delta Commercial Model 27T4833-LS, Cast Deck mount LESS pop-up, 4" Deck Faucet, 102 mm (4") center, deck mount faucet, two handle, Heavy duty cast brass body, polished chrome plated finish, TUF-TECK™ compression structures, 90% flow with first 1/4 turn of operation, positive shutoff even in poor water conditions, metal hold-down package, Spout#: 8 - VR Gooseneck - 4.5" radius-10.5" height (un-mounted) - rigid/swivel - Vandal resistant(VR) .090" wall thickness (R2), Outlet#: 3 - VR Aerator -2.2 USGPM (8.3 L/min)- Vandal Resistant (VR), Handle#: 3 - VR 76 mm (3") Hooded Lever Handles-ADA Compliant-Metal-Colour indexed-Vandal Resistant (VR) screws, 120 degrees limited swing of spout - swing position is field adjustable in 15 degree increments

• Drainage: Delta Commercial Model 33T260 drain, 32 mm (1-1/4") size P.O. plug with overflow holes, chrome plated, open grid, cast brass waste strainer. Delta Commercial Model 33T290 if offset required OR Brasscraft OR OS&B 3700 (Heavy Gauge) alternate




[S-8] Staff - Basin (Single Control Faucet, 203 mm - 4" C.C.- Wall

Mounted) • Basin: American Standard Lucerne Model 0355 012 OR Eljer OR Crane


wash system, chrome-plated one-piece, cast main body with integral sensor, field adjustable water resistant program controller, backlit indicator adjustment buttons. Unit retains adjusted settings in event of a power failure, adjustable sending distance 76 to 406 mm (3" to 15") factory set to 203 mm (8") based on Kodak grey card R27 90% reflective, 10 to 24 VAC transformer required for hardware models - not included to be purchased separately. Spout: R5 - VR gooseneck, 6.0" radius, 2.0" height (un-mounted) - rigid vandal-resistant (VR) 0.90" wall thickness, Outlet #: 3-Vandal Resistant, 2.2 USGPM (8.3L/min) flow control aerator, 3 holes 4" deck mounted gooseneck spout with integral sensor in base (forged coverplate), factory assembled in recessed counting 250 mm (10") metal box with stainless steel cover - includes thermostatic mixing valve.

• Transformer: Delta Commercial Model 060704A

• Power: 15A, 120V, 1 phase, power outlets CCT#N-67 for electronic faucets. 15A, 1 pole GFI breaker in electrical panel, as required.

• Drainage: Delta Commercial Model 33T260 drain, 32 mm (1-1/4") size P.O. plug with overflow holes, chrome plated, open grid, cast brass waste strainer OR Brasscraft OR OS&B 3700 (Heavy Gauge) alternate.


[S-9] Staff - Basin (Single Control Faucet, 203 mm - 4" C.C. - Counter





wash system, chrome-plated one-piece, cast main body with integral sensor, field adjustable water resistant program controller, backlit indicator adjustment buttons. Unit retains adjusted settings in event of a power failure, adjustable sending distance 76 to 406 mm (3" to 15") factory set to 203 mm (8") based on Kodak grey card R27 90% reflective, 10 to 24 VAC transformer required for hardware models - not included to be purchased separately. Spout: R5 - VR gooseneck, 6.0" radius, 2.0" height (un-mounted) - rigid vandal-resistant (VR) 0.90" wall thickness, Outlet #: 3-Vandal Resistant, 2.2 USGPM (8.3L/min) flow control aerator, 3 holes 4" deck mounted gooseneck spout with integral sensor in base (forged coverplate), factory assembled in recessed counting 250 mm (10") metal box with stainless steel cover - includes thermostatic mixing valve.

• Transformer: Delta Commercial Model 060704A

• Power: 15A, 120V, 1 phase, power outlets CCT#N-67 for electronic faucets. 15A, 1 pole GFI breaker in electrical panel, as required.

• Drainage: Delta Commercial Model 33T260 drain, 32 mm (1-1/4") size P.O. plug with overflow holes, chrome plated, open grid, cast brass waste strainer OR Brasscraft OR OS&B 3700 (Heavy Gauge) alternate.


[S-10] Stainless Steel Sink (Single Handle Faucet - One Compartment): • Sink: Kindred Model LBS6808-1: 20 gauge, type 302, 18-8 stainless

steel (3 hole) OR AMI alternate

• Faucet: Delta Commercial Model 100-WFELHHDF, center deck mount faucet, single handle, cast brass body, polished chrome plated finish, TUF-TECK compression structures, positive shutoff even in poor water conditions, Spout#: 250 mm (10"), Outlet#: - VR Aerator - 2.2 USGPM (8.3 L/min)- Vandal Resistant (VR), Handle#: - VR 76 mm (3") Lever Handle - ADA Compliant - Vandal Resistant (VR) screws, 120 degrees limited swing of spout - swing position is field adjustable in 15 degree increments (Please note: no ceramic cartridges). Use Delta Model 400 for faucet with pullout spray as required OR Model 100-WF for single lever less spray.



• Drainage: Delta Commercial Model 33T360, 38 mm (1-1/2") size cast "P"

trap 300 mm (11.8") long with cleanout plug OR Brasscraft OR OS&B (Heavy Gauge) alternate.

• Supplies: Delta Commercial OR Brasscraft Manufacturing OR Dahl alternate

[S-11] Stainless Steel Sink - Kindergarten (Single Handle - One

Compartment): • Sink: Kindred Model LBS 6808P - 1: 20 gauge, type 302, 18-8 stainless

steel (2-hole) OR AMI alternate • Faucet: Delta Commercial Model 27T4933-LS, Cast Deck mount LESS

pop-up, 200 mm (8") center, deck mount faucet, single handle, heavy duty cast brass body, polished chrome plated finish, TUF-TECK™ compression structures, positive shutoff even in poor water conditions, metal hold-down package, Spout#: 250 mm (10"), Outlet - VR Aerator -2.2 USGPM (8.3 L/min) - Vandal Resistant (VR), Handle - VR 76 mm (3") Lever Handle - Vandal Resistant(VR) screws, 120 degrees limited swing of spout - swing position is field adjustable in 15 degree increments (Please note: no ceramic cartridges).

• Mixing Valve: Delta Commercial Model 060434A OR Honeywell OR Powers alternate

• Drainage: Delta Commercial Model 33T360, 38 mm (1-1/2") size cast "P" trap 300 mm (11.8") long with cleanout plug OR Brasscraft OR Dahl alternate.


[S-12] Stainless Steel Sink (8" C.C., Two Handle - Two Compartment): • Sink: Kindred Model LBD 6808-1: 20 gauge, type 302, 18-8 stainless

steel (3-hole) OR AMI alternate



• Faucet: Delta Commercial Model 26T3933-LS, 203 mm (8") center deck

mount faucet, two handle, cast brass body, polished chrome plated finish, TUF-TECK compression structures, 90% flow with first 1/4 turn of operation, positive shutoff even in poor water conditions, Spout#: 9 - VR gooseneck - 152 mm (6.0") radius - 764 (10.4") height (un-mounted) -rigid/swivel - Vandal resistant(VR).090" wall thickness - (R4), Outlet#: 3 - VR Aerator - 2.2 USGPM (8.3 L/min) - Vandal Resistant(VR), Handle#: 3 - VR 76 mm (3") Hooded Lever Handles-ADA Compliant-Metal-Colour indexed-Vandal Resistant (VR) screws, 120 degrees limited swing of spout - swing position is field adjustable in 15 degree increments (Please note: no ceramic cartridges). Use Delta Model 470 for faucet with pullout spray as required OR Model 150-WF for single lever less spray.

• Drainage: Delta Commercial Model 33T360, 38 mm (1-1/2") size cast "P" trap 300 mm (11.8") long with cleanout plug OR Brasscraft OR OS&B 3700 (Heavy Gauge) alternate.


[S-13] Stainless Steel Sink - Laboratory (Single Hole, Two Handle - Single

Compartment) • Sink: Kindred Model LBD 6808P-1:18 gauge, type 316, 18-8 (Single

Hole) OR AMI alternate • Faucet: Delta Commercial Model 25C3937-LS, Cast Brass single shank

mixing faucet, polished chrome plated finish, CER-TECK™ 1/4 turn ceramic structures, Metal hold-down package, Anti-rotation, body mounted locking pins, Spout#: 9 - VR Gooseneck - 152 mm (6.0") radius -764 (10.4") height (un-mounted) - rigid/swivel - Vandal resistant(VR) .090" wall thickness - (R4), Outlet#: 3 - VR Aerator-2.2 USGPM (8.3 L/min) - Vandal Resistant(VR), Handle#: 7 - VR 63.5 mm (2.5") Balanced Lever Handles - ADA compliant - Metal - Colour Indexed - Vandal Resistant (VR) screws, 120 degrees limited swing of spout - swing position is field adjustable in 15 degree increments





[S-14] Lavatory • Bowl: American Standards Lucerne 0356-421 size 20" x 18" (500 mm x

450 mm) - white (equal to Crane White)

• Faucet: Delta Commercial 22C631

• Tailpiece: GL-7723.0180

• Drain: Telescopic chrome plated sleeve

• Trap: Buried below finished floor

• Supplies: Modified chrome plated lockshield angle valve complete with 24" (600 mm) stainless steel flexible risers.

• Support: "Pressalit" basin bracket R4360

• Mixing Valve: Powers Hydroguard Series 480

• "Pressalit" system supplied by Special Access Plumbing, Kitchener (519) 578-5693

[S-15] Stainless Steel Sink • Bowl: Aristaline SL2424-C

• Bowl Size: 600 mm x 600 mm x 350 mm I.D. (24" x 24" x 14")

• Trap: "P" chrome plated

• Faucet: Chicago Faucet No. 445-DJ13 complete with Chicago Faucet No.

13 faucet; 1200 mm (48") hose No. 83; No. 81 rinse valve and No. 850 wall hook

[S-16] Stainless Steel Sink – Barrier Free Counter Mount (8" C.C., Two Handle - One Compartment)

• Sink: Kindred Model ALBS 6805-1: 20 gauge, type 302, 18-8 stainless

steel (3-hole) OR AMI alternate

• Faucet: Delta Commercial Model 26T3933-LS, 203 mm (8") center deck mount faucet, two handle, cast brass body, polished chrome plated finish,



TUF-TECK compression structures, 90% flow with first 1/4 turn of operation, positive shutoff even in poor water conditions, Spout#: 9 - VR gooseneck - 152 mm (6.0") radius - 764 (10.4") height (un-mounted) -rigid/swivel - Vandal resistant(VR).090" wall thickness - (R4), Outlet#: 3 - VR Aerator - 2.2 USGPM (8.3 L/min) - Vandal Resistant(VR), Handle#: 3 - VR 76 mm (3") Hooded Lever Handles-ADA Compliant-Metal-Colour indexed-Vandal Resistant (VR) screws, 120 degrees limited swing of spout - swing position is field adjustable in 15 degree increments (Please note: no ceramic cartridges). Use Delta Model 470 for faucet with pullout spray as required OR Model 150-WF for single lever less spray.

• Mixing Valve: Delta Commercial Model R2970-MIX OR Honeywell OR Powers alternate

• Drainage: 38 mm (1-1/2") diameter offset waste, "P" trap complete with cleanout plug. Exposed pipe to be polished chrome plated and installed tight to underside of sink. Trap to be installed tight alongside wall. Brasscraft or heavy duty OS&B alternate.

• Supplies: Delta Commercial heavy duty type, chrome plated, angle supplies, screw driver slot, rigid riser tubes and stainless steel wall flange OR Brasscraft Manufacturing OR Dahl alternate.

[WF-1] General Use - Alternative (Tri-Lav - 3-Station - ADA Compliant): • Provide and install Corterra™ Tri-Lav Washfountain (specify model

number and options). Bowl, spray head and pedestal side panels to be constructed of Corterra™ cast polyester resin (with aluminum trihydrate and other fillers) and shall conform to ANSI Z124.3 and Z124.6 (specify colour). Unit with 860 mm (34") standard height rim to conform to ANSI, UFAS and ADA accessibility standards. Provide pressure balancing mixing valve with check stops and strainers in hot and cold supply and field set water temperature at 105 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide grid strainer and waste tailpiece. Operation (specify): Provide individual solenoid valves activated by infrared sensors with plug-in transformer. Spray nozzles shall be vandal-resistant with 0.5 GPM flow controls OR Bradley alternate.

[WF-2] General Use - Alternative (Quad-Lav - 4 Station - ADA Compliant): • Provide and install Corterra™ Quad-Lav Washfountain (specify model

number and options). Bowl, spray head and pedestal side panels to be constructed of Corterra™ cast polyester resin (with aluminum trihydrate and other fillers) and shall conform to ANSI Z124.3 and Z124.6 (specify



colour). Unit with 860 mm (34") standard height rim to conform to ANSI, UFAS and ADA accessibility standards. Provide pressure balancing mixing valve with check stops and strainers in hot and cold supply and field set water temperature at 105 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide grid strainer and waste tailpiece. Operation (specify): Provide individual solenoid valves activated by infrared sensors with plug-in transformer. Spray nozzles shall be vandal-resistant with 0.5 GPM flow controls OR Bradley alternate.

[DF-1] Drinking Fountain • Manufacturer: Haws 1105 complete with back panel

• Supply: 13 mm (1/2") IPS

• Drain: 32 mm (1-1/4") NPT

• Back Panel: BP3

• Mounting Plate: 6700 [DF-2] Drinking Fountain • Manufacturer: Haws 1109FR • Supply: 13 mm (1/2") IPS

• Drain: 32 mm (1-1/4") NPT

• Back Panel: BP3

• Mounting Plate: 6700 [JS-1] Service Sink • Sink: Stern Williams EB-70 complete with backsplash, drain and gasket

OR Acorn alternate TRH-323206

• Faucet: Delta Commercial Model 28T8193, 203 mm (8") centres, two handle, heavy duty cast brass wall mount sink faucet, rough chrome plated finish, Tuf-Teck institutional structures, brass trim, colour indexed metal handles with vandal resistant screws, integral check stops, 203 mm (8") top brace spout, body mounted angle vacuum breaker, hose thread outlet with 1219 mm (48") hose and stainless steel hanger (Please note: polished finish, no ceramic cartridges)



Water Closets: [WC-1] Floor Mounted Bowl (Flush Valve): • Bowl: American Standard Madera Model 2243 015 (Top Spud) OR Eljer

OR Crane

• Flush Valve: Delta Commercial Model 81T201, quiet action, chloramine resistant, Teck exposed diaphragm flush valve, renewable seat, polished chrome plated finish, external water conserving flush volume adjustment, vandal resistant cover, metal "non hold open" handle. 25 mm (1") FIP/copper sweat inlet adapter angle check stop with protecting cap, adjustable 121 mm (4-3/4") plus or minus 11 mm (7/16") inlet/valve outlet centres, vacuum breaker, 38 mm (1-1/2") dia. cover tube and wall flange, spud flange and concealed spud nut OR Powers Crane alternate. (Please note: volume must be adjustable)

• Seat: Bemis/Olsonite 1955-C (White) OR Centoco [WC-2] Floor Mounted Bowl - Handicap Accessible (Flush Valve): • Bowl: American Standard Madera Model 2305 100 (Top Spud) OR Eljer

OR Crane

• Flush Valve: Delta Commercial Model 81T201-5, quiet action, Teck exposed diaphragm flush valve, renewable seat, polished chrome plated finish, external water conserving flush volume adjustment, vandal resistant cover, metal "non-hold-open" handle. 25 mm (1") FIP/copper sweat inlet adapter angle check stop with protecting cap, adjustable 121 mm (4-3/4") plus or minus 11 mm (7/16") inlet/valve outlet centres, vacuum breaker, 38 mm (1-1/2") dia. cover tube and wall flange, spud flange and concealed spud nut. Flush valve supplied complete with centre cover bumper. (Please note: volume must be adjustable)

• Seat: Bemis/Olsonite 1950SS (White) OR Centoco Urinals: [U-1] Urinal (Wall Mounted - Flush Valve): • Urinal: American Standard Trimbrook Model 6561 017 (Top Spud) OR

Eljer OR Crane



• Flush Valve: Delta Commercial Model 81T231, Quiet action, Teck® exposed diaphragm flush valve, For flushing urinals with 19 mm (3/4") top spud, maximum 330 mm (13") from centreline of valve inlet to top of urinal, except -1 trap seal models which are maximum 315 mm (12.4"), external water conserving flush volume adjustment, polished chrome plated finish, vandal resistant cover screw, metal "non-hold-open" ADA Compliant oscillating handle, 1" FIP / 19 mm (3/4") Copper sweat inlet adaptor, adjustable 121 mm (4-3/4") plus or minus 11 mm (7/16") inlet/valve outlet centres, vacuum breaker, cover tube and wall flange, renewable seat, *Chloramine resistant diaphragm attached to guide with forged metal retainer, spud flange and concealed spud nut, pressure loss check angle stop with protecting cap, Factory Set For 2.7 Litre (0.70 US GAL.) Flush-Field Adjustable (Please note: volume must be adjustable).

• Note for installations of two (2) or more urinals, flush valves shall be deleted and the Water Matrix urinal control shall be specified.

Showers: [SHWR-1] Barrier Free - Shower: • Delta Commercial Model 11T5153-A005, HEAVY DUTY concealed in-

wall single lever pressure balancing shower control valve, requires 54 mm (2-1/8") wall cavity, back to back installation capability, one piece forged body, Monitor with Scald-Guard valve. Maintains a balanced pressure of hot and cold water even when a valve is turned on or off elsewhere in the system, no volume control-temperature only controlled with handle, field adjustable to limit handle rotation into hot water zone, 120 degree maximum handle rotation, all parts shall be replaceable from the front of the valve, integral stops and checks, polished chrome plated finish, inlets/outlets 13 mm (1/2") FIP or 13 mm (1/2") copper sweat (with adaptors supplied), Single Shower Unit Only, Handle#: 3 - Vandal Resistant Metal Lever Handle-ADA compliant-57 mm (2.24"), Hand shower with 610 mm (24") combination stainless steel slide/grab bar with ADA compliant slide mechanism supplied unless optional 900 mm (36") slide/grab bar selected, fixed spray, push button on-off control (not a positive shut-off), 9.5L/min at 551 kPa (2.5 USgpm at 80psi), 1778 mm (70") long white vinyl hose supplied unless optional brass hose selected, vacuum breaker (ASSE), A005 - 914 mm (36") combination stainless steel slide/grab bar with ADA compliant slide mechanism

[SHWR-2] General - Shower Valve: • Delta Commercial Model 11T5163, HEAVY DUTY concealed in-wall

single lever pressure balancing shower control valve, requires 54 mm



(2-1/8") wall cavity, back to back installation capability, one-piece forged body, Monitor with Scald-Guard valve. Maintains a balanced pressure of hot and cold water even when a valve is turned on or off elsewhere in the system, no volume control-temperature only controlled with handle, field adjustable to limit handle rotation into hot water zone, 120 degree maximum handle rotation, all parts shall be replaceable from the front of the valve, integral stops and checks, polished chrome plated finish, inlets/outlets 13 mm (1/2") FIP or 13 mm (1/2") copper sweat (with adaptors supplied), Single Shower Unit Only, Handle#: 3 - Vandal Resistant Metal Lever Handle - ADA compliant - 57 mm (2.24"), Cast Vandal Resistant Fixed Spray Showerhead, 30° spray angle, 7.6L/min at 51 kPa (2.0 USgpm at 80psi), concealed brass mounting plate

Water Coolers: Wall Mounted Bi-level Water Cooler: • Haws Model 1108 "Hi Lo" design, rectangular bowls, VR bottom plates Emergency Equipment: [EW-1] Eye Wash - Wall Mounted: • Haws Model 7260BT wall-mounted eyewash features a round 280 mm

(11") green ABS plastic receptor, aluminum wall bracket, and twin Soft-Flo ABS plastic anti-surge eyewash heads. Model is supplied with a waste tailpiece and trap.


• Waste: 38 mm (1-1/2") IPS


[EW-2] Laboratory Equipment - Hose and Spray Unit: • Haws Model 8905 wall-mounted eye/face and body spray features twin

Feather-Flo® ABS plastic eye/face wash heads positioned at 45 degrees, stay-open squeeze lever valve, 3658 mm (12-foot) yellow recoil hose and wall mounting bracket with grabber clips.




[EW-3] Laboratory Equipment - Hose and Spray Unit: • Haws Model 8901B wall mounted eye/face and body spray features a

Feather-Flo® ABS plastic eye/face wash head, stay-open squeeze lever valve, eight-foot hose and wall-mounting bracket.

• Supply: 13 mm (1/2") IPS.

• Unit complete with Model SP212 is a rough chrome-plated brass vacuum breaker, 9.5 mm (3/8") IPS.

[EW-4] Laboratory Equipment - Hose and Spray Unit: • Haws Model 8903 counter-mounted eye/face and body spray features a

Feather-Flo® ABS plastic eye/face wash head, stay-open squeeze lever valve, eight-foot hose and a Noryl plastic deck flange that incorporates guiding key slot for proper positioning of spray.


[EW-5] Laboratory Equipment - Hose and Spray Unit: • Haws Model 8904 counter-mounted eye/face and body spray features twin

Feather-Flo® ABS plastic eye/face wash heads position at 45 degrees, stay-open squeeze lever valve, eight-foot hose and a Noryl plastic deck flange that incorporates guiding key slot for proper positioning of spray.

• Supply: 13 mm (1/2") IPS Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Under-counter Type: • Delta Commercial Model 060322A OR Powers OR Symmons alternate.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C5 - Sprinklers/Fire Protection Page 1 of 6

C5 - SPRINKLERS/FIRE PROTECTION C5.1 - General Notes • This part of the work shall be performed by a Contractor experienced in

this type of work. Insulation for all piping, ductwork and equipment shall be provided to reduce heat transfer, prevent condensation, afford protection for personnel and for a neat appearance.

• Fire protection systems shall be provided as required by NBC, OBC and shall be installed in accordance with NFPA, UL, ULC and FM Standards.

• All new schools and permanent additions to existing schools shall incorporate Sprinkler systems in compliance with the Ontario Building Code, Office of the Fire Marshal and any local authority having jurisdiction.

• Post indicating valves will be specified by the Site Services engineer. Ref: C3 - Site Services C5.2 - Description of Work Fire Protection work includes, but is not limited to, the following: • Wet pipe sprinkler systems • Fire Extinguishers Specify that the performance of work under this Section shall be in accordance with Local or District By-Laws and Regulations and the approval of the following: • Fire Department • Building Department



C5.3 - Sprinkler Guide Specifications C5.4 - Submittals Specify that the following information be requested from the Sprinkler Contractor: • Before commencing with the Sprinkler System installation, the Sprinkler

Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, Engineer-stamped 1/8" (1:100) scale working plans with 1/4" (1:50) sections and details and stamped copies of hydraulic calculations stamped "Reviewed by the Authorities and/or agencies having jurisdiction over the installation for approval." Sprinkler Contractor shall submit to the Architect and Consultant for review, approved and stamped drawings before commencing installation.

• Specify that the Sprinkler Contractor provide a letter from Electrical

Contractor confirming co-ordination of wiring for all equipment and devices.

• Submit Sprinkler shop drawings and hydraulic calculations to CGI/IAO for review.

C5.5 - Design Criteria • The systems shall be hydraulically calculated, designed and submitted to

approving agencies by the trade responsible for the installation to NFPA 13 standards. Occupancies for the various areas shall be indicated on the drawings.

• The system shall be designed with a minimum 5 psig safety factor to allow for future pressure reductions.

• The Sprinkler Contractor to flow test the nearest hydrant to confirm water supply conditions.

C5.6 - Fire Protection Equipment All equipment shall be UL, ULC and/or FM approved equipment Sprinkler Heads: • Sprinkler heads shall be specified to be upright, semi-recessed or

concealed, with standard or quick response bulb rated at 165 Deg. F (79 Deg. C) unless noted otherwise.

• Specify the use of high temperature heads at heaters to NFPA standards.



• Sprinkler heads in areas with finished ceilings shall be Viking Polyester, white colour, complete with recessed escutcheon (white colour).

• Sprinkler heads located in areas that have an 8'-0" (2440 mm) or less ceiling height, all Corridors, Washrooms, Stairs, Foyers, Lobby, Change Rooms, Vestibules, Closets and Shower Areas shall be specified as concealed sprinkler heads complete with white cover. Sprinkler heads in Gymnasium, Stage area and Mechanical Rooms shall be specified complete with guards.

• Specify a sprinkler cabinet containing sprinkler wrench and a minimum spare stock of twelve (12) sprinkler heads, plus an equal stock of each type of sprinkler head where ten or less of that type are used.

Pipe and Fittings: • Piping to be specified as ASTM-A-795 lightwall steel pipe, ASTM-A53

roll, grooved to Standard Roll Grooving Specification, complete with approved and listed mechanical couplings and fittings to NFPA standards. Victaulic couplings and fittings are acceptable. Schedule 40 pipe shall be used for threaded fittings.

• Other types of piping, specifically listed for sprinkler system are acceptable when installed per listing requirements and to manufacturers' installation instructions.

Siamese Connections: • Siamese connections shall be specified as double clapper, chrome plated

with caps, heavy duty chains and ball drip. Wall plate to read "Auto Sprinkler Fire Department Connection". Threads to be to local City standards.

Alarm Check Valve: • Alarm check valve shall specified be equal to models as required for wet

systems complete with low pressure and alarm switches, drain connection and pressure gauges.

Monitoring Switches: • All shut-off valves shall be specified to be complete with ULC approved

supervisory switches; each switch shall be separately annunciated, and be complete with two (2) sets of contacts.



Excess Pressure Pump FP-1: • Specify a ULC approved pump complete with pressure switch, check

valves, etc. Motor to be specified for automatic operation. C5.7 - Fire Booster Pump System If required, specify unit shall be packaged, skid mounted completely factory assembled and wired, and consist of the following components: • Pump casing shall be suitable for 1725 kPa [250 psi W.P.];

• Starter(s) with adjustable overload protection and with phase failure

protection;

• Control circuit transformer with fused secondary;

• Adjustable 0 to 7 minute "Off-Delay" time delay relay;

• Seven day time clock with minimum fifteen minute "ON" cycle;

• Test relay with system purge circuit;

• Four (4) "push-to-test" pilot lights to indicate low suction pressure (red), auto test circuit (blue), running light (green) and overload or phase failure (red);

• Terminal block for external connections;

• Skid mounted panelboard assembly with low suction pressure cut-out switch; system pressure cut-in switch; pressure gauge, suction pressure; pressure gauge, system pressure;

• A prefabricated discharge control piping circuit which shall be mounted directly on the pump discharge piping and contain a thermal bleed circuit, purge valve and flow switch;

• EEMAC 1 Type 3 enclosure control panel.

• Pump shall be UL, ULC and/or FM approved.

• Pump shall be connected to emergency power.



C5.8 - Tests Specify the following testing work to be performed by the Sprinkler Contractor: • Pressure test sprinkler piping with 200 psig (1380 kPa) cold water for not

less than four (4) hours without decrease in pressure.

• Perform tests on concealed piping before concealing in structure. Protect equipment and parts not capable of withstanding test pressure during tests.

• Make leaks tight while systems are still under test. If this is impossible, remove and re-fit defective parts. Caulking of threaded joints or welds will not be permitted.

• After leaks have been repaired, repeat tests as often as necessary ensure tightness of each system.

• Test jockey pump and controls in presence of local Fire Department and Consultant.

• The Contractor is to provide two (2) copies of testing data, reports and final acceptance from the representative of the local Fire Department and submit the results to the Consultant.

C5.9 - Identification Signs • Specify for each control valve, shut-off valve, drain valve and test valve to

be provided with a sign. Size of sign shall be 6" x 6" (150 mm x 150 mm) for automatic control valves and alarm valves and 2" x 6" (50 mm x 150 mm) for other valves. Inscription shall be in accordance with Canadian Underwriters' Association standards. Sign shall be made of enamelled steel with Fire Department "RED" enamel background, white enamel letters and shall be fastened in a workmanlike manner to the pipe or structure in the immediate vicinity of the valve identified.

C5.10 - Final Inspection • Specify that the Sprinkler Contractor shall arrange for the completed

installation to be inspected by the Municipal Fire Department. C5.11 - Fire Extinguishers • Specify the supply and installation fully charged, multi-purpose, dry

chemical fire extinguishers with a 2A-10BC rating complete with wall bracket. Fire extinguisher cylinder shall be complete with stainless steel finish.



• Specify that the fully recessed models shall be as above and mounted in a cabinet complete with a maximum 1/2" (15 mm) turn back flange.

Note: Recessed fire extinguishers shall be provided in all areas with the

exception of Mechanical/Electrical Rooms and other service rooms.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C6 - Heat Generation Page 1 of 4

C6 - HEAT GENERATION C6.1 - General Notes • The School Board Standard is to design heating plants with two (2)

boilers, each sized to approximately 70% of the building total heat loss. Include future Additions in the heat loss calculations.

• Boilers are to be installed in a dedicated room, separate from the Mechanical Room air handling units.

• Boilers are to be controlled on return water temperature. Specify that the return water temperature can be reset to below 120°F to take advantage of condensing boiler efficiency.

Piping arrangement for boiler is, as follows • Constant flow

• Standard primary piping complete with two (2) primary heating pumps

(one pump operational, the other standby)

• Sizing of heating system piping is to be based on a 20°F (11.1°C) drop across the system.

Consideration to be given to the following: • Variable flow pumping using variable frequency drives

• Increasing the temperature drop across the system to reduce pipe sizing

and pumping requirements. C6.2 - Description of Work The work includes, but is not limited to, the following: • Hot water heating boilers complete with pumps, piping, natural gas piping

and controls.



C6.3 - Board Standard Boiler Specification The following specification must be used, without exception. Heating Boilers: Building heating boilers shall be DeDietrich series GT- Budders A or Viessman for operation using a natural gas forced draft power burner. Boilers approved to ANSI Z21.13 CSA 4.9-2000 standards with minimum efficiency of 85.2%. Boilers shall be capable of operating on return water temperatures to 40 °C. Tempering of return water with supply water is NOT ACCEPTABLE. Boilers shall be constructed of cast iron sections manufactured in accordance with ASME requirements for low-pressure boilers and each section shall be permanently marked with the ASME symbol and the maximum allowable working pressures. The eutectic cast iron shall have a modulus of elasticity of 30% greater than other cast iron. Boilers and burners shall be ULC listed as a package, site approval not acceptable. Boiler and burner package must have proven field verified track record for a period of 3 years minimum. Boilers shall be of a (3) pass scotch type wetbase, wetbacks design with optimized fins and cast iron turbulators to permit greater heat transfer. The forced draft burner shall be capable of firing the boilers pressurized combustion chamber assuring proper draft and positive ventilation. The burner shall be mounted to swing open either left or right on hinged mounting plate. The boiler shall be complete with a drain tapping and drain valve. Boilers shall be complete with full-swing doors that give access to all flue ways and combustion areas for easy maintenance and cleaning without burner removal. The complete boiler including the bottom shall be insulated with a minimum thickness of four inches of reinforced fibreglass wool insulation, and shall be encased in a heavy gauge steel boiler jacket. This jacket shall be installed after system piping has been connected to the boiler section assembly. Jacket will have removable panels to allow access to the boiler as required. Water boiler trim shall include pressure gauge, temperature gauge, low water cut-off high limit control operating control, high fire control, and drain valve. An ASME approved pressure relief valve shall be furnished sized to exceed the boiler gross output capacity and shall be factory set to relieve pressure at 30 PSI.



The boiler/burner shall be pre-wired to provide the following operation: • Local - Remote switch on burner

• In Remote position burner shall be capable of being controlled from

BEMS.

• In Local position burner shall operate from stand-alone supplied controls. The burner shall be Fuel Master Model (Lo-Hi-Lo Modulation) with squirrel cage 3,450 rpm motor, and shall be factory tested and incorporated all necessary devices and controls to make a complete fuel burning system and bear the listing label of CSA. The burner shall be designed for natural gas and be of the forced-draft pressure-atomizing type with no CO present in the products of combustion. The burner shall be furnished with an integral motor-driven blower, stainless steel flame retention type combustion head and observation port, and a primary control, which utilizes a UV scanner. (Flame Rod) Acceptable alternate Burners are: • Powerflame • Weishaupt • Riello

Main gas pressure regulator, (vented to outside atmosphere, in accordance with local codes), approved automatically operated motorized safety gas shutoff valve, with proof of closure interlock switches, second automatically operated gas safety, manually operated gas shutoff valve located downstream of both automatic gas valves (to permit leakage testing of valves), test pressure tappings upstream and downstream of each valve and regulator, air damper with high-low control linkage. Boiler controls shall be housed in a factory pre-wired control cabinet. The cabinet shall house combustion Safeguard Control to provide prepurge, postpurge and burner sequencing, complete with flame rod. Panel shall include the following: • All panel wiring with colour-coded wire. • Motor starters with overload protection for blower motor. • On/off switch. • Low/auto switch. • Step down transformer for 120-volt output. With circuit fuse if power

supply is 3 phase. • Individual pilot lights with nameplates to indicate: "Power On", "Main

Fuel Valve On", and "Flame Failure".



• Electronic safety combustion controls shall be supplied to monitor pilot and main flame. The programming control shall be a Fireye, model MC120 or equivalent and will provide pre and post purge, trial for ignition, energize main fuel circuit, interrupted tupe pilot and sequence operation.

• Manual restart of each burner shall be necessary in the event of a shutdown due to flame failure.

Boiler: • DeDietrich GT- /Viessman • Input MBH • Output MBH • Voltage Burner: • Fuelmaster (or acceptable alternate Model) Installation: • Install boilers level and plumb on a concrete pad with bevelled edges.

• Arrange piping as to provide adequate clearance for service and operation. Pipe safety relief valves and drain valves to floor drain.

• Install thermometers and pressure gauges on supply and return piping no higher than 1800 mm above floor.

• Install relief valve sized to suit boiler input and located upstream of any shut-off valve.

• Conform to manufacturers installation instructions and piping schematic on drawings.

• Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for boiler venting requirements.

• Extend each gas pressure relief (full size) through roof and terminate with gooseneck and screen.

• Upon notification of completion of the installation, boiler manufacturer shall furnish the services of a field technician, to start the boiler and provide combustion tests over the operating range and issue report to the Consultant indicating system acceptance as installed.

• Arrange and pay for TSSA inspection for the boiler and gas piping system.

• Co-ordinate controls with Divisions 16 and 17.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C7 - Heating, Piping, Fittings Page 1 of 15

C7 - HEATING, PIPING, FITTINGS C7.1 - General Notes/Approach to Design • Heating systems shall be designed using a reverse return piping

arrangement.

• All new schools shall be designed using a system of perimeter wet heat.

• Heating units shall be wall-fin radiation or ceiling mounted radiant panels.

• The heating plant flow schematic shall consist of the following: Primary loop piping complete with two (2) primary loop base mounted heating pumps and a pressure differential by-pass valve. One primary loop pump shall be standby.

• Specify 100 mm (4 in) housekeeping pads under all boilers, fans, tanks, pumps, etc. Housekeeping pads to be complete with bevelled corners.

• Specify hot water force flow cabinet heaters for all entrance vestibules. Heaters shall be recessed wall type complete with integral thermostats. Ceiling mounted units are not acceptable.

• Hot water radiation in Classrooms, Staff Rooms and Administration areas shall be individual heating controls connected to the building energy management control system. Ref: Section 17 - Controls

• Hot water radiation in Washrooms, Storage Rooms and other ancillary areas shall be controlled by stand-alone, thermostatic control valves (i.e. Braukman valves). These units shall not be connected to the building energy management control system.

• Ensure that chemical cleaning and flushing of all heating piping and fittings is specified in the water treatment specification. Ref: Water Treatment Guide Spec

• Avoid low level wall mounted wall fin radiation in Kindergartens. If low level wall fins are used, specify that the fins are to be enclosed in a wire guard on the underside of the wall fin.



C7.2 - Description of Work • Specify a hot water heating systems with pumps, piping, radiation, fan coil

heating/air conditioning units, coils and controls.

• Specify gas piping to serve boilers and domestic water heater.

• Specify water treatment for hot water heating systems.

C7.3 - Guide Specifications C7.4 - Steel Piping & Fittings • Service: Hot water heating, vent, piping for mechanical devices such as

pump gauges, pot feeder, etc., overflow relief and unburied drain piping from equipment. Maximum temperature 250°F (120°C) and 60 psig (400 kPa).

• Piping: Continuous welded Schedule 40 ASTM A120 for screwed piping,

and ASTM-A53 for welding.

C7.5 - Copper Piping & Fittings • Service:

All domestic water piping. Hot water heating connections to copper piping on heating equipment (maximum length 12" [300 mm]). Drains, vents, connections to drain pans, trap seal primers and equipment.

• Piping:

Plain end type "L" hard drawn copper and shall be certified to ASTM B88 (above ground). Plain end type "K" soft drawn copper and shall be certified to ASTM B88 (underground).

• Fittings:

Solder end wrought copper. As an option, tee fittings may be eliminated by using the T-Drill system for branches 1/2" to 2" (15 mm to 50 mm) for maximum run pipe diameter to 4" (100 mm). All joints must be brazed to Copper Development Association Handbook specifications using B-cup series filler metal. Soft solder joints are not permitted. Brass or bronze pipe flanges and flange fittings shall conform to ANSI B16.24.



• Joints: All domestic hot, cold, tempered and recirculation potable water piping shall be joined using 95/5 solder containing no lead compounds (95% tin/ 5% antimony). Non-potable water piping shall be joined using a standard 50/50 tin/lead compound solder.

C7.6 - PVC Piping & Fittings • Service: Chemical feed systems.

• Piping:

PVC and CPVC Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 to CAN/CSA B137.3M that has been approved under Ontario Building Code Test No. CAN-4-S102 for flame spread and smoke development tests.

• Fittings: Fabricated from PVC compatible with the pipe material socket weld Type ASTM D2466. Only Schedule 80 pipe shall be threaded. Provide PVC unions and flanges at equipment connections.

• Joining: By cold welding with solvent based cements to ASTM D2564 and according to the manufacturer's installation instructions.

C7.7 - Gas Pipe & Fittings • Service: Gas

• Piping:

Schedule 40, ASTM-A-53 steel pipe and fittings, all to CAN1-B-149.1-M91 and Ontario Regulation 826-82.

• Exposed Joints: Up to 2" (50 mm) shall be screwed. 2-1/2" (65 mm) and larger shall be welded.

• Screwed Fittings: Malleable 150 psig (1035 kPa), unions malleable dart pattern.



C7.8 - Pipe Grading • Heating water piping is to run level. Domestic water piping is to grade to

low points. Branch piping to heating units below the main shall be off the bottom, and off the top to units above.

• Equipment drain piping to be graded down in the direction of flow 1" in 4'-0" (25 mm in 1200 mm).

• Gas Pipe shall be graded down to riser, 1" in 60'-0" (25 mm in 18300 mm). Dips at the bottom of the riser and at low points shall be complete with tee, nipple and cap. Extend gas service from gas meter to Mechanical Room and rooftop unit, as indicated on the drawings.

C7.9 - Piping Tests • Specify that tests be performed before application of pipe covering and

before pipe is concealed in structure.

• Specify testing of piping systems to the following pressures for four (4) hours without drop in pressure or as otherwise noted. Hot water heating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) Domestic water: Hydrostatically to 150 psig (1035 kPa) for one hour [OR] Air to 100 psig (690 kPa) for two hours

• Gas: Air to 50 psig (350 kPa) for twenty-four hours

C7.10 - Spring Isolators and Vibration Isolation • Specify that mechanical equipment and associated piping shall be isolated

from the building.

• Specify the provision of bases, supports and spring isolators to isolate the vibration and noise of mechanical equipment from the building structure.

C7.11 - Drain Valves • Specify 3/4" (20 mm) ball valves and hose ends at main low points to

drain each water type system, at pumps, coils, strainers and at each piece of equipment.



C7.12 - Gas Service Provisions • Specify that the Contractor make complete arrangements with local Gas

Company and pay all fees, inspections and charges (including TSSA) for the installation of a gas line from the street connection to the building, including the gas meter and meter protection, performed by or under the supervision of the local Gas Company.

• Specify the installation at each appliance and gas cock, a union, dirt leg

and shut-off cock, piped up completely.

• Specify that the complete installation is to meet the requirements of the Ontario Regulation 546/96 and CAN/CGA-B149.1-latest edition.

• Specify pipe roof supports at 8'-0" (2400 mm) O.C.

C7.13 - Piping Devices Specify Make-Up Water Feeders, as follows: • Install a Mueller, Watts or Armstrong 3/4" (20 mm) pressure reducing

valve only (no relief), with compression stop valve and strainer set at pressures indicated on the drawings (Mueller Model C-15400).

• Install on all cold water make-up feeders to mechanical equipment, an approved backflow preventer.

Specify Air Eliminator Unit, as follows: • Supply and install air eliminators of the size and type shown on the

drawing rated for 75 psig and 240°F (520 kPa and 115°C).

• Each unit is to be complete with automatic air vent and air separator design. Pipe up completely.

• Acceptable products: S. A. Armstrong Amtrol Sarco Taco



Specify Pump Suction and Discharge Valves, as follows: • Pump suction strainer and guide shall be cast iron body, outlet guide

vanes, fine mesh brass start-up strainer and removable stainless steel screen.

• Pump discharge valve shall be flo-trex combination check valve, balance valve and shut-off valve with positive spring-load seating, flanged cast iron body, bronze disc and seat, stainless steel stem and spring.

• Valves shall match Vertical In-Line Pump, manufacturer selected for project.

• Acceptable products: Bell & Gossett Taco Armstrong

Specify Flexible Hose, as follows: • Supply and install flexible hose, screwed 150 lb. (1035 kPa) design and

stainless steel hose (and braid).

• Flexible hose shall be type 'RW', not to exceed 12" (300 mm) in length.

• Base Bid: Flexonics Limited

C7.14 - Hot Water Heating Devices Specify Air Vents, as follows: • Automatic air vents shall be used only in exposed areas where they can be

obviously seen to be leaking. In concealed areas, ceiling spaces, etc., only manual vents shall be used. All automatic vents to have pet cock before vent.

• Air handling units and unit heaters shall have auto vents. High points in

the mains where air will accumulate shall be provided with a 3/4"Ø x 6" long (20 mmØ x 150 mm long) air chamber and an Armstrong No. 7 automatic air vent with overflow connector and isolating pet cock.



• Each bottom-fed convector, continuous convector, fan coil unit and cabinet heater shall have a manual air vent assembly consisting of a 3/4"Ø x 6" long (20 mmØ x 150 mm long) chamber and a flexible 1/4" (6 mm) air tube to a manual vent in the end panel or front face, or a rigid iron pipe to the outlet grille with a manual slot head screw.

Specify Bladder Type Expansion Tank, as follows: • Supply and install bladder-type expansion tanks complete with replaceable

heavy duty butyl diaphragm.

• Tanks shall be ASME rated 75 psig (518 kPa) and 240°F (115°C).

Specify Terminal Unit Valves, as follows: • All radiators, fan coils, convector and coil-type heating units shall have

shut-off valves on the supply branch at the unit.

• Drain Valves: All low points of heating units and system shall be specified with hose bibb type drains for draining system.

Specify Circuit Balancing Valves, as follows: • Supply and install for each air handling unit and heat recovery unit,

heating and cooling coil, each fan coil unit and where indicated on drawings, circuit balancing valves.

• Valve shall be installed in the return line from each coil. Specify Thermostatic Radiator Valves, as follows: • Supply and install at each piece of convector radiation, a thermostatic

temperature control valve equal to the following: Valve Body: Danfoss Model RA-2000-013G8020 complete with Union connection. Operator: Danfoss Model RA-2000-013G8202



C7.15 - Pumps Specify Horizontal In-Line Circulators, as follows; • Service:

125 psig (862 kPa) maximum pressure, 60 psig (414 kPa) W.P., 225°F (107°C) maximum temperature hot water and glycol heating Chilled water and domestic water circulation 1" to 3" (25 mm to 80 mm) size, 1/6 HP to 1.5 HP

• Fittings: Cast iron body with flanged inlet and outlet, bronze impeller with alloy steel shaft and copper sleeve.

• Motor: Pump mounted 1750 RPM, drip proof, resilient mount, sleeve bearing motor.

• Seal: Standard carbon seal brass trim to 225°F (107°C).

• Special Construction: Domestic water pumps shall have bronze body, bronze fitted construction.

• Acceptable products: Taco Armstrong Bell & Gossett

• Installation Instructions: Install as indicated by flow arrows. Support at flanges or near unions on outlets of unit. Install with bearing lubrication points accessible. Check rotation. Ensure that pump body does not support piping or equipment. Provide stanchions or hangers for this purpose. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions for details.

Specify Base-Mounted Centrifugal Pumps, as follows: • Service: 125 psig (862 kPa) maximum pressure, 250°F (121°C) maximum

temperature hot water and glycol heating and Chilled water systems 1" to 6" (25 mm to 150 mm) size, 1 HP to 30 HP.



• Fitting: Direct drive horizontal end suction centrifugal pump, cast iron casing, ASA flanged or screwed suction and discharge connections, pressure tappings, steel shaft and stainless steel or bronze shaft sleeve, oil lubricated ball bearings with sight glass, oil fill reservoir and bronze impeller with stainless steel cap.

• Motor: Standard horizontal EEMAC Class B induction motor 1725 (3500) RPM continuous duty, drip proof, ball bearing 50°F (10°C) rise connected to the pump with a silent flexible coupling with gear-type rubber insert with guard.

• Base: Common steel baseplate for pump and motor.

• Seal: John Crane self-lubricated mechanical seal.

• Acceptable Products: Taco S. A. Armstrong A. S. Leitch Darling Bell & Gossett

• Installation Instructions: Provide templates for anchor bolt placement. Furnish anchor bolts with sleeves. Place level, shim unit and grout. Align coupling. Check rotation prior to starting up. Check oil level and lubricate. Ensure that pump body does not support piping or equipment. Install a support leg to the floor or spring isolated base under the pipe riser. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions for details. Mount on a 4" (100 mm) concrete base and grout in place. Layout concrete base for General Division to install.

Specify Replacement Seals, as follows: • Supply and install in each of the circulating pumps and vertical in-line

pumps, a new set of mechanical seals. The new seals shall be installed after the cleaning and flushing operation but prior to the addition of the final chemical treatment.

• If the seals removed are in good condition, they are to be turned over to the Owner.



Specify Impeller Adjustment, as follows: • Include in the contract the amount necessary to have the pump supplier's

service representative visit site and machine down or replace impellers for circulating and vertical in-line pumps as requested by the Balancing Contractor.

C7.16 - Heating Units Specify Convectors, as follows: • The element shall be 1-1/4" (32 mm) copper tube 4-1/4" x 4-1/4" (108 mm

x 108 mm) aluminum fin .

• Supply and install all vents, valves and balancing valves.

• The enclosure shall be 20 gauge steel as designated on the drawings by height and type. The sections shall be of standard length with slip joints; no screws. The enclosure is to be complete with a compressible sealer strip extending the full length of the enclosure and shall be firmly supported at the top and bottom with duplex insulated brackets at each end and at 4'-0" (1220 mm) O.C. The duplex insulated brackets shall be fastened to the wall as outlined in General Requirements under "Inserts". The enclosure shall be run level. Each separate run of continuous convector shall have die formed end caps with rounded edges. Wall-to-wall installation shall stop 1" (25 mm) from each wall for easy removal of ends and enclosure.

• Supply and install a 14" (355 mm) flush filler piece blank without grille at one end of the enclosure. The enclosure and filler piece shipped to the job shall be longer than the enclosure length required. The Contractor is to job measure the filler piece and have it cut to length on a band saw in a local machine shop for a clean, smooth cut. Job cutting with a torch, nibbler, shears or similar piece of equipment is not acceptable. For access to control and hand valves, install field mounting access doors in enclosures as follows: 8" (200 mm) and 12" (300 mm) high enclosure: install 5" x 5" (130 mm x 130 mm) access door. 24" (600 mm) high enclosure: install 10" x 12" (250 mm x 300 mm) access door.

• Each convector is controlled by a thermostatic radiator valve, supplied and installed by Piping Contractor.



Specify Cabinet Heaters, as follows: • Each unit shall be complete with multi-speed motor with built-in overload

protection and plug disconnect, supply and return valves, air vents and integral thermostat.

Specify Unit Heaters and Projection Heaters, as follows: • Each unit shall be complete with a louvre fin diffuser and line voltage

thermostat with guard, gate valves, balance valves, and air vents. The bearings to the motor must have extended grease fittings so that the unit can be lubricated without undue difficulty and without dismantling the unit.

Specify Linear Radiant Panels, as follows: • Manufacturer shall submit complete 1:100 scale drawings showing layouts

and complete details of all areas where radiant panels are indicated. These drawings shall be co-ordinated with and interference shall be cleared with other trades.

• Shop drawings shall indicate the location of supply and return hook-ups in addition to interconnection details for each zone.

• Contractor shall refer to architectural reflected ceiling plans and room finish schedule on addition to mechanical drawings to determine location, quantity and finish of radiant panels.

• Refer to contract drawings for details and dimensions. Panels shall run continuously from wall to wall and specified widths are minimum allowable.

• The radiant ceiling extrusions shall consist of extruded aluminum with copper tubing of 0.504" (12.8 mm) I.D. mechanically attached to the aluminum face plate. The copper tube shall be held in place by an aluminum saddle which extends mote than half way around the diameter of the tube. A non-hardening heat conductive paste shall be placed between the copper tubing and the aluminum face plate. Panels shall weigh no more than 2.15 lb/ft5 (10.5 kg/m5) when operating. The use of adhesive and/or clips to attach the copper tube to the extrusion will not be acceptable.

• Panels shall be finished in the Manufacturer's white colour (or as selected by the Consultant). Complete with cross-channel braces, hanger wire and Airtex hold-down spring clip.



Specify Reheat Coils, as follows: • Supply and install all necessary gate valves and balance valves, vents and

all piping.

• Coils shall have copper tube, aluminum fins and 14-gauge steel casings with flanged sides for bolting to the ductwork. Holes shall be a minimum of 3" (80 mm) centres. Coils shall be connected to ductwork with flanged and gasketted connections for a tight seal. Coils shall be rated for 250 psig (1035 kPa).

C7.17 - Water Treatment - Board Standard Related Instructions: • Conform to General Requirements, Division 1 as if written here.

Scope of Work: • Engage one of the Water Treatment Companies listed below which qualify

in this work.

• Water Treatment Company shall perform all duties as outlined in this specification, including, but not limited to, the following: Selection and location of chemical feeding devices. Instructions and supervision of each chemical cleaning and flushing of entire heating system. Setting up and implementation of the permanent chemical programs for a period of twelve months from the date of start-up.

• Acceptable Water Treatment Companies: Magnus Chemical Ltd.

Pre-Operational Cleaning of Heating Water Systems: • Flush out systems after pressure test for a minimum of four (4) hours.

• Isolate fan coils, radiant panels and radiators from initial fill and flush.

• Fill and back flush hot water heating pipe and radiation to mains.



• Fill and thoroughly flush new pipe systems with a 2" (50 mm) diameter hose connected the domestic cold water system complete with isolation valve and backflow preventer. Upon completion of the flush out procedure, remove backflow preventer and cap pipe. Remove and clean strainers.

• After cleaning, circulate Neutral pH for a minimum of 72 hours. This should be a cold water cleaner and can be used at water temperatures 50°F to 150°F (10°C to 65°C). This formulation should be effective at removing protective oils, grease and sludge.

• At completion of a circulating period, system shall be drained and flushed with fresh water for a period of four (4) hours. Blow down drains at all systems low points. The flushing of each low point shall be completed by flushing first with the supply valve open, return valve closed and then the return valve open, supply valve closed. All strainers shall be opened and cleaned.

• Supply and install every 100' (40 m) on heating/chilled water pipe system a high capacity hose connection for high velocity flushing.

• During cleaning operation, operate heating boiler to maintain 95°F (35°C) system water temperature. DO NOT EXCEED 109°F (43°C).

• Each system shall be filled with clean water and sufficient corrosion inhibitor to achieve a recirculating water pH range between 8.5 and 9.5 in the boiler system.

• Install treatment by-pass feeders for each piping system. Mount each feeder in by-pass around pumps in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Provide valves and unions not supplied by manufacturer.

• Supply and install the necessary chemicals to maintain corrosion rates on steel piping blow a maximum pitting depth of 0.127 m (0.005") or penetration per year and to obtain the above pH range values.

• Water Treatment Supplier to prepare a final report on the system condition after all flushing, cleaning and chemical charging is complete.



Chemical Treatment for the Boiler Heating System: • Supply a by-pass feeder with a capacity of 1.76 gallons (8l) across the

suction and discharge headers of Boiler system circulating pumps. Feeder shall be complete with isolation valves, air vent and drain valve. (If the boiler system recirculating volume is 5000 gallons or greater, provide a 5-gallon (23 L) feeder).

• Supply a JUDO HEIFi-Top Self Cleaning Back Washable Filter Model JHF-T (Part # 806055). Connections as 1.25" with a filtering capacity of 17.6 GPM. Install across the suction and discharge headers of Boiler system circulating pumps. (Filter is available from XLB Water Solutions, Mississauga 905-85804406)

• Supply and install a 3/4" (20 mm) totalizing type water meter on the cold water make-up to heating system.

• Provide a single, organic chemical for scale and corrosion control in sufficient quantity to establish the required product residual as recommended by the Water Treatment Company: The formulation must contain supplementary Azole-Type copper inhibitors which when applied with provide a Azole content of 5 - 15 ppm in the system. Regardless of the volume used or applied in error the formulation must not have the capacity to cause the system to exceed a pH of 9.5. The pH adjusters in the formulation must be liquid. The project selected must provide less than 0.5 mil per year corrosion rate on mild steel under a minimum 2-week stagnant test.

Installation Instructions: • Provide adequate clearance to permit performance and servicing and

maintenance of equipment.

• Pipe all by-pass feeders and filter drains plus relief's to nearest floor drain.

• Install by-pass feeder on each boiler system. Mount each feeder in by-pass around pumps in accordance with manufacturer's direction. Provide valves and unions which are not supplied by manufacturer.

• Install HEIFi-Top filter for each boiler system. Mount each filter in by-pass around pumps in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Provide valves and unions which are not supplied by manufacturer.



• Supply and install a Corrosion Coupon Test Station fabricated from 25 mm (1") pipe and fittings for the system working pressure: Stations shall be designed to hold a minimum of two (2) corrosion coupons Stations to be complete with flow regulating valves and a rotameter to adjust flow Install in accordance with manufactures directions. Provide valves and unions which are not supplied by manufacturer. Provide four (4) coupons (steel) complete with threaded plugs, shaft and suitable securing screws and washers.

Warranty Period: • Provide initial review of system connection and water analysis.

Recommend treatment dosages. This report is to be Faxed to the School Board's Mechanical Supervisor within four (4) weeks of initial flush and fill.

• Provide the services of the Water Treatment Company's representative for start-up assistance to instruct personnel in the use of chemicals.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C8 - Air Distribution Page 1 of 14

C8 - AIR DISTRIBUTION C8.1 - General Notes/Approach to Design - New Schools • All new schools shall be designed to meet the latest ASHRAE Ventilation

Standard 62.

• Heating/Ventilating systems shall be based on either of the following

• Multiple, indoor, constant volume air handling units

• Rooftop Multi-Zone units using condensing furnace technology Note: Co-ordination with the Architect regarding duct shafts, zoning of

interior zones and overall budget costs should be reviewed with the School Board and Architect before proceeding with a multi-zone unit design.

• The Multipurpose Room should be served by a separate air handling unit.

• Incremental units such as heat pumps and unit ventilators are not

acceptable.

• Variable volume type systems are not acceptable.

• Where rooftop units are required, units shall be specified with lockable hasps on all access doors to prevent vandalism.

• Return air shall be ducted from the Central Plant to within 15 metres of the furthest return air grille. Corridor ceiling spaces shall be used as a return plenum, where allowed by Code.

• Localized exhaust shall include, but not be limited to, the following Rooms:

• SMT Classrooms (Sawdust Collector Exhaust System) • Hub Rooms • Elevator Machine Rooms • Mechanical Rooms The design engineer must evaluate the ventilation requirements of each of the above Rooms to determine final fan system selection.



• Consider the use of silencers and acoustically lined ductwork for central systems to reduce the transfer of fan noise.

• Provisions for Art Room Kiln exhaust including fans, ductwork and exhaust hoods shall not be provided.

• Residential type range hoods are to be specified for Staff Rooms.

• Ceiling hung propeller fans complete with protective cages shall be specified in Multipurpose Rooms to offset stratification.

• Consideration should be given to the use of heat recovery equipment including desiccant wheel technology and heat pump technology to reduce ventilation heating requirements in the Central Plant.

• Heating/cooling type rooftop units should be complete with enthalpy wheel and stainless steel heat exchangers as required to meet ASHRAE ventilation requirements.

• The following rooms shall be designed with air conditioning: • Administration Offices • Daycare • Library and Computer Labs when located adjacent each other • Computer Labs to be specified with air conditioning system with

low ambient control for year-around operation

• Consideration to be given to using demand ventilation sequences complete with CO2 sensor to reduce ventilation requirements. Ref: Section 17 - Energy Management and Control System

C8.2 - General Notes/Approach to Design - Additions & Renovations • Ventilation systems serving Additions shall meet the requirements of new

Schools.

• Ventilation systems serving Renovations must be evaluated by the design engineer to determine the most appropriate approach for each project.

• The following systems may be considered for renovations: • Central air handling unit • Gas-fired single zone rooftop units • Gas-fired multiple zone rooftop units



• Hot water unit ventilators • Electric unit ventilators

The design engineer shall clearly describe in the mechanical system design brief the type of ventilation system proposed and identify whether the system will meet the latest ASHRAE ventilation standards.

C8.3 - General Description of Work • Ventilation work includes, but is not limited to: Ventilation systems

complete with all supply fans, controls, filters, gauges, diffusers, grilles and ductwork to form complete supply air systems.

• Fans, ductwork, grilles, registers and fire dampers for all exhaust air and return air systems.

• Gas vents for boilers and hot water heater.

• Dryer vents.

• Duct sound liner in all ducts as shown and/or specified.

• Outdoor air and exhaust air plenums.

• Exterior weather louvres and block vents.

• Duct silencers.

• Range hoods.

• Ceiling hung propeller fans.

• Reheat coils in ductwork.

• Sawdust collector exhaust system.



C8.4 - Duct Construction Specify Rectangular Low Pressure Ductwork, as follows: • All ductwork to 2" (500 Pa) maximum static pressure shall be fabricated

to SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, Section No. 1, and as follows: HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible - latest edition. HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual - latest edition.

• Specify that bends or elbows be made with a radius of not less than 1-1/2 times the width of the duct. Where this is not possible, turning vanes shall be used.

Specify Circular Low Pressure Duct Construction - To 2" (500 Pa) Static, as follows: • Specify ductwork shall be fabricated to SMACNA Duct Construction

Standard, Section No. 1

• Specify longitudinal joints to be lapped and pressure rolled air tight. All seams, end joints and fittings are to be sealed with duct sealer. Duct sealer to be "United" duct sealer, 3-M, Tough Bond or Duro Dyne S-2.

Specify Circular Medium Pressure Ductwork - To 6" Static, as follows: • All circular ductwork shall be 16 gauge fabricated spiral conduit or of

galvanized sheet steel fabricated to SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, Section 2.

• Die-stamped elbows are shall be used to 8" (200 mm) diameter. Five-piece elbows 10" (250 mm) diameter and over.

• Branch take-offs shall be 45° conical laterals or conical tees.

• Sleeve couplings shall be used for pipe-to-pipe joints.

• Joints: All joints on medium pressure ductwork to be sheet metal screwed and sealed with high velocity duct sealer, applied before assembly of duct sections.



Hangers: • Specify that horizontal ductwork up to 29" (740 mm) wide shall be

supported by galvanized 1" (25 mm) 16 gauge or heavier hangers placed not over 6'-0" (1800 mm) apart, with ends turned under the duct.

• Specify that horizontal ductwork 30" (760 mm) wide and over shall rest on galvanized angle iron supports or Unistrut channels.

Ductwork Installation: • Specify that the Contractor shall provide interference drawings when the

Contractor is supplying alternate equipment in lieu of the specified items in areas shown as Mechanical and Boiler Rooms, etc. Specify that Contractor shall provide dimensioned drawings of the equipment location, showing clearances to walls, ceiling, ducts etc., and also indicate clearances for filter and coil removal etc.

• Specify that the Contractor shall provide where required to suit system balancing, Pitot Tube openings covers in ductwork for each supply, return and exhaust system. Openings are required at all supply fan discharges and exhaust fan inlets.

• Specify that during construction, the Contractor shall temporarily seal

open ends of ductwork to exclude entry of foreign material and construction dust.

C8.5 - Ductwork Accessories Flexible Duct Connections: • Specify that all low pressure ductwork shall be isolated from fans with

flexible connections. Connections shall be non-asbestos fabricated from neoprene-coated glass fabric and shall be fireproof.

Duct Sealing: • Specify duct joints shall be sealed with 3M high velocity sealer, Tough

Bond, or Duro Dyne S-2 high velocity sealer, and on the faces of the joints after cleats are installed.

Access Doors: • Specify that access mandoors are to be constructed as per SMACNA's

Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards.



Acoustic Duct Liner: • Specify that acoustic insulation shall be flexible, edge coated, tightly

bonded, mat-faced and shall be made from inorganic glass fibres.

• Specify that the liner shall be treated so that the maximum flame spread rating is 25 or less and the smoke development is 50 or less according to local bylaws.

Fire Dampers: • Fire Dampers shall be specified to be of a type approved by the

Underwriters' laboratories and NFPA Bulletin #90, latest edition. All Fire Dampers must be listed and labelled by the Underwriters' Laboratories.

Flexible Duct: • Specify that flexible duct shall be acoustic type complete with perforated

aluminum core, 1" (25 mm) insulation and outer mylar sleeve.

• The flexible duct shall be specified for a maximum working velocity of 2500 FPM and 4" (1500 Pa) W.C. pressure and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories under their UL-181 Standards as Class I, Air Duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard No. 90A.

• Specify that flexible duct shall be maximum 6'-0" (1800 mm).

C8.6 - Vibration Isolation & Duct Silencers Vibration Isolation: • Specify vibration isolation to isolate fans, piping and ductwork to provide

a minimum noise transmission into occupied areas. • Specify that all piping connected to isolated equipment shall be suspended

with Type 'SH' spring hangers for the first four (4) points of support. Isolate muffler and exhaust pipe of electrical generator.

• Specify that all floor-mounted fans and cabinet-type fan units shall be mounted or suspended on open spring mounts.



Duct Silencers: • Specify that silencers be complete with aerodynamically designed splitters

having rounded inlets and tapered tails. Submit aerodynamic and acoustic insertion loss certified ratings obtained from duct-to-reverberant room tests.

• Specify that outer casings shall be airtight under 10" (2500 Pa) S.P. and be complete with H.T.L. casings for noise break-out control.

C8.7 - Grilles & Diffusers Grilles: • Specify that grilles shall have mounting frame and volume dampers.

Specify that dampers shall be key operated through the face and that the finish shall be prime coat white enamel.

Diffusers: • Specify that diffusers shall have an equalizing grid and opposed blade

damper in the supply collar. Specify finish as prime coat white enamel and trim as panel type, overlapping, or interlocking type, as designated and to suit the construction.

C8.9 - Air Filters - Board Specification

• All filters to be fully accessible from floor level for maintenance by Board Staff

• Air filters shall be medium efficiency ASHRAE pleated panels consisting of cotton and synthetic media; media support grid and enclosing frame.

• Filter media shall be cotton and synthetic blend, lofted to a uniform depth of 0.18" and formed into a uniform radial pleat. V-pleat is not acceptable. Synthetic charged media is not acceptable.

• A welded wire grid, spot-welded on one-inch centres, treated for corrosion resistance, shall be bonded to the downstream side of the media to maintain the radial pleat and prevent media oscillation. This wire must be rounded to prevent sharp edges which may penetrate the media. Expanded wire is not acceptable. Non-supported filters are not acceptable.

• An enclosing frame, of no less than 28-point high wet-strength beverage board shall provide a rigid and durable enclosure. The frame shall be bonded to the media to prevent air by-pass, and include integral diagonal support members on the air entering and air exiting side to maintain uniform pleat spacing in varying air flows.



• The filter shall have a minimum efficiency reporting value of Merv 7 when evaluated under the guidelines of ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1992. It shall have an average dust spot efficiency of 25 - 30% when evaluated under ASHRAE Standard 52.1-1992. Minimum duct holding capacity when evaluated under this Standard shall be no less than 170 grams.

• Initial resistance to airflow shall not exceed 0.25", 0.28", 0.27" WG at air flow of 350 FPM for 1" filters, 500 FPM for 2" filters, 500 FPM for 4" filters, respectively.

• The filter shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories UL Class 2.

• Provide independent laboratory product test reports for each of the above listed efficiencies, accompanied by six (6) each of 24" x 24" sample filters for testing and comparison purposes. The test reports shall include all details as prescribed in ASHRAE Standards 52.1 and 52.2.

• For heat recovery wheel systems, specify filters upstream from the wheel for both intake and exhaust air streams.

C8.10 - Gas Vents & Flues • Specify ULC listed and labelled vents and flues from gas-fired

equipment, in accordance with the Ontario Fuel Safety Branch, Ontario Regulation 826 latest edition, and CAN1-B149.1 latest edition, Installation Code for Natural Gas Burning Appliances.

• Specify that vents shall be complete with a tall cone roof flashing where vent passes through the roof and shall terminate in a patented CGA approved vent cap with bird guard.

C8.11 - Penthouse Multi-Zone Rooftop Unit Guide Specifications • General:

• Approved equipment must include multiple independent heating, cooling, fan and economizer sections to provide system redundancy, improve reliability, increase system efficiency and reduce energy usage. Equipment that requires reheat is not acceptable.



• Structure: • Unit shall be a fully assembled one-piece, weatherproof design.

The penthouse shall be constructed of KXL coated high ribbed steel with reflective foil R-6 insulation and colour fast steel siding and trim.

• The return air section shall include a central return air opening with protective grating, individual furnace economizers with fully modulating dampers, slide in filters, and pressure relief dampers. Low voltage control centre, line voltage load centre with main disconnect and circuit breakers for furnaces and remote condensing units.

• The supply air section shall include individual condensing furnaces, evaporator coils, zone heads, and ductwork from furnaces to zone head.

• Supply and return a division wall with a large access door shall separate air sections. Both return and supply sections shall be lighted and include a 115V convenience outlet for service and maintenance.

• The unit channel shall match existing roof mounting frame on replacement applications and the options PMX2 roof mounting frame for new construction applications. A roof mounting seal shall be supplied with the unit for field installation.

• The following components shall be factory installed, wired and piped inside the unit: - High efficiency Condensing Furnaces - Fully modulating economizer dampers (one set per furnace) - Low voltage control centre - Low and line voltage wiring - Gas lines with a single point connection - Combustion intake & exhaust piping - Supply air zone head to match existing - Interior lights & GFI outlet - 30% efficient 2" slide-in filters - Barometric relief dampers - Roof curb as required (new construction) - Main, exterior electrical disconnect switch - Step down transformer, as required



• Electrical, single point power connection. Load centre with main disconnect and circuit breakers. Outside fuse disconnects for condensing units.

• Heating Section: • Provide a minimum heating efficiency of up to 93% AFUE sealed

combustion condensing natural gas-fired furnace. The units shall be self-diagnostic, to be tested at the factory and require no field adjustments to start up. All components to be mounted in a heavy gauge frame. Heat exchanger shall be laboratory life cycle tested. Furnaces shall be equipped with a two-stage fixed burner.

• High Static Blowers: • Units are to be equipped with 1 HP quiet variable speed direct

drive motors. Each blower assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Slide out blower assembly shall be equipped with a jack plug connection for easy removal for service. The multiple speeds VSM (DC) motor shall maintain a specified air volume throughout the external static range. Change in blower speed to be easily accomplished by a simple wire change

• Economizer Damper Section: • Economizers shall be provided for each furnace consisting of

gasketted low leakage return and outside air dampers in steel housing with 2" pleated filters. Damper position shall be controlled by an air sensor and solid state outside air enthalpy sensor. Cabinet shall have a large access panels to provide complete service entry.

• Unit Control Centre: • The controller used shall be 32-bit microprocessor based and

graphically programmed to control each unit with 96 input/output (I/O) points. - Up to 48 universal points (individually jumper selectable either

a dry contact, thermistor, 0-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, or RTD, with 12-bit resolution on all analogue inputs).

- Up to 24 digital outputs (relayed outputs with individual LED indication and individual HOA switches)

- Up to 24 analogue outputs (0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA)



• Capacity requirements greater than nine (9) I/O's can be added as an option. The maximum number of inputs and outputs the controller can accept is 192 (92 universal inputs), 48 digital outputs, 48 analogue outputs). The controller must be capable of sensing CO2 levels by zone and modulating fresh air by zone established levels.

• There are no limits on the number control loops that the controller can handle nor any programming limits imposed. The controller shall have an on-board, jumper selectable, EIA-232 or EIA-485 open protocol port that supports the following communication protocols: BACnet (modes supported: MS/TP, PTP, and ARCnet), Modbus (models supported: RTU and ASCII), N2 Bus and LonWorks. If a controller does not support all these protocols, the supplied shall include in his price all of the necessary additional communication gateway(s) to support all of these protocols.

• All programming memory shall be stored in Flash Memory (512 KB minimum), thus requiring no battery backup and providing for rugged electrical noise immunity. The controller shall contain an on-board battery backed (up to 10,000 hours) hardware clock for standalone scheduling capability and accurate recoding of date/time on alarm events and data logging. The time/day maintained by the hardware clock shall automatically adjust for daylight savings time and leap years.

• A simple to use portable keypad/display (KPD) unit with a minimum 4 line by 40 character per line backlit LCD with 22 function buttons will be supplied with each unit. Software features of the KPD shall include: - Custom definable displays and menu Alarm indicator light and

horn as well as an acknowledge or mute button.

- The alarm light shall be active anytime there is an alarm active. It shall be software selectable which alarm conditions, if any, activate the horn.

- An alarm history buffer displaying the 64 most recent alarms, including custom alarm text and time stamping.

- User password protection for KPD editing access as well as separate technician password protection.



- Vie and adjustment of operating schedules - normal, holiday and override schedule modes.

- Ability to connect or disconnect the KPD "on-the-fly" without need to cycle power to the controller for the KPD to be fully functional.

- Option to mount the KPD component up to 1,500 feet from the unit.

- Ability to reset the controller's time/date. - Ability to field reset adjust through the KPD which protocol

the controller communicates through its open protocol port as well as the ability to adjust certain control parameters (such as baud rate, stop bits, parity, protocol mode, etc.).

• Sequence of Operation:

- The Open Protocol DDC system controls all PMZ3 functions. The system changes blower speeds, enables heating and cooling and provides minimum ventilation and disables equipment for night setback operation and emergency shut down. Independent zone temperature control is regulated by individual thermistors.

- Ventilation Mode: When power is supplied to the unit, each blower is enabled at its manually adjustable ventilation blower speed. Each economizer is driven to its manually adjustable minimum position.

- Heating Mode: Upon a zone heating call, the corresponding heating section is enabled. The corresponding blower ramped to its manually adjustable high speed. When the zone heating demand is met, the blower returns to ventilation mode.

- Cooling Mode: Upon a zone cooling call, the corresponding blower is ramped to its manually adjustable high speed. The outdoor air sensor for that zone is enabled (enthalpy or dry bulb). If outdoor conditions permit, the mixed air temperature control modulates economizer dampers to maintain a fixed mixed air temperate. Otherwise, the corresponding condensing unit provides mechanical cooling. When the zone demand is met, the blower returns to ventilation.



- Night Setback Option: During occupied periods the PMZ3 operates as described above. During unoccupied periods, the unit is idle with all outdoor dampers closed. During a call for heating or cooling, the PMZ3 is enabled as described above except all outdoor air dampers will remain closed. When the demand is met, the unit returns to idle.

• Warranty: The unit shall provide manufacturer's parts warranty.

Twenty year limited heat exchanger warranty. Supplier shall provide a five-year parts and labour warranty.

C8.12 - Sawdust Collector Guide Specification • Sawdust Collector unit shall be a pull through design, constructed of 14

gauge galvanized steel, complete with exhaust fan, top mounted on filter bin, belt drive motor with weather hood, filter door safety switch complete with explosion latch, bag filters, access doors, motorized bag shaker, and storage drum complete with lifting handles, and lid and locking latches. Unit shall be complete with explosion venting damper, return air fire damper, abort damper, silencer, inlet blow back damper, discharge duct fire damper and control panel with starters. Finish colour of unit by manufacturer. Colour to be determined by the Architect. Unit to be located outdoors complete with roll drums.

• Unit complete with dirty filter indicator.

• Control panel shall be NEMA 12 complete with fan and shaker motor starters, auto shaker control, 120 Volt transformer, push button ON-OFF, pilot lights, 2 auxiliary contacts and fused disconnect switch. Provide contacts for Energy Management System to allow unit shutdown upon fire alarm activation.

• Building Automation System to interlock two (2) access doors to dust collector control panel.

• Building Automation System to interlock shaker motor to dust collector fan to prevent shaker motor from operating when dust collector is operating.

• Provide dry contacts in control panel to interlock to Building Automation System.



• Spark Detector (supplied as part of the Sawdust Collector): • Supply and install a complete system of sawdust spark detection

and water spray fire suppression to protect the sawdust collector and ductwork.

• Complete system shall comply with the requirements of NFPA-69 and the local authorities having jurisdiction.

• System shall be automatic release through activation of spark detectors in the collector and/or the ductwork to release the water sprays, release the exhaust air abort damper, operate the alarms and indicate a trouble signal at the fire alarm panel.

• System shall be complete with the following: - control panel - water supply isolating valve, strainer and solenoid valve - nozzle/valve assembly - input/output module - spark detectors - ICON board - ICON enclosure - horn


Version 2.1 Issued: Dec. 1, 2014 C17- Energy Management Control System Page 1 of 16

C17- ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM C17.1 - Board Standard Specification C17.2 - Reference Standards Comply with Requirements of Division One, General Requirements and

all documents referred to therein.

Comply with requirements of Mechanical General Requirements, Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods, Electrical General Provisions, and Electrical Basic Materials and Methods. Plenum rated wire shall be used in ceiling spaces. Wiring in Mechanical Rooms and Boiler Rooms shall be run in conduit.

C17.3 - Intent The Energy Management Control System supplier shall be a subcontractor

to General Contractor who shall be responsible for the complete installation of the Energy Management Control System and guarantee its proper function. This Contractor shall bid directly to the General Contractor.

Energy Management Control System shall be supplied and installed by Schneider Electric (J.B.S. Services Inc. 905-453-8297). Alternate supplier is Johnson Controls Ltd. (Branch Office only 3070 Mainway Rd. 1-800-263-6226) with NAE or later version or Yorkland Controls (2689 Steels Ave. west 416-661-3306). No other suppliers are acceptable. General Contractors shall name the Control supplier at the time of tender.

Existing DDC installations shall be incorporated seamlessly into the new installation without the need of upgrades or equipment replacement. All existing DDC points shall be included in new graphic displays with the ability to read and write to the existing controllers. In the event the extension of the existing system is not possible, it shall be brought to the Owners attention prior to tender including associated costs.

The system for the new school shall be connected via the Board's wide area network to existing central DDC system and monitored by the existing main system. All system functions including displays, programs and graphics shall be accessible from any personal computer on the Board's network with web browser software. The control contractor shall demonstrate to the consultant the ability to access programming and graphics remotely from a location as chosen by the consultant.



The Network Cabling Installer will bring network connection(s) to the Energy Management Control System's supervisory panel and Operators Terminal.

C17.4 - Related Work Specified Elsewhere Installation of control valves, immersion wells, pressure differential taps

etc. will be by the Mechanical Contractor.

Power wiring for all electric motors and starters will be Division 16.

Electromagnetic starters with required number of ancillary contactors supplied and installed by applicable Division.

Installation of control dampers will be by the Sheet Metal sub-contractor.

Bidders to note that some air handling equipment may have factory-supplied motor-operated dampers. Refer to Division 15 and Mechanical Equipment Schedules. Coordinate with Equipment Suppliers to Division 15.

C17.5 - Quality Assurance Execution of work in this Section by a recognized control contractor

regularly employed in the design, manufacturing, and installation of EMCS and temperature control systems and equipment. The successful Contractor must be a Manufacturer as well as Supplier of all system components.

There will be no substitutions of manufacturers from those named on the list except where consent in writing is obtained from the Consultant.

C17.6 - Submittals Submit ten (10) copies of control working drawings and wiring diagrams

with written sequences of operation and components description.

Submit catalogue cuts and specifications on all EMCS equipment, i.e., Network Controller, Local Control Module, PC etc.

Submit DDC data by systems i.e. S1 air handling unit, whereby schematics, panel terminal wiring, sequences of operation, hardware, and component lists are grouped together without requiring cross reference to other areas of the submittal.



With reference to Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical Drawings submit a layout of the Building Operator's room showing the most practical arrangement of the EMCS front-end equipment. Show all dimensions and power requirements. Coordinate installation with other equipment i.e. fire alarm and security monitoring.

C17.7 - Guarantee Guarantee the control system and all components thereof free from defects

in operating sequences, materials, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year of normal use and service from the date of certified acceptance by the Consultant and taking over by the Owner.

Provide emergency repair service on a 24-hour basis during warranty period and replace defective parts.

Service provided by factory-trained representative of the system manufacturer.

C17.8 - Maintenance Service technicians particularly trained to work on the systems installed

shall handle system servicing and maintenance.

Provide emergency maintenance and service, responding within four hours notice given by the Board to attend to malfunctions relating to the controller and all field equipment such as valves wiring, etc.

C17.9 - Instruction Adjustment and "As-Built" Drawings On completion of the Work, calibrate and adjust all components to operate

as required. Provide three complete instruction manuals with "as constructed" control drawings and instruct the Board's operating personnel in the operation and function of the system.

All as-built submittal information to be submitted in acceptable electronic format.

Maintenance manuals describing maintenance on all system components including inspection, preventative maintenance, fault detection, and repair or replacement procedures.

All data specified in the "Submittals" section of this specification in its final as-built approved form.



As-built interconnection wiring diagrams or wire list, of the complete field-installed system with proper identification and ordering number of each system component and device.

As-built single line diagrams for each floor level showing building outline, corridors, approximate room layout, etc., with location of central processor and remote controllers.

Provide point to point commissioning sheets with record of commissioning date and initials of technician performing the work.

Provide a minimum of eight (8) hours (2-4 hour days) instruction on EMCS operation to Board's staff and 2 call-back sessions of 2 hours each during the first year of operation if required. This training to apply to schools with DDC components only.

C17.10 - Acceptance Procedure Acceptance by the Consultant will be granted when all components are

installed, operating, and calibrated.

Prior to on-line operation, a complete demonstration and read-out of computer real time responsibilities of surveillance and command shall be performed in presence of the Board's authorized maintenance representative and the Board's representative.

Upon successful completion of online operation, Board's authorized representative shall be requested in writing to inspect and approve satisfactory operation of building automation system.

Complete all outstanding deficiencies as determined by the Board's representative in his inspection report after which a resubmission of formal acceptance shall be made. This procedure shall be repeated if necessary until acceptable performance has been established.

C17.11 - EMCS Operation Summary (Point List) The EMCS Operation Summary is a supplement to the drawings and the

written sequences of operation. It is intended as a guide and clarification of requirements. It is not a complete I/O summary since it only describes

requirements for each type of system and unit component. The quantities of systems and components will be shown on the drawings.



It is the responsibility of this Contractor to determine quantities of input/output points, sensors, devices, wiring, etc.

C17.12 - Dampers

Dampers for return air applications: Provide, in sizes and in locations as

shown on the drawings, extruded aluminum air foil dampers as manufactured by TA Morrison series 1000 or Ruskin CD-50 (no alternates) with features as follows:

Extruded aluminum (6063T5) damper frame is not less than .080"

(2.03mm) in thickness. Damper frame is 4" deep.

Blades are extruded aluminum (6063T5) profiles.

Blade gaskets are extruded EPDM. Frame seals are extruded TPE thermoplastic. Gaskets are secured in an integral slot within the aluminum extrusions.

Bearings are composed of a Celcon inner bearing fixed to a 7/16" (11.11mm) aluminum hexagon blade pin rotating within a polycarbonate outer bearing inserted in the frame, resulting in no metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic contact.

Linkage hardware is installed in the frame side and constructed of

aluminum and corrosion-resistant, zinc-plated steel, complete with cup-point for a slip-proof grip.

Dampers are designed for operation in temperatures ranging

between -40°F (-40°C) and 212°F (100°C).

Air leakage through a 48" x 48" (1220mm x 1220mm) damper does not exceed 10.3 cfm/ft.² (52 l/s/m²) against 4" (1kPa) w.g. differential static pressure at standard air. Standard air leakage data is certified under the AMCA Ratings Program.

Pressure drop of a fully open 48" x 48" (1220mm x 1220mm)

damper does not exceed .02" (.004 kPa) w.g. at 1000 fpm (5.08 m/s).

Dampers for outdoor and exhaust air applications: Provide, in sizes and in

locations as shown on the drawings, extruded aluminum air foil dampers as manufactured by TA Morrison series 9000 or Ruskin CDTI-50 (no alternates) with features as follows:



Extruded aluminum (6063T5) damper frame is not less than .080"

(2.03mm) in thickness. Damper frame is 4" (101.6mm) deep and is insulated with styrofoam on four sides.

Blades are extruded aluminum (6063T5) profiles, internally

insulated with expanded polyurethane foam and thermally broken. Complete blade has an insulating factor of R-2.29 and a temperature index of 55.

Blade gaskets are extruded EPDM. Frame seals are extruded TPE

thermoplastic. Gaskets are secured in an integral slot within the aluminum extrusions.

Bearings are composed of a celcon inner bearing fixed to a 7/16"

(11.11mm) aluminum hexagon blade pin rotating within a polycarbonate outer bearing inserted in the frame, resulting in no metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic contact.

Linkage hardware is installed in the frame side and constructed of aluminum and corrosion-resistant, zinc-plated steel, complete with cup-point trunnion screws for a slip-proof grip.

Dampers are designed for operation in temperatures ranging

between -40°F (-40°C) and 212°F (100°C).

Air leakage through a 48" x 48" (1220mm x 1220mm) damper does not exceed 4.12 cfm/ft.² (21 l/s.m²) against 4" (1kPa) w.g. differential static pressure at standard air. Standard air leakage data is certified under the AMCA Ratings Program.

Pressure drop of a fully open 48" x 48" (1220mm x 1220mm)

damper does not exceed .03" (.007kPa) w.g. at 1000 fpm (5.08 m/s).

C17.13 - Actuators Electric/electronic sized to provide adequate power for opening, closing

and modulating dampers or valves in specified time. Provide a minimum of one actuator per damper.

Provide each actuator with a bracket for attaching to ductwork, building structure or equipment. Do not install operators in ducts or fresh air intakes.



Provide electric low temperature protected actuators in unheated areas

such as parking garages, ventilation shafts and transformer rooms and on any equipment located outdoors.

Properly sized and selected by the manufacturer in accordance with load requirements and characteristics of the systems to which they are applied.

Dampers to spring return to normal position on failure. C17.14 - Automatic Control Valves Automatic control valves shall be properly sized and selected by the

manufacturer in accordance with load requirements and characteristics of the systems to which they are applied. Provide all actuators and associated accessories.

Heating Valves shall be normally open, spring return. Do not provide, under any conditions, valves smaller than 20 mm (3/4").

Water pressure drop through all automatic control valves: 18 kPa (2.5 psi) for all two-way valves and 35 kPa (5.0 psi) for all three-way valves.

All valves to be modulating, fully proportional and shall spring return to normal position on control system failure (i.e. rad valves full open, coil valves open to coil, see schematics). Drive open-drive close operation is not acceptable.

For two-way radiation valves of 20 mm-pipe diameter, valve orifice diameter shall not be less than 13 mm (1/2") in diameter.

C17.15 - Reserved C17.16 - Space and Air Temperature Sensors Thermister RTD's selected to match application. Maximum drift 0.5F per

year. Accurate to ± 1F over the full range.

All mixed air temperature sensors and other sensors where indicated shall be averaging type with a minimum length of 6.7m (22 feet).

For space temperature sensors in Change Rooms, corridors, gyms etc. (and other high vandalism areas) provide an RTD type sensor in a recessed junction box fixed to a stainless steel wall plate cover with thermal paste.



Water temperature sensors shall be complete with a separable 316 stainless steel well.

Outside air wall mounted sensors to be mounted on a north-facing wall, complete with sun shield where required.

C17.17 - Components Provide cubicle type lockable panels with hinged doors constructed of 16

gauge steel with enamel finish suitable for either wall mounting or leg mounting as required, with sufficient space on cover for mounting labelled switches and gauges, etc.

Freeze protection devices (low limits) shall have manual reset features and shall NOT automatically recycle. Freeze controls shall have 6.0 m (20 feet) capillary arranged in ducts for best possible protection. Provide low limits for each 5.6 m² (60 ft²) of duct area where necessary, wired in series. Device shall have two poles, one hardwired to starter and one to DDC controller for alarming and graphic.

Fire protection devices (high limits) shall have manual reset feature and shall not automatically recycle.

Relays shall be solid state, heavy-duty type. Supply, install and wire all relays for outside lighting circuit control, and for other line voltage applications. All equipment controlled by EMCS shall be provided with Hand/Off/Auto (H.O.A.) switch by same manufacturer as equipment motor control starter. H.O.A. switch to be mounted on front panel and wired as follows: AUTO: Equipment shall be controlled by EMCS in series with all

limits and other protective devices. OFF: No operation. HAND: Equipment shall be operated independently of EMCS but

still in series with all limits and other protective devices.

Provide fractional horsepower motor control relays complete with Hand/Off/Auto switch for all fractional horsepower devices controlled by the EMCS equal to: Victory Model 101/102/103 Hawkeye Model H548



Relays required for exterior lighting control (individual circuits and contactors) shall be installed in a suitable general-purpose enclosure for installation in locations noted on the drawings. Co-ordinate with Electrical Contractor for lighting circuits and contactors required to be controlled. All relays shall be located in Main Custodian's Room and Mechanical Rooms.

C17.18 - Wiring Provide all electrical wiring (of any voltage) for components supplied

under this division including but not limited to low limit protection, thermostats, alarms, P.E. switches, relays, and interlocks as required to achieve the control function specified in the schematic drawings and sequences of operation. This work to include wiring into prefabricated control circuits (as coordinated with the appropriate sub-trade or supplier) of boilers, pump sets, dust collectors and fire alarm panels. Also provide suitably rated relays for single-phase motors wired in series with manual starters where EMCS start/stop operation is required.

Provide all power and interconnecting wiring to EMCS field panels. Co-ordinate with Division 16 sub-trade for appropriate locations of all power outlets for front-end equipment. Do not wire any EMCS components into emergency power supply.

Refer to Division 16 drawings for locations of all power outlets for electric actuators, sensors, and control devices or panels. Provide all wiring from these locations to the above devices as necessary and provide all low voltage control wiring between devices. Refer to Division 16 for wiring and conduit requirements.

Where it is desirable to relocate or add power outlets for electric control system co-ordinate with the Division 16 contractor and bear all costs which may occur as a result of this revision.

Install all wiring in conduit and conform to CSA, ULC, and local code

requirements as well as requirements as specified in Division 16.

In accessible ceilings, low voltage plenum rated cable may be used where permitted. Install cables at right angles and secure to prevent damage.

C17.19 - Reserved



C17.20 - Energy Management Control System Provide a Direct Digital EMCS which can, without additional equipment

and software, perform all the automatic temperature control and energy management functions as specified and shown on the drawings and to include all software, hardware, operator input/output devices, filed processing units, sensors, and controls, wiring, relays, engineering, installation, supervision, and labour, calibration, software programming, and checkout necessary for a complete and fully operational DDC system. Refer to sequences of operation in this section for operational requirements.

System Expansion: To facilitate large single facility expansion or to support large Wide Area Networks (WAN's) such as employed in large school systems, the Supervisory Controllers shall directly support a minimum of 4 logical networks using the same physical network (Ethernet or Echelon). Future expansion shall be provided without requirement of upgrading existing system. The new system must be fully backward compatible with existing system.

Mounted and wired in a steel enclosure complete with all relays,

digital to analog converters and terminal strips. Operate to provide any of the following modes:

- Two-position - Proportional (p) - Proportional plus integral (PI) - Proportional, integral plus Derivative (PID)

Operate within the following limits: - Temperature -40°C to 60°C - Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing) - Voltage 24 VAC +10% to –15%, 50 or 60 HZ - Storage conditions: Temperature -40°C to 60°C Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing)

Controller Software: A complete menu driven operating system, standard energy management application packages, standard control algorithm application packages, and an Owner/user custom control and calculation application package complete with interpreter and complete use documentation modules.

I/O Module: Capable of directing interface to a variety of industry standard sensors and input/output devices such as:



Analog inputs: 4-20 mA; 0-10 VDC; thermistors RTD. Digital inputs: Dry contact closure; pulse accumulator. Analog outputs: 4-20 mA; 0-10 VDC. Digital outputs: 24 VAC, 120 Volt Form C (SPDT)

Power Failure, System Re-start, System Start-up: Provide, under any

condition, automatic sequential restart of equipment based on current program time and program requirement without operator intervention. Refer to System Operation Summary at the end of this section for start-up priority.

Transmission Network:

To operate via a single pair of twisted wires utilizing industry standard RS-485 protocol, electrically isolated from local control modules, operator's terminal and CPU by optical couplers at each interface to prevent damage to electronic circuitry by voltages beyond tolerable limits.

All local control modules to be coupled to bus to ensure that single

or multiple controller failures will not cause loss of communication.

To support 100 devices minimum.

To provide alarm on non-communication by any controller.

System Interface (Operator's Terminal): Provide personal desktop computer with minimum specifications

to include Pentium processor operating at current industry MHZ, 17" monitor, keyboard, mouse, and CD Rom. Processor class and speed to meet board's standard. Provide latest Windows Professional operating system software with latest service pack and web browser software to board's standard.

Cabling: Provide all required connectors and cables for complete

connection to the Board's WAN.



Remote Support: The Supervisory Controller will communicate over the Board's

WAN to an existing EMS Server. New points to be fully defined within the server database in keeping with the Board's naming convention. All site information will be accessible from any Personal Computer on the Board's WAN with the current versions of Internet Explorer software. This Client/Server software will operate over the Peel District School Board's wide area network (WAN).

Provide any hardware, firmware, software, upgrades or license requirements for the remote server station to incorporate the new installation into the server database.

Provide as a minimum, one unique dynamic colour graphic installed in central computer for each of the systems. Graphics to conform to existing graphics standards.

Each individual piece of HVAC equipment shall have its own independent schedule accessible from the graphic via link.

C17.21 - Direct Digital Control Processor Software Local control modules must operate totally standalone and independent of

a central computer for all specified control applications. C17.22 - Execution - Components Mount all controller and relays within control panel cubicles. Mount

exposed components for easy access and protect from damage.

Identify all exposed components and equipment mounted on the control panel front with lamacoid nameplates. Identify instruments inside the cabinet with lamacoid nameplates. Cooperate with piping and ventilation subtrades in providing lists of all automatically operated equipment.

Locate all local control panels as shown on the drawings. All control panels must be located to provide easy access for service and trouble shooting.

C17.23 - Manufactured Equipment Coordinate with manufacturers as required to achieve sequences of

operation.



Install the entire DDC system under supervision of factory-trained engineers fully capable of providing instruction, routine maintenance, programming, and emergency maintenance service on all system components.

At any time during commissioning procedures and during the training period, make at no extra cost, any program changes required to enable optimum system operation.

Provide 'status' confirmation by using current relays.

For start/stop operation wire only to starter 'Auto' circuit. Failure to stop or start to register as an alarm.

Provide a minimum of 1 spare analog/digital input, 1 spare analog output and 1 spare digital output point on each DDC controller (LCM/MZII).

Where motor operation is specified to provide enable/disable, permissive or sequential operation, use DDC software wherever possible or provide hardwire interlocks.

C17.24 - Reserved C17.25 - Sequences of Operation Heating Boilers Low Water Temperature Alarm:

Provide a digital output point to activate security system remote dialler. Output point shall be closed during normal operation and open if perimeter radiation return water temperature drops below 40C. Contact is to reset when temperature rises above 45C. Provide wiring from EMCS to Security Panel. When circuit is open, activate remote alarm. Termination at Security Panel by Owner.

Refer to floor plans, specification, and points lists for all additional control

systems and sequences of operation. Boilers Local / Remote Switch:

Boiler manufacturer will provide local / remote switch and dry contact to indicate switch in local position. Monitor dry contact and provide indication and alarm for boiler running on local controls.



Security System Input Points:

Provide two (2) monitoring points for security system. System “armed” point will place all equipment into unoccupied mode. System “intrusion” point shall command all lighting points on.

Lighting Control:

The building is armed by the custodian at the end of the day, all pole lights and wall packs are turned off after a ten minute delay.

At 6 am all wall packs are enabled and controlled by the photo cell

(Div. 16). When a building is disarmed all wall packs and pole lights are

enabled and controlled through the photo cell (Div. 16). DDC Room Control:

Room sensor modulates heating valve to maintain occupied setpoint of 22°C. Setpoint is set back to 18°C outside of normal occupied schedule. Provide link to schedule on graphics. Sensor to be non-adjustable and no display.

Meters

All hydro, gas, and water meters must be connected to EMS c/w graphic to show demand load, real time usage, and monthly totals.

PDSB BAS Schedule

Standard - Classroom Occupied Setpoints Start Stop Notes Heating CoolingMonday - Friday 7:30:00

AM 4:00:00

PM Occupied Mode is overridden when security system is armed - System will then be placed in Unoccupied Mode

22°C 24°C

Saturday Sunday & Holidays

Systems are placed in Occupied Mode only when security system is unarmed and a scheduled permit is active

22°C 24°C



Standard - Gym Occupied Setpoints Start Stop Notes Heating CoolingMonday - Friday 7:30:00

AM 4:00:00

PM Occupied Mode is overridden when security system is armed - System will then be placed in Unoccupied Mode

20°C 24°C


Systems are placed in Occupied Mode only when security system is unarmed and a scheduled permit is active

20°C 24°C

Standard - Classroom Low Occupancy Setpoints Start Stop Notes Heating CoolingMonday - Friday 4:00:00

PM Security System is

Armed

18°C 26°C


Systems are placed in Low Occupancy Mode only when security system is unarmed and permits are not active

18°C 26°C

Standard - Gym Low Occupancy Setpoints Start Stop Notes Heating Cooling

Monday - Friday 4:00:00 PM

Security System is

Armed

18°C 26°C


Systems are placed in Low Occupancy Mode only when security system is unarmed and permits are not active

18°C 26°C

Standard - Classroom Unoccupied Setpoints Start Stop Notes Heating CoolingMonday - Friday Security

System is Armed

7:30:00 AM

Unoccupied Mode is overridden when security system is unarmed - System will then be placed in Low Occupancy Mode

16°C 28°C


12:00:01 AM

12:00:00 PM

Systems are placed in Unoccupied Mode only when system is armed

16°C 28°C



Standard - Gym Unoccupied Setpoints Start Stop Notes Heating CoolingMonday - Friday Security

System is Armed

7:30:00 AM

Unoccupied Mode is overridden when security

system is unarmed - System will then be placed in Low

Occupancy Mode

16°C 28°C


12:00:01 AM

12:00:00 PM

Systems are placed in Unoccupied Mode only when

system is armed

16°C 28°C


Version 2.5 Issued: June 21, 2017 C20 – Field Irrigation Page 1 of 18

C20 - FIELD IRRIGATION

C20.1 - Warranty

All awarded work to include a warranty for all labour and materials for

period of one year minimum from the date of installation.

C20.2 - Materials

Use materials which are new and without flaws or defects of any type, and

which are the best of their class and kind.

Materials used must be obtained from a manufacturer’s authorized

supplier.

C20.3 - Acceptable Manufacturers

Acceptable irrigation equipment manufacturer is Rain Bird International.

No product substitutions shall be permitted.

C20.4 - P.V.C. Pressure Pipe and P.V.C. Fittings

All main line pipe shall be CL160 (SDR-26) direct burial PVC pressure

pipe, will be homogeneous throughout, and free from visible cracks, dents,

holes or foreign materials. Solvent weld joints are not permitted on the

main line.

All plastic pipe fittings to be installed shall be a minimum of SCH 40

molded fittings manufactured of the same material as the pipe and shall be

suitable for solvent weld, slip joint ring tight seal, or threaded connections.

All threaded connections under pressure, whether constant or intermittent

shall be Teflon taped.

Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes,

and may be nominally increased at the option of the Irrigation Contractor,

but not decreased.

C20.5 - Manual Isolation Valves - Nibco 619 RW Iron Body Gate Valve

Bolted Bonnet - Non-Rising Stem w/50 mm Drive Nut - Resilient Wedge -

IPS Push-on ends

250 PSI/17.2 Bar Non-Shock Cold Working Pressure - Conforms to

AWWA C509



Coating – Electro-statically applied fusion-bonded epoxy 10-14 mm inside

and outside.

Meets or exceeds AWWA C550. Coating is NSF and FDA certified.

Sized to pipe.

C20.6 - Backflow Preventer – Watts Regulator Company 709 Series

A double check valve assembly shall be installed at referenced cross-

connections to prevent the backflow of polluted water into the potable

water supply.

The cross-connections shall be determined by local inspection authority

for use where a high hazard situation does not exist. Valve shall feature

modular check assemblies with center stem guiding.

Each check module shall have a captured spring and be accessible through

a bolted cover plate. Seats shall be replaceable with-out special tools. It

shall be a complete assembly including tight-closing resilient seated

shutoff valves, test cocks, and a strainer is recommended.

The assembly shall meet the requirements of ASSE No. 1015; AWWA

C510-92; CSA B64.5 and UL Classified File No. EX3185. Approved by

the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research at

the University of Southern California.

Backflow Preventer shall be tested and certified before handover and

commissioning of the system

C20.7 - Rotary Sprinklers – Rain Bird 8005 Series

The sprinkler shall be capable of both full circle and part circle operation

in the same unit. The mode of operation shall be selected by inserting a

flat blade screwdriver in the top of the rubber cap and turning a selector

approximately 45 degrees. The sprinkler shall not reverse direction during

continuous operation in the full circle mode. The part-circle sprinkler

shall have adjustable arc coverage of 50 to 330 degrees. Arc adjustment

can be performed with or without the rotor in operation and shall require

only a flat blade screwdriver. The arc adjustment can be performed on

both the right and left trip of the sprinkler. The sprinkler shall have a

rotating nozzle turret independent of the riser stem. The portion of the

riser stem that is in contact with the wiper seal shall be non-rotating.



The sprinkler shall have a non-strippable drive mechanism and permit

manual rotation of the pop-up stem in any direction. This shall have no

effect on either the drive or the set arc. Once the manual rotation is

terminated, the sprinkler shall automatically return the water stream to its

preset arc.

The sprinkler shall have a pressure activated, multi-function, soft

elastomeric wiper seal. This wiper seal shall prevent the sprinkler from

sticking in the up position, and be capable of sealing the sprinkler riser

stem to the sprinkler cap under normal operating pressures. The sprinkler

shall have a screen attached to the drive housing to filter inlet water,

protect the drive from clogging and simplify its removal for cleaning and

flushing of the system.

The sprinkler body shall have a 1" (26/34) female (NPT or BSP) bottom

inlet. The sprinkler shall have a standard rubber cover which designates

each adjustment opening from the top. The sprinkler shall have a two

piece, front-load nozzle assembly which will allow the nozzle to be

installed without a stator bushing change. The primary and secondary

nozzle ports shall be contained in one of the parts and shall be unique to

each nozzle size. The tertiary nozzle port shall be common to all of the

other primary/secondary nozzle assemblies.

The sprinkler shall have a selection of eight color-coded nozzles. All but

the #4 and #6 nozzles shall have three ports for optimal close-in, mid-

range and long-range water distribution. The sprinkler shall have a

stainless steel nozzle retention screw. The angle of trajectory shall be 25

degrees from horizontal.

The sprinkler shall have a strong stainless steel retract spring for positive

pop-down. The sprinkler shall have a standard Seal-A-Matic™ (SAM)

device capable of holding up to 10 feet (3,1 m) of head. Pop-up height as

measured from the top of the cover to the centerline of the nozzle orifice

shall be at least 5 inches (12,7 cm). The sprinkler’s overall height shall be

101.8 inches (25,7 cm) and the exposed diameter shall be 17.8 inches (4,8

cm).

C20.8 - Remote Control Solenoid Valve – Rain Bird PGA Series Angle w/PRS

Dial

The electric remote control valve shall be a normally closed 24 VAC

50/60 Hz (cycles/second) solenoid actuated globe/angle pattern design

capable of having a flow rate of 150 GPM with a pressure loss not to

exceed 6.5 psi. The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 PSI

(10,35) Bars.



The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact, weather

resistant PVC with stainless steel screws.

The valve shall have manual open/close control (internal bleed) for

manually opening and closing the valve without electrically energizing the

solenoid. The valve's internal bleed shall prevent flooding of the valve

box.

The valve shall house a fully-encapsulated, one-piece solenoid. The

solenoid shall have a captured plunger with a removable retainer for easy

servicing, and a leverage handle for easy turning. This 24 VAC 50/60 Hz

solenoid shall open with 19.6 VAC minimum at 150 psi (10,35 bar). At

24 VAC, average inrush current shall not exceed 0.41 amps. Average

holding current shall not exceed 0.28 amps.

The valve shall have a flow control stem for accurate manual regulation

and/or shut off of outlet flow. The valve must open or close in less than 1

minute at 150 PSI (10, 35 bar), and less than 30 seconds at 20 PSI (1, 38

bar).

The valve construction shall provide for all internal parts to be removable

from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. The

body shall have a removable 0-ringed plug for installation in either globe

or angle configuration.

The electric remote control valve shall have a pressure regulating module

(PRS-D) capable of regulating outlet pressure between 15 and 100 psi (±3

psi) (1, 04 and 6, 90 bar (±0, 21 bar).

The PRS-D module shall have an adjusting knob for setting pressure and

Schrader valve connection for monitoring pressure. The pressure shall be

adjustable from the PRS-D when the valve is internally manually bled or

electrically activated.

The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Corporation, Azusa,

California.

C20.9 - Remote Control Solenoid Valve (Master Valve) – Rain Bird GB-R

Series w/PRS Dial

The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of heavy cast red brass,

diaphragm shall be of nylon reinforced nitrile rubber. All other internal

parts shall be made of bronze, brass, and stainless steel to ensure corrosion

resistance.



The valve shall have both internal and external manual open/close control

(internal and external bleed) for manually opening and closing the valve

without electrically energizing the solenoid. The valve shall have internal

manual bleed to prevent flooding of the valve box.

The valve shall house a fully-encapsulated, one-piece solenoid. The

solenoid shall have a captured plunger with a removable retainer for easy

servicing, and a leverage handle for easy turning. This 24 VAC 50/60 Hz

solenoid shall open with 19.6 VAC minimum at 200 PSI (13,8 Bars). At

24 VAC, average inrush current shall not exceed .41 amps. Average

holding current shall not exceed 0.28 amps.

The valve shall have a control port filter screen to filter out grit and

prevent clogging of hydraulic control ports.

The valve shall have a stainless steel flow control stem and cross handle

for regulating or shutting off the flow of water. The valve must open or

close in less than one minute at 200 PSI (13,8 Bars) and less than 30

seconds at 20 PSI (1,38 Bars).

The electric remote control valve shall have a pressure regulating module

(PRS-D) capable of regulating outlet pressure between 15 and 100 psi (±3

psi) (1, 04 and 6, 90 bar (±0, 21 bar).

The PRS-D module shall have an adjusting knob for setting pressure and

Schrader valve connection for monitoring pressure. The pressure shall be

adjustable from the PRS-D when the valve is internally manually bled or

electrically activated.

The valve construction shall be such as to provide for all internal parts to

be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve

installation.

C20.10 - Quick Coupling Valve – Rain Bird 5RC

One Piece Quick Coupling Valve

The quick coupling valve shall be a one-piece type capable of having a

discharge rate of 50 GPM with a pressure loss not to exceed 11 psi.

The valve body shall be constructed of red brass. The cover shall be a

durable, protective self-closing rubber cover.

The valve shall be opened and closed by a brass key of the same

manufacturer having a 1" (MNPT) and 1" (FNPT) outlet. The valve throat

shall have a key-way with detent positions for regulating water flow.



The quick coupling valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird

Corporation, Azusa, California.

C20.11 - Swing Joints/Swing Pipe

All sprinklers shall be connected to lateral pipe using 25 mm (1 inch)

prefabricated PVC swing joint - Rain Bird TSJ -12.

All quick couplers shall be connected to mainline pipe with 25 mm (1

inch) prefabricated PVC swing joint - Rain Bird TSJ -12.

C20.12 - Irrigation Controller – Rain Bird ESP-LXME Series w/IQ NCC

Ethernet Cartridge

The ESP-LXME Controller shall be of a hybrid type that combines

electro-mechanical and microelectronic circuitry capable of fully

automatic or manual operation. The controller shall be housed in a wall-

mountable, weather-resistant plastic cabinet with a key-locking cabinet

door suitable for either indoor or outdoor installation. The controller shall

have the ability to be programmed and operated in any one of six

languages: English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, & Portuguese. The

display shall show programming options and operating instructions in the

chosen language without altering the programming or operation

information.

The controller shall have a base station capacity of 8 or 12 stations as well

as 3 expansion slots capable of receiving station modules of 4, 8, or 12

stations to create a controller capacity of up to 48 stations. All stations

shall have the capability of independently obeying or ignoring the weather

sensor as well as using or not using the master valve. Station timing shall

be from 0 minutes to 12 hours. The controller shall have a Seasonal

Adjustment by program which adjusts the station run time from 0 to 300%

in 1% increments.

The controller shall also have a Monthly Seasonal Adjustment of 0 to

300% by month. Station timing with Seasonal Adjustment shall be from 1

second to 16 hours.



The controller shall have 4 separate and independent programs which can

have different start times, start day cycles, and station run times. Each

program shall have up to 8 start times per day for a total of 32 possible

start times per day. The 4 programs shall be allowed to overlap operation

based on user-defined settings which control the number of simultaneous

stations per program and total for the controller. The controller shall allow

up to 5 valves to operate simultaneously per program and total for the

control¬ler including the master valve/pump start circuit. The controller

shall have an electronic, diagnostic circuit breaker that shall sense a station

with an electrical overload or short circuit and shall bypass that station and

continue to operate all other stations.

The controller shall have a 365-day calendar with Permanent Day Off

feature that allows a day(s) of the week to be turned off on any user

selected program day cycle. (Custom, Even, Odd, Odd31, & Cyclical).

Days set to Permanent Day Off shall override the normal repeating

schedule and not water on the specified day(s) of the week. The controller

shall also have a Calendar Day Off feature allowing the user to select up to

5 dates up to 365-days in the future when the controller shall not start

programs. The controller shall incorporate a Rain Delay feature allowing

the user to set the number of days the controller should remain off before

automatically returning to the auto mode.

The controller shall have Cycle+Soak water management software which

is capable of operating each station for a maximum cycle time and a

minimum soak time to reduce water run-off. The maximum cycle time

shall not be extended by Seasonal Adjustment.

The controller shall incorporate a FloManager feature providing real-time

flow, power, and station management. FloManager shall manage the

number of stations operating at any point in time based on water source

capacity, station flow rate, number of valves per station; user defined

simultaneous stations per program and for the controller. The controller

shall provide station priorities to determine the order in which stations

shall operate. The controller shall ignore the station number and instead

operate the highest priority stations first and the lower priority stations

last.

The controller shall offer Water Windows for each program. This function

sets the allowed start and stop time where watering is allowed. If the

watering cannot be completed by the time the Water Window closes, the

stations with remaining run time are paused and watering automatically

resumes when the Water Window opens the next time.



The controller shall offer a Flow Smart Module option which adds flow

sensing functionality. The Flow Smart Module sensor input shall accept a

direct input from a flow sensor with no flow scaling device required.

Module features shall include a FloWatch Learn Flow Utility which learns

the normal flow rate of each station. Each time the station runs FloWatch

compares the current real-time flow rate to the learned rate and takes user

defined actions if high flow, low flow, or no flow is detected. FloWatch

shall automatically determine the location of the flow problem and isolate

the problem by turning off the affected station or master valve. FloWatch

shall be compatible with both normally closed and open master valves. A

Manual Master Valve Water Windows shall be provided to coordinate

daytime manual watering with the flow sensing. This Water Windows

shall offer programmable days of the week and manual watering

additional flow rate.

The controller shall have an alarm indicator light on the front panel visible

through the outer door with the door closed and locked. The alarm light

shall prompt the user to select the alarm softkey to review the alarm

condition(s).

The controller shall be compatible with the IQ v2.0 Central Control

System utilizing IQ-NCC Network Communication Cartridges. The IQ-

NCC Cartridge shall provide communication with the IQ Central

Computer and other controllers via a variety of communication options

(Direct Connect Cable, Phone, GPRS/Cellular, Ethernet, WiFi, Radio, and

IQNet Communication Cable). The IQ v2.0 Central Control System shall

provide remote computer control of the controller providing automatic or

manual program adjustments.

The controller shall offer an optional metal cabinet and pedestal.

The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Corporation.

C20.13 - Irrigation Wire - Paige Irrigation Underground Feeder Cable (UF)

TWU AWG#14 or approved equal.

Common wire shall be white and TWU AWG #12 conductor.

Conductor - Soft drawn bare copper meeting the requirements of ASTM

specification B-3 or B-8.

Temperature Rating - -10°C +75°C

Insulation - Polyvinyl chloride, 75°C rated conforming to UL Standards

493 and 83



Markings - Surface marked with Paige-Electric, voltage rating, size and

type, and UL file numbers

UL Approval - All cables shall be tested physically and electrically in

accordance with UL Standard 493, and 83 (paragraphs 28.1, 29.1 and

29.2). All reels and cartons bear UL and/or c(UL) labels

Splicing Recommendations - Underground splices shall be made in

accordance with National Electrical Code® Articles 300.5 (Underground

Installations) and 110.14 (Electrical Connections) using 3M DBY-6 or

DBR-6 or 82A series connectors, which are UL listed under “UL 486D-

Direct Burial”, for wet or damp locations, 600 volts. Connectors that are

not listed at all, or listed under UL Standard UL 486C as “Compression

Connectors”, shall not be allowed.

C20.14 - Waterproof Wire Connections

3M DBR Series AWG #8-12

3M DBY Series AWG #14-18

C20.15 - Provisional Irrigation Booster Pump

Grundfos CRE Plus 10-6, 5 HP pump with integrated pressure sensor, or

approved equal.

Install per manufacturer`s recommendations.

C20.16 - Expansion Tank

Amtrol ST-20V-C 30 l expansion tank or approved equal.

Install per manufacturer`s recommendations.

C20.17 - Pump Start Relay Switch

Rain Bird PSR Series

C20.18 - Flow Sensor Rain Bird FS200B Series

The flow sensor shall be an in line type with a nonmagnetic, spinning

impeller (paddle wheel) as the only moving part.

The electronics housing shall be glass-filled PPS. The impeller shall be

glass-filled nylon or Tefzel with a UHMWPE or Tefzel sleeve bearing.



The shaft material shall be tungsten carbide. The electronics housing shall

have two, ethylenepropylene O-Rings and shall be easily removed from

the meter body. The sensor electronics will be potted in an epoxy

compound designed for prolonged immersion.

Electrical connections shall be 2 single conductor 18 AWG leads 48

inches (1.2 meters) long. Duration shall be direct burial “UF” type colored

red for the positive lead and black for the negative lead.

The sensor shall operate in line pressures up to 400 psi (27.5 bars) and

liquid temperatures up to 220° F (105°C), and operate in flows of 1/2 foot

(0.15 meters) per second to 15 feet (4.5 meters) per second with linearity

of ±1% and repeatability of ±1%. The meter body shall be cast 85-5-5-5

bronze, in 2" (50 mm), female iron pipe thread sizes.

C20.19 - Field Valve Boxes

All manual and automatic valves in softscape area of field shall be

enclosed in proper irrigation thermo-plastic valve boxes, of size as

required to permit “ease of access” for servicing purposes.

The boxes shall feature locking or hinged covers.

The term “ease of access” means that every solenoid and manual valve

should have adequate access for all types of maintenance.

All valve access boxes shall be installed on a suitable base of gravel,

minimum 150 mm (6”) ¾ washed stone sump for proper foundation of

box and easy leveling of box to proper grade, and also to provide proper

drainage of the access boxes. All valve access boxes shall be provided

with proper length and size extensions, wherever required, to bring the

valve box level with the finish grade, unless specified to be buried below

grade.

Valve boxes shall be located away from the playing field areas wherever

possible.

Locking bolts shall be installed in all valve boxes.

C20.20 - Concrete filled Metal Bollards w/yellow PVC cover

Reliance Foundry Co Ltd metal bollard model R-1007-06

Plastic bollard cover shall be Reliance Foundry R-7155, yellow with red

tape colour



C20.21 - Sleeves

Sleeving material beneath pedestrian pavements shall be PVC CL160,

SDR 26 pipe with solvent welded joints.

Sleeving beneath drives and streets shall be PVC CL 200, SDR 21 pipe

with solvent welded joints.

C20.22 - Spring start-up

Check in with front office and coordinate work with site Head Custodian

around recess times or gym classes

Locate and open all main line irrigation water valves.

Check operation of each sprinkler head, adjust rotation as required and

specified on checklist. Repair any heads that are damaged, fail to rotate or

are leaking. Each zone must be tested for at least 5 minutes to verify and

adjust for rotations.

Open and clean any sprinkler head or valve that fails to operate properly,

repair/replace leaking heads as required.

Check for main line water Leaks at point of connection in the building and

in the field

Check program scheduling to verify network connectivity to IQ2 system

Check flow meter is accurately measuring flow in each zone, record

average flow rates observed by zone and make special notes for any zones

not meeting flow expectations based on nozzle sizes.

Signoff with head custodian and leave the system in automatic mode,

ready for operation.

C20.23 - Fall shut-down / winterization

Check in with front office and coordinate work with site Head Custodian

around recess times or gym classes

Test run system and repair any damage to heads prior to system shutdown

Locate and close all main line irrigation water valves.

Blow out water from all irrigation lines

Signoff with head custodian and leave the system in the off mode.



C20.24 - Pipe Excavation and Backfill – Trenching Practices

Excavate to permit the pipes to be laid at the intended elevations and to

permit work space for installing connections and fittings.

Maximum cover distance from top of pipe or control wire to finish grade

is 600 mm (24”) for all pipe, conduit, and wire.

Maintain at least 4.6 m (15’) clearance from the centerline of any tree.

Backfill only after lines have been reviewed and tested.

Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill. Backfill shall be

free from rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger

than 2-inches in maximum dimension. Remove material not suitable for

backfill. Backfill placed next to pipe shall be free of sharp objects that

may damage the pipe.

Dress backfilled areas to original grade. Either incorporate excess backfill

into existing site grades or dispose of excess backfill off site. Confirm

with Owner’s Representative prior to construction.

C20.25 - Pipe Excavation and Backfill – Trenching Widths

The drawings and details will specify the correct line and grade to be

established by the trenching operation. Aside from these

considerations, good bedding practices shall govern the site.

PVC pipe can be assembled above ground and lowered into position, as

such trench widths may be kept to a minimum.

Minimum clear width of the trench measured at the spring-line must be

300 mm (12”) greater than the outside diameter of the pipe.

The maximum width at the top of the pipe should not be more than the

outside diameter of the pipe plus 600 mm (24”).

If trench width cannot be controlled and will exceed the maximum, then

compacted backfill must be provided for a distance of 2.5 pipe diameters

to either side of the pipe or to the trench wall, for pipe sizes up to 250 mm

(10”).

C20.26 - Pipe Excavation and Backfill – Trenching Depths

For irrigation water pressurized main lines and lateral lines, pipe

should be buried so that the top of the pipe is at least 400 mm (16")

below finished grade.



Where surface loads will be encountered, the minimum height of cover

from the top of the pipe is 450 mm (18"). Before vehicles pass over the

line of the pipe under cover, make sure backfill has been completed and

compacted to at least 95% standard proctor density.

At least 100 mm (4”) of bedding material shall be placed under the pipe if

rocky conditions exist. The bedding may or may not be compacted, but in

any event, the projecting bells of the pipe should be properly relieved in

the trench bottom so that the entire pipe is evenly supported by the

bedding.

For irrigation communication and control, wire shall be buried so that the

top of the bundle is at least 400 mm (16”) below finished grade.

C20.27 - Pipe Excavation and Backfill - Pulling

All PVC pipe that is 3” (75 mm) and larger shall not be pulled.

Where soil conditions allow the pipe depths of cover described above to

be met, the irrigation piping may be directly installed without trenching by

use of a vibratory plough. The feed blade must be equipped with a

minimum bullet diameter of 1 ½ times the outside diameter of the pipe to

be installed.

In each of the above operations, the Irrigation Contractor is responsible for

all pipe interiors to be kept free from dirt and debris. The site is to be

restored to its original condition, including any damage to existing trees,

shrubs, and structures, along with settlement of trenches within the

warranty period. Damaged sod must be repaired and any elevation

changes in the grade must be restored to original levels.

Generally, piping under concrete or asphalt will be installed by jacking,

boring or hydraulic driving. Where any cutting or breaking of sidewalks,

concrete work and/or asphalt is necessary, it shall be removed and

replaced by the Irrigation Contractor at no additional cost to the Client.

Permission to cut or break sidewalks, concrete and/or asphalt will be

obtained from those having proper jurisdiction. Where piping on the

drawings is shown under paved areas but running parallel and adjacent of

planted areas or turf areas, the intent of the drawings is that the pipe be

installed in the planted or turf areas.



C20.28 - Sprinklers and Turf Valves

The Irrigation Contractor will stake out the location of all sprinkler

heads and turf valves prior to commencing installation to allow the

Irrigation Consultant to verify all locations and grant approval.

Spacing of the sprinkler heads and turf valves shall comply with the

manufacturer’s recommendations and the irrigation drawings, and will not

be exceeded except with permission of the Owner.

Install appropriate nozzle per irrigation plan and adjust arc of coverage of

each sprinkler for best performance.

Adjust the radius of throw of each sprinkler for best performance. Ensure

sprinkler does not throw water on to roadways, buildings, parking lots or

anything else that does not require irrigation.

Sprinklers to be adjusted for full rotation, except near field edges, where

sprinklers are to be set to arc within the field area only.

Sprinkler head heights in the field must be set to 1” below the grade of

sod, to prevent any trip hazards. Any heads raised above grade shall be

corrected before the end of the one year warranty period.

All turf valves will be secured and anchored by approved means to prevent

movement of quick coupler during operation.

All quick couplers shall be installed in their own 910-12 valve box with no

other equipment.

Sprinkler heads shall be installed 6 inches from adjacent walls, curbs and

other paved areas and will be set to grade.

C20.29 - Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals

Flush mainline before installation of RCV assembly.

Install where indicated on the drawings. 3M DBR/Y wire connectors and

waterproof sealant shall be used to connect control wires to remote control

valve wires. Install connectors per the manufacturer's recommendations.

Install only one RCV to a valve box. Locate valve box at least 24-inches

from and align with nearby walls or edges of paved areas.

Group RCV assemblies together where practical. Arrange grouped valve

boxes in rectangular patterns. Allow at least 12-inches between valve

boxes.



Adjust PRS Dial to regulate the downstream operating pressure to prevent

misting.

All valve boxes shall be installed on brick supports or as shown on the

details drawings. All valve boxes shall have a minimum 6 inch gravel

sump.

All valve boxes shall be installed flush with the finished grade and fitted

with a bolt lock.

C20.30 - Valve Boxes

All manual and automatic valves shall be enclosed in proper

irrigation thermo-plastic valve boxes, of size as required to permit

“ease of access” for servicing purposes. The term “ease of access”

means that every solenoid and manual valve should have adequate

access for all types of maintenance.

All valves and valve boxes shall be installed in such a way as to be outside

of the marked field of play.

Materials contained in each valve box shall conform to the following

guidelines:

25 mm sprinkler zone valve – maximum of 3 valves in 1 standard

rectangular valve box.

25 mm sprinkler zone valve – 1 valve in a 10” round valve box.

38 mm sprinkler zone valve – maximum 2 valves in a standard rectangular

valve box.

38 mm sprinkler zone valve – 1 valve in a 10” round valve box

50 mm sprinkler zone valve – maximum 2 valves in a jumbo rectangular

valve box.

50 mm sprinkler zone valve – 1 valve in a standard rectangular valve box.

Quick couplers – 1 quick coupler per valve box installed in a 10” Round

valve box. No other equipment shall be installed with a quick coupler.

All isolation valves 75 mm and smaller shall be installed in a 10” round

valve box. 1 valve per box. Isolation valves 75 mm and larger shall be

installed in a standard rectangular valve box. 1 valve per box.



All field wire splices shall be installed in a 10” Round valve box. No

other equipment shall be installed with a field wire splice.

All boxes shall contain bolt locking lids with bolts installed.

C20.31 - Irrigation Controller

Install irrigation controller as per manufacturer`s instructions in the

room as noted on the irrigation drawings. Install per manufacturer’s

recommendations.

Install the NCC Ethernet Communication cartridge at time of installation.

C20.32 - Testing

Notify the Owner three days in advance of testing.

Pipelines jointed with rubber gaskets or threaded connections may be

subjected to a pressure test at any time after partial completion of backfill.

Pipelines jointed with solvent-welded PVC joints shall be allowed to cure

at least 24 hours before testing.

Subsections of mainline pipe may be tested independently, subject to the

review of the Engineer/Landscape Architect/Owner's Representative.

C20.33 - Hydrostatic Pressure Test

Subject mainline pipe to a hydrostatic pressure equal to the

anticipated operating pressure of 80 PSI for two hours. Test with

mainline components installed and in place with all joints exposed for

review

Test to be witnessed in its entirety by the consultant taking readings every

15 minutes.

Backfill pipe sections to prevent movement while under pressure. Expose

couplings and fittings.

Leakage will be detected by visual inspection. Replace defective pipe,

fitting, joint, valve, or appurtenance. Repeat the test until the pipe passes

test.

Cement or caulking to seal leaks is strictly prohibited.



C20.34 - Operational Test

Activate each remote control valve in sequence from controller or

remote. The Irrigation Consultant will visually observe operation,

water application patterns, and leakage.

Replace defective remote control valve, solenoid, wiring, or appurtenance

to correct operational deficiencies.

Replace, adjust, or move water emission devices to correct operational or

coverage deficiencies.

Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, sprinkler, or appurtenance to

correct leakage problems. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is strictly

prohibited.

Repeat test(s) until each lateral passes all tests. Repeat tests, replace

components, and correct deficiencies at no additional cost to the Owner.

C20.35 - Wiring

All 120 VAC wiring to the controller will be enclosed in 38 mm PVC

electrical conduit.

All irrigation pipes shall be installed with a single solid AWG#12 wire in

the trench where control wire is not already in the same trench for future

trace locating.

Trace wire shall originate at the zone control valve any run with all

legs/branches. All splices shall be made water tight with DBY connectors.

All visible low voltage communication wires will be enclosed in a PVC

electrical conduit at least 2 times the diameter of the wire bundle. Direct

burial communication wire may be trenched or placed in a common trench

beneath plastic irrigation pipes and must have a minimum cover of 300

mm (12”).

Provision must be made for expansion and contraction of all direct burial

wire, including protection from foreign objects.

A 600 mm loop of communication wire will be provided at all junctions.

The irrigation contractor shall install continuous runs of communication

cable without any splices in the field.



All electrical wire connections to remote control solenoid valves, sensors,

and decoders will be completed with 3M-DBY weatherproof wire

connectors.

C20.36 - Flushing and Set Up

Upon completion of each section or of the entire installation, and prior

to assembly of nozzles and pop-up components, the control valves will

be opened and a full head of water used to flush out the system.

Sprinkler assembly can then be completed, including all necessary

adjustments and setup procedures.

C20.37 - Sleeves

The Irrigation pipe and wiring will be protected at all sidewalk,

roadway and creek bed crossings with a sleeve measuring 1 ½”

diameter, or two sizes larger than the irrigation pipe, whichever is

larger.

Sleeving material at roadways and creek beds shall have eighteen inches

(18”) of cover and walkways twelve inches, (12”) respectively.


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 Index Part A Page i

INDEX TO PART A - INSTRUCTIONS TO DESIGNERS PART A - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO DESIGNERS Ai INDEX

A.ii INTRODUCTION A.1 CASH ALLOWANCES A.2 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS A.2 CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS A.4 ELECTRICAL ROOM A.5 PROVISION FOR FUTURE ADDITIONS A.6 FUTURE ADDITIONAL COOLING AND SERVICES A.7 AVAILABILITY OF ELECTRICAL SERVICE A.8 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A.9 PERMITS, FEES AND LICENCES A.10 DRAWINGS, RECORDS AND MANUALS A.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.12 INSTRUCTIONS TO MAINTENANCE AND OPERATORS A.13 MINIMUM CONSULTATIVE SERVICES A.14 RESPONSIBILITY OF ENGINEER A.15 DETAILED PROCEDURES TO BE FOLLOWED BY

CONSULTANTS A.16 CODES AND STANDARDS A.17 APPROVAL OF ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND

SPECIFICATIONS A.18 SUB TRADE BIDS AND INFORMATION REQUIRED IN

TENDER A.19 BONDING REQUIREMENTS


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 Part A - General Instructions to Designers Page 1 of 9

PART A - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO DESIGNERS A.ii INTRODUCTION Refer to Architectural Section for Introduction. A.1 CASH ALLOWANCES Refer to Architectural Sections for Cash Allowances Ref. Arch. C.1. The specifications for sections C15, C16, C17, C18, C19, C21, C22, and C23 are to be prepared by the Consultant based on information provided by the applicable PDSB Departemnt. The consultant is then responsible for obtaining quotations from the PDSB list of pre-qualified venders, reviewing the bid submissions and recommending the award of tender. However, for smaller projects ( under an estimated value of $5,000.00 and in compliance with the Public Sector Procurement Policy ) the responsible PDSB representative may assign a pre-approved vender ot complete this work. The Consultant should clarify at the start of the project the manner in which the above sections with the awarded. A.2 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS It is anticipated that these Guidelines will be used extensively by Architects and Engineers preparing documents for Renovations and Additions. For the most part these guidelines will be applicable to Additions in that new spaces are typically created in full compliance with Peel District School Board standards. Renovations, on the other hand, can present a variety of existing conditions which are not in compliance and the designer must assess the applicability of any and all aspects of these Guidelines. For renovations and additions the designer shall, as a minimum: • Survey and document all existing conditions • Review the applicability of guidelines to the renovation or addition in

terms of the building as a whole and the particular renovation or addition.

• Report to the Owner findings where deviations from the Guidelines may be warranted.

• Obtain clear direction for possible deviations from the Guidelines. As stated above, Architectural aspects of the Guidelines are usually applicable whether or not existing conditions are in full compliance. However, other mechanical and electrical systems such as HVAC or PA may be such that "matching existing" are preferable.



A.2 CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS In order to avoid conflict with other systems in the building and the site, the Engineer must maintain effective co-ordination with Architects, Structural Engineers, Mechanical Engineers, Civil Engineers and other groups involved in the design and detailing work. The Engineer, at the preliminary design stage, shall review with the Architect and the associated design disciplines, the ceiling space provision and ensure that sufficient space has been allowed for the electrical features. All recesses and furred space required for electrical services shall be confirmed with the Architects and indication made on the electrical drawings as to where services are so treated. Where recesses or openings are provided for electrical equipment called for in the base bid, a check shall be made to ensure that alternate equipment which is being proposed will also fit into the space provided. A.4 ELECTRICAL ROOM During the preliminary design stages, the Engineer shall review the size and shape of the proposed electrical room to ensure that switchboards, panels, etc. can be accommodated in a manner that will not create problems at a later date and that will facilitate a minimum electrical growth of at least 12 portable classrooms @ 14 kW each, single phase and provide in excess of the minimum clearance. To facilitate this expansion, there must be at least 1200 mm of free wall space beside the existing 120/208 Volt, or 347/600 Volt section of the main switchboard. Where electrical rooms are located in a sprinklered building, drip shields shall be provided on all electrical distribution equipment including the standby generator. A.5 PROVISION FOR FUTURE ADDITIONS The Engineer must make adequate allowance in his design to accommodate any obvious future expansion of the school including "Portables". These shall be included in the sizing of switchboards, distribution panels, step down transformers and feeders. Design capacities of connections for future are to be shown on the drawings to indicate loads in kW.



A.6 FUTURE ADDITIONAL COOLING AND SERVICES Reserved for later use. A.7 AVAILABILITY OF ELECTRICAL SERVICE The Engineer must check with the local Hydro Utility on the availability, quantity and location of a new electrical power service. A.8 SERVICE CONNECTIONS It is the responsibility of the Consulting Engineer to advise the Board on sizing and locations for each of the following: • Hydro • Telephone • Cable TV • Fibre Optic Cabling

The following items will be applied for and paid for (under cash allowances) by the contractor and will form part of the contract documents. • Hydro connection

Specify that prior to payment for electrical connections, the contractor must present a copy of the invoice from Hydro, showing the amounts paid. A.9 PERMITS, FEES AND LICENCES The specifications shall make it understood that all permits, fees and licences, for electrical services, shall be obtained and paid for by the electrical subcontractors. These items shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: • Hydro Inspections • Fire Alarm Testing & Verification The Electrical Engineer shall apply and pay for Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) Approval.



A.10 DRAWINGS, RECORDS AND MANUALS A complete set of electrical Tender Documents shall be kept up to date on the site by the electrical subcontractor. These drawings and specifications shall be for the exclusive use of the Board's Staff. They shall show all changes or deviations including, but not limited to, feeders and cables and in the case of buried lines, both inside and outside the building. All such lines shall be dimensioned from known reference points. As part of the basic service of the Electrical Consulting Engineer, shall specify to the Contractor that he maintain an updated set of drawings which incorporate all Addenda, revisions and changes made during the construction period. Upon completion of the project, Contractor shall place all updated information on drawings in CADD electronic format and copy to disc to form a complete set of reference drawings clearly marked "As-Built" showing all changes at the completion date. The Electrical Consulting Engineer will review the as-built files/drawings during construction as well as prior to preparation of the electronic files. Ref. Arch. C.1. A.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS It shall be the responsibility of the Consulting Engineer to specify and review Operating and Maintenance Manuals provided by the Contractor. Two copies of each of the operating and maintenance manuals will be provided and supplied to the to the Board. They shall be delivered before release of holdback via the Architect. A.12 INSTRUCTIONS TO MAINTENANCE AND OPERATORS The consulting engineer shall co-operate with the commissioner to instruct fully the Board's Maintenance and Operating Staff. It is the intention that the personnel located in the School, and such maintenance personnel who may in the future become involved, should become fully familiar with all systems and equipment during the course of construction, so that these senior operating and maintenance staff will be in a position to instruct the school staff when appointed.



The Electrical Consulting Engineer shall personally inspect the operation of the complete electrical system (all switchboard and distribution panel breakers and/or disconnects, etc.) During this demonstration, the leading subcontractors shall personally inspect, adjust and demonstrate the operation of the fire alarm system and any other systems which are "in contract". An appointment shall be made to carry out these demonstrations as soon as the Consulting Engineer is satisfied that the systems are satisfactory. The Electrical needs of Mechanical Commissioning shall be coordinated with the Electrical and Mechanical Consultants. A.13 MINIMUM CONSULTATIVE SERVICES The minimum services for all of the Architect's Consultants are identified in the Board/Architect Agreement. Refer to the latest Board/Architect Agreement. The Contract Documents issued for tender shall be clearly identified "FOR TENDER ONLY". As part of the Consultants' Agreement with the Architect, immediately after approval of the tender by the Board, and prior to the start of construction, the Consultants must issue a new set of Contract Documents clearly identified "FOR CONSTRUCTION ONLY". The "For Construction Only" Contract Documents will include all addenda issued during the tendering period and all post tender revisions and changes as a result of negotiations between the Contractor and the Board. Both the drawings, as well as the specifications, must be so amended. The Board will pay for additional printing of the new "For Construction Only" Contract Documents as part of the Reimbursable Expenses. Two weeks prior to the scheduled occupancy of any school facility, all the Architect's Consultants, jointly with the Architect, shall be required, by signed statement, to identify those building works, including deficiencies, which must be completed or corrected for reasons of Public Health and Safety before the building is occupied. Prior to occupancy, the Architect and the Architect's Consultants, following review of the corrective work done by the Contractor, must sign a joint statement that the school facility is safe for occupancy. All the Architect's Consultants shall review marked up drawings prepared by the Contractor during the course of construction and accurately record all changes, additions or deletions that occur during construction as a result of the Work; which have been identified by the contractor in accordance with the actual installation of the Work, Change Orders, etc., to the best of their collective knowledge, opinion and belief.



As part of the basic services, the Architect and the Architect's Consultants shall issue appropriate affidavits to the authorities having jurisdiction that the Work was completed in "General Compliance" with the Contract Documents, regardless of the time and effort expended by the Architect and/or the Architect's Consultants in issuing same. A.14 RESPONSIBILITY OF ENGINEER The Peel District School Board Electrical Design Manual is not intended to limit the ideas and initiative of Consultants but to indicate to them what has been found to be good design practice up to the present. Should the Consultants find discrepancies or errors in this manual, they must be brought to the attention of the Board's staff, in writing. Acknowledgement of the Board staff of such discrepancies or errors must be made before any deviation from the Manual can be made by the Consultant. The Consultant shall note the paragraph on the cover page with respect to payment for errors and omissions which may emanate as a result of a deviation from this Manual. Facilitate an early meeting with the Architect to discuss the electrical design concepts, Power & Telephone Service Features, pad mount transformer capacity and location, electrical room features etc. At the sketch plan stage, arrange a meeting with the Board's Staff for the review of preliminary electrical design sketches showing: the general layout, telephone/P.A. equipment provision, power distribution concepts, computer wiring schemes and the location of all electrical rooms. Also at the sketch plan stage, a meeting with the Board's Maintenance Supervisor/ Electrical and the appropriate Area Supervisor of Maintenance and Operations may be arranged to review preliminary electrical design sketches showing all of the above but including specified manufacturers and lighting concepts. Prior to the final submission of Drawings and Specifications to the Board's Staff for their review, the Engineer shall review the documents to ensure that the submission is compatible in all respects, that all the requirements of the Design and Co-ordination Manual have been incorporated and that the approved Construction Cost Estimate has been accommodated. It is a professional services contract requirement that this be done and the Engineer's schedule for the release of the final document shall make allowance for his final checking and confirmation of these features. The submission of the final complete drawings and specifications for the Board's review shall be through the Architect's office.



Ensure that all the suggested Electrical alternate prices and separate prices are properly and clearly referenced on the Electrical Tender Form or Supplementary Form of Tender, prepared by Consultant and incorporated in the Contract Documents as prepared by the Architect. A.15 DETAILED PROCEDURES TO BE FOLLOWED BY

CONSULTANTS Attend a preliminary meeting with the Architect to discuss the Electrical Design concept, special problems, fan room locations, etc. As soon as small scale sketch plans are received, arrange a meeting with the Board's staff and provide a preliminary design layout sketch showing the manner in which the mains and various services will be run, the ventilation and heating concept, and the location of all fan and equipment rooms. Maintain contact during the design stages and discuss problems on the telephone. Ensure that all requirements of the Manual are included in the Drawings and Specifications before the drawings are submitted for checking. Review drawings and design briefly immediately prior to the submission of the final checking set to the Board including construction cost estimates one week prior to the submission of the checking set. Submit a final complete set of plans and specifications for checking through the Architect's office prior to tender. Ensure that all the alternate bidders are coordinated in the Board Standard General Contractor's Bid Form. A.16 CODES AND STANDARDS Design, specifications and installation must comply with all current applicable Codes and Standards.



A.17 APPROVAL OF ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

After the Consulting Engineer has checked his drawings thoroughly and incorporated all of the requirements of the various governing authorities (Building Dept. etc.), a complete set of check drawings showing at least 90% of the work is to be submitted to the Board with the Architectural drawings and specifications for final scrutiny by the Board's officials and at least three weeks prior to tender. The check set of drawings and specifications will be marked up by the Board's staff and any necessary revisions must be made by the Consulting Engineers. One complete set of tender drawings, specifications and details must be delivered to the Board at least two week prior to going to tender along with revised construction estimates. A.18 SUB TRADE BIDS AND INFORMATION REQUIRED IN TENDER Attached to the electrical tender form shall be a list of subcontractors proposed to be used by the electrical contractor. This list should be set up in the following manner: • "We propose to use the following subcontractors, the portion to be

performed by each being as indicated". (No more than one subcontractor being proposed for any such portion.)

WORK TO BE DONE SUB CONTRACTOR SUPERVISING PERSONNEL Fire Alarm System Other Systems The Engineer must specify in the Contract Documents the following clauses which should assure that the Board obtains the services of a subcontractor listed on the Electrical Tender: • "The Electrical Contractor agrees to employ those subcontractors

proposed in the Electrical Form(s)of Tender and accepted by the Board at the signing of the Contract with the General Contractor.

• The Board may, for reasonable cause object to the use of a proposed

subcontractor and consequently, may require the Electrical Contractor to employ one of the other subcontractor bidders.

• In the event that the Board requires a change from a proposed

subcontractor originally proposed by the Electrical Contractor, the Contract Price shall be adjusted by the difference in cost.

• The Electrical Contractor shall not be required to employ as a

subcontractor, a firm to whom he may reasonably object."



A.19 BONDING REQUIREMENTS Review bonding requirements with Prime Consultant. Ref. Arch. C.1


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 Part B - Index Page i of ii

PART B - TYPICAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ROOMS B1 - Standard Classroom (Single) B2 - Standard Classroom (Double) B3 - Kindergarten (Single) B4 - Kindergarten (Double) B5 - Coat Room (Kindergarten) B6 - Vestibule (Kindergarten) B7 - Washrooms (Kindergarten) B8 - Music Rooms (Instrumental/Vocal) B9 - General Office B10 - Principal's Office B11 - Vice-Principal's Office B12 - Work Room (General Office) B13 - Library Resource Centre B14 - Library Work Room (office) B15 - Seminar Room B16 - Special Education Room B17 - Special Education Seminar Room B18 - Health Room B19 - Washroom (Health Room) B20 - General Purpose Room (Gym) B21 - Stage/Lunch Room B22 - Storage Room (General Purpose Room - Gym) B23 - Change Room (Boys and Girls) B24 - Staff Room B25 - Staff Washroom B26 - Student Washroom (Boys and Girls) B27 - Storage/Work Rooms B28 - Custodian's Office B29 - Garbage Room B30 - Custodian's Storage Rooms B31 - Mechanical Room B32 - Corridors (First & Second Floors) B33 - Stairwells B34 - Main Entrance Lobby B35 - Vestibule (Main Entrance) B36 - Secondary Vestibule B37 - Exterior B38 - SMT Classroom B39 - Art Room B40 - Prep Room B41 - Hub Room (First Floor) B42 - Hub Room (Second Floor) B43 - Electrical Room


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 Part B - Index Page ii of ii

B44 - Sprinkler Room B45 - Exterior Storage B46 - Sports Equipment Storage B47 - Boiler Room B48 - Elevator Machine Room B49 - Elevator B50 - Handicap Lift B51 - Stage Storage Room B52 - Computer Room B53 - Resource Room B54 - Music Practice Room B55 - Instructors Room B56 - Instructors Washroom B57 - Withdrawal Room B58 - Ortho Washroom B59 - Handicap Washrooms B60 - Teachers Workroom B61 - Academic Storage Room B62 - Computer Closet B63 - Guidance Resource Room B64 - Counselling Room B65 - Modular Control Panel (MCP)

Peel District School Board Design Guidelines Manual for Junior & Middle Schools Electrical

Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 Part B - Typical Electrical Requirements for Rooms Page 1 of 17

PART B - TYPICAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ROOMS B1 - Standard Classroom (Single) • Standard Modular Control Panel (MCP) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • Two duplex receptacles per wall • Two data outlets (adjacent a receptacle, one at side, one at rear) • One GFCI duplex receptacle (above sink counter) where applicable • One duplex receptacle in ceiling plate • Security system motion detector • Surface wiremold DS4000 for future VGA cable (located at rear of room) • Fire alarm speaker

B2 - Standard Classroom (Double) • Two Modular Control Panels (MCP) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • Two duplex receptacles per wall (on small side of wall) • Four data outlets (2 on large side walls, 2 one back walls adjacent a

receptacle) • Four duplex receptacles per wall (on larger side of wall) • One GFCI receptacle (above each sink counter), where applicable • Two duplex receptacles mounted in ceiling space • Two security system motion detectors • Surface wiremold V4000 for future VGA cable (located at rear of room) • Two fire alarm horns B3 - Kindergarten (Single) • Standard Modular Control Panel (MCP) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • Two duplex receptacles per wall T.P. (Tamper Proof) • One data outlet on wall (adjacent a receptacle) • Security motion detector • Fire alarm speaker B4 - Kindergarten (Double) • Two Standard Modular Control Panels (MCP) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • Four duplex receptacles per long wall. • Two duplex on short wall. • Two data outlets per wall (adjacent a receptacle) • Two security motion detectors • Fire alarm speaker



B5 - Coat Room (Kindergarten) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • One duplex receptacle • One fire alarm manual station at vestibule exit • One exit light. B6 - Vestibule (Kindergarten) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'B1' • No switch - connect fixture to coat room

B7 - Washrooms (Kindergarten) • Fluorescent fixture - one type 'B1' • One single pole light switch to control light fixture and exhaust

B8 - Music Rooms (Instrumental/Vocal) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • Modular Control Panel (MCP) • Sixteen duplex receptacles (located as shown). • Three data outlets (on wall adjacent a receptacle) • Security motion sensor • One duplex GFI receptacle (above counter at sink) • Two duplex receptacles ceiling mounted (separate circuits) • Fire alarm speaker/strobe combo B9 - General Office • Fluorescent fixtures type 'O' • One fixture unswitched on emergency circuit • Single pole 3-way light switches as required. • Three 4-plex receptacles (one per secretarial workstation). • One TV outlet • Three data outlets (one per workstation) • Three telephone outlets (one per workstation) • One desk mounted fire alarm console (see PA Specifications) • Two split receptacles in ceiling space • Two ceiling mounted PA speakers • Call-for-assistance horns (Ortho Washrooms) • Three duplex receptacles located at Office entrance • Two duplex receptacles located on opposite walls • Door hold open devices complete with smoke detectors and relay base • 4 x 4 junction box for Administrative Console PA unit • Intrusion infrared detectors to cover complete office area • Fire alarm speaker • One clock hanger receptacle complete with clock



B10 - Principal's Office • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'O' • One single pole light switch • One duplex receptacle on each wall • One 4-plex receptacle at Workstation • One telephone outlet • Two data outlets • One clock hanger receptacle complete with clock • One security motion sensor • One ceiling mounted split receptacle B11 - Vice-Principal's Office • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'O' • One single pole light switch • One duplex receptacle on each wall • Two 4-plex receptacles (one at each Workstation) • One TV outlet • Two telephone outlets (one at each Workstation) • Two data outlets (one at each Workstation) • One microphone outlet • One clock hanger receptacle complete with clock • One security motion sensor • One ceiling mounted split receptacle B12 - Work Room (General Office) • Fluorescent fixtures type 'O' • One single pole light switch • Two duplex 20A T-slot receptacles (photocopiers) • Two ceiling mounted split receptacles • One telephone outlet • Two general duplex receptacles • Surface wiremold DS4000 complete with duplex receptacles and data

outlets at each counter • Pushbutton for School lockdown procedure interconnected to PA system B13 - Library Resource Centre • Fluorescent fixtures type 'O' • Modular Control Panel (MCP) • Surface wiremold DS4000 complete with duplex receptacles and data

outlets (quantities as required) • Four duplex receptacles with USB charging (one at each workstation) • Four data outlets (one at each workstation) • Two TV outlets complete with adjacent receptacle



• Security motion sensor • Two ceiling mounted PA speakers • Two 25 mm conduits in ceiling space, one to lighting panel and one to

Computer Hub for future use. • Fire alarm speaker B14 - Library Work Room (office) • Fluorescent fixtures type 'O' • One single pole light switch • Two duplex receptacles (one for TV distribution cabinet). • One TV outlet • One PA speaker • One Telephone outlet • Television distribution centre • One GFI receptacle at counter sink • One clock hanger receptacle complete with clock • One security motion sensor B15 - Seminar Room • Fluorescent fixtures type 'A' • Modular Control Panel (MCP) • One duplex receptacle with USB charging on each wall • One TV outlet (adjacent receptacle) • One security motion sensor • One fire alarm horn B16 - Special Education Room • Same as standard classroom (single) with the following additions • One duplex receptacle at front wall • Two ceiling mounted split duplex receptacles • One data outlet per Workstation • One duplex receptacle with USB charging per Workstation • One GFI receptacle at counter/sink • One duplex receptacle for Refrigerator • One stove receptacle • Two 20 Amp receptacles • One stove hood connection and circuit • One 15A circuit for hard wiring dishwasher

B17 - Special Education Seminar Room • Fluorescent fixtures type 'A' • Modular Control Panel (MCP) • One duplex receptacle on each wall



• One TV outlet (adjacent receptacle) • One security motion sensor • One fire alarm horn B18 - Health Room • Fluorescent fixture - type 'A' • One single pole light switch • Two duplex receptacles - one for refrigerator • One duplex GFI receptacle at sink/counter • One fire alarm strobe B19 - Washroom (Health Room) • Fluorescent fixture - type 'B' • One single pole light switch to control light fixture • One duplex GFI receptacle at Sink/Counter

B20 - General Purpose Room (Gym) • Fluorescent fixtures - types 'G' & 'G1' • Three-way switches to control lighting (quantity as required) • Provide approximately 15% of total number of fixtures on emergency

circuit and switch from Custodian's Office • Two front-of-house spot lights complete with lighting channels • Twelve duplex receptacles - two on front wall, two on back wall and four

on each side wall • Three clock hanger receptacles complete with clocks and wireguards • One projector jack at rear room mounted at 36" A.F.F. with duplex

receptacle adjacent • Exit lights as required complete with wireguards • Fire alarm pull stations as required (complete with covers) • Four fire alarm speakers/strobe complete with wireguards • PA speakers as required complete with wireguards • Duplex receptacles ceiling mounted for destratification fans (quantity as

required) • Destratification fans speed control switch (one per bay) • Hearing assistive listening system • Motorized folding curtain motor and controls • Motorized basketball backstop motor and controls • Two PA units complete with call switch • One hand set (Telephone/PA) C/W recessed box plus surface ringer (per

gym area) • Lock down horn/light



B21 - Stage/Lunch Room • Fluorescent fixtures - types 'K' and 'K1' • 3-way light switches as required • Three fixtures on emergency circuits switched from Custodian's Office • Modular Control Panel (MCP) • Eight duplex receptacles and six data outlets on surface mounted wiremold

raceway located at back wall. • Two PA speakers • Exit lights as required • One microphone jack at side stage • One project jack at side stage • Two duplex receptacles, one at either side of stage opening • Two stage lighting channels complete with wire and stage fixtures • Key switch for Stage Curtain Control • Motorized projector screen complete with toggle switch controlling

receptacle at ceiling • Fire alarm strobe • House Lights - dimming station/console • House Lights - dimming control panel • One data outlet on stage face for projector use

B22 - Storage Room (General Purpose Room - Gym) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'F' • one single pole light switch • Four duplex receptacles (two on each side wall) B23 - Change Room (Boys and Girls) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'F' • Provide two fixtures on night light/emergency circuit • No light switches, control is from circuit breaker in Corridor lighting panel • One duplex receptacle near entrance to Gym • One fire alarm speaker complete with wire guard • Two PA Speakers complete with wire guards

B24 - Staff Room • Modular control panel • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • One single pole light switch, as required • Five duplex receptacles on perimeter walls • One ceiling mount PA speaker • One telephone outlet • One 50 Amp stove receptacle • One fire alarm speaker



• Two data outlets at workstations • One circuit for hard wiring dishwasher • One duplex receptacle for refrigerator • Two duplex receptacles for microwaves • One connection and circuit for Stove Hood • Two split duplex receptacles at counter • Two split receptacles in ceiling • One Voice/Telephone outlet • One security motion detector

B25 - Staff Washroom • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'B' • No light switching, control from circuit breaker in corridor lighting panel • One GFI receptacle at entrance • One fire alarm speaker • One PA speaker • One connection for hand dryer B26 - Student Washroom (Boys and Girls) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'F' • No switching, control from circuit breaker in corridor lighting panel • One GFI receptacle at entrance • One Emergency light per washroom • Two connections for hand dryers • One fire alarm speaker • One PA speaker in ceiling • Connection for urinal auto flush system B27 - Storage/Work Rooms • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'B' • One single pole light switch • Two duplex receptacles mounted at 36" above floor • One clock hanger receptacle complete with clock • One telephone outlet • One PA speaker ceiling mounted

B28 - Custodian's Office • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'B' • Provide one fixture unswitched on emergency circuit • Three-way switching as required • Exit sign at exterior doors, as required • Three duplex receptacles on walls • Two duplex receptacles for stacking washer/dryer



• One PA unit complete with call switch • One fire alarm manual station as required at outside Exit doors • One fire alarm strobe. (speaker will interfere with microphones) • One receptacle for auto scrubber battery charger • One data outlet adjacent proposed desk location • One telephone outlet • Connection for hot water tank • Security motion sensor • One fire alarm control panel • One Security/Intrusion alarm control panel • One EMS panel connection and telephone outlet • One emergency battery pack unit complete with two heads • One clock hanger outlet complete with clock

B29 - Garbage Room • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'L' • One single pole light switch • One duplex receptacle • One manual electric starter for exhaust fan B30 - Custodian's Storage Rooms • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'B' • One single pole light switch • Two duplex receptacles (one red for Service) • One PA speaker • One telephone outlet B31 - Mechanical Room • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'L' • Light switches as required • Three duplex receptacles mounted at 48" A.F.F. • Fire alarm speaker/strobe, as required • Connections for mechanical equipment, as required • Exit signs, as required • PA speakers complete with call in switch (as required) • TV cabinet complete with duplex receptacle • EMS panel connection and telephone outlet • One data outlet • One telephone outlet • Motor control centre(s), as required C/W Lamicoid labels



B32 - Corridors (First & Second Floors) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'B' • Provide emergency/night unswitched circuit every fourth fixture • Control fixtures from corridor lighting panel • Duplex receptacles on maximum 15m (50 foot) centres, T-slot, 20 Amp • PA speakers on approximately 10m (35 foot) centres • Fire alarm speaker on maximum 15 m (50 foot) centres, flush type wall

type • Exit lights as required • Fire alarm manual stations at exit doors as required • Intrusion alarm motion sensors as required • Fire alarm smoke detectors, spaced as required by Code B33 - Stairwells • Fluorescent fixtures - types 'A', 'B' and 'S' • Fluorescent wall brackets to be used on landings at 2.5 m (8'-0") mounting

height • Control fixtures from emergency circuits • No switching control • One duplex receptacle at ground floor landing • Fire alarm hold open devices and smoke detectors complete with relay

base, as required

B34 - Main Entrance Lobby • Fluorescent type fixtures type (limited decorative treatment), types 'N', 'P',

'P1' & 'P2'. Fixtures on emergency circuit as required • Two duplex receptacles • Exit lights as required • Fire alarm manual stations as required C/W STI cover with horn. • Halogen lamp fixture for display case • Single pole switch for display case mounted adjacent • Intrusion alarm motion sensors, as required • Automatic door operators complete with pushbutton controls • One TV outlet (mounted below display case) • One data outlet (mounted below display case) • One telephone outlet (mounted below display case) • Fire alarm hold open devices with smoke detectors complete with relay

bases as required • PA speaker - ceiling mounted



B35 - Vestibule (Main Entrance) • Fluorescent fixtures - types 'N', 'P', 'P1' & 'P2' on emergency/night light

circuit, as required • Two duplex receptacles • Fire alarm & Supervisory Trouble Annunciator graphics • Intrusion alarm remote key and key pad • Automatic door opener, controls and pushbuttons • PA speaker in ceiling • Fire alarm pullstations, as required • Security motion sensor B36 - Secondary Vestibule • Fluorescent fixtures (to match corridors) • No switching B37 - Exterior • HPS Type 'H' outdoor fixtures, surface mounted on rear and sides of

building, number as required • HPS Type 'J' outdoor flood fixtures in parking area, number as required • Control of outdoor lighting with EMS control system through timed

switch and photo cells • Outdoor program bells - number as required around entire building • Type 'M' fixtures installed recessed in underside of Vestibules and canopy,

number as required • All exterior doors leading into the building to have intrusion alarm door

switches including main entrance and secondary vestibules • Provide underground ducts for future portable as required, include

separate ducts for power, fire alarm, security, PA Intercom, data/telephone as required and terminate at free wall adjacent associated panels and buried 2'-6" deep, 10'-0" beyond asphalt paved area

B38 - SMT Classroom • Modular Control Panel (MCP) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • Seven - 20 Amp single burner receptacles each on a separate circuit; five

mounted above counter and two mounted on the vertical face of counters • Twelve duplex receptacles • Four data outlets (adjacent receptacles at workstations) • One ceiling mounted duplex • One fire alarm horn • One security motion sensor • On/Off keyswitch, pilot light, contactor and red dome light (type 'C')

interconnected to illuminate when power to burner receptacles is On



• Two keyswitches complete with pilot lights mounted on vertical face of the Instructors Desk to control respective Hot and Cold water valves

B39 - Art Room • Modular Control Panel (MCP) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • Two split receptacles at counter/sink • Two duplex receptacles at front of room • Two data outlets at front of room • Six duplex receptacles (two at each workstation) • Three data outlets (one at each workstation) • One duplex receptacle at side wall • One ceiling mounted duplex receptacle • One fire alarm horn • One security motion sensor

B40 - Prep Room • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • Single pole light switch • One clock hanger outlet complete with clock • One PA Speaker complete with call switch • One fire alarm strobe • One telephone outlet • One duplex receptacle • Three duplex receptacles and three data outlets mounted in wiremold

DS4000 raceway located above counter at rear of room

B41 - Hub Room (First Floor) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'L' • Single pole light switch • Two quad receptacles, isolated ground • Two duplex receptacles • One 2.4 m x 2.4 m x 19 mm thick plywood backboard • Six 50 mm conduit sleeves from First Floor Hub Room to Second Floor

Hub Room (if required) • Six 50 mm conduit sleeves from Hub Room to First Floor Corridor • One telephone outlet • One manual electric starter complete with pilot light for exhaust fan c/w

thermostat control • PA system wiring junction box



B42 - Hub Room (Second Floor) • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'F' • Single pole light switch • One quad receptacle • Two duplex receptacles • One manual electric starter complete with pilot light for exhaust fan c/w

thermostat control • Six 50 mm conduit sleeves from First Floor Hub Room to Second Floor

Hub Room (if required) • Six 50 mm conduit sleeves from Hub Room to Second Floor Corridor • One 2.4 m x 2.4 m x 19 mm thick plywood backboard B43 - Electrical Room • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'L' • One fixture unswitched on emergency circuit • One single pole light switch • Main switchboard and distribution panels, as required • Transformers, as required • Hydro metering cabinet to suit Local Utility • One duplex receptacle located adjacent metering cabinet • One telephone outlet (for remote monitoring of meter) • One duplex receptacle on distribution panel wall • One 2.4 m x 2.4 m x 19 mm thick plywood backboard for incoming

telephone and Cable TV • Two duplex isolated ground receptacles mounted on backboard • One telephone outlet mounted on backboard • One fire alarm horn • One emergency lighting battery pack unit • One duplex receptacle for emergency light unit • Exhaust Fan c/w thermostat control B44 - Sprinkler Room • Fluorescent fixture - type 'L' • Single pole light switch • One PA speaker • One duplex receptacle • Connection to all mechanical pumps. equipment, supervised valves,

pressure switches, flow switches, as required C/W Lamicoid labels B45 - Exterior Storage • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'D' • Single pole light switch • One duple receptacle • One PA speaker



• One fire alarm manual station • One fire alarm speaker • One security door contact at outside door • Two manual electric starters complete with pilot lights for exhaust fans B46 - Sports Equipment Storage • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'L' • Single pole light switch • One PA speaker • One duplex receptacle weatherproof type • One fire alarm horn • Exhaust Fan c/w thermostat control • One security door contact at outside door • One fire alarm manual station

B47 - Boiler Room • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'L', as required • Single pole light switch • Hard-wired connection and circuit to Boiler Control Panel • One duplex receptacle • One fire alarm horn/strobe • Two A/C SPST toggle switches for boiler disconnect means mounted in

red surface box and located at entrance • One manual electric starter complete with pilot light for Boiler Room

exhaust fan • Hardwired connection to Boiler(s) power circuits and control circuits, as

required B48 - Elevator Machine Room • Fluorescent fixture - type 'F' • Single pole light switch • One duplex receptacle • One telephone outlet • Two 50 mm conduits run between elevator controller in Machine Room

and Elevator (run in ceiling space) • One 3-pole fused disconnect switch (sized to suit) complete with auxiliary

contacts and 208V, 3∅ feeder connected to elevator controller • One 15A-1P fused disconnect switch, wire and circuit for Elevator cab

lights



B49 - Elevator • One 100 Watt A-lamp equivalent LED and fixture complete with wire

guard located in Elevator pit • One single pole light switch • One duplex receptacle ground fault type located in elevator pit • One heat detector mounted at top of shaft • Two 50 mm conduit between Elevator and Elevator Machine Room

B50 - Handicap Lift • One 100 Watt A-lamp equivalent LED and fixture complete with wire

guard located in lift pit • One single pole light switch • One duplex receptacle ground fault type located in lift pit • One fused disconnect switch, 3 pole, sized to suit (mounted local to lift) • One 25 mm conduit between lift controller and disconnect

B51 - Stage Storage Room • Fluorescent fixture - type 'B' • single pole light switch • one duplex receptacle B52 - Computer Room • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'V' • Modular Control Panel (MCP) • Surface wiremold DS4000 complete with duplex receptacles and data

outlets (quantities as required) • Two quad receptacles located at rear wall • Two data receptacles located in wiremold • One duplex receptacle located at front wall adjacent TV outlet • One TV outlet located at front wall (adjacent receptacle) • One fire alarm horn • One security motion sensor located at rear of room • Two empty 53 mm conduit sleeve in ceiling space from Computer Room

to Library/Reference Room and one to Corridor • One ceiling mounted receptacle from projector • Surface wiremold for future VGA cable

B53 - Resource Room • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'O' • Modular Control Panel (MCP) • Three duplex receptacles (one on each side wall and one on rear wall) • One data outlet (located adjacent rear wall receptacle) • 3 meter length of surface wiremold DS4000 complete with three duplex



receptacles and three data outlets located at front wall • Two ceiling mounted split receptacles • One fire alarm strobe light • One TV outlet located in cabinet • One duplex receptacle located adjacent TV outlet • Surface wiremold of future projector video cable B54 - Music Practice Room • Fluorescent fixture - type 'A' • Single pole light switch • One fire alarm strobe light • One PA speaker • Two duplex receptacles

B55 - Instructors Room • Fluorescent fixture - type 'A' • Three-way light switches as required • One clock hanger outlet complete with clock • One PA speaker • Two duplex outlets, one on each side wall • Two data outlets, one on each side wall (adjacent receptacles) • One electric manual starter complete with pilot light for exhaust fan • One 30 Amp receptacle for Dryer • One 15 Amp duplex receptacle for Washer B56 - Instructors Washroom • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • Single pole light switch • One PA speaker • One duplex receptacle at Sink, ground fault type and ganged together with

light switch • One data outlet • Connection for electric hand-dryer • Electric manual starter complete with pilot light for exhaust fan (as

required) B57 - Withdrawal Room • Incandescent recessed pot lights - type 'T' • Single pole dimmer switch • One PA speaker • One duplex receptacle



• One fire alarm strobe • One security motion sensor B58 - Ortho Washroom • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • Fluorescent shower fixture - type 'R' • Single pole light switches as required • Electric manual starter complete with pilot light for exhaust fan • One duplex receptacle • One connection for hand-dryer • One 30 Amp receptacle for Dryer • One 15 Amp duplex receptacle for Washer • One red service duplex receptacle 20A, T0slot • Two call-for-assistance pull cord stations complete with horns, dome

lights (type 'C1') and interconnection to General Office buzzer and lights. Locate call assist dome light in Corridor above door

• Automatic Door Operator c/w “push to lock button and” “occupied” sign

B59 - Barrier Free Washrooms • Fluorescent fixture - type 'F' • Single pole light switch • One duplex receptacle, ground fault type • One connection for hand-dryer • Automatic Door Operator c/w “push to lock button and” “occupied” sign B60 - Teachers Workroom • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'A' • Modular Control Panel (MCP) • Four duplex receptacles (two on each side wall) • One 20A receptacle for photocopier at counter • Three data outlets • One fire alarm strobe

B61 - Academic Storage Room • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'L' • Single pole light switch • One duplex receptacle next to door

B62 - Computer Closet • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'L' • Single pole light switch • One 4-plex receptacle isolated ground type on separate circuit • Six 50 mm conduit sleeves from Computer Closet to Corridor



B63 - Guidance Resource Room • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'O' • Single pole light switch • One fixture unswitched on emergency circuit • One clock hanger outlet complete with clock • One security motion sensor • Four duplex receptacles • Two data outlets (adjacent a receptacle) • One red service duplex receptacle, 20A T-slot • One ceiling mounted PA speaker • Two split receptacles in ceiling space • Three split duplex receptacles for battery chargers mounted above counter • One data outlet - mounted above counter • One telephone outlet - mounted above counter • One ceiling mounted PA speaker B64 - Counselling Room • Fluorescent fixtures - type 'O' • Single pole light switch • Two duplex receptacles in two gang box (one at each Workstation) • Two double data outlets (one at each Workstation) • Two telephone outlets (one at each Workstation) • One clock hanger receptacle complete with clock • One security motion sensor • One duplex receptacle B65 - Modular Control Panel (MCP) • Standard Modular Control Panel (MCP) complete with the following

devices: 1 - red service duplex receptacle T-slot, 20A 1 - 4-plex receptacle 1 - data outlet 1 - clock hanger receptacle complete with plug in clock 1 - room thermostat 1 - PA speaker 1 - handset or call switch (telephone) 1 - TV outlet Switching, 120 Volt, as required


Version 2.5 Issued June 21, 2017 Ci - Index Page i of ii


C.i INDEX

C.II INTRODUCTION

C1 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE PROVISION

C2 - PREFERRED BUILDING DISTRIBUTION VOLTAGE

C3 - ESSENTIAL SERVICE (STANDBY PROVISION)

C4 - SERVICE ENTRANCE BOARD

C4.1 - Main Service Entrance Board

C4.2 - Provision For Portables

C5 - SHORT CIRCUIT & OVERLOAD PROTECTION CO-ORDINATION

C6 - GROUNDING

C7 - PANELBOARDS

C8 - SPECIAL PANELBOARD FEATURES

C9 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

C10 - FUSES

C11 - BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS

C11.1 - Conduits

C11.2 - Wire & Cable

C11.3 - Device Boxes

C11.4 - Switching Devices & Systems

C11.5 - Receptacles

C11.6 - Specialty Electrical Fittings Version 2.5

C11.7 - Coverplates

C11.8 - Wiremold 4000 Designer Series Surface Raceway

C11.9 - Suspended Ceiling Plate for Projector Mount

C11.10 - Lockdown Warning Strobe/Horn Devices

C12 - MOTOR FEEDERS & CONTROLS

C13 - FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM

C14 - LAWN IRRIGATION SYSTEM

C15 – PA/TELEPHONE SYSTEM

C15.1 - Incoming Telephone Service

C15.2 - Integrated PA/Telephone System

C15.3 - Materials and Equipment - Telephone System

C16 - CABLE TV

C16.1 - Cable TV Service & Signal Distribution Provision

C16.2 - Cable TV System


Version 2.5 Issued June 21, 2017 Ci - Index Page ii of ii

C17 - COMPUTER SYSTEM

C17.1 - Computer Raceway System

C17.2 - Computer Systems

C17.3 - Materials and Equipment

C18 - INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEM

C18.1 - Intrusion Alarm

C18.2 - Intrusion (Security) Alarm System Installation

C19 - CLOCK AND PROGRAM BELL SYSTEM

C20 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

C21 - ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM

C22 - SOUND SYSTEMS

C22.1 - Gymnasium Sound System

C22.2 - Stage Sound System

C23 - SPECIALTY ALARM SYSTEMS

C23.1 - Call Assistance System

C23.2 - Kindergarten Door Alarm Version 2.5

C24 - LIGHTING

C24.1 - Lighting Design Concepts

C24.2 - Lighting Fixtures

C24.3 - Fluorescent Fixtures, Ballasts and Lamps

C24.4 - Incandescent Fixtures and Lamps

C24.5 - Compact Fluorescent Fixtures and Lamps

C24.6 - H.I.D. Fixtures, Ballasts and Lamps

C24.7 - General Lighting Fixture Requirements

C24.8 - Photo-Electric Controls

C24.9 - Lamp Changer Stick

C24.10 - Lighting Controls

C25 - EXIT LIGHTING AND EMERGENCY LIGHTS Version 2.5

C26 - STAGE LIGHTING & DIMMING SYSTEM

C27 - TYPICAL FIXTURE LIST Version 2.5

C28 - TYPICAL MODULAR CONTROL PANEL (MCP)


Version 2.0 Issued January 1, 2014 Cii - Introduction Page 1 of 1

PART C - GUIDELINES FOR SPECIFICATIONS

Cii - INTRODUCTION

This Part of the Guidelines groups issues into Sections similar to the organization

of a standard specification so that issues related to that part of the work can be

captured in one area and reviewed by the designer.

Extensive use is made of point form format and lists.

Typically, issues are grouped in the following categories:

General Issues

Design Issues

Specification Issues

Construction Issues


Version 1.4 Issued: January 1, 2014 C1 - Electrical Service Provision Page 1 of 2

C1 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE PROVISION • The Consultant is to identify a service solution in early preliminary design

development meetings with the Architectural and Mechanical Design Team.

• The Consultant is to obtain service point location approval (at the property line) from the developer and a vault location approval from the Utility. The Consultant shall present the preferred service features and location to Hydro. The submission shall be based on the most practicable solution, conforming to the Architectural space assignments and resulting in the pad mounted transformer being placed centrally to the electrical room.

• The design of the underground duct bank shall meet Hydro’s requirements. The route selected shall be from the nearest property line and, preferably, be separated from the route of the existing underground municipal and mechanical services. If routing is in close proximity to existing or new municipal services, review with the Mechanical Consultant and discuss with Board Staff.

• The Consultant shall advise the Board of any Utility requirements which reference that the duct bank, being installed under the Core School contract, is also to be used by the Utility for purposes other than a dedicated electrical service to the Core School.

• The Consultant shall review the electrical service route with the Telephone Utility and arrange for the preferred arrangement of "Joint-Use" trenching such as duct bank, telephone incoming service entrance cable (conduit) and cable TV (CATV) conduit. The Electrical Consultant shall review with the Mechanical Consultant, the respective underground plant and ensure that the primary underground duct bank is clear of existing and new buried municipal services. Similarly the routing of the telephone and CATV cables shall be reviewed.

• If a pad mounted transformer is prohibited by the Municipal Utility and a vault must be designed, the Electrical Consultant shall co-ordinate the associated disciplines with respect to the design requirements for the vault features, such as: size, fire rated wall construction, openings, ventilation, cooling, oil leak confinement, door size and location, access to the vault in the event of emergency replacement of a transformer (by the Utility), interconnection with the adjacent electrical room, ground continuity, etc.

• If a pad mounted transformer is employed all installations must have a drainage loop around the transformer pad foundation perimeter connected to storm water.


Version 1.4 Issued: January 1, 2014 C1 - Electrical Service Provision Page 2 of 2

• The Consultant is required to receive early direction from the Utility and, in turn, give direction to the balance of the Design Team to ensure that the electrical service entrance features are conforming to the Electrical Code, the Ontario Building Code and Utility Standards.

• In the unlikely event that a vault is forced upon the Board, the Consultant is to ensure that reference is made in the Contract Documents to the requirements to seal any of the vault walls that are pierced (moisture ingress and fire rating integrity).

• The Consultant shall obtain the available fault current at the secondary terminals of the Utility's transformers and reference same, on the Contract Documents, as the available three phase symmetrical fault MVA at the secondary terminals of the service transformer.

• The electrical service shall have adequate capacity for an minimum of twelve (12) future portables.

• In renovations and/or additions to a School, where the existing service must be upgraded, and where a vault exists, it is the Board's intent to replace the service with a new padmount transformer convert the vault to outside Custodial Storage.


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C2 - Preferred Building Distribution Voltage Page 1 of 1

C2 - PREFERRED BUILDING DISTRIBUTION VOLTAGE • The Board prefers all schools in excess of 3,150 sq. meters (34,000 sq. ft.),

utilize distribution voltage be 347/600V. This selection is based on the deemed most economical solution for typical schools which have provision for Relocatables.

• Extra low voltage switching, systems, are not acceptable, however extra low voltage devices to comply with ASHRAE are permitted.

• If the Consultant deems that 120/208 Volt distribution would be the more economical distribution voltage, he should discuss his observation with Board Staff and receive specific direction.

• The Consultant should ensure that the voltage characteristics are clear to the associated design disciplines and give direction that all motors which are in excess of 1/2 hp be three phase 600 Volt and any major load components have a 347 Volt single phase or 347/600 Volt three-phase voltage rating.

• All motors must be of the energy efficient type. All motors 5hp and higher must be inverter duty.

• Low voltage distribution is to be provided by Dry Type Transformers 600- 120/208V (delta grounded wye connection).


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C3 - Essential Service (Standby Provision) Page 1 of 2

C3 - ESSENTIAL SERVICE (STANDBY PROVISION) The provision of emergency power shall be provided by the installation of a natural gas fuelled Genset. The installed Genset shall provide a minimum of sixty (60) minutes run time to provide the Ontario Building Code required life safety systems including the monitoring equipment, emergency egress lighting and exit sign illumination. In addition to the Ontario Building Code life safety systems requirements the following “critical loads” shall be connected to the emergency power – telephone which includes the PA and associated lockdown equipment, LAN Rooms, elevators, heating system components to provide freeze protection in the event of power loss, and the Building Automation System. The minimum heating system freeze protection components shall include – boilers, heating primary loop circulating pump(s), heating secondary loop circulating pump(s), heating perimeter loop circulating pump(s).

The generator shall consist of a liquid cooled spark ignited engine, a synchronous AC alternator, and system controls with all necessary accessories for a complete operating system. The system shall be supplied by an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) who has regularly been engaged in the production of engine-alternator sets, automatic transfer switches, and associated controls for a minimum of 25 years, thereby identifying one source of supply and responsibility. The generator shall be provided in a factory built sound attenuated enclosure of the required sound rating for the application and site mounted on the roof. The Genset provider shall also include all required screening to comply with all applicable Municipal bylaws as part of the enclosure package.

Suggested Genset vendors are – Total Power, Generac

As each site ultimately requires an MOEE application and approval to confirm the required sound level based on generator location, site zoning, and proximity to the property line. The Architect shall ensure that at the earliest possible stage of the design an “Environmental Consultant” specializing and familiar with the MOEE approval and application process be engaged to ensure all MOEE approvals are received in a timely manner to ensure there is no delay in the project schedule. A suggested Environmental Consultant is - Fulco Environmental Inc. 6-1500 Upper Middle Road., Suite 318 Oakville, ON L6M 0C2 Attention: Greg Fullerton t: 905-464-1779 e: [email protected]


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C3 - Essential Service (Standby Provision) Page 2 of 2

Engaging the appropriate Environmental Consultant and initiating the MOEE application and approval process at the earliest possible time is critical to ensuring a timely and schedule compliant installation of the standby power. The design shall incorporate “Single Sided Bypass Automatic Transfer Switches “in a Type 1 enclosure to transfer the life safety and critical loads in the event of a power outage. The specified Automatic Transfer Switch must be CSA Certified to Standard 22.2 No. 178 and meet the requirements of CSA 282 Emergency Electrical Power Supply for buildings standard. Suggested ATS manufacturers are – Asco 300 Series


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C4 - Service Entrance Board Page 1 of 2

C4 - SERVICE ENTRANCE BOARD C4.1 - Main Service Entrance Board • The Consultant, at the preliminary design stage, shall ensure that adequate

provision is made for the main electrical room and same is located as close as possible to the exterior of the incoming service.

• The room shall be adequately sized to ensure Code conforming working space and adequate space provision in the room for all the distributions and systems equipment common to such rooms.

• The Consultant is to ensure that the service entrance board is adequately rated for the present and future loads. The loading data, "connected" and "demand", shall be referenced on the single line diagram, as well as for the balance of the sub distributions, to allow the Board’s Staff, the Utility and other interested parties to have a data base on the particular building load.

• The distribution shall have digital metering.

• The protection elements for the main distribution system shall be rated for proper loads and interrupting ratings.

• The Consultant should, in his design, make provision in the Main Distribution for future loads, spare breakers and adequate spaces.

• The Main Distribution shall have 25% "space" provision and 50% "capacity availability".

• The Main Distribution must have copper bussing.

• The Consultant should assess the physical size of the Main Distribution and ensure that same is drawn to scale on a floor plan (1/4" = 1' or 1:50) so that the space in the electrical room can be properly planned.

• Board approved manufacturers include: • SQ.D. (Base Bid) • Eaton-Cutler Hammer • Siemens


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C4 - Service Entrance Board Page 2 of 2

C4.2 - Provision for Portables • The Consultant should, in his design, make provision in the Service

Entrance Switchboard for future Portables (12 @ 17 kW each).

• Consultant to co-ordinate floor and wall space in Electrical Room to accommodate future transformer, panels and disconnect switches to future Portables.

• Underground service to future Portables consisting of three, 100 mm, direct buried, rigid PVC, type DB2 ducts; one end terminated 3 metres beyond asphalt paved area; the other end terminated 4" from free wall space adjacent Service Entrance Switchboard, 150 mm above finished floor complete with fish wire.

• The power distribution for portables may be located from a mechanical room. Mechanical room distribution must be sized to accommodate future portables.

• Provide four, 50 mm, direct buried, rigid PVC, Type DB2 ducts; one end terminated 3 metres beyond asphalt paved area; the other end terminated, as follows: • One (1) in Computer Closet, 4" from free wall space • One (1) terminate in the Fire Alarm Control Panel • Two (2) terminated under the Telephone Demarc/Distribution

Board


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C5 - Short Circuit & Overload Protection Co-Ordination Page 1 of 1

C5 - SHORT CIRCUIT & OVERLOAD PROTECTION CO-ORDINATION • The Consultant shall ensure that a coordinated three phase and ground

fault protection system is provided.

• The distribution(s) shall have the required fault current bracing and symmetrical fault and the symmetrical fault current interrupting ratings shall be specified.

• The Consultant shall specify co-ordination with the Utility's transformer protection elements.

• Ground fault protection components shall be set at maximum pick-up and maximum Time Delay.

• Where the designed protection includes field adjustable components, the contract documents shall reference the responsibility for designing the required settings (pick up and time settings) and applying the settings to the protection element(s).

• Protection elements shall be the breaker type: • thermal magnetic • solid state tripping • current limiting

• Fused switches shall be specified only for the particular component

protection as directed by other design disciplines.

• Equipment shall be labelled in accordance to CSA Z 462-08 work place electrical safety

• For all additions a fault coordination study must be completed.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C6 - Grounding Page 1 of 1

C6 - GROUNDING • It is the Board’s requirement that due to the corrosion issues of conduits,

and the loss of ground continuity created by loose set screws with EMT, a ground wire must be installed in all conduits.

• The Consultant shall reference on the floor plan drawings and the Riser Diagram the required grounding features: • Vault (if required), • Main Distribution, • Transformer neutral points, • Telephone equipment, etc., • Computer Tacks/Hubs

• The Consultant shall review the suitability of the incoming water main

service (metallic) with the Mechanical Consultant and assess the required grounding method: • water main or • minimum double ground rods.

• Warranting assessment by the Consultant, is the criteria in establishing a

ground bus (12" x 1 1/2" x 3/16" copper) in the electrical room for the grounds other than the main service ground.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C7 - Panelboards Page 1 of 2

C7 - PANELBOARDS • The Consultant's design shall reference the application of circuit breaker

panelboards to provide the required branch circuit protection.

• Fused panels, QMQB panels etc. are acceptable for Main Switchboards and MCC Panels, for new school applications.

• Panelboards shall be placed in locations approved by the School Board preference is to not have panels within corridors.

• Panelboards shall be referenced as flush or surface mounted depending on location.

• Where flush mounted panelboards are required, the Consultant shall ensure that a minimum of 3 - 25 mm (1") empty conduits terminate in the ceiling space for future circuits.

• The Board will not accept "load centre" construction panels.

• The panelboard specification shall reference the following features: • Copper bus • Flush or Surface • Hinged door complete with locks • Directory card & holder • All panelboards be keyed alike • Spare breaker capacity of 25% must be left at the Tender

Document stage • No breakers to have a width less than 25 mm (1") • Bolt-on branch breakers (plug-in breakers are not acceptable) • Flush mounted units to have concealed hinges and trim attachment

features

• Consultant shall indicate on the drawings a schedule for each panelboard with the following data:

• Voltage and amperage rating • Circuit breaker rating, number of poles • Short Circuit interrupting and bracing ratings • GFI breakers where applicable • Load in Watts or VA of each branch circuit

• Total load to be phase balanced as close as is practicable


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C7 - Panelboards Page 2 of 2

• Flush or Surface

• Main Breaker or lugs only

• Provision for "lock dogs"

• Trade referenced panelboard type (NLAB, CDP, NBLP and NQOB)

• Fire alarm breaker to be painted Red.

• The Consultant is to specify that the Contractor shall identify the

panelboards complete with: • Typed directory ("spares" in pencil; "spaces" blank)

• Blanking Plates

• Lamacoid plate identifying the Panel as to Designation (Panel "A",

etc.) (red if Essential Distribution) and voltage (120/208V or 347/600V)

• A balanced load

• Handle locking devices on specific breakers: e.g. Exit Lights, Telephone Switchboard, Fire Alarm, clocks, mechanical equipment, control systems, etc.


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C8 - Special Panelboard Features Page 1 of 1

C8 - SPECIAL PANELBOARD FEATURES • For Technology panelboards, specify the following features:

• oversized tub and trim

• Integral "on" indicated neon pilot light (green)

• Mechanically held contactor above c/w key lock "close" P.B. and conventional

• "open" P.B. located at approximately 1800 mm (6') above the floor.

• Remote positioned flush enclosure mushroom heads P.B. "Stop" c/w name plate at each exit door and at location closest to major equipment.

• "Power off for Emergency Use Only". P.B. 2PST so activation of P.B. will initiate a sealed in alarm. Adjustable volume horn (Edwards 340A) and adjacent positioned

• "Reset" button. The Consultant shall show simple schematic of this control, which is to result in only keyed access to energize the Panelboard (key removable) and normal de-energizing by the integral "Open" P.B. or by the mushroom head P.B. The activation of the Mushroom head P.B. will initiate an alarm.

• Acceptable Manufacturers are: • SQ D (Base Bid) • Federal Pioneer • Westinghouse • Eaton Cutler Hammer • Siemens

• Acceptable Mechanical Contractor Manufacturers:

• Asco Electric • SQ D • Allen Bradley


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C9 - Disconnect Switches Page 1 of 1

C9 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES • Disconnect switch applications are to be limited to:

• Motorized equipment; • Code conforming disconnect devices; • Small splitter distribution applications.

• The Consultant is to specify that the switches are, where applicable, to be

horsepower power rated and have dual element motor protection fuses.

• Where there is a necessity to use HRC fuses, the Consultant shall ensure that the specified switches have the Code fuse rejection feature.

• Approved Manufactures include: • SQ D (Base Bid) • Federal Pioneer • Siemens


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C10 - Fuses Page 1 of 1

C10 - FUSES • The Consultant is to ensure HRC fuses are applied, where the indicated

short circuit current is 10kA or more;

• General purpose fuses shall be provided for less than 10kA;

• Time delay fuses shall be provided where indicated, such as motor feeders.

• Only fuses with 200 kA I.R.C. are acceptable.

• Provide a "Switch Schedule", approved by the Electrical Engineer, upon completion of the project listing every fusible switch, its location. the complete information on the installed fuse, and any relevant comments.


Version 2.5 Issued: June 21, 2017 C11 - Basic Materials & Methods Page 1 of 14

C11 - BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS

Refer to Architectural Section B for locations and quantities of devices

C11.1 - Conduits

The Consultant shall define in the specification and /or on the drawings,

the various conduit applications and reference that all branch circuit, Fire

Alarm and Systems etc.

Wiring is to encompass Code conforming conduit and encased conductor

applications.

A ground wire must be installed in all conduits. (Reference EMT

corrosion issue) All conduits must have a correctly sized ground wire.

The extent of flexible conduit and AC90 cables is to be limited to fixture

drops, motor connections etc.

The Consultant shall specify that conduits and wiring shall be run

concealed except in mechanical equipment rooms, electrical rooms, etc.

Where exposed, conduits are acceptable and where surface conduits are

applied, they shall be run parallel to building lines and to other conduits.

Generally, feeders and branch circuitry conduit will be EMT complete

with steel set screw type couplings and steel, insulated throat set screw

type connectors.

RGS conduit shall be applicable to:

cast fittings are not acceptable;

outdoor above grade applications where subject to contact by

vehicles;

interior applications where subject to mechanical damage.

PVC conduit is acceptable for below grade installations, using epoxy glue

couplings, formed offsets, and having a ground continuity conductor run

with the current carrying conductors.

Approved manufacturers are Scepter Mfg. Co. Ltd and CGE "Cobocon".

Motor connections and Dry Type Transformer connections shall be

referenced as to be through flexible metallic conduit (motors in excess of

1/3 horsepower with "Liquiseal" type of flexible conduit).



Peel District School Board and Ontario Electrical Code conforming green

grounding conductor shall be provided for ground continuity purposes in

all conduits.

Armoured cable is not acceptable alternate for flexible metallic conduit for

any motor connections.

Consultant to reference, in "As built" information instructions, that all

buried conduit runs are to be shown on the "As built" drawings complete

with dimension from building lines.

Underfloor Duct Systems: Under floor duct systems are not to be

specified.

C11.2 - Wire & Cable

The Consultant shall reference that only copper conductors are to be

specified and that the minimum branch circuit conductor size is #12 AWG

R90 insulation.

Acceptable insulation types shall be as follows:

RW90XLPE - Indoors

RWU90XLPE - Outdoors

Direct burial cable is not acceptable. All wire and cable to be run in

conduit.

Volt rating for all 600 Volt feeders, -40 Deg. C rating for outdoor wiring.

Armoured or sheathed RA90, Teck cable, i.e. Corflex and ACWU, RA90

Teck cables may be used for specific feeder applications, but only where

such are completely accessible for replacement. This excludes application

in locations such as under floor slabs.

The Consultant shall assess voltage drop levels in his design. The total

voltage drop to the farthest outlet or component, on a fully energized

circuit, shall not exceed a two percent, (2%) limit.



C11.3 - Device Boxes

The Consultant shall outline the type of device boxes to be installed under

the School construction contract. These are as follows:

Interior recessed: Complete with single device covers.

Masonry Block: Extra deep box.

Exterior brick work: Masonry block box complete with provision

for accepting four (4) face plate screws.

All surface boxes to be light duty, cast. Stamped surface boxes are

not acceptable.

In new construction, surface mounted boxes are unacceptable.

In alterations, surface mounted boxes are acceptable, only if flush

mounted ones cannot be economically installed. In these instances, both

exterior and interior surface mounted boxes must be of cast construction.

Specification to reference a requirement for interior positioned device

boxes which are to be installed in exterior walls, to be arranged so that

such requirements are minimized and where necessary, a good vapour

barrier continuity technique is employed such as Iberville or Mold

Processors 1004-VB plastic backboxes.

Specify that Device Boxes are to be installed vertically plumb and

securely fastened so associated trades will not cause the box to be

misaligned.

For mounting heights, refer to latest edition of OBC, OESC and good

engineering practice. For specialty devices, consult with the PDSB and

the Architect.

Gang switching to be employed. 347 Volt toggle switches, where applied

and where ganged, shall have the device boxes fitted with barriers.

C11.4 - Switching Devices & Systems

The Board's preference is for toggle switches for 120 Volt and 347 Volt

branch lighting circuits.



Switches:

Switches shall be A.C. "Quiet-Type" specification grade rated 20

Amp/120 Volt and 15 Amp/347 Volt respectively, totally enclosed

phenolic housing or from branch circuit breakers for corridor

lighting, Brown colour.

Acceptable manufacturers are:

Leviton

Pass & Seymour

Bryant

Hubbell

Delete any preference for low voltage lighting control system

Key switches shall be applicable only to 120 Volt systems

Acceptable products:

Hubbell (Write spec around Hubbell.)

P&S 501L

Leviton 1201-L

Time controlled devices shall be wired through the BCMS system

(Division 15) as described in the Mechanical Design and Co-ordination

Manual or individual time clocks as described here in.

Time clocks should be selected or specified as having the following

features and application parameters:

Located indoors

EEMAC 1 enclosure

Have Power Failure over-ride feature (if timer motor not sub-fed

from an Essential Distribution System)

Be 24 hour type having a skip day feature (when such is required)

Have astronomic dial suitable for the Toronto area latitude

The time clock coils shall be sub-fed from the Essential

Distribution.

Photo Electric controls shall be a design consideration for security

lighting, parking lot lighting, roadway and walkway lighting. The P.E.

Controls shall be suitable for the voltage applied, 347, 120 or 208 Volt,

load rated or control rated for controlling the lighting through an EEMAC

1 enclosure, multiple pole contactor. Photo electric controls shall be used

in conjunction with Astronomic Time Clocks.



Equipment Storage Rooms and other similar infrequently used areas

should have toggle switches complete with Leviton 1201-LHC or P&S

OSC 3000-1 passive infra red sensor with manual "on" over-ride.

Dimmer Switches (Incandescent) shall be applied where the Consultant

deems applicable. The Dimmer Switches should be mounted above an

"on" "off" toggle switch and be series connected. The dimmer Switches

shall have the following features:

Rated for the applicable load

Electronic type complete with heat sink as required

Complete with Radio Interference Suppression

Toggle type for ratings 1000W and smaller

Where fitted with a control knob, the type which attaches to a

flattened spline (not a fluted spline)

Specify dimmers with slide type control or toggle.

Suggested products:

Leviton 81500/slide series

Ideal 56-1000 series.

C11.5 - Receptacles

The Consultant shall, through the specification references, develop a clear

definition of the quality of receptacles the Board wishes to have applied to

the School project.

Install a neutral with each branch circuit conductor for all duplex

receptacles in the office areas, business rooms and Classrooms.

The definition of the required quality may be specific to the following

applications:

Teaching areas

Shops

Corridors

Service areas

Exterior

Offices



Gymnasia

Computer rooms. etc.

Receptacle Construction: The following parameters define the general use

receptacle features the Board wishes to be applicable to the Core School

construction:

Duplex Receptacle:

A rated

Specification Grade

Brown Face

Impact resistant nylon face (mandatory)

Thermo plastic or nylon body

Break-off links

Side & back wired

Receptacles meeting above construction criteria:

15A, 125V, (5-15R) Single - Leviton #5261

- Hubbell #5261

- Pass & Seymour #5261

15A, 125V, (5-15R) Duplex - Hubbell CN#5262

Red Service Receptacle: - Leviton #5262-R

15A, 125V, (5-15R) Duplex - Hubbell CN#5262-RD

- Pass & Seymour #5262-RED


- Hubbell #6331


20A, 125V, (5-20R) Duplex - Leviton #5362

- Hubbell #5392



- Hubbell #9308


15A, 125V, (5-15R) GFCI - Leviton #6599

Duplex - Hubbell #GF-5252




15A, 125V, (5-15R) - Leviton #5280

Isolated Ground Duplex

Surge Suppressor COMPLETE WITH Decora Style Plate

Domestic Dryer: - Leviton #278/801

30A, 125/250V, (14-30R)

Domestic Range: - Leviton #279/801

50A, 125/250V, (14-50R)

Specialty Receptacles:

Photocopying Equipment Receptacles:

The Consultant shall refer to specific equipment requirements for

ampacity and voltage of the required branch circuit and the

receptacle type.

If specific information not available, it is recommended that, for

the minimum circuit requirement and for flexibility in equipment

branch circuit supply, 3#10 R90, 2P 20A circuit breaker circuit be

extended to each device box for a receptacle suitable for the

particular equipment.

Leviton 5280 Surge Suppressed Receptacle, T-slot

USB Charger with Tamper Resistant Duplex Receptacles

The consultant shall review the floor plan of the school with the

Board to determine where charging outlets are required. Particular

attention shall be placed on areas where the design provides

benches such as common areas and hallways.

Two (2) 125V/15A outlets, and two (2) USB outlets with

minimum charging rate of 5V/2.1A.

Shall be tamper resistant receptacles and shall be so marked

Acceptable manufacturers:

Hubbell USB15x2

Arrow Hart (Cooper) TR7745



Kindergarten Receptacles: Tamper-resistant type, 15A, 125V,

5-15R duplex.

Tamper Resistant GFI type P+S 1595TR

Pass & Seymour TR621

Clock Receptacles: Recessed fitting. Mounted 2300 or 300 below

ceiling which ever provides the lowest mounting height.

Leviton 5261/CH clock receptacles.

Service receptacles on MCP's to be red and labelled "Custodial".

Domestic Range Receptacle:

50 Amp, 125/250V (14-50R) Leviton #279/801

Domestic Dryer Receptacle:

30 Amp, 125/250V (14-30R) Leviton #278/801

C11.6 - Specialty Electrical Fittings

The Consultant shall note that the Board has a preference for the following

specialty fittings and these components should be reviewed for application

on the project under design.

Floor Mounted Pedestals (Generally should be avoided): Concrete

imbedded floor boxes shall be Conduflor Series 800, adjustable flush floor

box with fittings as outlined below:

Duplex receptacles shall be Cat. No. 200.

Telephone surface pedestals shall be Cat. No. 191, single flush

receptacles.

Flush telephone, low potential service fitting assemblies shall be

Series 800-7.

Flush blanking caps, Series 800-6 floor ring and abandoning cap

assemblies.



Hand Dryers/Hair Dryers:

All Washrooms to be equipped with Hand/Hair Dryers (touchless

type)

Consultant shall review with Architect the application of Hand/

Hair Dryers and confirm the extent of the application in

Classrooms with sinks (other than Washrooms).

Recommended type: World Dryer, SMARTdri– Surface mount

120 volt with fixed nozzle to include heavy duty vandal-resistance

grille, hands-free operation, cast iron cover.

Specifically mounted as shown on Architectural Drawings.

(Location and height)

Acceptable manufacturers:

- World

- Bobrick

Touchless Sinks/Faucets:

All faucets/sinks in Washrooms shall be designed for hands-free

operation

S.T.A.C. Classroom - Cable Cord & Reel:

Where shown on drawings and approved by PDSB in specified

S.T.A.C. Rooms there shall be installed a minimum of eight ceiling

mounted cable reel assemblies complete with 15 Amp duplex

receptacle (ceiling mounted). Cable reel assembly to be securely

fastened to ceiling complete with stop ball, "Kellems" strain relief

connector and duplex receptacle device, suspended 2.1 m A.F.F.



S.T.A.C. Room Equipment and Emergency Stop Pushbutton

Where shown on drawings and approved by PDSB in specified

S.T.A.C. Rooms, the Consultant shall design for adequate power

supplies for the following pieces of shop equipment:

- two belt sanders

- two belt disc sanders

- two jig saws

- two drill presses

- one band saw

Note: Each piece of equipment shall have its own dedicated 120V,

15A circuit which shall be wired though an Emergency Stop

Button, mounted locally in front of each piece of equipment. This

circuit shall be fed from the dedicated Shop Panel complete with

contactors for emergency shut off control.

LCD Ceiling Projector Interface

The Consultant shall provide for three (3) flush mounted single gang

deep device boxes complete with empty ¾” raceway to the ceiling

space in each Classroom, as follows:

- Three flush mounted on masonry wall 153 (6”) or 203 (8”)

each complete a single gang deep masonry box and a 41 (2-

3/4”) EMT conduit to the ceiling space.

Classroom:

Each Classroom to have 15A, 120V, 1 phase, power terminated in

a duplex receptacle mounted directly into Peerless projector ceiling

plate complete with 8'-0" of slack of flexible conduit (BX).

In classrooms specified, with ceiling plates the electrical contractor

shall supply and install standard ¾” conduits for both AV and data

cables as indicated on drawings.

C11.7 - Coverplates

General Concepts: brushed stainless steel is the acceptable standard

coverplate to be used throughout for all flush mounted interior positioned

device boxes.



Components:

General interior flush mounted device boxes: Brushed stainless

steel coverplates.

Surface wiring cast device boxes: Pressed metal cover plates

Control coverplates: Brushed stainless steel coverplates.

Exterior duplex receptacles: W P thermoplastic resin material

(unbreakable) face plates. Be equivalent to Leviton Cat #

4941/805.

Essential Distribution Service Receptacle Coverplates (located in

MCP Only): Red smoothline phenolic plastic, labelled

"Custodial".

C11.8 - Wiremold 4000 - Designer Series Surface Raceway (DS-4000)

Where shown on drawings and approved by PDSB in specific Classrooms,

Libraries and Computer Rooms, wiremold two-piece surface steel (not

plastic) raceway shall be installed, as follows:

Mount the top of the horizontal raceway a maximum of 400 mm

above finished floor. This height must apply to all horizontal

raceway NOT located above a counter. Where located above a

counter, mount the top of horizontal raceway a minimum 900 mm

above finished floor.

All material will have an ivory or white finish complete with end

caps and vertical T-connections.

Provide cut-outs in raceway to accommodate coverplates (AC and

Data) by Wiremold. Quantities as specified in Architect's Section

B-1.

Electrical wiring to occupy the lower channel of the raceway. Pull

string to be provided in upper channel for the later installation of

data cables.

No more than four (4) duplex receptacles shall share a single 15A

circuit.



Install a surface Wiremold 4000 starting a minimum of 150 mm

above the ceiling grid to 305 mm above finished floor at the

opposite corner of the entrance door at the front of the Classroom

for the VGA connection of the LCD ceiling mounted projector.

This vertical 4000 shall be tight to the ceiling cross tee or main

rail.

C11.9 - Suspended Ceiling Plate for Projector Mount

Where shown on drawings and approved by PDSB in specific Classrooms,

Libraries Kindergartens, Music Rooms, etc., a Suspended Ceiling Plate for

Projector Mounts shall be installed, as follows:

The supply and installation of the Suspended Ceiling Plates for Projector

Mounts is part of the Electrical Contract and is to be included under the

Electrical Contractors Tender Price.

Electrical Contractor (Division 16) shall supply and install all lightweight

suspended ceiling plates for the entire project complete with 120V duplex

receptacle mounted in knockout panel provided and all support material to

form a complete projector mounting system.

Specifications: The lightweight Ceiling plate shall be:

Approved by the PDSB, in consultation with the PDSB LTSS

Department, pending model of projectors and shall be mounted in

designated Classrooms.

The projector plate shall be at least a distance of no more than

11'-0" from the designated Teaching Wall.

Acceptable Manufacturer Peerless CMJ 455

Install one 120V, 15 Amp, 1P, duplex power receptacle and cover plate

within knock out of ceiling plate and complete with 8'-0" length of flexible

conduit (BX) concealed in ceiling space extending from true ceiling

junction box to ceiling plate receptacle, such that ceiling plate may be

repositioned to adjacent ceiling tiles or approximately 4'-0" in any

direction without rewiring.

In rooms where there is no ceiling to mount Peerless Plate or the ceiling is

open, Electrical Contractor shall supply and install a Chief projector

mounting pole. The mounting pole shall be a Chief model CMS 115,

manufactured by CSAV Inc. Mounting pole shall be no more than 10'-0"

and no less than 9'-0" from the designated Teaching Wall and approved by

the PDSB, in consultation with the Principal pending model of projectors.



In rooms where the ceiling is in excess of 15'-0" no ceiling plates or

mounting poles are required, projectors shall be placed on movable carts.

C11.10 - Lockdown Warning Strobe/Horn Devices

The supply and installation of the Lock Down Procedure Warning

Beacons/Strobe Lights, Electronic Tone Sounders, and all associated

Horn/Strobe protective wire guards, wiremold surface raceway, conduit,

wiring, junction boxes, custom cover plates, fasteners and supports are all

part of the Electrical Contract and is to be included under the Electrical

Contractor's Tender Price. Final terminations of devices to PA system,

auxiliary relays and controllers to activate and control strobe/horns shall

be supplied and installed by PDSB and PA system installer.

Where shown on drawings and approved by the PDSB in specified

General Purpose Rooms & Gyms, Exercise Rooms, Weight Rooms, pool

areas, all Technology Rooms, Music Classrooms (both vocal and

instrument), Drama/Dance Classrooms, Cafeteria/Lunchrooms,

Auditoria/Lecture Halls and all rooms deemed to have high ambient noise

levels, or housing a Hard of Hearing class of students, a Combination

Warning Strobe and Electronic Sounder shall be installed side by side.

Strobe/sounder horn complete with all mounting hardware wire guards (in

General Purpose Rooms, Gymnasia and Technology Rooms), conduit,

wiring, junction boxes, fasteners and supports including all incidentals to

form a complete system. Combination strobe/horn shall be mounted at

approximately 3600 mm above finished floor in general purpose or high

ceiling rooms and at approximately 2400 mm in regular Classrooms. In

some General Purpose Rooms four to six or multiple synchronized

strobe/horns may be required, Cafeterias or Lunchrooms require two, and

some shops, which may be L-shaped, also require two. Where multiple

strobes are installed in same room STROBES MUST BE

INTERCONNECTED AND WIRED TOGETHER TO OPERATE

SYNCHRONIZED. Each combination strobe/horn shall be wired to a

dedicated 120 Volt power supply with minimum 2C#14 wiring and from

each combination strobe/horn to a 12" x 12" x 6" junction box located in

ceiling above PA console.

All strobes in same room to be connected with synchronization wiring

using 2 pair of two conductor #18 shielded Belden cables to each strobe

(2-in, 2-out). Single strobes do not require synchronization wiring.



Specifications: The strobe/horn combo shall be XFV + IAS-T series

"deegee" beacon sounder Cat #XSV-AC-115-SH-11J-R+IAS-T/R, which

can be ordered from MDA Controls, 1131 Invicta Dr. Unit #4 Oakville,

Ont. L6H 4M1. Tel. 905-845-3666. Protective wire guard for strobe/horn

can be ordered through WILENE & Assoc. Tel. 905-549-3634.


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C12 - Motor Feeders & Controls Page 1 of 1

C12 - MOTOR FEEDERS & CONTROLS

• The Consultant shall review with the Mechanical Consultant the anticipated connected motor loads so that this loading can be accounted for in the preliminary Electrical Design.

• Motors of 1/2, 1/3 HP or greater are to be supplied three phase and energy efficient type.

• The Division 16 Scope of Work to include the starter (manual or magnetic), control wiring, disconnect switch and power wiring downstream from the disconnect switch.

• Ensure that the Tender Documents are well coordinated with respect to showing all motorized equipment, location of same and adequate feeders to same.

• Every motor must have an isolation switch with provision for the installation of a padlock. This is required to comply with the Board’s “Lock and Tag” procedure.

• European size starters are not acceptable.

• All motors 5hp and above to be inverter duty.

• VFD’S: • When VFD’s are installed all documentation must be submitted with

contract close out documents showing programmed parameters. • By pass switch to be included with all VFD’s • Acceptable manufactures are

1. DanFoss 2. Seimens 3. Mitsubushi

• Note: VFD’s may be part of the mechanical design


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C13 - Fire Protection Sprinkler System Page 1 of 1

C13 - FIRE PROECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM • Ensure the jockey pump has automatic control to maintain pressure.

Manual switch is not acceptable.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C14 - Lawn Irrigation System Page 1 of 1

C14 - LAWN IRRIGATION SYSTEM • System shall be powered by Dedicated circuits.


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C15 - Telephone System Page 1 of 6

C15 – PA/Telephone System C15.1 - Incoming Telephone Service • The Consultant shall arrange with the Telephone Utility the service

requirements for this service to the School.

• Consultant shall liaise with the Telephone Utility and incorporate the Utility's service directives into the preliminary design concepts.

• Ensure, where possible, that the routing of the telephone and cable TV service is in common with the incoming underground power service.

• An acceptable arrangement to the Board is a "Joint Use" trench: Incoming primary duct bank with the three (3) communication conduits above for fibre-optic WAN connection, telephone and cable TV.

• Confirm that incoming telephone service is adequate for the School's requirements which, in addition to the normal telephone trunk lines, include the following separate lines to the appropriate office or dedicated location: • Fire Alarm reporting agency; • Security Alarm reporting agency; • Provision for data channel(s); etc. • Lockdown procedure telephone (or line seizure device) • Elevator telephone (or line seizure device)

Receive direction from the Board Staff in this regard.

• The Consultant is to ensure the conduits are adequately sized for the telephone service and are terminated and complete with the required pull wire, as directed by the Telephone Utility.

• All required conduits, raceways, and outlet boxes for this system shall be installed as per (Division 16).

• The Consultant shall give direction to the Telephone Utility as to whom they best contact to expediently resolve the number of pairs and the quality of telephone service that should be extended to the School and hence the determination of the extent of the required empty conduit system.



• The Consultant shall provide guidance to the Architect and the Mechanical Consultant on the requirements for the telephone equipment room such as: space requirements, ambient conditions, floor covering, etc.

• For features with respect to the required equipment power supply receptacles, required backboards, heat release and requirement for a mechanically cooled space, make enquiries to the selected agent and Board staff. The Board representatives will advise the Consultant of specific supplier/agents.

• As part of the general contract, however, the Electrical Consultants must specify: • appropriately sized back boxes in either the control panels or walls

to accommodate the Telephone/PA units • All backboxes for all-call speakers • Terminate conduits from wall mounted back boxes in above ceiling

space. • Contract documents to reference the provision of:

• an RGS conduit from property line exterior to the building as located by the Telephone Utility to telephone service entrance backboard.

• Backboards shall be 1200 mm x 2400 mm (4' x 8') fir, fire resistance rated, plywood.

• Specify 4 duplex receptacles on separate circuits to be mounted at the back boards.

• Any conduit which is buried shall be a minimum of 600 mm (24") below finished grade.

• The main service conduit size shall meet the Telephone Utility's requirements.

• Specify that all wall mounted single gang telephone and computer back boxes are to receive device blank cover plates (stainless steel 301) and that they shall be the telephone type, approved by the telephone equipment supplier.

• Grounding provision shall reference the extension of #6 (green insulated conductor) to electrical service ground point and to leave 2 metre coiled for connection by the telephone equipment installer.



C15.2 - Integrated PA/Telephone System – See Division 18 • The Consultant in his design, should make provision for an integrated

telephone/P.A. system complete with a comprehensive internal and external communications. External communication is provided via connection with the carrier service's public switched network. Internally, the system will enable staff to make announcements (announcements from classrooms must be restricted) and page teachers from their telephones, through the paging speakers or the built-in telephone speaker.

• An Electronic Key Telephone System shall accommodate analog trunk lines and station extensions with integration for audio paging, output to public address paging speakers. The system shall integrate with optional software and firmware to accommodate voice processing functionality as may be selected by the School Board.

• The paging main unit should be located in the main office area as or as

specified by the Principal. The paging system will be installed in a floor standing cabinet and equipment will be mounted as per P.A. equipment diagram. The P.A. contractor will install P.A. amplifier, mixer, paging module, AM/FM tuner, P.A. speakers, exterior bells, door bell and other equipment specified below.

• The paging system requirements must include at least the following

"paging" capabilities/hardware. • Centrally amplified paging component systems.

• Access paging from telephone by user entering programmed paging

code or depressing the talk switch on the desk microphone shall activate the zone.

• Automatic muting of the page channel unless signal activated.

• Auxiliary night ringer interface capability.

• Music and auxiliary program source distribution to speakers or telephone system interface.

• Integration with master program control unit and general purpose sound system.

• Flexible paging to allow zoning to different sections of school.



• Flush mounted Box housing hand set located in gyms

• Tone generation of inside speaker signals and outside bells.

• Automatic power failure restoration system – minimum one (1) hour back-up.

• All equipment must be CSA approved.

• Cabling systems to be in compliance with CSA-T529-M91 and T530-M90 (ANSI/EIA/TIA), EIA/TIA 568 wiring standards.

The system shall be designed to include, but not be limited to, the following: • Paging System Mixer and Amplifier: Solid-state, electronic paging and

associated components.

• AM/FM Tuner, DVD Player and Cabinet

• P.A. Speaker Assemblies (Cone Type) • Office Desk Microphone • Master Program Control Unit to interface with the P.A. system for tone

signalling over speakers and the synchronization of Tel/PA system’s internal clock. The program unit shall be wired to provide automatic operation of electronic tone program signalling and telephone system’s internal clock. Control unit shall allow for scheduling/sequencing (co-ordinate with the School Board).

• Zone Paging Module: The Contractor will terminate the telephone line

from the phone equipment room to the P.A. equipment and program for two (2) page zones.

• P.A. Exterior Bells: Three (3) 10 inch loud bells shall be installed on the three outside walls (back, left side and right side) of the school or as specified by the School Board.

• P.A. Door Bell: At main front door, install P.A. door bell.



• P.A. System Wiring: • For classroom and other rooms, speaker cabling shall be Grey FT6,

2 pair twisted, 24 AWG as specified by the equipment manufacturer.

• For hallway, speaker cabling shall be Grey FT6, 1 pair 18 AWG as specified by the equipment manufacturer.

• For gym, speaker cabling shall be Grey FT6, 1 pair 18 AWG as

specified by the equipment manufacturer.

• For P.A. door bell, cable shall be Grey 1 pair 18 AWG FT6 cable installed from the main front doors back to the P.A. system head equipment in the main office and labelled as door bell.

• For P.A. exterior bell, cabling will run from the master time clock location in main office to each of the 3 exterior bell locations as per electrical drawings. The cable shall be 1 pair 18 AWG FT6, as specified by the equipment manufacturer.

• For P.A. backbone cabling install two (2) Grey FT6 18 AWG 1 pair from each remote wiring closet back to the P.A. head equipment.

• One 4 Pair 24 AWG FT6 cable from the P.A. system in main office

to the telephone system in main wiring closet.

• P.A./Telephone integration cable must be white plenum FT6 rated fully TIA/EIA 568 Category 5E unshielded twisted pair (UTP) rated at minimum of 200 MHz.

• All P.A. cable terminations must be made on BIX terminals.

• All cabling shall be installed to conform with the requirements of

the Canadian Electrical Code and applicable Provincial Codes.



C15.3 Materials and Equipment - Telephone System – See Division 18 • Integrated Communications System:

• The telephone/P.A. system should be based on Nortel MICS with

software to support a minimum of 8 CO trunks, one 6 port expansion cards, 64 extensions, CAP, RAD, 2 ATA. The modular integrated communication system will have the latest version of software installed. The system will be configured as per the requirements of the School Board.

• Telephone Station Sets to be provided as required. • Voice Cabling:

• The telephone system will be located in the main wiring closet on

the first floor and installed on an 2400 x 1200 x 19 mm (8 x 4 foot x 3/4") fire retardant backboard.

• Grounding:

• All equipment used in the installation that has the potential to conduct current should be grounded, i.e. equipment racks, metallic pathways, and wall mount enclosures.


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C16 - Cable T.V. System Page 1 of 1

16 - CABLE T.V. SYSTEM C16.1 - Cable T.V. Service & Signal Distribution Provision • The Consultant shall in his design, make provision for an empty conduit

raceway from the Cable TV service providers location in the sub-division to a location within the school complete with pull cord.


• Ensure, where possible, that the routing of the telephone and Cable TV service conduit is in common trench with the incoming underground power service.

• The television system is not wired throughout in any of the schools. In elementary schools, (junior and middle) provide empty conduit raceways and television outlets in:

• The Library • Main Office • Gymnasium

C16.2 - Cable T.V. System • The Cable TV systems shall be roughed in only in the contract among the

School Board, Principal and Cable TV carrier/provider.

• Television receptacles are to be shown in the following specific rooms. (Consultant to review this list with Board Representative). • Library • General Office • Gymnasium


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C17 - Computer System Page 1 of 1

C17 - COMPUTER SYSTEM C17.1 - Computer Raceway System

• Consultant to show the computer raceway system as required by the

Computer classroom equipment supplier and any raceway system that is required for the office systems.


• Generally, all outlets shall be flush mounted in building structure and piped to above closest suspended ceiling.

• Where fixed ceilings exist, appropriate size conduits shall be installed between areas that have accessible ceilings.

• A complete conduit system is not required. The under of J-hooks or cable tray is acceptable, for cable routing.

• All computer receptacles to be with dedicated neutral.

• Review the specific requirements with the Board representative.

• System to be referenced will include adequately sized conduits, pathways, J-hooks, cable tray, pull boxes, terminal boxes, etc. and the provision of a fish wire in same.

• All surface computer system raceway shall be minimum DS4000 and V700 where required for fill or device installation.

• Feeds for surface wiremolds to be surface vertical wiremold extended minimum 6" above ceiling.

C17.2 - Computer Systems • Not currently used.

C17.3 – Materials and Equipment

• Not currently used.


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C18 - Intrusion Alarm System Page 1 of 3

C18 - INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEM C18.1 - Intrusion Alarm

• The security system is not in contract and is to be specified by an outside

contractor in yearly contractual agreement with the Board. Make provisions for the security system as outlined in this Document.

• All required conduits, raceways, outlet boxes, and electrical AC power for this system shall be installed as per (Division 16).

• For information, and for roughing-in purposes to the exterior, the following is a description of the minimum security system:

• All of the ground floor teaching areas that have perimeter fenestration, (including incra-paks) are to have motion/infrared detectors. • The administration area is to have motion/infrared detectors in

each of the perimeter offices with fenestration.

• The second floor teaching areas that have windows accessible from the low roofs are to have motion/infrared detectors.

• The second floor corridors are to have motion detectors located in designated areas.

• The ground floor stairwells and vestibules are to have "broken glass" sensors.

• The ground floor corridors are to have motion sensors in designated areas.

• The corridors on both floors are roughed-in for strobe/sirens in designated areas.

• The exterior walls facing rear of private homes shall have roughing in for exterior strobe/sirens.

• The front lobby and the caretaker’s room is roughed-in for disarming the system.

• The system operates on the appropriate number of zones to identify quickly, the potential break-ins.



• As part of the general Contract, the Electrical Contractor will need to install all of the necessary backboxes in ceiling, control panels and wall with appropriate conduit, easily accessible by the security contractor.

• Specify that the Electrical Contractor must cooperate with the security contractor in the installation of the system.

C18.2 - Intrusion (Security) Alarm System Installation • The Consultant shall, early in the preliminary design stage, review with

the Board representatives and Peel Regional Police Community Services the requirements for the Intrusion Alarm System. The review should include: • Sensor methods.

• Transmission of the alarm condition signal to an off premises

agency. (Auto dialler, dedicated pair, etc.)

• Method of putting the Core School under electronic security each day on locking up and releasing the system on re-entry.

• The Board favours a "Supplier/Installer" arrangement from such a firm specializing in the provision of Security Systems and offering Central Control Station Monitoring and Response Dispatching services.

• The Division 16 specification is to specifically reference this requirement and reference that this service, for one year, is to be included in the Tender Price.

• The Specification should reference the following: • Solid state logic components. (Programmable System)

• 12V DC System.

• Adjustable entry and exit Alarm activation delays.

• Timed cut off of local alarm devices.

• Latching in of alarms (will be manually re-set)

• Sensors: Passive Infra red detectors, magnetic door switches, etc.



• The activation and de-activation feature (key pad or key switch) and location should be reviewed with the Board representative.

• Alarm circuitry wiring be installed in conduit.

• Reference that the F/A activation will deactivate the Security System.

• The Specification shall reference a requirement for the Security Alarm System to be verified and Verification Certificate to be forwarded to the Board representative and a copy filed in the Maintenance Manual.


Version 2.0 Issued: Jan. 1, 2014 C19 - Clock & Program Bell System Page 1 of 2

C19 - CLOCK & PROGRAM BELL SYSTEM • The Board's preference is to have the Program Bell (Tone) system as a

feature of the Public Address and Intercom System.

• Only the exterior bells shall be identified in this section of the Tender/Contract Specification. These bells/horns should be 120 volt AC (separate power supply) and activated through relays common to the P.A. and Intercom system.

• Provide a Telecor 2400, 1U, rack mounted, wireless Master Clock system to interface with the P.A. system for internal tone signalling over the speakers and the exterior bells for external signalling, and the synchronization of the Tel/P.A. system's internal clock and all remote clocks. The master timekeeping system shall consist of one ( 1) Telecor Master Clock Cat. No. 2400, one (l) wireless Clock Controller/Transceiver Cat. No. 2490-TCR for wireless secondary clocks, and the required number of program clocks. All secondary (classroom) clocks shall be Telecor wireless, 120V plug-in. For secondary schools all secondary (Classroom) clocks shall be Telecor wireless, digital, 120V plug-in clocks Cat. No. 2411-115 complete with surface box Cat. No. 2413. For elementary ( K-8) schools all secondary (classroom) clocks shall be Telecor wireless analog, 12" diameter, 120V plug-in clocks Cat. No. 2491-120. The master program unit shall be wired to provide automatic operation of either the inside program signal, the external 120V bells and the Lockdown signal. The internal program signal and the external bells shall employ a TOA Multitone Generator Model S04, the door bell shall employ a TOA Input Module Model S02, and the Lockdown signal shall employ a Viking Module Cat. No. MTG-10. The Master Clock shall allow for scheduling/sequencing of all programming which must be coordinated with the School Principal. The entire P.A. system shall include 4 hour battery back-up, programmer for automatically sounding signals on the appropriate circuit on an adjustable duration, (minimum 5 seconds) Monday through Friday and off on Saturday, Sunday, and holidays. Times will be given to the Contractor by the school Principal. A calendar shall permit daily repetition of program schedules, or omission of any 2-hour program period any day of the week.

• The Contractor shall be responsible for supply and installation of a 4U, 19" Panel in the P.A. console containing the manual On/Off operating switches for the interior signal, exterior signal, and door bell. These switches shall be connected as outlined in the "Equipment Connection Schematic"'. This panel shall be installed in the P.A. rack in a location acceptable to the PDSB Designee.


Version 2.0 Issued: Jan. 1, 2014 C19 - Clock & Program Bell System Page 2 of 2

• In addition to the automatic operation of electronic tone program signalling, the system shall have the ability through the supplied 4U, 19" section in the P.A. console to manually operate the interior tone signal and the exterior program bells, turn off the interior tone program and exterior program bells, and turn off the exterior door bell. In addition through the installation of the Contractor supplied Viking Tone Module Cat. No. MTG-10 provide a distinct interior tone program signal for "Lockdown".

• The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the PDSB 1U "Daily Physical Activity, (DPA) Panel. The DPA Panel as to be installed and set-up according to documentation supplied by the PDSB. The Contractor shall be responsible for fully testing and ensuring full functionality of all components related to the P.A. system, Lockdown, and DPA.

• Install as required per Division 16 all required conduits, raceways, outlet

and back boxes for the clock system


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C20 - Fire Alarm System Page 1 of 6

C20 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM • The Consultant shall design a Fire Alarm System meeting all applicable

Codes and the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

• The Board's preference is for a microprocessor based, fully addressable, transponder, multi-plex, non-proprietary type Fire Alarm System.

• Only a single-stage type of fire alarm system shall be installed.

• Audible devices (FA speakers preferred) shall be located and specified taking into consideration the ambient conditions, the construction of the room separations and the Code requirements for 10db over the ambient in all occupied areas minimum 65 dba or maximum 100 dba (or specific audibility levels to meet other governing conditions).

• Integral or common strobe synchronized lights applications warrant review for high ambient noise level rooms.

• The designed system shall be zoned as per current Code and the current ULC S524 Standard.

• The Consultant shall reference in the specification that all components shall be CSA and ULC listed and labelled, acceptable to the Ontario Fire Marshall and the local Fire Department and suitable for operation on the available service characteristics.

• System equipment and operation and installation shall comply with the "Ontario Building Fire Safety Design Standard", issued by the office of the Ontario Fire Marshal, Ontario Building Code and Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC).

• The Consultant shall reference the current CSA and ULC standards.

• The Consultant's Fire Alarm system selection and specifications shall identify with a Fire Alarm System having a control panel which is: • Microprocessor based,

• Surface or flush mounted, depending on location, complete with a

lockable hinged door

• Incorporates all the necessary components to supervise and control end-of-line Class B detection circuits, individually fused Class B, polarized alarm and manual station circuits.



• All extended circuits will be Electrical Code Class 2 Type and be individually protected by fuses or equivalent protection and a fault in any circuit shall not interfere with the operation of any other circuit under "Alarm" conditions.

• The control equipment shall be enclosed in a wall mounted enclosure.

• All fire detectors, pull stations, sprinklers and standpipe flow and supervisory switches shall be connected, zoned and annunciated according to the applicable fire separations, Code and ULCS524 Standards.

• The Consultant shall make himself totally familiar with the building fire separations and provide the Fire Alarm Zoning accordingly.

• A passive graphic shall be installed adjacent the annunciator at the Fire Fighter's Entrance.

• The specified Fire Alarm System control panel is to include: • trouble signal, • silencing switch, • power "on" pilot light, • no-break power supply with fully automatic battery charger and

proven performance adequately sized battery source • hand held microphone

• Battery source to have a life expectancy of over five (5) years and of

sufficient capacity to power the system upon loss of normal AC supply, for a period of 24 hours under supervisory current drain plus 30 minutes under alarm conditions.

• Battery pack to be secondary source of power only the primary source to be the rectified AC Charger which is to be capable of restoring 90% of discharged battery's capacity within 24 hours.

• Battery bank to be automatically disconnected from system at drop to 60% output voltage.



• The current Ontario Building Code requires that emergency power be provided for the fire pump by means of a electric generator. The Electrical consultant needs to determine whether the emergency lighting system should be powered from this generator.

• Specified Fire Alarm System control panel shall include the following features: • Transient surge voltage protection on line voltage and field wiring

leaving building (i.e. portables).

• Automatic signal silencing, 20 minutes after last alarm indication.

• Spare alarm (two) and trouble (two) zone modules for future use, and 10% "space" zones.

• Fire Department connection to transmit alarm to municipal system. Provide a red Fire Department Disconnect. Consultant to review with the Peel District School Board representative, at an early preliminary design meeting, as to how this is to be accomplished such as Automatic Dialler, direct connection via dedicated telephone channel to a supervisory agency (proprietary or otherwise) or as a minimum the provision of an exterior horn or bell.

• Provision in the Main Fire Alarm Panel CPU for a preset adjustment of

normal smoke ambient and read-out, on addressing, of the condition of the smoke detectors, so that servicing can be arranged and false alarms be minimized.

• All fire alarm sensors and detectors are to be addressable, such as smoke detectors, manual stations, thermal detectors, flow switches, etc., and to be interwired to the Main Fire Alarm Panel.

• The resulting system is to be fully supervised.

• The Fire Alarm System specified is to have a degree of coded access entry (Password Entry) which will be field programmable and which will be restriction based, as the Peel District School Board directs to a level typical of the particular selected staff member's technical skill.



• The Fire Alarm Specification is to reference that the Peel District School Board will, after the one year warranty period, be reviewing the placement of a Service Contract. Accordingly, as a condition of the Division 16 Scope Work, there is a requirement that the Fire Alarm Supplier wishing to quote on this project, to place a letter on file that the labour charges common to such arranged Service Contracts will be no different from the labour charge now common to such contracts or proposals for the servicing and maintenance of the Peel District School Board's present Fire Alarm Systems.

• The Fire Alarm System shall include a Remote Annunciator and where more than eight (8) zones, a passive Graphic Annunciator shall be included. The Consultant shall locate this Remote Annunciator at the Main Entry (confirm that it is the Fire Fighter's entry): at a specific location defined by the Architect and with the Consultant's properly advising the Architect of the size(s) of the two component Annunciator (if over eight (8) zones). Wiring to the Remote Annunciator shall be referenced as to include all the initial and future features. All systems shall have a passive graphic.

• The Fire Alarm System shall include an LCD display in the General Office.

• The Consultant should reference on the Drawings, the Building

Occupancy classification and the applicable Building Code section under which the Fire Alarm System was designed.

• The Fire Alarm requirements for the School shall include and some shall be referenced in the specifications by the following: • Fully supervised, partially addressable single stage, total

evacuation 24 Volt DC Fire Alarm system.

• Class B wiring.

• Remote Annunciator provision (window type, with a passive Graphic and with provision in the interconnection wiring and annunciator spaces for 20% additional zones). Remote Annunciator to have visual and adjustable volume and silence trouble indication, Audible device silence switch and Fire Drill switch. (Confirm the latter with the Board representative.)

• Minimum of two (2) audible alarm circuits.

• Battery source back-up adequate to meet Code Requirements.



• Auxiliary relays for Ventilation shut down, M.H.O. door releases etc. Good practice would be to reference spare relay contacts.

• Automatic signal silencing after 20 minutes of operation.

• Manual signal silencing after a minimum Code conforming preset time, accessed from either the Main Fire Alarm Panel or the Remote Annunciator.

• Abnormal condition of smoke detectors as a trouble indication and to initiate a service request such as clean the head.

• The Consultant shall review with the Architect the necessity for magnetically hold open (M.H.O.) devices which release on Fire Alarm. This review is to be at the preliminary design stage and to reference which Division is to have responsibility (Division 8 or 16) for specifying the units, locations for same (wall or floor) and voltage (recommend 120 volt (essential), circuit(s) extended through an auxiliary contact(s) in the Fire Alarm panel.

• Door closure devices with integral hold open devices are not acceptable. Separate wall or (M.H.O) devices are to be used. 120v, Edwards M.H.O devices Cat. No. 1508-AQN5 or equivalent must be used.

• The Consultant to identify the detectors and components which interface with the selected and specified Main Fire Alarm Panel. The smoke detector specification detail should reference interface with a multiplex digital system and equivalent to the Notifier smoke detector.

• The specification is to reference the Verification of the Fire Alarm System requirements. The specification is to reference that such is required and the Certification Form is to be forwarded to the Engineer prior to the issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Performance (or Interim Occupancy Certificate). Copies of the Certificate are to be filed in the Maintenance Manuals and forwarded to the Board representative and any regulatory body that requires same.

• Fire pump (if applicable) interface will include a separate zone "Fire Pump Running".

• Suggested Fire Alarm Systems that fully meet the above criteria: • Base Bid: Notifier, Edwards or Simplex



• Fire Alarm specification is to include a sequence of operation of the system as per Appendix ‘C’ CAN/ULC S524

• In Renovations: Any renovation which involves the modification of the existing Fire Alarm System, requires a written verification report and certificate of the entire Fire Alarm System to be provided.

• STI covers with horn to be installed on all manual stations where students have access


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C21 - Assistive Listening System Page 1 of 1

C21 - ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM • The General Purpose Room Assistive Listening System is in the Division

16 contract

• For information purposes, the system shall be a complete, large area, easy listener, wireless FM, narrow band system for use in the School Gymnasium.

• The transmitter shall be CSA Approved, connected to speakers or line outputs of the Gymnasium Sound System. System shall transmit one of the 40 FCC and DOC approved band channels on the 72 to 76 MHz band. Transmission range of approximately 300 feet complete with remote large area antenna

• Receiver should be powered by 2 AA rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium batteries, On/Off control output jacks accepting one of the listening accessories and by FCC and DOC approved.

• Charger/organizer capable of recharging 12 receivers at one time complete with external, CSA approved, wall transformer.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C22 - Sound Systems Page 1 of 2

C22 - SOUND SYSTEMS C22.1 - Gymnasium Sound System • The Gymnasium Sound System is in the Division 16 contract.

• The components of the General Purpose Room Sound System are

described for information and coordination purposes only.

• Mounted in an equipment rack with casters and lockable doors, the system consists of: • main frame/mixer • amplifier • two wall mounted speakers • microphones • jacks • dual cassette deck • CD player • equalizer.

• The system will interface with FM radio frequency assistive listening

system, by means of an area transmitter.

• Included in the system are two microphones, complete with stand and cord.

• Provision for a projector jack is to be made at the far end of the gym, opposite the stage.

• Provide conduit from equipment rack location to wall mounted speakers, mounted high on both sides of the stage.

• Provide two back boxes and conduit centered on the stage apron for microphone and data.

C22.2 - Stage Sound System • The Stage sound system shall provide:

• A total of four (4) microphone inputs for the Stage and

Gymnasium

• Two proscenium loud speakers for the Stage


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C22 - Sound Systems Page 2 of 2

• Two loudspeakers for the double gymnasium

• Two "sound system bulkheads" for rolling rack inputs

• All receptacles, conduits, deep back-boxes, male/female XLR receptacles, microphone terminations, speaker terminations, connectors, faceplates, labelling/engraving as required to complete system.

• All cables shall be continuous runs (no splice allowed) shielded cable by Belden or Delco.

• System shall be powered by four single phase, 15 Amp, 120 VAC breakers from the same phase of a distribution panel. These receptacles to be engraved "FOR SOUND SYSTEM ONLY".


Version 2.5 Issued: January 21, 2017 C23 - Specialty Alarm Systems Page 1 of 2

C23 - SPECIALTY ALARM SYSTEMS

C23.1 - Call Assistance System

The call assistance system is in this Contract and shall be installed in each

Barrier-Free Washroom.

For information proposes, each system shall include:

A horn/strobe mounted high and located in the General Office area which

sounded when a pull cord station is activated C/W Lamicoid label

indicating washroom designation.

Pull cord stations mounted 900 mm (36") A.F.F. and located in Barrier-

Free Washrooms, as required.

Ceiling mount white dome light with lamp, interconnected to illuminate

when a pull cord station has been activated, located outside associated

room

Transformer, conduit and wiring as required to complete system.

Communication is part of the PA/Telephone system


Version 2.5 Issued: January 21, 2017 C23 - Specialty Alarm Systems Page 2 of 2

C23.2 - Kindergarten Door Alarm

The Kindergarten Door Alarm system shall be an isolated system and

installed under this Contract.

For information proposes, each system shall include:

One "Wheelock" horn Model MT-12/24-White (in each Kindergarten

Classroom)

One low voltage transformer/power supply (120/24VDC), conduit and

wiring as required.

One illuminated selector switch type disconnect switch mounted 1524 mm

(5') A.F.F. at Exit door to Vestibule for silencing alarm circuit and one

disconnect switch for corridor door. Selector switch shall be assembled as

a complete unit with the following parts:

Selector -Telemechanique Part # ZB4 BK 1243

LED and Mount -Telemechanique Part # ZB4 BVB4

Normally open contact -Telemechanique Part # ZBE 101

Stainless Steel Plate -Temco Part # SP97S 01277

Door contacts "Sentrol" 1078 Series, steel door contacts (24VDC) at

vestibule and corridor doors.

Each kindergarten area to have its own zone when two or more

kindergartens have combined rooms


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C24 - Lighting Page 1 of 9

C24 - LIGHTING C24.1 - Lighting Design Concepts • The Consultant shall select either a surface mounted fixture or a lay-in

fixture where suspended ceilings exist. Where lighting control is required, cell type parabolic fixtures with chrome reflectors shall not be used. A design including dimming type ballasts is acceptable in specified areas.

• The Consultant shall select fixtures and apply same following good practice for classroom lighting applications, to meet the illumination levels recommended in the current I.E.S. Lighting Handbook.

• Fixtures identified that the Peel District School Board has previously accepted, in similar Core School applications must be specified. Refer to Section C27 "Light Fixture Schedule" bound herewith.

• The Consultant shall submit, to the Peel District School Board for its review, a complete set of calculations for the major classrooms, offices, gymnasia, corridors, general purpose rooms and other specific rooms as identified by the Peel District School Board. The calculations shall be based on the particular lamp and ballast selected (specified) and the fixture referenced on the drawings. The calculations may be made either by the I.E.S. zonal cavity method or by computer point by point method following an I. E. S. recognized program. The calculations shall be based on the particular lamp selected and reflector surface referenced in the fixture schedule.

• In applying the I.E.S. recommendations, the range of illuminance selected by the Consultant shall be midrange, unless advised otherwise by the Peel District School Board representative.

• Unless the manufacturer recommends otherwise, the initial lumens (for the case of HID lamps after 40 hours use) shall be utilized in the calculations and the following Fixture/Lamp maintenance factor applied: • Fluorescent (T-8) • HID • L.E.D.

• Illuminance levels (Targeted Maintained Level) (applicable IES Data Base

1987 Application Volume).



• Teaching Space 60 Foot-candles • Administration Office/Workroom/

Seminar/Resource 55-65 Foot-candles • General Purpose Rooms 50 Foot-candles • Libraries 75-85 Foot-candles • Alternative Learning

Environment 60-70 Foot-candles (dimmable) • Computer Rooms 50 Foot-candles • Gymnasium 50 Foot-candles • Corridors 25-30 Foot-candles • Main Lobby/Foyer 50 Foot-candles

• The use of lighting equipment intended solely for decorative functions

(interior and exterior) shall not be considered.

• Dimmer switches shall be incorporated in the design, as directed by the Peel District School Board representative or by the multi-purpose use of the room.

• The application of Dimming Systems will require an economic assessment and the Consultant should present solution(s) for the selection of different illuminance levels to the Architect and the Peel District School Board and in so doing identify such reduced illuminance methods as selective local switching, multi-level switching, super imposed lighting systems (i.e. a mix of incandescent and or LED (economically dimmable) and HID fixtures or fluorescent fixtures). This assessment would be required in rooms: • Stage areas, etc. • Main Office areas • Alternate Learning Environment (ALE Room)

• Dimming systems shall not be used on HID fixtures or fluorescent

fixtures.

C24.2 - Lighting Fixtures • The Consultant should reference, though a detailed fixture schedule, his

fixture selections on the Drawings (in preference to the Specification).



• The Fixture Schedule should identify: • the Fixture by letter for all the fixtures or letter for the fluorescent

fixture and number for the incandescent and HID fixtures

• The fixture type should be generally referenced i.e.: troffer, surface wrap-around, industrial etc.

• The balance of the schedule would encompass lamp and ballast type, voltage, catalogue number and special directives.

• The Fixture Schedule complete with "fixture brochures" shall be submitted to the Peel District School Board representative and Architect, well before final design, for review and approval.

• The fixture mounting heights, where stem mounted, chain suspended or wall mounted shall be shown on the drawings (Architectural and/or Electrical) or the mounting heights so referenced on the Fixture Schedule.

• Chain suspend fixtures to structural steel and supports, NOT to roof deck.

• The Consultant's selection of a lensed fluorescent fixtures, (troffer) should be the type that minimizes light leakage and has a captive, hinged lens.

• All surface wrap around fixtures must employ a lens that receives written approval of the Peel District School Board's Maintenance Department / Electrical.

• All troffers or surface fixtures that use a flat acrylic lens must employ a captive hinged frame.

• The Consultant should reference the lens material as acrylic and minimum thickness as 0.125" for 2' x 4' fixtures.

• The Consultant shall, where low energy fixture applications are applicable, reference the ballast, lamps and reflective surface feature common to each fixture type.

• All ballasted fixture shall have an internal disconnect plug.



• The Consultant should also include a caution in his specification with respect to: • dust control method, • methods of ensuring that lens, reflective surfaces and lamps are

turned over to the Peel District School Board in a clean condition.

• The Consultant is to ensure that the Maintenance Manual, prepared by the Contractor at the completion of the construction activity, has the fixtures referenced and particularly the lamp type and ballast type.

C24.3 - Fluorescent Fixtures, Ballasts & Lamps • Ballasts - General:

• All fluorescent fixtures shall be equipped with T8, instant start, high efficiency, electronic ballasts.

• Ballasts shall bear a "CSA Approved" label.

• Ballasts shall be complete with non-resetting type thermal protection as defined by CSA Standard C22.2

• All ballasts shall meet Class 'A' Sound Levels.

• All ballasts shall meet the Specifications and Requirements of the Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) and Certified Ballast Manufacturer's Association (CBMA).

• Verify the operating voltage of each fixture with Supplier at Tender and include any additional transformers that may be required.

• Ballasts - T8 Electronic Systems (120V or 347V): • Must have a maximum allowable power consumption for:

Ballast F32 T8 4 foot 1 Lamp 28 Watts 2 Lamp 55 Watts 3 Lamp 85 Watts 4 Lamp 110 Watts

• Ballasts shall be instant start type and operate lamps in accordance with ANSI C82.1.



• Transient & Surge Immunity to: ANSI C62.41 & C62.45.

• Electromagnetic and Radio Frequency Interference (EMI & RFI) emissions to: FCC (CFR47) Part 18, Subpart C, Class A. For areas sensitive to EMI: FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B.

• Starting Temperature: Shall be capable of starting lamps in indoor applications with ambient temperatures 10°C or greater.

• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): 20% Maximum (summarizing 2nd through 39th harmonic)

• Power factor: 0.95 minimum.

• Ballast Factor: 0.88 minimum.

• Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 maximum.

• Ballast Operating Frequency Range: 20 kHz - 60 kHz with no modulation of the secondary waveform amplitude with any 60 Hz component or harmonic thereof.

• Failure Mode: Should any lamp in a multi-lamp system fail, the remaining lamps must be extinguished (series operation).

• Ballasts shall carry a minimum five (5) year guarantee.

• Approved Equals: Osram/Sylvania QHE Philips IOP

• Lamps - T8 Systems:

• All fluorescent lamps shall be 4'-0" (1220 mm) in length and be rated minimum 20,000 hours, unless noted otherwise 40,000 hours for high areas such as gyms.

• All lamps shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Performance. Labour to replace lamps shall also be included in the guarantee.



• Lamps shall be rapid start, 265 mA and be able to provide 3050 initial lumens (minimum) and also meet the following criteria: CRI: 80 minimum, unless specified otherwise. Correlated Colour Temperature: 4100K (Cool White) for Corridors, Service Rooms and Front Office

• Correlated Colour Temperature: 4100K (Cool White) for Classrooms, Library, Resource Rooms, Sciences and Art Rooms, etc. 40,000 hours for high areas. Lamps to be 28 watt.

• Approved Manufacturers: Philips TL80 Series GE SPX41 Sylvania

C24.4 - Incandescent Fixtures & Lamps • All incandescent fixtures shall be provided with medium base, 125 Volt,

inside frosted lamps, rated 2500 hours, except where noted otherwise, and of wattage accommodated by the fixture.

• Reflector lamps shall be rated for 2000 burning hours lamp life.

• Exit fixtures with Incandescent lamps shall not be specified.

• Lamps for exit lights shall be LED type and provide 50,000 hour life.

• Incandescent lamps shall be guaranteed for a period of 90 days from the date of Substantial Performance. Labour for replacing lamps shall be included in the guarantee.

• Approved Manufacturer • Philips • GE • Sylvania

C24.5 - Compact Fluorescent Fixtures & Lamps • Not currently used.



C24.6 - H.I.D. Fixtures, Ballasts & Lamps • All high intensity, discharge fixtures shall be equipped with high power

factor, constant wattage ballasts.

• Note: The operating voltage of each fixture shall be verified with the Supplier at time of Tender. Where additional transformers are required to match the fixture, these shall be included.

• Ballasts for use outside the building shall provide reliable starting down to -30°C for high pressure sodium lamps. All pole-mounted fixtures shall be provided with isolated secondary ballasts.

• H.I.D. ballasts shall meet the requirements of the Electrical Testing Laboratories and Certified Ballast Manufacturer's Association.

• Unless noted otherwise, H.I.D. lamps shall be manufactured by Sylvania, Canadian General Electric, Westinghouse Canada or Philips.

• H.I.D. lamps shall be guaranteed for a period of 12 months from the date of Substantial Performance. Labour for replacing lamps shall be included in the guarantee.

C24.7 - General Lighting Fixture Requirements • Quality: Install only lighting fixtures which are structurally well designed

and constructed and which use new parts and materials of highest commercial grade available.

• Matching Ceiling and Fixture Finishes: Verify the finish of exposed ceiling support members and metal tiles, before ordering fixtures, and paint fixtures to match, where required in the specifications or drawings.

• Manufacturer's Operational Tests: • Test fixture for acceptance of lamp made to maximum tolerance as

required in A.N.A. Standards as listed in Section 16.

• Test fixtures with rated lamps for starting and operation.

• Check wiring for agreement with design circuit.

• Test for short circuits and improper grounds.



• Commercially Listed Fixtures: Lighting fixtures shall be of the types, sizes, ratings, etc. shown in the Fixture Schedule and notes therein or as shown on Drawings.

• Delivery: Assemble completely all fixtures at the Manufacturer's plant and deliver to the project site in original cartons. Ensure that a dry and protected space is available for proper storage before delivery of production fixtures.

• Pot Lights (interior) are not to be used/ specified with exception to ALE Room and Ortho Washrooms

C24.8 - Photo-Electric Controls • Photo-electric controls shall be a used for, parking lot, perimeter, wall

packs, and school sign lighting. The PE controls shall be suitable for 347V, 120V or 208V as applicable, load rated or control rated for controlling the lighting through an EEMAC 1 enclosure, multiple pole contactor.

C24.9 - Lamp Changer Stick • Consultant to assess the need and review with the Peel District School

Board representative the requirements for a lamp change stick.

C24.10 - Lighting Controls • General Concepts (Interior Lighting):

• Control from panelboard breakers is not acceptable except for Corridor switching

• The Peel District School Board practices Energy Management Measures. The Engineer in his selecting the lighting control method(s) is to be cognizant of this and incorporate measures which will facilitate the implementation of these measures.

• All Public Area switching is to be from: A master control BCMS System (Division 15) Time Clock Programmer Master Toggle Switch Station A Low Voltage Lighting Control system



• The general method of lighting control is to be reviewed with the

Peel District School Board, at the early preliminary design meetings stage.

• As a minimum, the Peel District School Board favour low voltage switching using momentary contact spring return off three position toggle switches (Recommend the application of similar in appearance units to the conventional toggle switch).

• Application of key switches is to be limited: Public Washrooms (where not on a master system as referenced above).

• Limited use rooms e.g. Resource Rooms (General Office Work Room) to have occupancy sensor lighting controls (motion sensing).

• Wider use of occupancy sensor switching warrants the Consultant's reviewing the application of same with the Peel District School Board.

• Gymnasium lighting design to incorporate motion sensors where possible, combined with key type switches for override control.

• General Concepts (Exterior Lighting): • The exterior and parking lot lighting shall be dark sky compliant.

• All pole lighting shall specify a base mounted aluminum pole to

eliminate future painting requirements.

• Entrance Foyer lighting separately controlled from the balance of the "exterior lighting".

• Perimeter (Security) Lighting controlled from the BCMS System or a system which includes P.E. cell "on", feature and a time clock or BCMS "off" feature.

• Roadway and walkway lighting controlled from a PE cell "on", time clock or BCMS "off" feature.

• Parking lot lighting controlled from an BCMS System or PE cell "on" and time clock or BCMS System "off" arrangement.


Version 2.5 Issued: June 21, 2017 C25 - Exit Lights & Emergency Lights Page 1 of 1

C25 - EXIT LIGHTS & EMERGENCY LIGHTS

Refer to Architectural Section B for locations and quantities of equipment

AC Inverters are NOT acceptable as emergency systems.

If the School is provided with an emergency generator (roof mounted,

natural gas) the Exit Lights and Emergency Lighting shall be sub-fed from

the emergency generator. Refer to Electrical Section C3

If no generator is provided, all Exit Lights and Emergency Lighting shall

be specified with DC battery back-up stand-by power.

The Consultant to reference on the drawings the Exit Lights, complete

with arrows where necessary, in sufficient quantities and at specific

locations so that the means of egress route(s) from any area is properly

identified, and identified as per the applicable Building Code.

The Exit Lights specified shall be the low energy LED type (light emitting

diodes), referencing a total wattage consumption of 2 watts per unit. The

specification shall be written with "Lumacell" LE Series as base bid with

"Emergi-Lite" or “Begheli” as an alternate.

The construction of the Exit light should be referenced as having an

Extruded Aluminum housing a white baked enamel finish and face plate

extruded aluminum brushed finish. Review the Exit Light fixture

selection with the Architect.

Emergency battery units capable of supplying wattage for a minimum of

60 minutes to connected loads. 120 VAC input, 24 VDC output, complete

with solid state charger, automatic type, one integral 12 Watt, 24 Volt

lamp head, press-to-test switch, fused protection, ready disconnect switch

and light, mounting bracket cord and plug connection for AC, automatic

test feature, complete with alarm, remote test feature.

Label units showing panel and breaker designation and battery unit zone.

Approved letter by Authorized person recognized by the AHJ for adequate

light levels to be included in submitted documents.


Version 1.4 Issued: June 15, 2012 C26 - Stage Lighting & Dimming Page 1 of 3

C26 - STAGE LIGHTING & DIMMING • The stage lighting and dimming system shall be a complete pre-wired

stage dimming system capable of controlling stage lighting fixture and front-of-house lighting channels, as required.

• System shall include a Dimmer Rack complete with 24 - 2.4 kW solid state dimmers and lighting control console (Portable).

• Consoles shall be a micro-computer based lighting system, which can support up to 512 dimmers on 24 control channels, built-in state-of-the-art diagnostic capabilities, built-in user defined memory capability/cartridge

• Standard features to include (but not limited to) in the Control Console, are: • Grand master and black out switch controlling the entire system

outputs

• Channel faders operating on a scale of 1 - 10 (full)

• Channel mode and scene mode

• Flash switches

• Play back controls

• A/B and C/D manual split cross-faders

• Time fader

• Special effects play-back controls

• Integral 4-row by 20-column (80 character) LCD backlit display to provide access and set up

• Console shall comply with CSA Standards and be powered by independent 120V power supply

• Acceptable manufacturers are: Strand Matrix 24 NSI 7024

• Operating functions shall include set-up, patch, level settings and recordings, play-back special effects, back-up and diagnostics.



• Console shall be powered with a low-voltage DC supply connector (provided with system) connected to 120 VAC, 60 Hz power supply

• Provide 30'-0" long channel mount plug-in strips on front of the house and two (2) 24'-0" long channel mount plug-in strips over stage.

• Channels to be light weight, CSA approved, complete with: • mounting hangers • continuous fixture support pipe • all mounting hardware

• Channel mounted circuits shall be wired with 16#10 +1 #8 ground.

Provide eight circuits per channel.

• Provide channel mounted plug-in strips, 30 foot long with twelve (12) flush mounted, 20 Amp GTL connector (L5-20R) receptacles, in strips 24 foot long with six (6) flush mounted 20 GTL connector (L5-20R) receptacles on each. Each receptacle shall be identified with a permanent and legible label.

• Provide stage lighting fixtures complete with: • Colour frame • Safety clip assembly • C-clamp • 36" lead, • 20 Amp grounded 3-wire twistlock GTL connector (L5-20) TLG • Lamps • All components CSA approved

• Provide eighteen fixtures of a combination of 575 Watts and 500 Watts

(various manufacturers)

• Include with system: • Remote receptacle station complete with 120V power outlet

adjacent

• Control console cable set (to be minimum 25'-0" long)

• Control console vinyl cover

• One NEMA type 14-50R type range style receptacle for stage rental purposes located adjacent stage lighting wall dimmers



• One 200 Amp, 120/208V, 3 phase, surface mounted panelboard complete with main breaker and minimum 18 spaces

• One surface mounted junction box complete with sufficient number of terminal blocks to accommodate a maximum of 48#12 AWG conductors plus grounding

• All conduit, junction boxes, cables, connectors and interconnections to form a complete system


Version 2.5 Issued: June 19, 2017 C27 - Typical Fixture Schedule Page 1 of 8

C27 - TYPICAL FIXTURE SCHEDULE

Note: Update re: ballasts and lamps

1. Fluorescent fixtures are to have Instant Start ballasts rated for 28/32 watt T-8 lamps

2. Except where noted in item 3 lamps for fluorescent fixtures are to be 28 watt T-8

3. Applications for fixtures in high areas (Gyms, STAC and shops etc) shall use a 40,000

hour lamp and are to be 32 watt T-8

4. LED must be L79 and L80 minimum compliant.

Electrical Consultant to determine use to of fixture to ensure adequate lighting levels and

distribution. See A-1, A-2 and A-3

C27.1 Type ‘A-1’:

3 lamp, T-8, (2ft x 4ft) fluorescent fixture complete with k12 .125 captive hinge

lens.

Recess mounted (lay-in fixture or with drywall trim depending on application) and

with cam latches

(c/w - 3 x 28 W T-8 lamps)

Ballasts - 120 volt High Efficiency T-8 Ballasts, rated for 28/32 watt per lamp,

instant start ballast, (Sylvania QHE or Advance/Philips IOP)

Acceptable Products:

Peerless LACH Series

Visoneering ERC TB Series

Lithonia GT8 Series 2GT8332 A12125 BNIP LP841 CSA

C27.1-1 Type ‘A-2’:

4 lamp, T-8, (2ft x 4ft) fluorescent fixture complete with k12 .125 captive hinge

lens.

Recess mounted (lay-in fixture or with drywall trim depending on application) and

with cam latches

(c/w - 4 x 28 W T-8 lamps)

Ballasts - 120 volt High Efficiency T-8 Ballasts, rated for 28/32 watt per lamp,

instant start ballast, (Sylvania QHE or Advance/Philips IOP)




Lithonia GT8 Series



C27.2 Type ‘A-3’:

2 lamp, T-8, (2ft x 4ft) fluorescent fixture complete with k12 .125 captive hinge lens.

Recess mounted (lay-in fixture or with drywall trim depending on application) and with

cam latches

(c/w - 2 x 28 W T-8 lamps)

Ballasts - 120 volt High Efficiency T-8 Ballasts, rated for 28/32 watt per lamp, instant

start ballast, (Sylvania QHE or Advance/Philips IOP)




Lithonia GT8 Series

C27.2-1 Type ‘B’:

2 lamp, T-8, (1ft x 4ft) fluorescent fixture complete with k12 .125 captive hinge lens.

Recess mounted (lay-in fixture or with drywall trim depending on application) and with

cam latches

(c/w - 2 x 28 W T-8 lamps)

Ballasts - 120 volt High Efficiency T-8 Ballasts, rated for 28/32 watt per lamp, instant

start ballast,(Sylvania QHE or Advance/Philips IOP)




Lithonia GT8 Series

C27.3 Type ‘C’:

1 LED lamp ceiling recess mounted fixture (Corridor Dome Light), red lens, 22mm, for

SMT Rooms “Burner Receptacles On” or S.T.A.C. Rooms “Emergency Stop”

4 Watts

120 VAC

Edwards Cat. No. 9505-1011

Telemecanique XB4 BVG4

Alternate Products: TBA

C27.4 Type ‘C1’:

1 LED lamp ceiling recess mounted fixture (Corridor Dome Light), white lens 22MM,

for “Call for Assistance” (Plus one remote light/buzzer combo for main office c/w

lamicoid label indicating which washroom.)

4 Watts

120 VAC

Base Bid: Edwards Cat. No. 9505-1011

Telemecanique XB4 BVG4




C27.5 Type ‘D’:

1' X 4' - 2 lamp fluorescent T-8 surface, surface (or pendant mount exposed ceilings

only)

Side supported Wrapped lens

Ballast - 120 volt High Efficiency T-8 Ballasts, 28/32 watt per lamp, instant start

ballast, (Sylvania QHE or Advance/Philips IOP)

Mounting height: 9’-0” (2.7 m) A.F.F. (optimum)

Base Bid: Philips (Thomas/Daybright) Saturn - Cat. No. STN-232

Alternate Products:

Peerless KOPA 11-4-232

BJTAKE - BJT7000/1 SEMI WRAP Series

Visoneering NE-Neutron series

C27.5 Type ‘D1’:

As above (D) but 8’-0” 4 lamp unit

1' X 8' - 4 lamp fluorescent T-8 surface, surface (or pendant mount exposed ceilings

only)

Side supported Wrapped lens



Mounting height: 9’-0” (2.7 m) A.F.F. (optimum)

Base Bid: Philips (Thomas/Daybright) Saturn - Cat. No. TST-232

Alternate Products:

Peerless KOPA

BJTAKE - BJT7000/1 SEMI WRAP Series

Visoneering NE-Neutron series

C27.6 Type ‘E’:

Not Used

C27.7 Type ‘F’:

No Longer Used – note Type F fixture was originally a gymlume similar to Type G and

not suitable for the proposed locations. References to this fixture in the balance of the

Design Manual being updated and should now utilize the following;

Student Washrooms - Type D or D1

Barrier Free washroom - Type B

Kindergarten Washroom – Type B

Kindergarten BF Washroom – Type B

Kindergarten vestibule – Type B

Gym Change Rooms – Type G1

Gym Storage – Type G1

Elevator Machine Room – Type L

ITS Hub Room – Type L



C27.8 Type ‘G’:

4 lamp, surface mounted, fluorescent fixtures (8-0”)

c/w wire guard and clear acrylic K12 .125 prismatic lens

Mounted directly to roof steel or beams or from uni-strut

(alt - Refer to drawings Notes for details of pendant

(2- 4’-0” tandem units c/w F32 T-8 40,000 hour lamps)

Ballast - 120 volt High Efficiency T-8 Ballasts, 32 watt per lamp, instant start ballast,

(Sylvania QHE or Advance/Philips IOP)

Base Bid: Philips (Thomas/Daybright) Cat. No. TGYM-N-232-01

Alternate Products:

Peerless - GP-8-432 c/w guard and lens

Visioneering GYM series

C27.9 Type ‘G1’:

2 lamp, surface mounted, fluorescent fixtures (4’-0”)

c/w wire guard and clear acrylic K12 .125 prismatic lens

Mounted directly to roof steel or beams or from uni-strut

(alt - Refer to drawings Notes for details of pendant

c/w F32 T-8 lamps 40,000 hour lamp

Ballast - 120 volt High Efficiency T-8 Ballasts, 32 watt per lamp, instant start ballast,


Base Bid: Philips (Thomas/Daybright) Cat. No. GYM-N-232-01

Alternate Products:

Peerless -GP-4-232 c/w guard and lens

Visioneering GYM series

C27.10 Type ‘H’ (Exterior Perimeter Wall Packs):

1 lamp, surface mounted, vandal resistant, LED fixture (exterior)

120V

Base Bid: Cooper Crosstour, Series

Alternate Products: Lithonia OLWX series

C27.11 Type ‘I’ (Exterior under Canopy and Entrances):

1 lamp, surface mounted (under Canopy)

Minimum 660 Lumens

120V

Base Bid: Lithonia Vera-Lite FMML




C27.12 Type ‘J’ (Exterior Parking Lot Pole Fixture):

1 lamp, LED (preferred) or HPS (optional) outdoor, pole mounted fixture (2 fixtures

per pole)

LED or 400 HPS

120V ballast

Base Bid: - LED Rudd Lighting Canada, Ledway Street Light Cat No. X-SL-90-120

Lithonia D Series

AEL Autobahn Series ATB

Alternate Products:

Avalume

C27.13 Type ‘K’:

4 lamp, mounted in 8’-0” strip (4’-0” tandem units) fluorescent fixtures (industrial)

4- 4’-0” c/w F28 T-8 lamps

Ballast - 120 volt High Efficiency T-8 Ballasts, 28/32 watt per lamp, instant start ballast


Base Bid: Thomas (Daybright) Cat. No. T1FC-232-PPS-WG

Alternate Products:

Peerless ITS-8-432

Lithonia "C" Series TC232 MV

C27.14 Type ‘K1’:

2 lamp, 4’-0” unit, fluorescent fixtures (industrial)

2- 4’-0” c/w F28 T-8 lamps



Base Bid: Philips (Thomas/Daybright) Cat. No. IFC-232-PPS-WG

Alternate Products:

Peerless ITS-4-232

Lithonia “C” Series TC232-MVOLT-OSIS

C27.15 Type ‘L’:

2 lamp, surface wall mounted, fluorescent fixture (Strip)

Complete with wire guard



c/w F28 T-8 lamps

Base Bid: Philips (Thomas/Daybright) Cat. No. STRIP-S232-120-WG

Alternate Products:

Peerless LS-232-120-WG

Lithonia “C” Series C232-MVOLT-OSIS-WG



C27.16 Type ‘M’:

4 lamp (8’-0”long), industrial fluorescent fixture complete with die-formed steel

housing and aperture reflector ( 2x 4’-0” tandem units)



4- F28 Watt T8 lamps

Chain suspended

Base Bid: Philips ( Thomas/Daybright) Cat. No. TI-NDAS-2-232-120-EB

Alternate Products:

Peerless NIR-8-432 Series

Lithonia Cat. No. ATRIU Series, Cat. No. TL232-MVOLT-CHAIN-GEB10IS-CSA

C27.17 Type ‘M1’:

2 lamp (4’-0” long), industrial fluorescent fixture complete with die-formed steel

housing and aperture reflector

Ballast; 120 volt High Efficiency T-8 Ballasts, 28/32 watt per lamp, instant start ballast



Chain suspended

Base Bid: Philips (Thomas/Daybright) Cat. No. INDA S-2-232-120-EB

Alternate Products:

Peerless NIRA Series -NIR -4-232

Lithonia Cat. No. RIU Series Cat. No. L232-MVOLT-CHAIN-GEB10IS-CSA

C27.18 Type ‘N’:

Not Used

C27.19 Type ‘O’:

3 lamp, 2fg. x 4ft., fully recessed fluorescent luminaire complete with curved acrylic

lens and hinged frame

Ballast; 120 volt High Efficiency T-8 Ballasts, 28/32 watt per lamp, instant start ballast



Base Bid: Ledalite Pure/FX Series Cat. No. 9424D10ST-T328-S11E

Alternate Products:

Lightolier Alter

Thomas Arioso

Lithonia VT8, Cat. No. 2VT8-322-MVOLT-OSIS-CSA



C27.20 Type ‘P’: (Display Case and Under Cabinet Strip Lighting):

LED, 4000K surface mounted fixture c/w 120 driver to suit. Length and wattage vary

Rab UC-LED

Alternate Products:

Lithonia RAYZOR

C27.21 Type ‘R’:

1 lamp fully recessed shower light, vapor proof, LED complete with clear reflector

Reference Type T

120 Volt ballast

Base Bid: Cooper/Halo Cat. No.

Alternate Products:

Gotham 6" EVO

C27.22 Type ‘S’:

2 lamp, surface mounted, vapor proof, fail-safe vandal resistant, BWE finish




Base Bid: Cooper/Halo Cat. No. FWW-228-120-EBT-VRSD

Alternate Products:

Peerless

Philips (Thomas)

Lithonia cat. No. VSL232-MVOLT-OSIS-DL

C27.23 Type ‘T’:

1 lamp fully recessed LED pot light, complete with Frosted Lensed Trim with White

Baffle and Trim Ring

(Optional Trim as required for locations where need determined by Electrical

Consultant – Regressed Solite Lensed White Reflector With White Trim Ring shatter-

proof glass Fresnel lens ** Ref. for Type R)

Dimmable LED MODULE

Minimum 94.5 lumen output

120 Volt

Base Bid: Cooper/Halo Portfolio Series

Alt. Cat. No. (3 Parts)

1. – Halo LED H7 Housing cat. No. H750T

2. – LED Driver or Module 4000K, dimmable, 945 lumens cat. No.

ML7098401CAT120D;

3a. – Trim, Frosted Lensed Trim with White Baffle and Trim Ring cat. No. 492PS06

Alternate Products:

Capri/Lightolier

Gotham EVO Series



C27.24 Type ‘U’:

Not Used

C27.25 Type ‘V’:

2 lamp, recess mounted, volumetric fluorescent fixture, complete with captive hinged

lens to hold the acrylic diffusers and access the lamps without removal of the acrylic

lens

2- T8 lamps

64 Watts

120 Volt ballast

Base Bid: Lithonia Cat. No. 2RT8S-232-120-BINP-LP841-E28-CSA

Alternate Products:

TBA


Version 2.0 Issued: January 1, 2014 C28 - Typical Modular Control Panel (MCP) Page 1 of 1

C28 - TYPICAL MODULAR CONTROL PANEL (MCP) Ref. Arch. M.2 • The Consultant shall, in his design, make provision for a Modular Control

Panel in each designated space.

• MCP's to be complete with backboxes constructed of heavy gauge steel with suitable barriers and continuous knockouts.

• MCP's to be vandal resistant and have openings and mounting hardware for services as required for installation of mechanical and electrical services by Divisions 15 and 16.

• Components within Modular Control Panels will vary from room to room. A standard MCP will be completely wired with the following electrical devices: • 1 - red service duplex receptacle T-slot, 20A, labelled "Custodial" • 1 - clock hanger receptacle complete with plug in clock • 1 - room thermostat complete with wire cage • 1 - PA speaker complete with approved backbox • 1 – Telephone handset • Switching, 120 Volt or 347 Volt, as required (two switches; one

per alternate row of light fixtures) • 1 – Fire Alarm Signal Device